ED 362 878
DOCUMENT RESUME
CS 214 064
AUTHOR
TITLE
INSTITUTION
REPORT NO
PUB DATE
NOTE
AVAILABLE FROM
PUB TYPE
Jensen, Julie M. , Ed.; Roser, Nancy L,, Ed.
Adventuring with Books: A Booklist for Pre-K-Grade 6.
Tenth Edition. NCTE Bibliography Series.
National Council of Teachers of English, Urbana,
111.
ISBN-0-8141-0079-1 ; ISSN-1051-4740
93
682p.; For the previous edition, see ED 311 453.
National Council of Teachers of English, 1111 W.
Kenyon Rd. , Urbana, IL 61801-1096 (Stock No.
00791-0015; $14.95 members, $19.95 nonmembers) .
Reference Materials - Bibliographies (131) — Books
(010)
EDRS PRICE
DESCRIPTORS
IDENTIFIERS
MF04/PC28 Plus Postage.
Annotated Bibliographies; *Childrens Literature;
Elementary Education; Fantasy; Fiction; Mathematical
Concepts; Nonfiction; Poetry; Preschool Education;
^Reading Material Selection; ^Recreational Reading;
Scientific Concepts; Social Studies
Historical Fiction; Trade Books
ABSTRACT
Designed to help teachers, librarians, and parents
introduce books of exceptional literary and artistic merit, accuracy,
and appeal to preschool through sixth grade children, this annotated
bibliography presents nearly 1,800 annotations of approximately 2,000
books (2 or more books in a series appear in a single review)
published between 1988 and 1992. Annotations are grouped under 13
headings: Biography; Books for Young Children; Celebrations;
Classics; Contemporary Realistic Fiction; Fantasy; Fine Arts;
Historical Fiction; Language and Reading; Poetry; Sciences and
Mathematics, Social Studies; and Traditional Literature. In addition
to the author and title, each annotation lists illustrators where
applicable and the recommended age range of potential readers. A
selected list of literary awards given to children's books published
between 1988 and 1992; a description of popular booklists; author,
illustrator, subject, and title indexes; and a directory of
publishers are attached. (RS)
ft*********************************************^
* Reproductions supplied by EDRS are the best that can be made
Vf from the original document. *
****** t******************* *********************************************
Adventuring with Books
V
, - I v ill 1 1 IaIiIioii
I u I ii» \ 1 . I en -.e n .nnl \ nn \ I K t 1 -m- i I d i I i u s
Adventuring with Books
Committee to Revise the Elementary School Booklist
Julie M. Jensen, Cochair, The University of Texas at Austin
Nancy L. Roser, Co-chair, The University of Texas at Austin
Judy Abbott, The University of Texas at Austin
Rasma Barbee, Austin, Texas Independent School District
Jennifer Battle, The University of Texas at Austin
Lowell J. Bethel, The University of Texas at Austin
Anne Bustard, Toad Hall Children's Book Store, Austin, Texas
Mark Dressman, The University of Texas at Austin
Bonnie M. Elliott, The University of Texas at Austin
Colleen M. Fairbanks, The University of Texas at Austin
Cynthia Farest, Texas Tech University
Edmund J. Farrell, The University of Texas at Austin
Angela Ferree, The University of Texas at Austin
Carolyn Foote, Eanes Independent School District, Austin, Texas
Cyndy Hoffman, Eanes Independent School District, Austin, Texas
Barbara Immroth, The University of Texas at Austin
Kenneth Kidd, The University of Texas at Austin
Shirley Lukenbill, Round Rock, Texas Independent School District
Jane Manaster, The University of Texas at Austin
Miriam Martinez, The University of Texas at San Antonio
Sarah McCarthey, The University of Texas at Austin
Priscilla Myers, California State University
Tim Myers, Bakersfield, California
Connie Nutt, Eanes Independent School District, Austin, Texas
Sharon O'Neal, Texas Education Agency, Austin
Sheila Pederson, Austin, Texas
Stuart Reif el, The University of Texas at Austin
Joan M. Shiring, The University of Texas at Austin
William Teale, The University of Texas at San Antonio
Barbara Thomas, Toad Hall Children's Book Store, Austin, Texas
Jane Townsend, University of Florida
Georgene Wilson, Austin, Texas Independent School District
Michael Spooner, NCTE Staff Liaison
ERLC
4
i
Adventuring with Books
\
A Booklist for Pre-K-Grade 6
Tenth Edition
Edited by
Julie M. Jensen
The University of Texas at Austin
Nancy L. Roser
The University of Texas at Austin
National Council of Teachers of English
1111 W. Kenyon Road, Urbana, Illinois 61801-1096
5
NCTE Editorial Board: Keith Gilyard, Ronald Jobe, Joyce Kinkead, Louise Phelps,
Gladys Veidemanis, Charles Suhor, Chair, ex officio, Michael Spooner, ex officio
Manuscript Editor: Jane M. Curran
Production Editor: Rona S. Smith
Interior Design: Doug Burnett
Cover Design: R Maul
Cover Illustration: Wayne Anderson. From Dragon © 1992 by Wayne Anderson. Used
by permission of Green Tiger Press, an imprint of the Simon & Schuster Ch Lidren's Book
Division.
NCTE Stock Number 00791-3050
© 1993 by the National Council of Teachers of English. All rights reserved. Printed in
the United States of America.
Permissions acknowledgements for photographs appear on p. 594.
Eve Merriam quote, p. 339, excerpted from " T Says the Poem" from A Sky Full of Poems
by Eve Merriam. © 1964, 1970, 1973 by Eve Merriam. Reprinted by permission of
Marian Reiner.
It is the policy of NCTE in its journals and other publications to provide a forum for the
open discussion of ideas concerning the content and the teaching of English and the
language arts. Publicity accorded to any particular point of view does not imply
endorsement by the Executive Committee, the Board of Directors, or the membership at
large, except in announcements of policy, where such endorsement is clearly specified.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
National Council of Teachers of English. Committee to Revise the
Elementary School Booklist.
Adventuring with books : a booklist for pre-K-grade 6 / National
Council of Teachers of English, Committee to Revise the Elementary
School Booklist ; edited by Julie M. Jensen, Nancy L. Roser. — 10th
ed.
p. cm. — (NCTE bibliography series, ISSN 1051-4740)
Rev. ed. of: Adventuring with books / Mary Jett-Simpson, editor,
and the Committee on the Elementary School Booklist of the National
Council of Teachers of English. 9th ed. cl989.
Includes index.
ISBN 0-8141-0079-1 : $19.95
1. Bibliography— United States— Best books— Children's literature.
2. Children's literature— Bibliography. I. Jensen, Julie M. n. Roser, Nancy,
in. National Council of Teachers of English. Committee on the Elementary
School Booklist. Adventuring with books (9th »d. c 1989). IV. Title V. Series
Z1037.N346 1993
[PN1009.A1]
011.62— dc20 93-30112
CIP
ERIC
6
Contents
Acknowledgments
xi
Introduction
xiii
1. Biography
i
2. Books for Young Children
23
Alohabet Books
X ilk/1 k I/WIW
24
Color Books
32
Concept Books
33
Counting Books
48
Nursery Rhymes
56
Paper Engineering
6U
Lift-the-Flap
60
Pop-ups
63
Pull-Tabs
65
Songs and Music
65
Wordless Books
68
3. Celebrations
73
Birthdays
74
Christmas
76
Easter
86
Halloween
87
Jewish Holidays
91
Kwanzaa
93
Multiple Holidays
93
St. Patrick's Day
95
er|c
7
vi Contents
Thanksgiving 95
Valentine's Day 96
4. Classics 97
5. Contemporary Realistic Fiction 103
Adventure Stories 104
Animal Stories 106
Ethnic, Racial, and Religious Groups 113
Human Relationships 115
Everyday Life 115
Family Life 121
Friendship * 144
Illness or Death 154
School Life and Day Care 160
Humorous Stories 164
Mystery Stories 173
Respect for Nature 176
Social Issues 183
Stories about Other Lands and People 1 87
Survival 192
6. Fantasy 193
Adventure and Magic 194
Animal Fantasy 200
Folk Literature 238
Humorous Fantasy 247
Imagination and Dreams 255
Other Worlds 266
Science Fiction 267
Supernatural Tales 268
8
Contents vii
Time Fantasy 273
Toys and Dolls 275
Unique Beings 277
Humans with Special Powers 277
Make-Believe Characters 279
7. Fine Arts 285
Performing Arts 286
Visual Arts 288
8* Historical Fiction 293
Prehistoric Times 294
Medieval limes 294
Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries 294
Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries 297
United States 297
World 299
Nineteenth Century 300
United States 300
World 307
Twentieth Century 309
United States: Early in the Century 309
United States: World War I and Next Two Decades 313
United States: World War II and Later 314
World: World War I and Next Two Decades 319
World: World War II and Later 319
9* Language and Reading 323
Easy-Reading Books 324
Jokes, Riddles, and Puns 329
Language Play 333
ERIC
9
Contents
10. Poetry 339
Anthologies 340
Collections by a Single Poet 352
Individual Poems 362
Poetry Writing 370
11. Sciences and Mathematics 371
Aeronautics and Space 372
Animal Kingdom 376
Animal Behaviors 376
Birds 382
Domesticated Animals 385
Insects and Spiders 386
Ocean Life 387
Pets 390
Reptiles and Amphibians 391
Wild Animals 392
Archeology 396
Conservation and Ecology 396
Earth Science, Meteorology, and Oceanography 401
Energy 405
General Science Concepts 406
Geography 407
Human Body, Health, and Development 408
Machines 411
Mathematics 411
Plants 412
Prehistoric Life 414
ERLC
Contents
ix
12. Social Studies 419
Careers 420
Communication 421
Community Life 422
Crafts and Hobbies 424
Ethnic, Racial and Religious Groups 428
Food, Clothing, and Shelter 432
Geography 433
Government 435
History 436
United States 436
World 442
Human Relationships 448
Religion 449
Social Issues and Family Relationships 451
Sports and Games 452
Transportation 455
13. Traditional Literature 459
Fables - 460
Folk Songs and Ballads 463
Folktales and Fairy Tales 468
Myths and Legends 503
Tall Tales 513
Prizes and Lists 515
Directory of Publishers 527
Author Index 533
X
Contents
Illustrator Index 546
Subject Index 556
Title Index 571
Photo Credits 594
Editors 603
ERiC
12
Acknowledgments
We are grateful to the College of Education at The University of Texas at Austin
and to Dr. JoAnn Sweeney for the allocation of space, equipment, and supplies,
and for providing the assistance of five exceedingly competent and pleasant
people: Nona Brown, our secretary, and graduate student assistants Cynthia
Farest, Priscilla Myers, Rasma Strautmanis, and Judy Abbott.
Were it not for the cooperation of publishers, we would have had nei-
ther books to review nor incentives for reviewers to persevere.
Thirty Austin, Texas, area teachers, librarians, bookstore owners, college
faculty, and graduate students helped us to compose reviews. Collectively they
are known as the Committee to Revise the Elementary School Booklist: Judy
Abbott, Rasma Barbee, Jennifer Battle, Lowell J. 3ethel, Anne Bustard, Mark
Dressman, Bonnie M. Elliott, Colleen to. Fairbanks, Cynthia Farest, Edmund J.
Farrell, Angela Ferree, Carolyn Foote, C yndy Hoffman, Barbara Immroth, Ken-
neth Kidd, Shirley Lukenbill, Jane Manaster, Miriam Martinez, Sarah
McCarthey, Priscilla Myers, Tim Myers, Connie Nutt, Sharon O'Neal, Sheila
Pederson, Stuart Reifel, Joan M. Shiring, William Teale, Barbara Thomas, Jane
Townsend, and Georgene Wilson.
To a publisher who shipped a last-minute book overnight in order to
avoid a glaring omission, and to a committee member who on deadline day
arrived in the rain with a review of a book too good to overlook, and to a
graduate student who never measured her time, and Thank you for caring.
13
Introduction
The purpose of the tenth edition of Adventuring with Books is exactly that
of its nine predecessors: to help teachers, librarians, parents, and others
introduce books of exceptional literary and artistic merit, accuracy, and
appeal to preschoolers through sixth graders. As children's books in-
crease in numbers and as their significance grows in homes and schools,
so too does the importance of informed adult guides who can bring
together books and children. Literature for children is emerging as not
only the heart of the language arts curriculum, but as a singularly
important contributor to learning in all subject areas. We hope the
larger, illustrated format of this edition attracts the attention of an audi-
ence of book selectors that is as numerous anH diverse as the literature
itself.
Because the editorship of Adventuring with Books offers a vantage
point on the state of the literary art, we begin with a few observations,
each offered with due regard for certain limitations. First, we did not
receive books from all publishers of books for children, particularly
small presses, and we received only those titles that publishers chose to
send. Second, even if we had received all the books published between
1988 and 1992, time and space would have set limitations. Of 20,000 or
so books that might have been reviewed, we have included nearly 1,800
annotations of approximately 2,000 books (two or more books in a series
appear in a single review). Some of the following observations derive
from the books that we have reviewed here, others from the thousands
of other books that complete the set.
The Children's Literary Art, 1988-1992:
A Few Observations
A future audience of historians could use Adventuring as a window on
the times. Such an audience might conclude that American society and
the world of children's books in the late 1980s and early 1990s was
profoundly affected by emerging high technologies, showed interest in
and concern for the environment, demonstrated the effects of economic
stress, liked the sameness of rented books, was more than a little nos-
talgic, took a great interest in the preschool child, honored poetry, strug-
gled to acknowledge diversity within society, and tried to give children
the best possible reading materials in their schools.
ERIC
14
xiv
Introduction
Technology, The imaginations of today's authors and illustrators
are less constrained than previously by the processes of book produc-
tion. Books come in all sizes: miniature versions of timeless tales and
"big books/' which are proving to be valuable resources in classrooms
and libraries. Books today are not just a feast for the eyes, but sometimes
for the nose, ears, and fingertips as well. Thanks to microchips, books
make sounds and play music. They can be scratched and sniffed.
They glow in the dark. Their parts pop up by themselves or can be
pushed and pulled, removed and replaced. They may reflect the
shape of their subject matter, or through a series of overlays may reveal
layers of an object or living thing. The formerly functional, such as an
endpaper, is often an interest-capturing contributor to a book's total
effect. Variations in format are wide and accomplished in their so-
phistication.
As with innovations in format, light years have passed since
printing with woodcuts was the means of reproducing art. Joining
woodcuts today is a vast array of media, not just wood and linoleum
prints, or watercolor, oil, and acrylic paintings, or pencil and ink draw-
ings, but paper collages, cloth tapestries, photographs, clay and paper
sculptures, mosaics, crayons, detraction foil, and holograms. Further-
more, these media, alone and in combination, are used in the full range
of styles seen in art for any audience. Technological advancements have
reduced many of the tedious aspects of creating book illustrations, such
as preparing color separations for a printer by hand. New equipment
can reproduce art in any medium. Because technology invites and al-
lows experimentation, the result is ever more varied and interesting
visual experiences for children.
Interest in the Environment Books related to environmental
issues are but one small slice of the world of nonfiction literature now
available to young readers. This edition of Adventuring features a large
selection of books pertaining to sciences and mathematics, including
aeronautics and space, the animal kingdom, archeology, conservation
and ecology, earth science, meteorology, oceanography, energy, human
health and development, machines, plants, prehistoric life, and other
subjects. An equally lengthy section relates to aspects of the social
sciences: careers; communication; community life; ethnic, racial, and
religious groups; food, clothing, and shelter; geography; government;
history; human relationships; religion; social issues and family relation-
ships; transportation; and more. The opportunity both to learn about
and to enjoy a great range of subject-matter fields is provided by numer-
ous prominent authors: Patricia Lauber, Millicent Selsam, Seymour
15
The Children's Literary Art, 1988-1992: A Few Observations
xv
Simon, Brent Ashabranner, Aliki, Mitsumasa Anno, Franklyn Branley,
Milton Meltzer, Alice Provensen, Laurence Pringle, and others.
Yet, one unmistakable observation within that world of nonfic-
tion is that children in the late eighties and early nineties are growing
up with a concern for the future of the Earth. Perhaps triggered by
events like the 1989 Alaskan oil spill and the 1990 celebration of the
twentieth anniversary of Earth Day, a wave of books was published
which promote environmental causes like recycling, forest preserva-
tion, and pesticide-free food. Some of these books are subtle in their
messages, some are overt. Selected titles, such as those involving oil
slicks, threatened wildlife, and sanctions on whaling and logging, have
encountered industry claims of manipulation and one-sidedness. Even
the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles got into the environmental act with
an ABC book, featuring Acid rain, Global warming, and Ozone deple-
tion. Books about the environment are not only a way to influence
young minds; they are also a way to make money The fact that 750,000
copies of the 1990 book 50 Simple Things Kids Can Do to Save the Planet
were sold was not lost on publishers, our next topic.
The Economics of Publishing Children's Books. Within today's
publishing world, children's books are a notable success story. Sales
now top a billion dollars a year for the first time in history. The chil-
dren's literature business is financially healthy, and, more than ever, it
is market-driven. A couple of facts: Few independently owned publish-
ing companies remain; most have merged with big business conglom-
erates. Library sales have shrunk, so publishers are placing their focus
on marketing directly to consumers. Shoppers with limited time and
limited knowledge make different kinds of selection decisions than do
professionals. Author Kathryn Lasky has sounded a warning:
There is a dark side to the current boom in juvenile publishing
that has me concerned. The dark side is that trade publishers are
starring to behave like business people — in the worst sense of the
word What does the market want? You never heard that
question ten years ago. You only heard people speaking in terms
of criteria for excellence In the past, the children's book in-
dustry has been very tolerant of risk takers. It is not so now. They
have found some formulas that work — The Baby-sitters Club and
Waldo, for instance — that have had a huge impact on juvenile
publishing. (Lasky 1991)
We have noticed several additional formulas for catching the
buyer's eye, among them a) "celebrity authors/' including Fergie, Carly
Simon, Judy Collins, Dom Deluise, Jimmy Buffett, Leontyne Price, Mar-
got Fonteyn, and Paul Simon; b) best-selling adult authors as authors of
ERIC
IB
xvi
Introduction
books for children, including Mark Helprin, Ken Follett, Danielle Steel,
Ken Kesey, James Herriot, and James Michener; c) lavishly illustrated
reissues of books, especially those likely read during the childhoods of
current buyers; d) eyecatching toy books and book-toy combinations,
including inflatable globes, banks, stuffed animals, lapel buttons, foot-
ball cards, lockets, skateboard stickers, and lunch bags; e) spin-offs
from other media, including Nintendo, Garfield, Indiana Jones, and
others; and f) spin-offs from just-published successful books, most
prominently series books. The Baby-sitters Club, for example, had sold
over forty-one million copies by 1991. Indeed, if child appeal were our
only criterion for book selection, this volume would be overflowing
with reviews of series books. We do include numerous reviews of reil-
lustrated editions of older works. Flashy books were as irresistible to
our committee members as they are to the buying public, and flash does
not necessarily preclude enduring literary and artistic merit.
Series Books. Perhaps one-third of the books that we received
from publishers were sets of two or more titles with a unifying charac-
teristic: the same characters or similar subject matter. Paperbacks in
which readers meet the same characters in book after book — sometimes
a new book every month— are a phenomenon of the times. Their suc-
cess, from the standpoint of sales, is testimony that many young readers
enjoy contemporary realistic fiction in which they can find comfort and
security in sameness. Although none is reviewed here, familiar series
like The Bobbsey Twins ("revised and reissued") and The Hardy Boys
and Nancy Drew ("with new modernized characters'') are ubiquitous,
as are series that have become popular in recent years. Here are just a
dozen: The Saddle Chib, Sweet Valley Kids, Sweet Valley Twins, Fifth Grade
Stars, The Treehouse Times, Camp Sunnyside Friends, Sleepover Friends,
Ballet One, The Baby-sitters Club, The Gymnasts, Bad News Ballet, and New
Kids on the Block.
Nonfiction series, unified by topic and format, are remarkable for
their numbers and for their range in quality. Several series are reviewed
here, with a single review pertaining to the series as a whole, classified
by topic, usually social studies, or sciences and mathematics. Rest as-
sured that even if it is not included here, a series of books can be found
on almost any topic imaginable. These we know for sure: sports figures,
sports, holidays, natural disasters, insects, mammals, reptiles, cities,
states, countries, planets, occupations, famous writers, presidents, an-
cient civilizations, breeds of dogs, explorers, women artists, and thir-
teen books about thirteen different types of beans.
17
The Children's Literary Art, 1988-1992: A Few Observations
xvii
Nostalgia. Although contemporary issues and efforts toward so-
cial relevance — nontraditional families, family violence, homelessness,
chemical dependence, AIDS— figure prominently in today's books, in-
terest in the past is substantial. One can look backward (or homeward)
through retellings, reissues, and new issues in a variety of genres —
historical fiction, poetry, biography, and information books. Those who
contend that the route to learning and loving history is to make it come
alive can feel encouraged by the range of choices.
Authors seem eager to celebrate anniversaries through children's
books. Most prominently and voluminously celebrated during this pe-
riod was the 500th anniversary of Columbus's voyage of 1492. From the
numerous reviews of books about Columbus, readers will immediately
recognize diverse historical perspectives and viewpoints, some celebra-
tory and some calling into question the humanity of the "discoverers."
Titles published between 1988 and 1992 reflect not only a looking
back to earlier times, but to earlier books. A fierce devotion to the
tried-and-true may be nostalgia or simply good business. Whether it's
revolving pictures from another century or reissues with or without
new illustrations, many of today's new books are old books. They speak
to buyers dependent on the familiar. So many elaborately illustrated old
tales have appeared in recent years that children can enjoy comparing
multiple versions of the same tale; for example, Gail Haley's, Fred
Marcellino's, and Alain Vaes's versions of Perrault's Puss in Boots, or Jan
Brett's, Helen Cooper's, and Louise Voce's renditions of Lear's The Owl
and the Pussycat.
Books for the Early Years. As evidence mounts about the value
of reading aloud to children during the preschool years, publishers
have responded to parent and educator interest in securing children's
futures. Joining Good Night Moon and Pat the Bunny are books in abun-
dance for looking at and handling by the three-and-under set, especially
concept books and toy books in cloth or glossy board format. Also
reviewed in the chapter entitled "Books for Young Children" is a large
variety of counting books, alphabet books, nursery rhyme collections,
color books, song books, and concept books through which young
children can solve a puzzle, have an adventure, learn, and enjoy.
Poetry in Abundance. Anthologies, collections by a single poet,
and individual poems in picture-book form are liberally represented in
this edition, often with illustrations attractive enough to challenge the
words for attention. Familiar names from present and past appear in the
Author Index: Prelutsky, Schwartz, Adoff, Ciardi, de la Mare, Dickin-
son, Fisher, Kennedy, Lear, Merriarn, Nash, Stafford, Whittier. Both new
18
xviii
Introduction
collections and reissues address a range of topics and feelings, and they
do so in a range of forms. Just two of the ways in which the importance
of poetry for children was affirmed during this period were through the
ongoing NCTE Award for Excellence in Poetry for Children and by
bestowing the 1989 John Newbery Medal on Paul Fleischman for Joyful
Noise: Poems for Two Voices. Because poetry is flourishing, those who
wish to share it with children have more to choose from; today it is easy
to build a collection of old and new poems, to demonstrate the variety
of poetry, and to share poetry that children are likely to enjoy.
Quest to Reflect Cultural Diversity. The availability of books that
authentically portray a range of cultures remains low, although one can
find between these covers an outstanding collection of books written or
illustrated by or about members of varied cultures. The annotations re-
flect not only African Americans, Hispanics, Asians, Native Americans,
and other cultural groups within American society, but also describe
books from and about other countries, some in translation. Writers of
great promise from several cultures have emerged during the past few
years, who, with nurturing, may allow the editor of the next edition of
Adventuring a greater representation of multicultural titles.
Literature in the Classroom. Consensus continues to grow that
literature plays a critical role in children's literacy and subject-matter
learning, as does support for teachers who believe that children should
not only learn how to read, but should become readers. One notable
example is the Teachers as Readers project of the Association of Ameri-
can Publishers, which helps classroom teachers establish teacher read-
ing groups on the theory that teachers who read and talk about books
with their peers create rich literate environments in their classrooms.
Evidence that literature is coming to classrooms can be seen in the many
classroom trade-book collections which now augment central school
libraries. It can also be seen in instructional materials, some of which are
drawing heavily on trade books. A question to be answered by in-
formed teachers is whether a particular resource preserves literature as
an aesthetic and imaginative experience or diminishes it.
Users of Adventuring will find it easy to bring literature into the
school curriculum. Books are classified into subject-matter fields like
sciences and mathematics, social studies, and fine arts. For those who
know the pleasure and learning associated with reading aloud, some
especially fine choices are included: Morning Girl (Dorris), Monkey Is-
land (Fox), Nothing but the Truth (Avi), Flight: The Journey of Charles
Lindbergh (Burleigh), Chicken Sunday (Polacco), Shiloh (Naylor), Amazing
Grace (Hoffman), Seven Blind Mice (Young), and The Stinky Cheese Man,
and Other Fairly Stupid Tales (Scieszka), among dozens of others. Still
19
How to Read an Annotation
xix
other books ease the transition to independence in reading because of
their predictable elements. Finally, many books are about school itself,
about reading and writing, and about authors and illustrators.
The children's literary art from 1988 to 1992 is flourishing. Those
who select books for children have more titles from which to choose
with each passing year; examples of excellence exist in goodly numbers;
and children's literature is being accorded ever greater importance by
those who find themselves in the company of preschoolers through
sixth graders. Our excitement about new and talented faces who have
burst upon the scene is tempered, however, by the loss during these
years of Isaac Asimov, Patricia Beatty, Roald Dahl, Carolyn Haywood,
Arnold Lobel, James Marshall, Eve Merriam, Scott O'Dell, Peggy Par-
rish, Alvin Schwartz, Theodor Seuss Geisel, and Isaac Bashevis Singer.
Children's reading experiences will be enriched forever by their gifts.
How to Read an Annotation
Bringing order to thousands of books is a daunting task. In the end we
sorted them into thirteen imperfect categories, most with numerous
subcategories, then subcategories of subcategories. The thirteen appear
as "chapter" divisions, each one introduced with a quote from a distin-
guished contributor to that particular facet of literature for children.
Some divisions are based on the age of the reader ("Books for Young
Children"), some on genre ("Fantasy"), and some on content ("Fine
Arts"). So much for parallelism. Classifying books is fraught with prob-
lems; solid arguments can be made for assigning a number of books to
many different places. To illustrate, Joanna Cole and Bruce Degen's The
Magic School Bus inside the Human Body, a field trip through the circula-
tory system, is a fantasy filled with scientific information. It is intriguing
fiction and also a fine content-area resource which provokes discussion
and makes learning memorable.
Each annotation has been assigned an interest level. The "interest
age range" uses the publishers' designations of the youngest to oldest
children who might be interested in either hearing the book read aloud
or reading it on their own. Estimates are given in the absence of pub-
lisher information. We supply this designation with all due caution that
for some books and some children it may be unduly restrictive.
We have tried to inform book-selection decisions by indicating
honors and awards bestowed upon single books. We do this in two
ways: as part of the annotation itself, and in an appendix which de-
scribes major awards and honor lists and which compiles the names of
1988-92 winners. Because of the proliferation of ways to honor books,
ERIC
20
XX
Introduction
we have generally not noted runners-up for awards, state awards, or
foreign awards.
Except for the series books reviewed collectively, each bibliog-
raphical entry includes the International Standard Book Number (ISBN)
for the library edition.
The annotations themselves range in length. Each includes a story
summary or content statement and, when relevant, commentary on art
and design. Occasionally the annotations suggest topically related books,
books by the same author, or suggestions for responding to the book,
such as storytelling, drama, reading aloud, readers' theatre, writing and
art experiences, and possible connections with subject-matter units.
Adventuring closes with a Directory of Publishers for ordering
purposes, the appendix of award-winning books, and four indexes:
author, illustrator, subject, and title.
As we emerge from four years of floating on a sea of books, we
have regrets, the major one being that we weren't able to include anno-
tations for hundreds of additional titles as meritorious as many of those
included here. We weren't finished; we simply had to quit. We hope that
we have organized this collection in a way that is useful, but we learned
in the process that the work of imaginative minds defies categorization.
We have had the opportunity to see a great range of books — a range in
quality, in subject matter, in format, and in artistic medium and style.
Those who select books for children have an enviable "problem": choos-
ing from among so many and varied literary offerings that can be
recommended with enthusiasm and that will be read with pleasure.
In 1990, midway through our work on this project, Publishers
Weekly reported on the ten best-selling paperback books for children.
Eight of the ten featured Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles, accounting for
the sale of eight million copies. One of the two remaining best-sellers
was about the New Kids on the Block, and the other was a selection
from The Baby-sitters Club series. How to read an annotation? Read it
voraciously and conscientiously, here and wherever book-selection ad-
vice can be found. The guidance of a teacher or librarian, parent or
friend who is informed about the children's literary world is critical
beyond question.
Work Cited
Lasky, ^athryn. 1991. ''Creativity in a Boom Industry," The Horn Book Maga-
zine, November/December.
ERIC
21
Biography
Children look for clues to life.
They want the truth,
They need the truth,
and they deserve it
So I try to present characters honestly
with their paradoxes and their complexities,
their strengths and their weaknesses.
Jean Fritz, "Making It Real/'
Children's Literature in Education
ERIC
22
2
1 Biography
1.1 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Benjamin Franklin. Illus-
trated by John and Alexandra Wallner. Holiday House, 1990.
ISBN 0-8234-0792-6. 29p. 7-10 (est.).
A writer, an inventor, a scientist, a statesman — Benjamin Frank-
lin was all of these and more. David Adler 's historical account,
a volume in the Picture Book Biography series, chronicles this
founding father's life and accomplishments. Double-page illus-
trations colorfully depict the life and times of early America.
This biography would complement other books about Franklin,
such as Jean Fritz's What's the Big Idea, Ben Franklin?
1.2 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Christopher Columbus.
Illustrated by John and Alexandra Wallner. Holiday House,
1991. ISBN 0-8234-0857-4. 32p. 6-12 (est).
Another in David Adler 's Picture Book Biographies series, this
account of Columbus's life from boyl">od to death is told
through simple, informative text and fu:i-page illustrations.
1.3 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Eleanor Roosevelt. Illus-
trated by Robert Casilla. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-
0856-6. 29p. 8-12 (est.).
A shy child who learned to be independent at an early age,
Eleanor Roosevelt grew up to become "first lady of the world."
This easy-to-read Picture Book Biography offers a brief history
of the life and accomplishments of this remarkable woman. Full-
page watercolor paintings complement the text and capture the
memorable events in her life.
1.4 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Harriet Tubman. Illustrated
by Samuel Byrd. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-0926-0. 28p.
6-9.
The eleventh book in David Adler's Picture Book Biography
series depicts the life of a prominent African American woman
in American history. In her more than ninety years, Harriet Tub-
man escaped slavery, used earnings from odd jobs to lead other
slaves to freedom on the Underground Railroad, served as a
nurse and a spy, fought for women's right to vote, and opened
a home for the elderly poor. Dark, expressive watercolors por-
ERLC
23
Biography
3
tray the sorrow, mystery, and unfailing courage that marked
her life.
1.5 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Helen Keller. Illustrated by
John and Alexandra Wallner. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-8234-
0818-3. 30p. 7-10 (est).
Left deaf and blind by a childhood illness, Helen Keller grew to
become an inspiration to others all over the world. This easy-to-
understand book in the Picture Book Biography series chronicles
the life story of this courageous woman and highlights the im-
portant aspects of her life, including her education with Anne
Sullivan and her dedication to the American Federation for the
Blind. Full-page, soft-colored illustrations help to explain the
struggles and triumphs of a remarkable woman.
1.6 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Jesse Owens. Illustrated by
Robert Casilla. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-0966-X. 32p.
6-9 (est).
Son of sharecroppers and grandson of slaves, Jesse Owens set
three world records and tied a fourth at the 1936 Olympics.
David Adler's Picture Book Biography of the child who could
run and jump primarily traces Owens's development as an ath-
lete, but it does not skirt the prejudice that he faced both at home
and at the games. Hitler, for example, snubbed Owens at the
Olympic Games in Berlin. Illustrations are reminiscent of softly
tinted photographs.
1.7 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of John F. Kennedy. Illustrated
by Robert Casilla. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0884-1.
29p. 8-12 (est).
Born into a rich and powerful family, John F. Kennedy carved his
own identity through his achievements and career in govern-
ment. This Picture Book Biography profiles Kennedy's life. Full-
page, watercolor paintings, many from actual photographs, il-
lustrate the significant events in his life, from his childhood to
his assassination.
1.8 Adler, David A. A Picture Book of Thomas Jefferson. Illus-
trated by John and Alexandra Wallner. Holiday House, 1990.
ISBN 0-8234-0791-8. 29p. 7-10 (est.).
He was eager to learn, loved to read and invent, and had ideas
of his own — he was Thomas Jefferson. This Picture Book Biog-
raphy presents a simple chronological account of Jefferson's
24
4
Biography
1.10
1.11
1.12
private life as colonist and father, as well as his public life as
legislator, statesman, and president — ''father of our democracy/'
Colorful double-page watercolors illustrate the informative and
straightforward text.
Aliki. The King's Day: Louis XIV of France. Illustrated by Aliki.
Thomas Y. Crowell, 1989. ISBN 0-690-04590-5. 28p. 7-11.
King Louis XIV of France lived in the grandest of styles. His
palaces were magnificent:; his wigs, robes, and jewels were the
finest; and his days were filled with ceremonial rituals and spec-
tacular events. Detailed information can be gained both from the
drawings and their captions, which together depict a day in the
life of one of France's most extravagant and yet most brilliant
kings.
Alper, Ann Fitzpatrick. Forgotten Voyager: The Story of
Amerigo Vespucci. Carolrhoda Books, 1991. ISBN 0-87614-442-
3. 80p. 8-12.
Amerigo Vespucci's accomplishments — and the slanders that
contributed to his relative obscurity — are fleshed out in this
readable account From his Florentine childhood to his serious
geographical scholarship and exploration, Vespucci is presented
as an energetic, intelligent, and ambitious European discoverer.
Historical illustrations and primary source material add power
to the narrative.
Anderson, Joan. Christopher Columbus: From Vision to Voy-
age. Photographs by George Ancona. Dial Books for Young
Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-1042-9. 48p. 7-10 (est.).
Joan Anderson portrays Columbus as a man of "vivid imagina-
tion, great curiosity, tremendous energy, the courage to stand by
his beliefs, and a willingness to take risks" in this account of the
of the "inner" journey — the years 1459-92— that led to his first
sailing. George Ancona 's color photographs, set in Spain, feature
members of the Spanish National Opera dressed in period
costumes.
Banish, Roslyn, with Jennifer Jordan-Wong. A Forever Family.
Photographs by Roslyn Banish. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-
021674-3. 44p. 5-8.
After spending half of her life in foster homes, eight-year-old
Jennifer Jordan-Wong tells the story of her adoption by a "for-
ERLC
25
Biography
5
ever family." With the help of black-and-white photographs of
parents, extended family, foster parents, social workers, friends,
pets, and important places and activities, a heartwarming and
informative account emerges.
1.13 Bernheim, Mark. Father of the Orphans: The Story of Janusz
Korczak. Lodestar Books, 1989. ISBN 0-525-67265-6. 160p. 11
and up (est.).
In this volume in the Jewish Biography series, Mark Bernheim
weaves a poignant tale of dignity and love in Warsaw during the
Nazi occupation. Janusz Korczak's story begins with his privi-
leged childhood and moves through his adult life of poverty and
sacrifice. Korczak was one of the first physicians in Europe to
dedicate his career to the care of children, and his devotion to
his orphanage resulted in the ultimate sacrifice of his life for
these Jewish children. Middle-grade students will come away
wanting to know more about how such atrocities could have
occurred.
1.14 Bernstein, Joanne E., and Rose Blue, with Alan Jay Gerber. Ju-
dith Resnik: Challenger Astronaut Lodestar Books, 1990. ISBN
0-525-67305-9. lOOp. 10 and up (est).
This biography traces Judith Resnik's life from young girl to
engineer/ scientist to space-shuttle astronaut. Although much of
the book focuses on the Discovery mission and the Challenger
tragedy that took Resnik's life, the authors also explore her
reactions to her parents' bitter divorce, the influence of Judaism
on her life, the breakup of her own marriage, and her struggle
to become an astronaut. Black-and-white photos, a reading list,
and an index complement the text.
1.15 Black, Sheila. Sitting Bull and the Battle of the Little Bighorn.
Cwiklik, Robert. King Philip and the War with the Colonists.
Sequoyah and the Cherokee Alphabet McClard, Megan, and
George Ypsilantis. Hiawatha and the Iroquois League. Shorto,
Russell. Geronimo and the Struggle for Apache Freedom.
Tecumseh and the Dream of an American Indian Nation. Illus-
trated by L. L. Cundiff; Ed Lee; T. Lewis; Frank Riccio; Tim Sisco;
Robert L. Smith. Silver Burdett Press, 1989. Approx. 120p. 10-13.
Alvin Josephy's Biography Series of American Indians is charac-
terized by its thoroughness, its accuracy, its sense of drama, and
its emphasis on Native American perspectives. Each volume
2B
ERIC
6
Biography
tells the story of a great Native American, with subjects ranging
from Sitting Bull to Sequoyah to Hiawatha. The writing is clear
and rich with historical detail, explanation, analysis, and narra-
tive excitement. Line drawings and historical photographs ac-
company each text, along with a list of suggested readings.
1.16 Bios, Joan W. The Heroine of the Titanic: A Tale Both True and
Otherwise of the Life of Molly Brown. Illustrated by Tennessee
Dixon. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-07547- 9. 40p. 6
and up.
Joan Bios pieces together the facts and legends surrounding the
exuberant life of Margaret (Molly) Tobin Brown, focusing on her
adventure-seeking derring-do and her courageous spirit as an
"unsinkable" survivor of the Titanic. Brown's feats and foibles
are recounted in lyrical prose, with text embedded in paintings
that capture wistful hues of bygone elegance, but that give Molly
Brown a vivacity undiminished by advancing age. As an added
touch, a sprinkle of verse in Victorian frames works like a Greek
chorus to comment on the saga.
1.17 Brighton, Catherine. Nijinsky: Scenes from the Childhood of
the Great Dancer. Illustrated by Catherine Brighton. Doubleday,
1989. ISBN 0-385-24926-8. 26p. 4^8.
As a little boy, future great ballet dancer Vaslav Nijinsky trav-
eled through Russia with his brother, sister, and theatrical par-
ents and learned to dance. When the family fortunes changed
and his father walked out, his mother taught dance, and Vaslav
won a place at the Imperial Ballet School in St. Petersburg, pro-
pelling his legendary success. Bordered in dark green, evocative
watercolor illustrations reveal not only the Nijinsky family, but
a portrait of turn-of-the-century Russia as well.
1.18 Byars, Betsy. The Moon and I. Julian Messner, 1992. ISBN 0-671-
74165-9. 96p. 10 and up (est).
In lighthearted anecdotes woven together by a snake that she
calls Moon, Betsy Byars describes her life and discusses her
approach to writing in this slim, delightful memoir. Readers will
learn how she associates her villains with the horrific Bubba of
her youth, how she begins with title pages and keeps them long
after she's forgotten their stories, and how she believes in the
importance of characters and the need for authority in author-
ing. Black-and-white photographs show Byars with Moon
throughout her life.
27
Biography
7
1.19 Carpenter, Angelica Shirley, and Jean Shirley. L. Frank Baum:
Royal Historian of Oz. Lerner, 1992. ISBN 0-8225-4910-7. 144p.
10 and up.
Lyman Frank Baum was a fanciful child, imagining that scare-
crows could run across the fields that they protected. Later, he
dressed the window of his general store with pots and pans
assembled to look like a man. Thus originated two of his char-
acters in The Wonderful Wizard ofOz. Frank Baum's enterprises,
his family life, and his determination to write despite ill health
provide the framework for this responsible biography of an
author who wrote his life into his stories for children.
1.20 Collins, David R. Malcolm X: Black Rage. Dillon Press, 1992.
ISBN 0-87518-498-7. 104p. 10 and up.
Solutions to racial prejudice are complex and never easily dis-
cussed in the classroom. David Collins, however, portrays more
than anger in this sensitive biography of Malcolm X, one of
twenty-two books in the People in Focus series. Facts are pre-
sented, with the judgment of Malcolm's life left to the reader.
Teachers and students alike will find the text, black-and-white
photographs, bibliography, and index useful and informative.
1.21 Conrad, Pam. Prairie Visions: The Life and Times of Solomon
Butcher. Photographs by Solomon Butcher. HarperCollins, 1991.
ISBN 0-06-021375-2. 85p. 11 and up.
Solomon Butcher, an early Nebraska settler, was a man unable
to decide which of his many talents and interests to pursue. He
decided to record the settlement history of Custer County in
photographs, a remarkably innovative project for the times.
Captivated by his photographs while researching her novel Prai-
rie Songs, Pam Conrad created a pictorial account of Butcher's
eclectic life and of the courageous pioneer families that he im-
mortalized more than a hundred years ago. Notable 1991 Chil-
dren's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
1.22 Crews, Donald. Bigmama's. Illustrated by Donald Crews.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09951-3. 32p. 4-7 (est.).
Bigmama once told grandson Donald Crews, "Boy, you going to
amount to something/7 This autobiographical picture book of
author/ illustrator Crews is further testimony to her faith. Re-
calling long-ago family train trips back to the farm in Cotton-
dale, Florida, to see Bigmama and Bigpapa, Crews uses water-
color and color dyes to reassure that, in memory at least, nothing
ERLC
28
8
Biography
changes. From fishing hole to deep well to the peddle sewing
machine in the hall and to the reunion with family, "everything
is as it should be."
1.23 Darby, Jean. Martin Luther King, Jr. Lerner, 1990. ISBN 0-8225-
4902-6. 144p. 10 and up.
This highly readable, concise biography of Martin Luther King,
Jr., explores the charismatic man's life as a small child in segre-
gated Atlanta, his early career as a Baptist minister in
Montgomery, Alabama, and his subsequent emergence as leader
of the American civil rights movement of the 1950s and 1960s.
Accompanying the text are striking black-and-white photo-
graphs depicting King's family, the Montgomery bus boycott,
Freedom Riders, and the famous March on Washington. Jean
Darby concludes the book with a helpful bibliography, glossary,
and index. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
1.24 dePaola, Tomie. Patrick: Patron Saint of Ireland. Illustrated by
Tomie dePaola. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-0924-4. 32p.
3-8 (est).
The story of Saint Patrick begins with his boyhood in Britain,
when he was kidnapped and enslaved in Ireland. Although he
made his way home again, he returned to Ireland to found the
first church there and to baptize thousands. Facts about Patrick's
life are separated from the legends that surround him, including
driving the snakes from Ireland. Tomie dePaola interprets both
life and legends with earth-tone static forms that are uniquely
his, but they are also reminiscent of early religious paintings.
1.25 Emmert, Michelle. I'm the Big Sister Now Illustrated by Gail
Owens. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-3458-7. 28p. 7-11
(est.).
Even though nine-year-old Michelle Emmert is younger chan
her sister Amy, Michelle plays the role of big sister because Amy
has cerebral palsy and cannot walk or talk or sit unsupported.
Nevertheless, Amy brings unmitigated joy to those who love
her. In a straightforward description, Michelle tells Amy's story:
her needs, her care, her gifts, and her responses to her world. A
photograph of the sisters and illustrations in pencil and water-
color provide sensitive accompaniment to the narrative,
1.26 Fleischman, Paul. Townsend's Warbler. HarperCollins/Char-
lotte Zolotow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-064)21875-4. 52p. 9-12.
ERIC
29
Biography
9
The story of naturalist John Kirk Townsend's exploration of the
American Northwest in 1834 is interwoven with the story of a
previously unknown warbler's migration from South America
to North America. After an arduous journey and encounters
with storms, wild rivers, and Native American war parties,
Townsend discovered the warbler, which was later named for
him. The text, which draws on Townsend's journal, is inter-
spersed with black-and-white photos, paintings of period
scenes, and portraits.
1.27 Ford, Barbara. Walt Disney. Walker, 1989. ISBN 0-8027-6865-2.
156p. 9-12.
This clearly narrated biography, generously illustrated with
black-and-white photographs, provides fascinating insight into
the creator of beloved characters for children. In spite of mone-
tary hardships and the negativism of friends and family, Walt
Disney's determination and perseverance enabled him to fulfill
his dreams. Although there are references to Disney's personal-
ity quirks, the author leaves readers with an understanding of
and admiration for a creative genius who revolutionized the
entertainment world.
1.28 Foreman, Michael. War Boy: A Country Childhood. Illustrated
by Michael Foreman. Little, Brown/Arcade, 1990. ISBN 1-55970-
049-1. 92p. 8 and up (est.).
In a memoir of World War II from the perspective of a very
young English boy, illustrator Michael Foreman re-creates a time
when his village was crowded with soldiers, when barbed wire
lined the beaches against invasion, and when incendiary bombs
lit the night sky, one just missing young Michael's bed. But there
are also memories of the respite of his mother's tea shop, boy-
hood games, and fatherly soldiers. The narration is dispassion-
ate, and Foreman's watercolor illustrations are accompanied by
line drawings, war posters, and diagrams.
1.29 Freedman, Russell. The Wright Brothers: How They Invented
the Airplane. Illustrated by Wilbur and Orville Wright. Holiday
House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0875-2. 124p. 8 and up.
Amazingly, Wilbur and Orville Wright, inventors of the airplane,
never had any special training in science or engineering. Read-
ers might also be interested to learn that when the brothers
tested their first "full-size, man-carrying glider" in Kitty Hawk,
North Carolina, in the fall of 1900, they lived in a tent, and that
30
9
10
Biography
when the Wrights offered their successful airplane idea to the
U.S. military, they were "turned down without a hearing/7 This
photographic account of the Wrights' most famous invention is
clearly written and well documented by their own words and
photographs. Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies.
1.30 Fritz, Jean. Bully for You, Teddy Roosevelt! Illustrated by Mike
Wimmer. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21769-X. 128p.
10 and up.
Both adults and children will find this biography of Theodore
Roosevelt by award-winning author Jean Fritz entertaining and
may encounter some new facts about our twenty-sixth presi-
dent. For example, Teddy Roosevelt once owned land in the
Dakotas and wanted to become a rancher; he ran for mayor of
New York City and was elected governor of New York before
being nominated as vice-president under William McKinley;
and he was the first person inaugurated to the Conservation
Hall of Fame. Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies.
1.31 Fritz, Jean. George Washington's Mother. Illustrated by Dy-
Anne DiSalvo-Ryan. Grosset and Dunlap, 1992. ISBN 0-448-
40385-4. 48p. 7-9.
Not a great deal is known about George Washington's mother,
Mary Ball Washington. But in her impeccable research style, Jean
Fritz must have ferreted deeds, ledgers, and letters to add to
published accounts. In the seamless result for beginning readers,
Mary Washington is revealed as both strong and weak, depend-
ent and independent, and always a bit impecunious. On tinted
paper, the illustrations have both colonial flair and humor.
1.32 Fritz, Jean. The Great Little Madison. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989.
ISBN 0-399-21768-1. 160p. 10 and up (est.).
Just as Jean Fritz skillfully sculpts the dimensions of "a pale,
sickly boy with a weak voice" who became the fourth U.S. presi-
dent, so does she tell of his times. Madison is revealed as a quiet
but articulate spokesman and meticulous recordkeeper at the
constitutional convention, as a student of government, as a
friend and admirer of Jefferson, and, finally as a president pas-
sionately devoted to the preservation of the union. Political
crossfire is made comprehensible and intriguing. Dolley Madi-
ERLC
31
Biography
11
son's humor, courage, and vanity also shine through. Boston
Globe-Horn Book Nonfiction Award, 1990.
1.33 Golenbock, Peter. Teammates* Illustrated by Paul Bacon. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1990. ISBN 0-15-
200603-6. 32p. 5-12 (est.).
Drawings, photographs, and baseball cards help tell an impor-
tant story in baseball history. When Jackie Robinson joined the
Brooklyn Dodgers in 1947, he became the first African American
to play on a major-league baseball team, and also became a
victim of slurs, slights, affronts, and threats from his teammates
and others. The focal event of this account is when Pee Wee
Reese crossed the field in Cincinnati, stood next to Robinson, put
an arm around him, and silenced the taunting crowds by stating,
"This man is my teammate/' Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books
in the Field of Social Studies.
1.34 Harrison, Barbara, and Daniel Terris. A Twilight Struggle: The
Life of John Fitzgerald Kennedy. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-08830-9. 159p. 10 and up.
This balanced portrait of John F. Kennedy incorporates current
historical information, family influences, and a cogent analysis
of President Kennedy's political life. Based upon the Home Box
Office documentary JFK: In His Own Words, the biography de-
tails both the president's personal life and his political career,
revealing the president as a complex, even flawed, political
leader. Photographs, a selected bibliography, a chronology of
important events, and an index provide useful resources for the
reader.
1.35 Haskins, Jim. Outward Dreams: Black Inventors and Their
Inventions. Walker, 1991. ISBN 0-8027-6999-2. 128p. 12 and up.
If history is the living record of a society, its ideas, codes, laws,
and achievements, then significant groups of people have been
omitted from the record. Nowhere is this more true than with
African American inventors and their inventions. Now the
reader can learn who built the first steam engine, the first shoe-
making machine, the first clock in the United States and the first
traffic light. Jim Haskins offers a refreshing look at the contribu-
tions of African Americans, thus helping to correct some signifi-
cant oversights. A comprehensive index of black inventors be-
tween 1834 and 1900 is included.
er|c
32
12
Biography
1.36 Houston, Gloria. My Great-Aunt Arizona* Illustrated by Susan
Condie Lamb. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-022607-2. 32p.
6-10 (est).
Arizona Houston Hughes was a singer, a reader, a dancer, a
dreamer, and, most of all, a teacher. In this realistic yet fictional
account of her life, Arizona touches generations of her Appala-
chian fourth-grade students and helps them aspire to visit those
faraway places that she had only visited in her mind, through
her voracious reading of books. Young teachers-to-be will de-
light in Susan Condie Lamb's expressive illustrations of a
woman who perservered to achieve her dream and to help
dreams emerge for others.
1.37 Hurwitz, Johanna. Astrid Lindgren: Storyteller to the World.
Illustrated by Michael Dooling. Puffin Books, 1991. ISBN 0-14-
032692-8. 54p. 7-11.
Astrid Lindgren enjoyed childhood on a farm in southern Swe-
den before moving to Stockholm, marrying, and raising a family.
Her memories and adventures, some of which she told to her
own children, were woven into more than forty books and were
delightfully exaggerated in the tales of Pippi Longstocking. This
affectionate biography in the Women of Our Time series attrib-
utes Lindgren's international success to her appealing interpre-
tation of family life. Although the book is aimed toward seven-
to eleven-year-old readers, it is sufficiently researched and de-
tailed to appeal to teenagers.
138 Ireland, Karin. Albert Einstein. Silver Burdett Press, 1989. ISBN
0-382-09523-5. 144p. 10 and up.
The details of Einstein's daily life and personality presented in
this biography help the reader appreciate him as a man rather
than a superman. Einstein is portrayed as a single-minded, very
private individual who was first considered a slow learner and
who came to define the word scientist Consistent with the for-
mat of the Pioneers in Change series, black-and-white photo-
graphs clarify the meaty text, and a time-line chronicles the
scientist's major accomplishments.
139 Jaspersohn, William. Senator A Profile of Bill Bradley in the
U.S. Senate. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-
272880-5. 224p. 12 and up.
Richly illustrated with both black-and-white and colored photo-
graphs, this lucid biography, somewhat breezy in tone, first
33
Biography
13
sketches Bill Bradley's days as an AU-American basketball
player at Princeton, Rhodes scholar, and star with the New York
Knickerbockers. Concentrating thereafter on Bradley's life as
U.S. Senator from New Jersey, the volume presents the legislator
in a variety of roles — author of major bills, envoy to the Soviet
Union, campaigner for reelection. Bradley emerges throughout
as industrious, highly intelligent, sensitive, and sensible.
1.40 Johnson, Rick L. Bo Jackson: Baseball/Football Superstar, Dil-
lon Press, 1991. ISBN 0-87518-489-8. 64p. 7-10 (est.).
Superstar sports figure Bo Jackson was already a football, track,
and baseball star back home in McAdory High School in
McCalla, Alabama. At Auburn University, he won the Heisman
Trophy as the best college football athlete in the nation, and after
college he became both a professional baseball and football
player. Yet, this Taking Part biography for younger readers, illus-
trated with photographs, makes Jackson a real person, an Afri-
can American child of poverty with imperfect school behavior
and serious youthful offenses, and in need of help in growing
up.
1.41 Levinson, Nancy Smiler. Christopher Columbus: Voyager to
the Unknown, Lodestar Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-67292-3. 128p.
9-12.
This well-documented discussion of Columbus's voyages in-
cludes archival documents, black-and-white reproductions of
portraits, and photographs of artifacts, charts, and maps. In
chapter format, Nancy Smiler Levinson's oversize volume sets
the historical stage, describes each of the voyages, and addresses
the place of Christopher Columbus in history. In large print with
lots of white space, information is presented in a straightfor-
ward way, without dodging the admiral's frailties. A chronology
of events and even the crew list for the first voyage are included.
1.42 Little, Jean. Stars Come Out Within. Viking Penguin, 1990. ISBN
0-670-82965-X. 263p. 10 and up (est.).
Award-winning Canadian children's author Jean Little contin-
ues her memoirs first begun in Little by Little, this time focusing
on her adult life. Little recounts episodes about her own writing,
her short but meaningful teaching career, her remarkable
mother, her significant friends, her Seeing-Eye dog, Zephyr, and
SAM, her talking computer. Candid about her experiences with
depression and the adjustments that she makes as her sight
34
14
Biography
decreases, this determined woman of strength tells a moving
story. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1992.
1.43 Livingston, Myra Cohn. Let Freedom Ring: A Ballad of Martin
Luther King, Jr. Illustrated by Samuel Byrd. Holiday House,
1992. ISBN 0-8234-0957-0. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
The life work and mission of Martin Luther King, Jr., are told in
ballad form, borrowing words and phrases from King's own
sermons and speeches and embedding them within rhythmic
text. Paintings are large, powerful, color interpretations of actual
photographs and scenes from King's life. A reference page iden-
tifies the scenes and sources of quotations. The ballad concludes
with a variation on its repeated chorus: "From every mountain-
side, let freedom ring. / Your dream is our dream, Martin Luther
King."
1.44 Marrin, Albert. Napoleon and the Napoleonic Wars. Viking
Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83480-7. 276p. 10 and up.
This biography thoughtfully presents the turmoil and tri-
umphs of the Napoleonic era of the late seventeenth and early
eighteenth centuries. Historian Albert Marrin traces Napo-
leon's life from his birth on Corsica to his early military suc-
cesses as the "Little Corporal" to his victorious coronation as
European Emperor to his ultimate defeat at Waterloo and im-
prisonment on Elba. Black-and-white illustrations (paintings,
portraits, cartoons) and a helpful bibliography supplement
the text. National Council of Social Studies Notable Children's
Trade Books, 1992.
1.45 McKissack, Patricia C. Jesse Jackson: A Biography. Scholastic,
1989. ISBN 0-590-43181-1. 108p. 8-12.
Patricia McKissack's biography of African American leader Jesse
Louis Jackson follows his many trails: from the dusty roads of
Greenville, South Carolina, in 1941 to the difficult campaigns for
the presidency in 1984 and 1988; from his leadership of SCLC's
Operation Breadbasket in Chicago to his organization of the
Rainbow Coalition in Washington, D.C.; from "country
preacher" to eloquent orator; from commitment to America's
poor to audiences with foreign dignitaries. Whatever Jackson's
path, McKissack's words, along with dozens of black-and-white
photographs, make clear Jackson's impact upon the course of
history. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
35
Biography
15
1.46 Neimark, Anne E. Diego Rivera: Artist of the People, Harper-
Collins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-021784-7. 116p. 8-12.
In a fictionalized biography based partly on Diego Rivera's own
autobiography and writings, Anne Neimark first creates a por-
trait of the Mexican artist as boy, round and curious and full of
mischief and art. Then, against the political turmoil of his times,
Rivera becomes a man, determined to record the stories around
him and to be a participant as well. His records are his famous
murals, testifying to his people in the places where his people
would see them. Neimark includes reproductions of the artist's
work, beginning with a drawing by three-year-old Diego.
1.47 Nichols, Janet. American Music Makers: An Introduction to
American Composers. Walker, 1990. ISBN 0-8027-6958-6. 209p.
12 and up.
Janet Nichols offers ten fascinating portraits of talented Ameri-
can composers, from the nineteenth-century pianist Louis
Gottschalk to the internationally acclaimed George Gershwin to
the contemporary innovator Philip Glass. Presented in chrono-"
logical order, the mini-biographies explore the musicians' per-
sonal lives, professional successes and failures, and specific con-
tributions to the musical field. Black-and-white photos of the
nine men and one woman accompany the text, along with bibli-
ographies of recommended books and recordings, a glossary,
and an index.
1.48 Osborne, Mary Pope. The Many Lives of Benjamin Franklin.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0680-4. 144p.
9-12.
A scientist, statesman, diplomat, and inventor — Benjamin
Franklin was all of these and more. The "many lives" of one of
America's founding fathers are sequentially explored in Mary
Pope Osborne's account of Franklin's life from childhood until
death. A list of his accomplishments and a time-line of important
events in his life help to organize the information presented in
this book. Historical black-and-white photographs of early
America further authenticate a well-researched biography. Nota-
ble 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
1.49 Parks, Rosa, with Jim Haskins. Rosa Parks: My Story. Dial
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-0673-1. 192p. 12 and up (est.).
Rosa Parks's quiet defiance on a bus in Montgomery, Alabama,
in 1955 is often cited as a pivotal moment in the struggle for civil
ERLC
38
16
Biography
rights in the United States. Here, with family photos and great
modesty, Parks tells the story of her ancestry, her marriage, and
the events that led to and affected her decision not to abandon
her seat that day Her arrest and her life subsequent to the
ensuing societal changes are also documented.
1.50 Peet, Bill Bill Peet: An Autobiography. Illustrated by Bill Peet
Houghton Mifflin, 1989. ISBN 0-395-50932-7. 90p. 6-12 (est.).
In a book filled with charcoal drawings of his beloved characters
and true-life experiences on every page, popular and prolific
author/illustrator Bill Peet tells the story of his life. As a young
boy, he loved to draw. Hired at Walt Disney Studios upon gradu-
ation from art school, he remained for nearly thirty years and
became one of Disney's top artists. At the same time, Peet began
to write and illustrate the stories that he originally told to his
own children. Now he works full-time creating books. Caldecott
Honor Medal 1990.
1.51 Porter, A. P. Jump at de Sun: The Story of Zora Neale Hurston.
Carolrhoda Books, 1992. ISBN 0-87614-667-1. 96p. 8-12.
Folklorist/novelist Zora Neale Hurston celebrated a distinc-
tively African cultural point of view at a time when the Ameri-
can part of her heritage was celebrated by many of her contem-
poraries. Her unorthodox views and eccentric personality
prevented her from achieving in her lifetime the recognition or
financial stability that she deserved. Author A. P Porter recounts
Hurston's triumphs and failures in honest and engaging terms;
abundant photographs and clear prose combine to make an
entertaining biography of this African American writer.
1.52 Rappaport, Doreen. Living Dangerously: American Women
Who Risked Their Lives for Adventure. HarperCollins, 1991.
ISBN 0-06-025109-3. 117p. 9-13.
Riding over Niagara Falls in a barrel, heading out on safari, and
scaling Mount Huascar&n in Peru are but three of the adventures
recounted in this text. The reader learns about six women who,
like their male counterparts Charles Lindbergh and Robert
Perry, sought to accomplish feats of daring. Each portrayal in-
cludes black-and-white photographs and biographical data. The
bibliography and list of other women adventurers provide sug-
gestions for further reading.
ERIC
37
A. Dear Dr. Bell . . . Your friend, Helen Keller by Judith St. George; cover illustration
by Ellen Thompson (see 1 .58). B. The King's Day: Louis XIV of France by Aliki (see
1 .9). C. Jump at de Sun: The Story ofZora Neale Hurston by A. P. Porter (see 1 .51 ).
D. Bard of Avon: The Story of William Shakespeare by Diane Stanley and Peter
Vennema; illustrated by Diane Stanley (see 1.61).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
A. 8/7/ Peet: An Autobiography by Bill Peet (see 1.50). B. Bully for You, Teddy
Roosevelt! by Jean Fritz; illustrations by Mike Wimmer (see 1.30). C. Celia's Island
Journal by Celia Thaxter; adapted and illustrated by Loretta Krupinski (see 1.66).
D. Townsend's Warblerby Paul Fleischman (see 1.26).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Biography
17
1.53 Richmond, Robin. Introducing Michelangelo. Little, Brown,
1991. ISBN 0-316-74440-9. 32p. 10-12.
This visually captivating account conveys both the sensory
power of Michelangelo's work and the fascination of his life and
era. Reproductions of the artist's friezes, statues, and portraits cf
Christian and mythic figures are augmented with works by his
contemporaries, offered as further explanation of the historical
period. For example, paintings of Florence, of Medici merchant
princes, and of an artist's studio are included. Insets add practi-
cal information about how Michelangelo painted the Sistine
Chapel and how its original luminescence has been restored.
1.54 Roth, Susan L. Marco Polo: His Notebook. Doubleday, 1991.
ISBN 0-385-26555-7. 32p. 8-12 (est.).
This fictionalized version of Marco Polo's notebook, written on
"parchment," records the thirteenth-century travels originally
described in Polo's own Travels of Marco Polo. Maps, paintings,
and drawings help to tell the tale of visiting Mount Ararat,
Persian fire-eaters, the Great Khan, and China with its coal,
postal service, and paper money Visually splendid, the format
invites close examination.
1.55 Rowland, Delia. The Story of Sacajawea, Guide to Lewis and
Clark. Illustrated by Richard Leonard. Dell/Yearling Books,
1989. ISBN 0-440-40215-8. 92p. 8-11.
Delia Rowland dramatically relates the harrowing, exciting ex-
ploits of Sacajawea, the Shoshone guide to Lewis and Clark as
they explored America's Northwest Territory. Stolen from her
family as a young girl, enslaved by a rival Indian tribe, and then
sold to a rough fur trapper, this young woman nevertheless
revealed courage and wisdom far beyond her years. Boys and
girls alike will enjoy reading about the expedition's encounters
with hostile Native Americans, wild animals, and nature's harsh
elements.
1.56 Ryan, Nolan, and Harvey Frommer. Throwing Heat: The Auto-
biography of Nolan Ryan. Avon Books, 1990. ISBN 0-380-
70826-4. 249p. 12 and up (est.).
Nolan Ryan tells his story of growing up in a small Texas town,
being drafted into the major leagues after high school, marrying
ERJC
40
18
Biography
his childhood sweetheart, and ultimately becoming the greatest
pitcher in basebrU history. Interspersed throughout the narra-
tive are the vokes of family, scouts, coaches, teammates, and
competitors who have known Ryan over the years. The highly
readable, interesting prose is complemented by black-and-white
photographs of Ryan at different stages of his life.
1.57 Rylant, Cynthia. But I'll Be Back Again: An Album, Orchard
Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08406-X. 80p.
10-12.
When Cynthia Rylant was a little girl in West Virginia, her father
left her mother, and then her mother left her to go to nursing
school. So Rylant lived with her grandparents and sought solace
in music and her friends. Supplemented with quotes from
Beatles songs and black-and-white photographs that create the
appearance of a personal album, this honest, introspective auto-
biography documents Rylant's childhood and adolescence and
includes her memories of thoughts and boyfriends, with which
early adolescents can identify.
1.58 St. George, Judith. Dear Dr. Bell . . . Your friend, Helen Keller.
G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-2237-1. 96p. 10-12 (est.).
The lives of two inspirational contemporaries, Alexander Gra-
ham Bell and Helen Keller, crossed repeatedly It was Bell who
recommended to Keller's father that a tutor be secured for the
girl, and so Annie Sullivan came into Keller's life. From the age
of seven and for almost thirty-five years, Helen Keller corre-
sponded with Dr. Bell Judith St. George explains the inventor's
early work for the deaf, but she primarily chronicles Keller's life
and Keller and Bell's correspondence and meetings. Numerous
black-and-white photographs accompany the text.
1.59 Senna, Carl. Colin Powell: A Man of War and Peace. Walker,
1992. ISBN 0-8027-8181-0. 176p. 8-12.
Of eleven chapters, Carl Senna devotes nine to Colin Powell's
military career, tracing Powell's early service in Vietnam, where
the young officer served two tours and was wounded, to his
recent service as the first African American chair of the Joint
Chiefs of Staff. Although Powell is presented as beloved son,
able student, and caring husband and father, the author concen-
trates on the general's exceptional abilities as military tactician
and diplomat. Clustered black-and-white photographs show
Powell in various roles.
er|c
41
Biography
19
1.60 Simon, Sheridan. Stephen Hawking: Unlocking the Universe.
Dillon Press, 1991. ISBN 0-87518-455-3. 115p. 10-12 (est.).
The personal and professional life of Stephen W. Hawking, who
is sometimes called the greatest scientific thinker of the twenti-
eth century, is described in this People in Focus book, from his
early childhood and schooling to his scientific work. Hawking's
contributions to cosmology — the study of the origin, evolution,
and fate of the universe — are made comprehensible without loss
of his moving personal story, for Hawking is a victim of ALS, or
motor neuron disease, and is unable to walk or talk.
1.61 Stanley, Diane, and Peter Vennema. Bard of Avon: The Story of
William Shakespeare. Illustrated by Diane Stanley. Morrow
Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09109-1. 48p. 7 and up.
The team of Diane Stanley and Peter Vennema has produced the
backdrop for William Shakespeare's time and brought cohesion
to the skimpy bits of information, documentation, and transac-
tions still in existence. The narrative is storylike, with the
authors cautious about filling in details for which there is no
evidence. Full-page paintings offer brilliantly colored portrayals
of sixteenth-century England, executed in blended gouache wa-
tercolors that yield, according to Stanley, "a somewhat naive,
folk-art style."
1.62 Stanley, Fay. The Last Princess: The Story of Princess Ka'iulani
of Hawai'i. Illustrated by Diane Stanley. Four Winds Press, 1991.
ISBN 0-02-786785-4. 40p. 6-12 (est.).
Radiant gouache paintings illustrate the story of Princess Ka'iu-
lani, born into the Hawaiian royal family but destined never to
reign. While the princess attended school in England, American
traders wrested political power from her aunt, the queen. De-
spite her courageous protests, and appeals to President Cleve-
land, Princess Ka'iulani won only the hearts of her people, not
the return of her kingdom. She died at age twenty-three, many
say of despair. An explanation of the Hawaiian language and a
bibliography are included.
1.63 Stevens, Bryna. Handel and the Famous Sword Swallower of
Halle. Illustrated by Ruth Tietjen Councell. Philomel Books,
1990. ISBN 0-399-21548-4. 32p. 4-8.
George Handel, Senior, the rich barber-surgeon of Halle, hated
music. In fact, if it had not been for Aunt Anna, young George
Frederick Handel might not have learned to play the clavichord
42
20
Biography
at all, for some say that she kept a clavichord hidden in the attic.
When a boy swallowed a knife, it was George the Elder's surgi-
cal talents that got him summoned to court, where the duke
recognized George Frederick's musical gifts and pressured the
father to let the boy study music. The dusty-toned pencil draw-
ings are as spirited as the tellings; the author's notes offer
sources for the anecdotal history.
1.64 Stevenson, James. Don't You Know There's a War On? Illus-
trated by James Stevenson. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
688-11384-2. 32p. 5 and up.
In 1942 the war was on, and the ten-year-old child narrator
recalls daily efforts made on the home front while his father was
away: ration books, blackouts, Spam, victory gardens, war
stamps, stalking a suspected spy, collecting tinfoil, and waiting.
The blend of child perspective and humor opens an important
topic for discussion. Imaginative and minimal watercolor im-
ages capture the rarifed spirit of memory.
1.65 Teeters, Peggy. Jules Verne: The Man Who Invented Tomorrow.
Walker, 1992. ISBN 0-8027-8191-8. 128p. 10 and up.
Author Peggy Teeters clearly presents the scope of Jules Verne's
career, which was highly diverse before he fathered what is now
known as science fiction. Of the nearly one hundred books that
Verne wrote, sixty-five featured extraordinary voyages on, into,
around, above, and below the earth. Teeters rightfully pays trib-
ute to her subject's remarkable prescience: technological and
scientific wonders that he foretold over a century ago have be-
come or are emerging as today's commonplaces. Black-and-
white photographs and sketches complement the text.
1.66 Thaxter, Celia (adapted by Loretta Krupinski). Celia's Island
Journal. Illustrated by Loretta Krupinski. Little, Brown, 1992.
ISBN 0-316-83921-3. 32p. 6-8 (est).
When nineteenth-century poet Celia Thaxter was a child, she
lived on an island off the coast of New Hampshire, where her
father was the lighthouse keeper. There, with her young brother,
she explored the rocky surfaces, watched the tidal pools, rel-
ished the seasons, and became an astute observer of nature.
Thaxter kept her childhood impressions in a journal, describing
her days so keenly that other children can share them today. The
journal excerpts are bordered by island birds and plants; facing
pages interpret the isolation and beauty in the family's life.
43
with Jim Haskins « .
A.
C.
A. Rosa Parks: MyStoryby Rosa Parks with Jim Haskins (see 1 .49). B. Michelangelo's
World by Piero Ventura (see 1 .69). C. Prairie Visions: The Life and Times of Solomon
Butcher by Pam Conrad; jacket design by David Saylor (see 1.21).
44 BEST COPY AVAILABLE
>VA N ! \V flA VVl
I
m RYAN W H 1 1 E
xsh ANN MARIE CUNNINGHAM
B.
A. Handel and the Famous Sword Swallower of Halle by Bryna Stevens; illustrated by
Ruth Tietjen Councell (see 1 .63). B. Ryan White: My Own Story by Ryan White and
Ann Marie Cunningham (see 1 .71). C. Teammates by Peter Golenbock; illustrated by
Paul Bacon (see 1.33).
ER?C
45
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Biography
21
1.67 Turner, Robyn Montana. Georgia O'Keeffe. Mary Cassatt. Rosa
Bonheur. Little, Brown, 1991-92. 32p. 6-10.
Women who became accomplished artists against the obstacles
of little encouragement or praise for their efforts are the subjects
of these picture-book biographies in the Portraits of Women
Artists for Children series. Portraits of the artists and important
landmarks in their lives are included, but most important are the
radiant, full-color, captioned reproductions of their artwork that
spill across the pages, subordinating the significance of gender
to the supremacy of their art. Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books
in the Field of Social Studies.
1.68 Ventura, Piero. Great Composers, Illustrated by Piero Ventura.
G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21746-0. 124p. All ages.
From prehistoric cultures to the Beatles, Great Composers pre-
sents information on the role of music over the centuries. The
book's profiles of selected composers present the history behind
some of the world's most celebrated pieces of music. Piero Ven-
tura's artwork includes lifelike portraits of composers and col-
orful sketches of their stages, theaters, and communities. Black-
line sketches of various instruments and brief biographies of
each composer can be used to supplement the text.
1.69 Ventura, Piero. Michelangelo's World. Illustrated by Piero Ven-
tura. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21593-X. 44p. 8 and
up (est).
Piero Ventura tells Michelangelo's story in first person, vividly
recounting his experiences, his times, and both his triumphs and
setbacks as painter and sculptor. Ventura's detailed and attrac-
tive color illustrations create the daily realities of a distant time.
A time-line of the artist's life and a photographic glossary of his
greatest works round out the text.
1.70 Weil, Lisl. Wolferl: The First Six Years in the Life of Wolfgang
Amadeus Mozart, 1756-1762. Illustrated by Lisl Weil. Holiday
House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0876-0. 30p. 6-9.
The early childhood of Mozart is recounted, from his birth to his
first command performance for the Empress Maria Theresa of
Austria at age six. Lisl Weil's cartoon-like illustrations in ink,
crayon, and watercolor provide a charming view of life in eight-
eenth-century Vienna. A glossary helps explain the more diffi-
cult terms and place-names.
ERIC
48
22
Biography
1.71 White, Ryan, and Ann Marie Cunningham. Ryan White: My
Own Story. Dial Books, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0977-3. 277p. 10 and
up (est.).
Ryan White contracted AIDS at age thirteen from tainted blood
used to treat his hemophilia. Before his death at age eighteen, he
triumphed over the abuse of his community and became a cul-
tural hero who championed all victims of discrimination. L^-
spite lifelong illness, White was a normal kid from a working-
class home. He and coauthor Ann Marie Cunningham write
engagingly in unvarnished terms about the social and physical
ravages of his disease. This very literate account will be an
important book long after White's media celebrity has faded.
1.72 Wormser, Richard. Pinkerton: America's First Private Eye.
Walker, 1990. ISBN 0-8027-6965-9. 120p. 10 and up (est.).
From humble roots in the nineteenth-century slums of Glasgow,
Scotland, Allan Pinkerton struggled against slavery, made bar-
rels, did police work, and eventually founded a detective agency
that developed an international reputation for solving difficult
crimes. Today that agency is a modern corporation with 50,000
employees devoted to preventing, rather than solving, crimes.
Interested readers will appreciate the original photographs and
drawings, the index, and the list of related books. Notable 1990
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
1.73 Zheng Zhensun and Alice Low. A Young Painter: The Life and
Paintings of Wang Yani — China's Extraordinary Young Artist.
Photographs by Zheng Zhensun. Scholastic Hardcover
Books/Byron Preiss-New China Pictures Books, 1991. ISBN 0-
590-44906-0. 80p. All ages.
Wang Yani, a precocious Chinese painter, began producing
charming, energetic works at age three and soon won interna-
tional attention. Readers will be fascinated by this lavishly illus-
trated account of her early life. Although the word genius doesn't
appear in the text, it is evident in Wang Yani's free-flowing and
sophisticated depictions of monkeys, cranes, cats, trees, and
flowers. The text recounts her childhood, her relationship with
her father, her artistic growth, and her personal development.
Color photographs showcase the artist at work and reproduce
her paintings. An index, map, and glossary of Chinese terms
round out this introduction to a still-young artist.
47
Books for Young Children
The content of a children's book is basically unimportant. The sole
purpose oftJmt book is to convince the child that reading is great fun.
The book must be so exciting and funny and wonderful that the child
falls in love with it. Then the battle is won and the realization that
books are easy and lovely and enthralling begins to dawn on the
young reader. There need be no message in the book, no moral, just
sheer entertainment.
Roald Dahl, CBC Features
48
2 Books for
Young Children
Alphabet Books
2.1 Agard, John. The Calypso Alphabet Illustrated by Jennifer
Bent. Henry Holt, 1989. ISBN 0-8050-1177-3. 30p. 5-^8.
Through a combination of scratchboard and bright watercolor
inks, Jennifer Bent adds to the lively Caribbean flavor of this
rhythmic alphabet book. In calypso beat and rhyming text, al-
phabet letters are matched with the island lexicon — "h for
hurry-hurry. Hurry-hurry make bad curry." Children past al-
phabet learning will experience cultural snapshots through the
pages. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
2.2 Argent, Kerry. Animal Capers. Illustrated by Kerry Argent. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-8037-0752-5. 40p. 3-7.
With a bright-eyed bird as "mascot," animals from anteaters to
kookaburras to wombats and zebras follow one another across
the pages of this alphabet book. Only on the final page does the
reader discover where this cheery parade of animals is headed.
Lively and humorous animals are rendered in chalk and colored
pencil, spread engagingly across white backgrounds and in-
volved in playful "capers" along the route.
2.3 Aylesworth, Jim. The Folks in the Valley: A Pennsylvania
Dutch ABC. Illustrated by Stefano Vitale. HarperCollins, 1992.
ISBN 0-06-021929-7. 32p. 3 and up.
"Alarm clocks ring / It's almost dawn / The folks in the valley
/ Stretch and yawn." From morning alarm-clock yawns to eve-
ning yawns over candlesticks, the Pennsylvania Diutch go about
their busy days — harvesting wheat, splitting oaks, plowing
fields, and milking cows — all described through an alphabet
rhyming book. Stefano Vitale's primitive-style folk-art paint-
ings, executed on textured wood and framed with stencils of
Pennsylvania Dutch motifs, reflect the serenity and order of the
lives of these "folks in the valley."
ERIC
49
A. Alison's Zinnia by Anita Lobe! (see 2.16). B. The Folks in the Valley: A
Pennsylvania Dutch ABC by Jim Aylesworth; illustrated by Stefano Vitale (see 2.3).
C. Aardvarks, Disembark! by Ann Jonas (see 2.13).
5i) BEST COPY AVAILABLE
ERIC
III
Chickd
A. Chicka Chicka Boom Boom by Bill Martin, Jr. and John Archambault; illustrated by
Lois Ehlert (see 2.19). B. Antler, Bear, Canoe: A Northwoods Alphabet Yearby Betsy
Bowen (see 2.6). C. Eating the Alphabet: Fruits £ Vegetables from A to Z by Lois
Ehlert (see 2.10).
ERLC
3EST COPY AVAILABLE
Alphabet Books
25
2.4 Aylesworth, Jim. Old Black Fly, Illustrated by Stephen Gam-
mell Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1401-2. 32p. 2-£.
In this exuberant, rapping rhyme, Old Black Fly goes buzzing
around having a very busy bad day. With bulging scarlet eyes
and trailing multicolored paint splatters, Old Black Fly annoys
his way through the alphabet and the house: "He ate on the crust
/ of the Apple pie. / He bothered the Baby and made her cry.
Shoo fly! / Shoo fly! / Shoo." Stephen Gammell's paintings
create the most buoyant havoc imaginable — messy patches and
splotches of brilliant color — until swat!
2-5 Blake, Quentin. Quentin Blake's ABC, Illustrated by Quentin
Blake. Alfred A. Knopf /Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-94149-7.
32p. 4-6.
Quentin Blake's energetic and humorous cartoon-like drawings
feature individual alphabet letters in large print along with a
rhyming line. Letters C and D work like this: "C is for Cockatoos
/ learning to scream; D is for Ducks / upside down in a stream."
Screaming cockatoos deafen an old man and his grandchildren,
but spark the interest of an old woman with an earhorn. Ducks
take an underwater inspection of an upside-down diver. The
whole effect is wacky fun.
2.6 Bowen, Betsy. Antler, Bear, Canoe: A Northwoods Alphabet
Yean Illustrated by Betsy Bowen. Little, Brown/ Joy Street Books,
1991. ISBN 0-316-10376-4. 28p. 4-8.
This alphabet/ seasons /information book, inspired by the north-
woods of Minnesota, features a moose Antler, a black Bear, and
a snow-covered Canoe for January. February brings a Dogsled,
Evenings spent reading or waxing skis by a wood stove, and ice
Fishing. The illustrations were produced by carving the designs
and letters backward into wood blocks, rolling black ink onto
the white pine blocks, making prints of the designs and letters,
and then applying paint to each print. The effect is one of visual
strength and mood perfection, from loons on the lake to quiet on
the pond.
2.7 Brown, Ruth. Alphabet Times Four: An International ABC,
Illustrated by Ruth Brown. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN
0-525-44831-4. 32p. 4 and up.
This unusual alphabet book showcases the richly detailed and
textured paintings of Ruth Brown against word labels for the
subjects of the paintings printed in English, Spanish, French, and
52
26
Books for Young Children
German. Younger children may have difficulty identifying the
focal object in some paintings, so an older reader might help
them relish the pictures and might point out some of the subtle
details of the illustrations and the arched frames in which they
are displayed.
2.8 Cox, Lynn. Crazy Alphabet Illustrated by Rodney McRae. Or-
chard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08566-X. 32p. 3-6.
"A is for Apple. Everyone knows that/' Less obvious, though, is
"B is for Bird that ate the apple/' and "C is for Cat that caught
the bird that ate the apple/' In cumulative story line, the alpha-
bet sentences build on this repetitive pattern until, at last, a huge
tongue-wagging "Yowie" eats everything and bursts, leaving
only "Z for Zero." Each colorful page offers a crazy-quilt collage
of shapes and patterns that cohere in the letter/sound illustra-
tions.
2.9 Edwards, Michelle. Alef-Bet: A Hebrew Alphabet Book. Illus-
trated by Michelle Edwards. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books,
1992. ISBN 0-688-09725-1. 32p. 4 and up.
In a comfortably chaotic Israeli household, the alef-bet, or the
Hebrew alphabet, is presented along with a selection of house-
hold words, translations, and pronunciations. Illustrations are
so brimming with life that one could forget the book's mission
and simply want to join the family The older son rides in a
wheelchair without fanfare, while the younger is a welcome
baby. Gabi, the daughter, dresses in one costume after another as
the pages turn.
2.10 Ehlert, Lois. Eating the Alphabet: Fruits and Vegetables from
A to Z. Illustrated by Lois Ehlert. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,
1989. ISBN 0-15-224435-2. 28p. 3-8.
From apples to zucchini, bright watercolor collages of fruits and
vegetables spread across the pages of this alphabet book. In a
style that is unique to Lois Ehlert, familiar and less familiar
edibles are colorfully displayed, clearly labeled, and served up
for inspection. Interesting histories of each of the fruits and
vegetables appear in the book's glossary. As a follow-up, chil-
dren might make collages of their favorite fruits and vegetables
or put together their own "edible" alphabet book.
2.11 Elliott, David. An Alphabet of Rotten Kids! Illustrated by Oscar
de Mejo. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22260-X. 25p. 4-8.
ERIC
53
Alphabet Books
27
Ernestine, who painted her poodle green, is just one of the rotten
kids in this distinctive alphabet book. Each child, from Agatha
to Zazu, is involved in mischief: Georgina cuts holes in her
underwear because "no one ever saw her there/7 Ursula teaches
kids to curse, and Vincent drinks finger paint. Primitive, elemen-
tal illustrations, markedly direct, are reminiscent of early cau-
tionary tales and add to the harmless fun.
2.12 Hepworth, CathL Antics: An Alphabetical Anthology. Illus-
trated by Cathi Hepworth. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN
0-399-21862-9. 32p. All ages.
Here's an ench/mfing alphabet book, with each letter repre-
sented by a single word that contains an "ant." For A, there's
antique, a very old woman ant knitting in her rocker. For B,
there's Brilli/wf, a mad scientist ant wearing a laboratory coat,
his legs at work with beakers and test tube. For D, it's a Deviant,
a punk antenna head with jam box, green mohawk, and shades.
The ant portraits are adult funny at times (Kant? Nonchaknf?),
but may inspire some classroom fantasy writing.
2.13 Jonas, Ann. Aardvarks, Disembark! Illustrated by Ann Jonas.
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-07207-0. 40p. 4-7.
After forty days and forty nights of rain, Noah invites the animal
refugees to disembark — in alphabetical order! Surprisingly,
when Noah gets to letter Z and "zebras," the ark is still full of
animals — Noah hadn't called the zebus nor the youyous, the
xerus nor the wapiti. Readers must rotate the book to follow the
trail of exotic animals, many of which are either extinct or en-
dangered, making their way down the mountain. A glossary is
provided describing the animals' characteristics and habitats.
ALA Notable Children's Books, 2992.
2.14 Lear, Edward. A Was Once an Apple Pie. Illustrated by Julie
Lacome. Candlewick Press, 1992. ISBN 1-56402-000-2. 32p. 4-6.
Julie Lacome has given Edward Lear's nineteenth-century non-
sense alphabet rhyme bright new images. Admitting the influ-
ence of her studies of American folk and craft design, the Scot-
tish artist has used torn-paper and cut-paper shapes with
painted details that sometimes float about the pages and that are
sometimes tucked into frames bordered by folk-art motifs. For
example, in the verse for N, "N was once a little needle," hexa-
gons of calico are stitched together amid stylized spools and a
pincushion.
54
28
Books for Young Children
2.15 Linscott, Jody. Once Upon A to Z: An Alphabet Odyssey. Illus-
trated by Claudia Porges Holland. Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-385-
41907-4. 64p. 4-8.
"Andy always ate an astounding amount. Artichokes, apples,
avocados and apricots. . . ." So begins the saga of Andy of the
amazing appetite and his friend Daisy, who daily dispatched the
"dozens of delicious delicacies" that Andy required. Each letter
page signals a new alliterative pattern, and each is illustrated
with brightly colored layers of cut paper, inspired, according to
the artist, by the colors of the Caribbean Islands. Children and
teachers may want to try their own alliterative stories.
2.16 Lobel, Anita. Alison's Zinnia* Illustrated by Anita Lobel. Green-
willow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08866-X. 32p. 3 and up.
This elegant alphabet book is a garden of literacy. Each letter is
represented by an expansive, full-color painting of a flower be-
ginning with that initial — amaryllis to begonia to chrysanthe-
mum to daffodil, and so on. Each page also includes a sentence
linking a girl's name, a verb, and a flower's name in alphabetical
rhythms: "Alison acquired an Amaryllis for Beryl," "Beryl
bought a Begonia for Crystal," and so on through the alphabet.
The pleasure of flowers, the chain of generosity as one child
gives to the next, and the clever sentences all make this a warm
and delightful work.
2.17 Lyon, George Ella. A B Cedar: An Alphabet of Trees. Illustrated
by Tom Parker. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08395-0. 32p.
3-7.
A row of shadowed alphabet letters bands the top border of each
double-page spread of this alphabet book. From a narrow black
foreground strip, the shapes of trees from aspen to zebrawood
rise in silhouette against crisp white pages, given scale by ant-
sized people. Dramatically, dark and light adult hands hold
actual-size leaves of each tree for close inspection. In a flurry of
autumn leaves at the book's end, readers are reminded of what
trees provide — including this alphabet book!
2.18 Magee, Doug, and Robert Newman. Let's Fly from A to Z.
Photographs by Doug Magee and Robert Newman. Cobblehill
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-525-65105-5. 32p. 8 and up.
Beginning with A for airplanes that fly in the sky, and for air-
ports where airplanes land and take off, a panoply of color
ERJC 55
Alphabet Books
29
photographs offers a range of perspectives on aircraft, equip-
ment, and services. Organized by letters of the alphabet, some
pages seem ideally suited: F, for example, is for fuselage and
flaps, while L is for landing and landing lights. As with many
topical alphabet books, some letters must stretch: O is for the
opening on a jet engine.
2.19 Martin, Bill, Jr., and John Archambault. Chicka Chicka Boom
Boom. Illustrated by Lois Ehlert Simon and Schuster Books for
Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-617-67949-X. 32p. 2-6.
"A told B and B told C, I'll meet you at the top of the coconut
tree/7 In rhythmic, chant-like text that is sure to encourage chil-
dren's instant participation, letters of the alphabet race to the top
of the coconut tree. "Will there be enough room?" No! With a
"Chicka chicka BOOM BOOM!" Lois Ehlert's bright and tropi-
cal-colored letters topple the tree and must untangle and wiggle-
jiggle free. ALA Notable Children's BGoks, 1989; Boston Globe-Horn
Book Picture Honor Bock, 1990; New Books of Merit, Winter 1990—
The Five Owls.
2.20 Merriam, Eve. Goodnight to Annie: An Alphabet Lullaby. Il-
lustrated by Carol Schwartz. Hyperion Books for Children, 1992.
ISBN 1-56282-206-3. 32p. 3-7.
After enjoying twenty-six bordered illustrations in gouache, col-
ored pencil, and ink, each with a dominating uppercase letter,
the young reader sees that Annie has joined in sleep such objects
as Nightingales "nodding in their nest," Queens "doffing their
crowns and drowsing under downy quilts," and Rainbows "fad-
ing from their rush of bright colors to rose and russet and deep
indigo."
2.21 Merriam, Eve. Where Is Everybody? An Animal Alphabet. Il-
lustrated by Diane de Groat. Simon and Schuster Books for
Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-671-64964-7. 40p. 3-6.
Where is everybody? "Alligator is in the attic," "Bear is in the
bakery," . . . and "Zebra is at the zoo." This alliterative phrase
alphabet book offers hidden surprises on every page as Mole the
photographer tracks down animal pals from A to Z. Bustling
watercolor illustrations contain lots of additional items begin-
ning with the featured letters: "Sheep is in the stroller," but he's
riding past a store window displaying a Santa, a sale sign,
skates, and a shovel.
5B
30
Books for Young Children
2.22 Owens, Mary Beth. A Caribou Alphabet* Illustrated by Mary
Beth Owens. Farrar, Straus and Giroux/Sunburst Books, 1990,
ISBN 0-374-41043-7. 32p. 3-6.
This unique rhyming alphabet book focuses on caribou and their
habits from A to Z. Detailed and delicately rendered caribou
weave in and out of large-scaled alphabet letters, while a single
line of a couplet describes the action in each scene. For example,
wrapped with the letter C, and with a lowercase c forming a
crescent moon, a caribou cow watches over the calf: "Caribou
cows protect calves as they grow. . . ." A compendium of inter-
esting caribou facts is provided at the book's end.
2-23 Phillips, Tamara. Day Care ABC Illustrated by Dora Leder Al-
bert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-1483-7. 32p. 2-7.
Each letter of the alphabet is used in an alliterative sentence that
describes children's morning preparations for day care or pre-
school and the school activities that follow ("Sam shares a
swing"). Large capital and lowercase letters mark each page,
and classroom scenes are filled with objects that begin with the
focus letter or sound. An index of the pictured objects is in-
cluded at the book's end. The usefulness of the book reaches
beyond a preschool/day-care audience.
2.24 Rubin, Cynthia Elyce, selected by. ABC Americana from the
National Gallery of Art. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-15-200660-5. 32p. All ages.
The National Gallery of Art's Index of American Design lists
17,000 watercolor paintings which were commissioned during
the Great Depression. Together they create a visual record of
"representative objects of American design and folk art." For
each letter of the alphabet, one object is featured against a white
background, bound by a color border and captioned, such as "W
is for Weather vane." A final page identifies the original object
and its artist.
2.25 Shelby, Anne. Potluck. Illustrated by Irene Trivas. Orchard
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08519-8. 32p. 3-6.
Alpha and Betty invite all their friends, from Acton to Zelda, to
a potluck, and brimming dishes from around the world are
brought — alphabetically — to the table: "Edmund entered with
enchiladas " From asparagus soup and bagels to yogurt and
zucchini casserole, the colorful pages show a scrumptious feast.
ERIC
57
Alphabet Books
31
Beyond the exuberance of the party, the book is a splendid
example of the cultural variety that feeds the American palate.
2.26 Simpson, Gretchen Dow. Gretchen's abc. Illustrated by
Gretchen Dow Simpson. HarperCollins/Laura Geringer Books,
1991. ISBN 0-06-025646-X. 27p. 3-6.
In this vibrant alphabet book, each letter is represented by a
bright, bold, closeup depiction of a familiar object. Letter F, for
example, is a striking red, white, and blue furl of cloth; children
will delight in identifying it as "flag." Answers are provided at
the end of the book. Illustrations for several of the letters were
taken from covers of The New Yorker painted by illustrator
Gretchen Dow Simpson.
2.27 Snow, Alan. The Monster Book of A B C Sounds. Illustrated by
Alan Snow. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-
0935. 28p. 2-10.
In this unconventional alphabet book, a parade of comical mon-
sters plays hide-and-seek with a bunch of grinning, goofy rats.
For each letter, a sound word beginning with that letter balloons
across the oversize pages. For example, for the letter U, a pudgy
blue monster wails "Uuugh!" when he finds the rats in his
cabinet. And so it goes throughout Alan Snow's lively rendition
of letter and sound correspondences. Borders are filled with
letters and such not-so-often-seen objects and animals as emus,
harmonicas, javelins, and kimonos in this visual treat.
2.28 Stock, Catherine. Alexander's Midnight Snack: A Little Ele-
phant's ABC. Illustrated by Catherine Stock. Clarion Books,
1988. ISBN 0-89919-512-1. 31p. 3-6.
When Alexander gets thirsty in the middle of the night, he heads
downstairs to the kitchen. But the little elephant's midnight
snack turns into an alphabetically arranged feast that begins
with apple pie, buns, and cinnamon cookies. In the end, Alexan-
der returns to bed to catch some "Z's," and Alexander's mother
wakes to find an awful big mess in the kitchen. Alliterative
captions beneath amusing bordered watercolors feature the let-
ter-of-the-page in bright red.
2.29 Wilner, Isabel. A Garden Alphabet. Illustrated by Ashley Wolff.
Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44731-8. 28p. 4-6.
From planning to harvesting, two gardeners — one an ambitious
black-and-white border collie and the other her able assistant, a
58
32
Books for Young Children
frog with a cowboy hat — make a step-by-step production of
tending and protecting their backyard plot. Bright, bursting-
with-color illustrations interpret each letter's rhyming verse.
Color Books
230 Ehlert, Lois. Color Zoo* Illustrated by Lois Ehlert. J. B. Lippin-
cott, 1989. ISBN 0-397-32260-7. 32p. 3-5.
Lois Ehlert's characteristic vivid colors (as in Growing Vegetable
Soup) surround cutout shapes, turning those shapes into ani-
mals. As each page is turned, a new shape is embellished into a
different animal. Some of the images are fascinating, although a
few are far-fetched. Color and shape concepts are clear, as are
written labels identifying animals and shapes. Three glossaries
at the end review ten shapes, sixteen colors, and nine animals.
Caldecott Honor Book, 1990.
2.31 Fleming, Denise. Lunch* Illustrated by Denise Fleming. Henry
Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1636-8. 32p. 2-6.
Never has lunch been so appreciated, sought out, gobbled,
spilled, slurped, or chomped. Created out of handmade paper, a
cunningly hungry mouse sniffs lunch. Like Eric Carle's The Very
Hungry Caterpillar, he eats through larger-than-life-size vegeta-
bles and fruits, spewing the colors of their juices all about and
splashing himself with the colors of lunch. Minimal text and
exuberant appetite combine to make a manageable book for
beginning readers and an invitation to write about still other
hungry creatures.
2.32 Goennel, Heidi. Colors. Illustrated by Heidi Goennel. Little,
Brown, 1990. ISBN 0-316-31843-4. 32p. 3-6.
In a brightly colored concept book for young children, round-
faced, featureless children compare the colors of objects in their
world with objects found in nature: "The bright sun is the color
of my beach bucket/7 "Cotton candy is the color of summer
roses/7 Heidi Goennel7s simple forms yield pleasing page de-
signs.
2.33 Kunhardt, Edith. Red Day, Green Day. Illustrated by Marylin
Hafner. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09400-7. 32p. 3
and up.
Kindergarten springs to life in full color as children celebrate the
color days. Andrew wears his favorite pants on Red Day, brings
59
Concept Books
33
orange gelatin for Orange Day, daffodils for Yellow Day, a toy
tractor for Green Day, blueberries for Blue Day, and purple socks
for Purple Day When the color days are over, a rainy day
stretches a huge rainbow across the sky, making "all the color
days at once/' Bright rainbow colors border the cheery school-
day illustrations.
2.34 Rikys, Bodel. Red Bear. Illustrated by Bodel Rikys. Dial Books
for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1048-8. 24p. 1-5.
This color-concept book offers single color words juxtaposed
against simple line drawings of a bear getting dressed and then
visiting a circus. Each color word is printed in enlarged type on
a matching color page. Red Bear pulls on blue pants, and the text
reads simply "Blue." A yellow shirt, brown shoes, purple socks,
and black cat all help to introduce crayon-box colors.
2.35 Williams, Sue. I Went Walking. Illustrated by Julie Vivas. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1990. ISBN 0-15-200471-
8. 32p. 3-7.
"I went walking. / What did you see? / I saw a black cat /
Looking at me." An assortment of animals follow a young boy
on his walk. Rhythmic, instantly readable text and large, whim-
sical paintings bring this simple story to life in a style very
similar to Brown Bear, Brown Bear, What Do You See? by Bill
Martin, Jr. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1991.
Concept Books
2.36 Anholt, Catherine, and Laurence Anholt. All about You. Illus-
trated by Catherine and Laurence Anholt. Viking Penguin, 1992.
ISBN 0-670-84488-8. 32p. 3-6.
In a book perfect for laptime, the story rug, or an "All about Me"
unit, young children are invited to talk about themselves, their
feelings, their preferences, and their uniqueness. Each spread
poses a question and follows it with small pictures to stimulate
discussion: "When you wake up in the morning, how do you
feel?" "Feeling" words appear beneath huggable children —
happy, tired, sad, noisy, quiet, and glad. There are questions about
clothes, toys, family, homes, friends, animals, and more.
2.37 Anholt, Catherine, and Laurence Anholt. Kids. Illustrated by
Catherine and Laurence Anholt. Candlewick Press, 1992. ISBN
1-56402-097-5. 32p. 4-6.
60
34
Books for Young Children
In a book where kids seem to speak for themselves, the Anholts
give them license to strut. Across double-page spreads, a bold
"kid question" marches: "What's in a kid's pocket?" "What do
kids look like?" or "What are nasty kids like?" The answers are
jolly, rhyming, and perfectly matched to their illustrations. An-
holt-drawn kids are scary and hairy, tall and small, grumpy and
dumpy, and thoroughly charming.
238 Anholt, Catherine, and Laurence Anholt. What I Like. Illus-
trated by Catherine and Laurence Anholt. G. P. Putnam's Sons,
1991. ISBN 0-399-21863-7. 32p. 3-£.
Six active children do what children are especially good at —
saying what they like and don't like. On facing pages, the bold,
patterned text sets the stage: "What I like is . . ." or "What I don't
like is . . . ," while small pictures aligned on the facing pages
finish the sentences with rhyming phrases, such as "time to
play" and "a holiday." A pair of twins also offers their likes and
dislikes about being twins. What all six children like is being
friends. The book prompts patterned writing with young chil-
dren.
2.39 Anno, Mitsumasa. Anno's Masks. Illustrated by Mitsumasa
Anno. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21860-2. 22p. 3-6.
Each page of Anno's simple picture book offers a colored animal
mask, including a dog, koala bear, lion, and cheetah. Small eye-
holes are punched so young children can peek through the
whole book or "wear" a special face. The only text is the label
for the animal.
2.40 Bang, Molly Yellow Ball. Illustrated by Molly Bang. Morrow
Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-06315-2. 24p. 2 and up.
Cut-out figures with warm-brown skin tones toss a big yellow
ball. The text reads "Catch," "Throw," and then "Uh-oh," as the
yellow ball floats out to the big, wide-rolling sea. Its path is
under a high bridge, above a fish, and below a winging gull
"Wind blowing / Storm growing." After a swirling storm, the
yellow ball forms a perfect reflection of the full moon. And with
the dawn, the yellow ball washes ashore and is found. Minimal
rhyming text and expressive paintings combine in the simplest
of story lines.
2.41 Bios, Joan W. A Seed, a Flower, a Minute, an Hour. Illustrated
by Hans Poppel. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers,
1992. ISBN 0-671-73214-5. 24p. 2-5.
61
Concept Books
35
Newbery Medal-winner Joan Bios observes changes: a seed
changing into a flower, a minute changing into an hour. "A
cloud, a storm. A bee, a swarm" — changes affect many things.
The growth concept as well as the rhyming text should provide
young children with ample discussion opportunities. Hans Pop-
pel's pastel-colored watercolor washes create a dream-like at-
mosphere for this sparsely worded poem.
2.42 Borden, Louise. Caps, Hats, Socks, and Mittens: A Book about
the Four Seasons. Illustrated by Lillian Hoban. Scholastic Hard-
cover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41257-4. 32p. 2-6.
"Winter is caps, hats, socks, and mittens." It's also sleds, hot
mugs, and snug beds. Spring is "grass, grass, grass," and mud
to dig. Summer is a ball game and a jar full of bugs. Fall is soccer
and frost on the grass. Lillian Hoban's appie-cheeked children
frolic across all four seasons.
2.43 Brown, Craig. My Barn. Illustrated by Craig Brown. Greenwil-
low Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-08786-8. 24p. 3-6.
A farmer with a drooping hat and a large red barn rejoices in the
sounds that his animals make. In highly repetitive text, the
farmer announces each love: "I like the sound GOBBLE GOB-
BLE GOBBLLE GOBBLE GOBBLE... the sound a turkey
makes," and "I like the sound HEE HAWWW HEEE HAWW
HEE HAW ... the sound a donkey makes." Each page substi-
tutes only the animal name and the sound, making this a man-
ageable early text for an emergent reader. Watercolor paintings
are flecked with ink dots, giving a soil-like quality to the impres-
sions.
2.44 Brown, Margaret Wise. Baby Animals. Illustrated by Susan Jef-
fers. Random House, 1989. ISBN 0-394-92040-6. 32p. 3-6.
Margaret Wise Brown's lyrical text, written in 1941, has been
reissued, this time partnered with all new illustrations by Susan
Jeffers. Young children can once again follow a little girl and
baby animals through a day on the farm.
2.45 Brown, Margaret Wise. Big Red Barn. Illustrated by Felicia
Bond. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-020749-3. 30p. 4-6.
A big red barn and the surrounding field are home for families
of animals. Told in rhyme, this story is a simple tale of life on a
farm from sunrise to moonlight. The bold, stylized drawings
created for this newly illustrated edition by Felicia Bond com-
ERIC
62
36
Books for Young Children
2.46
2.47
2.48
2.49
plement the rich and rhythmic text cherished by children since
Brown, Margaret Wise. Red Light, Green Light. Illustrated by
Leonard Weisgard. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
590-44558-8. 40p. 5-8.
First published in 1945, Red Light, Green Light has been re-created
by Leonard Weisgard to "fix some of the things that bothered
him over the years/7 Using casein, watercolor, crayon, and ink,
Weisgard offers illustrations in nearly primitive style. Farm ve-
hicles and animals in grays, tans, and olives contrast with
touches of brilliant red and green — sun, leaves, steeples, and
hydrants. But most important of all, the red and green of the
traffic signal regulate the daytime traffic and work throughout
the night.
Browne, Anthony. Things I Like. Illustrated by Anthony
Browne. Alfred A. Knopf/ Dragonfly Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-
94192-6. 32p. 3-6.
In this companion to Anthony Browne's I Like Books, the same
moppet chimpanzee announces the other things that he really
likes — such as "painting/7 "riding my bike/' "climbing trees/7
and "kicking a ball." The minimal text and background-free
illustrations are edged with thin-line frames, with an element
from each picture giving a special touch to each corner.
Throughout, the chimpanzee's expressions register perfect con-
tentment with his favorite pursuits. Young children may want to
try their own "things I like" book or list.
Butler, Dorothy. My Brown Bear Barney. Illustrated by Elizabeth
Fuller. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08568-7. 24p. 2-5.
A little girl may go many places and take many different things,
but she must always take her most special friend. In Dorothy
Butler's simple story, the special friend is "my brown bear
Barney." The story is told in first person and accompanied by
framed illustrations. Youngsters will be able to "read along"
with the litany of things that you must take to the store, to the
beach, to grandmother's, and to bed. And they will readily pre-
dict that no matter where you go, you simply must take "my
brown bear Barney."
Calhoun, Mary. While I Sleep. Illustrated by Ed Young. Morrow
Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-08201-7. 32p. 1-6.
1956.
ERLC
63
Concept Books
37
Soothing pastels set the perfect tone for this bedtime lullaby
conversation. A child asks where animals sleep; her parents'
answers are accompanied by full-page depictions of each ani-
mal, active in the daylight and asleep in an ink-dyed insert. The
contrast, for example, between the repeated form of the squirrel
that represents leaping and the nighttime squirrel curled in sleep
provides an effective representation of the rhythms of night and
day. The questions end with the child snuggling into her blan-
kets for sleep.
2.50 Carlstrom, Nancy White. How Do You Say It Today, Jesse Bear?
Illustrated by Bruce Degen. Macmillan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-717276-
7. 32p. 2-8.
Jesse Bear, now the hero of four of Nancy White Carlstrom's
creations, is back to answer a special question in every month of
the year. In January, Jesse says it "with whistles and cheers / It's
a happy new year"; in February, Jesse will say it "with squiggles
and lines / On my valentines." All through the year, Jesse and
his family celebrate the months, seasons, and holidays, saying
"it" in special ways. Bordered paintings are calendar-like, with
the rhyming text blocked from the festivities.
2.51 Caseley, Judith. Annie's Potty Illustrated by Judith Caseley.
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09066-4. 32p. 2 and up.
Annie's new potty is a place to be avoided. She prefers diapers
to underpants, even if the underpants have bunnies on them. "I
know you want to be a big girl," Mama tells Annie. "No, I don't.
I'm a baby," Annie replies. But explanations, demonstrations, a
toilet-trained friend, time, and patience help. Even when Annie
is so busy playing that she forgets to use the potty, Mama under-
stands, and together they clean up. Judith Caseley's drawings
rely on simple lines, bold patterns, and white backdrops.
2.52 Cummings, Phil. Goodness Gracious! Illustrated by Craig
Smith. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08567-8. 32p. 3-6.
Take a look at every inch of her — her face, her hair, her peepers,
and her toeses! Along with a group of imaginary creatures, a
little girl has fun describing all the ways in which her body parts
can look and work — in a near festival of adjectives. Bold, ener-
getic drawings give high action to the rhyming text, which may
encourage children to think of new ways to describe other famil-
iar things.
er|c
64
38
Books for Young Children
2.53 Demi. Find Demi's Baby Animals. Illustrated by Demi. Grosset
and Dunlap, 1990. ISBN 0-448-19169-5. 32p. 4-8.
In a hide-and-seek format book, children are invited to find the
animal on the page that matches one in a small circle. Against
backgrounds that are like pages from a wallpaper sample
book— flower sprays, delicate vines, and abstract fronds — large
outline shapes of animals are sprinkled with smaller pictures of
the same animal at play Even very young children will be able
to find within the array the animal that exactly matches the one
in the circle.
2.54 Demi. Find Demi's Dinosaurs: An Animal Game Book. Illus-
trated by Demi. Grosset and Dunlap, 1989. ISBN 0-448-19020-6.
39p. 4-8.
Learning the names of dinosaurs turns into a game with this
brightly patterned artwork requiring foldout pages to contain it.
While attending to the detail of finding such creatures as the
quetzalcoatlus tucked among look-alikes within the gigantic
rhamphorynchus, children can identify the names of their favor-
ite dinosaurs at their fanciful best. Bold colors, finely drawn
details, and a game format combine to provide information and
entertainment for young children.
2.55 Demi. Find Demi's Sea Creatures: An Animal Game Book.
Illustrated by Demi. Putnam and Grosset, 1991. ISBN 0-399-
22122-3. 50p. 4-8.
A brilliantly colored gallery of sea animals features a large draw-
ing of a species — octopus, oarfish, lobster, manatee — and many
smaller versions of the same animal. Children view the animal
in detail and also hunt through various natural poses in foldout
pages to answer questions placed within superimposed insets.
2.56 Dodds, Dayle Ann. The Color Box. Illustrated by Giles Laroche.
Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-18820-4. 28p. 2-6.
In a color and shape concept book, a cut-paper monkey crawls
through a box into an all-black world, totally black except for
one yellow oval. The yellow oval is actually a cut-out shape,
allowing the monkey a peek-a-boo preview of the yellow page
beyond. Only cut-paper textures distinguish the yellow objects
on the next page: yellow daisies, bees, and bananas, with one
orange circle to lead on through a series of shapes to a succession
of monochromatic worlds.
65
A. How Do You Say It Today, Jesse Bear? by Nancy White Caristrom; illustrated by
Bruce Degen (see 2.50). B. Pig in a Barrow by Bert Kitchen (see 2.71). C. Kids
written and illustrated by Catherine and Laurence Anholt (see 2.37).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
B.
WKITTtN BY
Sue Williams
ILLUSTRATtD >V
Julie Vivas
A. Color Farm by Lois Ehlert (see 2.57). B. Lunch by Denise Fleming (see 2.31).
C. / Went Walking by Sue Williams; illustrated by Julia Vivas (see 2.35).
67
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Concept Books
39
2.57 Ehlert, Lois. Color Farm* Illustrated by Lois Ehlert. J. B. Lippin-
cott, 1990. ISBN 0-397-32441-3. 15p. 3-6.
In this clever book, cutout shapes surrounded by bright, fluores-
cent-colored designs are layered upon each other to form com-
mon farm animals. As the pages are turned, the shapes are
peeled away to reveal each new animal on the right page, with
the removed shape clearly labeled and on view on the left. Lois
Ehlert's Color Zoo follows the same unique format. Outstanding
Science Trade Books for Children in 1990.
2.58 Finzel, Julia. Large as Life. Illustrated by Julia Finzel. Lothrop,
Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10653-6. 32p. 3 and up.
Julia Finzel builds the concept of relative size by posing a simple
question in poetic form: "Ladybug, ladybug where are you go-
ing / On the back of a butterfly, hardly showing?" In this nearly
wordless book, however, it is the bold, textured paintings that
will capture young children's attention as they look for the tiny
ladybug on the foot of an elephant, the ear of a tiger, the nose of
an owl, or the feather of a peacock. The paintings have a post-
modern flair, presenting exaggerated parts of animals in a kalei-
doscope of color and design.
2.59 Florian, Douglas. Turtle Day. Illustrated by Douglas Florian.
Thomas Y. Crowell, 1989. ISBN 0-690-04745-2. 32p. 3-6.
Rich, childlike drawings illustrate the necessary daily activities
that fill Turtle's life (and our lives, too): hunger leads to eating,
friends lead to play, and fatigue leads to rest. Each page offers
the reader an opportunity to predict what Turtle may do. Large
and bold print will benefit the youngest readers. Basic informa-
tion can be used to introduce concepts about the biological
needs of turtles and of all animals. Notable Children's Trade Books
in Science, 1989.
2.60 Florian, Douglas. A Year in the Country. Illustrated by Douglas
Florian. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08187-8. 32p. 2-6.
A scene from a farm, spreading edge to edge across the pages,
reflects the seasonal changes that each month brings during a
year in the country — from melting snow patches through buds
and blossoms to golden harvest and winter's snows. The muted
watercolor illustrations are labeled with the name of each month
in large bold type.
er|c
63
40
Books for Young Children
2.61 George, Lonnie. Star, Little Star, Lewison, Wendy. Nighty-
Night Dlustrated by Antonella Abbatiello; Giulia Orecchia.
Grosset and Dunlap, 1991. 24p. 2-6.
Each of these board books in the Poke and Look series has a
cutout shape (a star and crescent moon) on the cover and di-
rectly beneath on each right-hand page throughout the book.
The shape regularly decreases in size, producing a textured tun-
nel through the book. In Star, Little Star, a rhyming text describes
a curious baby fox that wanders out at night to assure himself
that the world is asleep. In Nighty-Night, a pajama-clad reluctant
sleeper cavorts in an imaginary adventure with the moon.
2.62 Goennel, Heidi. My Dog. Illustrated by Heidi Goennel. Orchard
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08434-5. 32p. 3-6.
Each of us has our trait preferences for dogs. The round-faced,
featureless children on each page of Heidi Goennel's book indi-
cate in spare text that they prefer their dogs with such features
as floppy ears like bassets, soft noses like pugs, loud barks like
German shepherds, or tall, tall legs like Great Danes. Bright
primary colors, simple shapes, and flat backgounds lend a "flan-
nel board" feel to Goennel's easily distinguishable style.
2.63 Gomboli, Mario. What Else Could It Be? What Will It Be?
What's Hiding? What's Missing? Illustrated by Mario Gomboli.
Boyds Mills/Bell Books, 1991. 12p. 2-5.
These riddle and puzzle board books are designed to involve the
youngest listeners. What's Missing? has holes for little fingers, so
that children provide the missing parts — legs for a crab, a trunk
for an elephant, or ears for a rabbit. What's Hiding? camouflages
a cutout shape within a design; turning the page reveals the
answer. What Will It Be? and What Else Could It Be? ask children
to imagine what other forms cutout shapes could represent.
Illustrations are whimsical and warm.
2.64 Hartman, Gail. For Strawberry Jam or Fireflies. Illustrated by
Ellen Weiss. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-742990-3. 22p. 1-4.
Mason jars are for strawberry jam or fireflies. And what can you
do with a wooden spoon? You can mix cookies or tap a tune.
This concept book explores alternative uses for eleven items,
such as a big tire, a ball of string, and chewy raisins. Full-page
watercolor and colored-pencil illustrations will elicit children's
suggestions for various uses for everyday objects around them.
69
Concept Books
41
2*65 Hoban, Julia. Amy Loves the Snow* Illustrated by Lillian Ho-
ban. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-022395-2. 20p. 2-5.
Small hands will enjoy turning the pages of this little book about
Amy, in her red mittens and scarf, who goes out with Daddy, in
his blue mittens and scarf, to play in the snow. They have fun
making footprints, catching snowflakes, and building a snow-
man. After Mommy contributes a carrot nose for the snowman,
the three go inside for some hot chocolate. Lillian Hoban cap-
tures winter's essence in full-page illustrations with pastel
shades of snowy blues and violets.
2.66 Hoban, Tana. All about Where. Photographs by Tana Hoban.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09698-0. 28p. 2-7.
Photographer Tana Hoban has a special talent for developing
learning opportunities from everyday situations. Here Hoban
explores how objects relate to each other by providing a list of
fifteen common prepositions from which children can choose
words to describe the action in the brightly colored photo-
graphs: a baby rides on a bicycle, behind her mother, her head
under her mother's shirt, and her thumb in her mouth. Hoban's
photographs supply possibilities for many open-ended learning
experiences.
2.67 Hoban, Tana. Exactly the Opposite. Photographs by Tana Ho-
ban. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08862-7. 32p. 2-5.
From fire and ice to whole and broken eggs to the front and back
ends of sheep, a variety of unconventional subjects illustrates
the concept of opposites in this wordless book. Yet, look again —
you may find that the baskets holding the whole eggs are up-
right, while the baskets with the broken eggs are tipped over.
Readers will discover that there are as many opposites in these
vivid photographs as there are in the world around us. Outstand-
ing Science Trade Books far Children in 1990.
2.68 Hoban, Tana. Spirals, Curves, Fanshapes and Lines. Photo-
graphs by Tana Hoban. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-
11229-3. 32p. 2 and up.
Tana Hoban's glorious photographs reveal the lines, details, and
textures of the world around us — fan-shaped radiants of the
cockatoo's plume, spiral shadows of a wire wastebasket, the curl
of a fossilized nautilus shell, and the graceful turn of a ram's
horn. Inspired by this wordless book of photos to talk about and
ERIC
70
42
Books for Young Children
trace with fingers, readers will see their surroundings in new
ways.
2,69 Jeunesse, Gallimard, and Pascale de Bourgoing. Colors. Fruit
The Ladybug and Other Insects. Weather. Illustrated by Sophie
Kniffke; Sylvaine Perols; P. M Valet. Scholastic/Cartwheel
Books, 1989. 24p. 3-6.
This colorful, informative series of First Discovery Books uses
simple text, big illustrations, and transparencies to teach basic
topics like weather, insects, colors, and fruits. Each volume is
small; the pages are stiff and plastic-coated; and the brightly
painted, cheery illustrations will attract children. In the volume
on weather, transparencies allow the reader to superimpose rain
storms, clouds, and rainbows onto various landscapes. In the
insect book, the insect transparencies show various parts of in-
sect anatomy; teachers may want to pair it with Eric Carle's The
Grouchy Ladybug.
2 JO Jonas, Ann. Color Dance. Illustrated by Ann Jonas. Greenwillow
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-05991-0. 27p. 3-7.
Three young dancers with translucent red, yellow, and blue
scarves demonstrate how colors combine to create more colors.
Against a stark white background, the children use their scarves
to make fourteen different colors before a fourth dancer intro-
duces white, gray, and black. The simple text complements the
bold watercolor illustrations. Each time a color is written in the
text, its name is printed in ink of that color. A color wheel and a
description of the relationship among colors appears on the final
pages.
2.71 Kitchen, Bert. Pig in a Barrow. Illustrated by Bert Kitchen. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0943-9. 25p. 4-8.
A happy pig in a barrow, a puppy crouching on a scale, and field
mice in a parsley pot are a few of the farm animals beautifully
illustrated in this collection of humorous verses. In a realistic
style similar to John James Audubon's paintings, Bert Kitchen
has drawn colorful and detailed portraits from the animal king-
dom. The four-line rhyming verses that accompany each illus-
tration offer an explanation of the drawing and occasionally
extend readers' understanding of nature.
2.72 Koch, Michelle. Hoot, Howl, Hiss. Illustrated by Michelle Koch.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09652-2. 24p. 2-5.
71
Concept Books
43
Woods, ponds, mountains, farms, and jungles have their own
animals with their own special sounds. From these five habitats,
each of three animals fills a full page against a plain white
background. Washes and light shading give texture to the child-
like depictions of animals that cluck, bleat, or chirp, as well as
those that hoot, howl, or hiss.
2.73 Kuskin, Karla. Roar and More. Illustrated by Karla Kuskin.
Harper and Row/Harper Trophy Books, 1990. ISBN 0-06-
023619-1. 46p. 3-6.
Karla Kuskin, winner of the NCTE Award for Excellence in
Poetry for Children in 1979, first published Roar and More in
1956. This reissue adds bright color to the original illustrations
that accompany her animal rhymes. Following each rhyme, the
animal's sounds blast or slither or bounce or roll across the
pages in perfect mesh with the sound's originator. For example,
dog sounds fill a double-paged spread in a cacophony of barks,
growls, and yaps, while the bee's buzz quietly follows a mean-
dering trail.
2.74 Leonard, Marcia. Alphabet Bandits: An ABC Book* Bear's Busy
Yean A Book about Seasons* Counting Kangaroos: A Book
about Numbers* The Kitten Twins: A Book about Opposites*
Noisy Neighbors: A Book about Animal Sounds* Paintbox
Penguins: A Book about Colors* Illustrated by Maryann Cocca-
Leffler; Diane Palmisciano; Bari Weissman. Troll Associates,
1990. 24p. 2-6.
In a series of books covered by polka-dots and illustrated with
jolly cartoons, young children are introduced to a parade of
concepts through the antics of busy animals whose activities
form a simple story line. For example, two kangaroo kids bring
their pouches full of toys to Grandma's house. They carefully
count out their booty, page by page, until Grandma announces
that she can count, too. Grandma counts one big mess and two
little kangaroos to clean it up.
2*75 MacDonald, Amy. Let's Do It* Let's Make a Noise* Lefs Play*
Let's Try* Illustrated by Maureen Roffey. Candlewick Press, 1992.
14p. 2-6.
These Let's Explore board books for the youngest child offer
bright, simple, page-filling illustrations and large, high-contrast
text. Let's Make a Noise invites children to make pet, train, truck,
and baby sounds. Let's Play and Let's Do It ask for responses to
72
44
Books for Young Children
2.76
2.77
2.78
2.79
simple questions, each beginning with "Can you . . . " ("Can
you knock down the blocks?"). Let's Try depicts children at-
tempting child-manageable skills: "Let's try to wash your
tummy/'
McMillan, Bruce. Eating Fractions. Photographs by Bruce
McMillan. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1991. ISBN 0-590-43770-
4. 32p. 4-8.
First, you take one whole pizza pie. Then you cut it into four
pieces, making fourths. When you eat a piece (1/4), you are
"eating fractions." The mathematical concept of how halves,
thirds, and fourths are a part of a whole is illustrated through
full-page color photographs of nutritious snacks being shared
among two friends and a dog. Recipes for the foods make it even
easier to reinforce fractional concepts in the home or classroom.
Miller, Jane. Farm Noises. Photographs by Jane Miller. Simon
and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-671-67450-
1. 32p. 4-^8.
On a trip around a country farm, the reader meets farm animals
(and farm machinery) in striking photographs. Each of the pho-
tos is accompanied by appropriate animal sounds. Kindergarten
teachers will find value for farm units and for the predictable
text.
Miller, Margaret. Who Uses This? Photographs by Margaret
Miller. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08279-3. 40p. 3-6.
On a double-page spread, the simple bold question runs oppo-
site a color photograph of a tool: "Who uses this?" Turn the page
to find two more brilliant photographs, one of an adult, the other
of a child, at work with the tool. Following the photograph of a
rolling pin, a baker rolls dough and a child rolls modeling clay.
The word Baker labels the pages. Tools in this concept book
include a conductor's baton, a barber's scissors, a carpenter's
hammer, and a gardener's watering can.
Morris, Ann. Loving. Photographs by Ken Heyman. Lothrop,
Lee and Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-06341-1. 32p. 3-7.
"Mommies and daddies take care of you for a long time." Paral-
lels of the universality of human relationships can easily be
drawn by young children when they read the simple, but ex-
pressive, text and see families from many lands engaged in
similar nurturing activities. Color photographs depict how par-
ERLC
73
Concept Books
45
ents, siblings, and even pets love and take care of each other all
around the world. An index and world map give, additional
information about the traditions and locations of the repre-
sented cultures.
2.80 Ormerod, Jan. Come Back, Kittens. Come Back, Puppies. Illus-
trated by Jan Ormerod. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992.
32p. 4r4.
Painted on transparent overlays, Jan Ormerod's kittens and
puppies nearly disappear against backgrounds of the same
color. So, when their parents call, "Come back, kittens'' or
"Come back, puppies/' wandering babies can be brought home
by young children who turn the overlay, placing the little ani-
mals against the left-hand page and their parents' protection.
One tiny spotted puppy stays nearly hidden throughout, a thin
line defining his shape against the floor. The text is large, repeti-
tive, and instantly readable.
2.81 Paterson, Bettina. In My House. In My Yard. My Clothes. My
Toys. Illustrated by Bettina Paterson. Henry Holt, 1992. 12p. 1-5.
In a series of board books, babies and toddlers can point to
favorite toys, articles of clothing, familiar household items, and
outdoor things. Torn-paper collages in clear colors make for
textured effects against equally bright backgrounds. In addition,
each page has a print label. Pictured toddlers are multiracial.
2.82 Ryder, Joanne. Under the Moon. Illustrated by Cheryl Harness.
Random House/Just Right Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-91960-2.
32p. 3-5.
Mama Mouse teaches her young one "special things," such as
where to find the fattest seeds and how to hide from the owl.
When it is time to go home, Mama uses gentle questioning to
encourage her offspring to rely on memories of smells and
sounds and textures to locate their meadow. Even though Little
Mouse is sure their home is under the moon, Mama helps to
sharpen the observations. At times, the guidance occurs in an
inset box, wrapped by the meadow home.
2.83 Shapiro, Arnold. Circles. Squares. Triangles. Illustrated by Ban
Weissman. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. lOp. 1-5.
Each double-page spread of these three sturdy board books
opens into a circular-, square-, or triangular-shaped object in
electric primary colors. The triangle book opens into a pine tree,
74
46
Books for Young Children
a tent, and a mountain, while the circle becomes a ball, a moon,
and a clock face. A natural extension activity for these Play-
shapes Books would be for young authors to make similar books
in the classroom or at home.
2-84 Shapiro, Arnold L. Who Says That? Illustrated by Monica Wel-
lington. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44698-2. 32p.
2-5.
In simple rhyming text, the voices of animals are heard: "Mon-
keys chatter. Cats purr. Lions roar. Hummingbirds whir/' Unlike
animals, "girls and boys make different noise." As that refrain
repeats, girls and boys whisper, giggle, shout, holler, whistle,
and talk. Colorful, cartoon-like drawings match each text line,
accompanied by print depictions of sounds, ranging from roll-
ing moos to long purrs, from tiny squeaks to loud shrieks.
2.85 Sharratt, Nick. The Green Queen* Monday Run-Day. Illus-
trated by Nick Sharratt. Candlewick Press/Toddler Books, 1992.
20p. 1-^6.
Two books by the same author have fun with language. In the
first, Nick Sharratt combines color words with colorful illustra-
tions to provide the fodder for wordplay. A "green queen" sleeps
in a "red bed" and wears "blue shoes," but she wants to make
her "gray day" a little more colorful. In the second book, the
days of the week spark rhyming fun for a brown-and-white
beagle and his friends. If Monday is "run-day," then Tuesday is
"snooze-day." Each day makes for a crazy-day poem, with Sun-
day "bun-day" culminating the week.
2.86 Singer, Marilyn. Nine O'clock Lullaby* Illustrated by Frane
Lessac. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-025648-6. 27p. 4-8.
When it's 9 p.m. in Brooklyn, New York, and Mama reads a
bedtime story, it's 2 a.m. in England and a little girl is up for a
snack. It's 11 a.m. in Japan and a grandfather watches carp
swimming in a pond, and it's 5 p.m. in Nome, Alaska, where
children play a circle game. On this lullaby trip around the
world readers view detailed and colorful folk-art illustrations of
children living in twenty-four time zones.
2.87 Sis, Peter. Beach Ball. Illustrated by Peter Sis. Greenwillow
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09182-2. 32p. 4-6.
A long, thin stretch of speckled sand separates sky and shore on
Peter Sis's title spread, as Mary and her mother spread their
75
Concept Books
blanket on a seemingly isolated beach. And then . . . "the wind
blew Mary's ball away." As Mary chases the beachball down-
wind, readers discover that the beach was not isolated at all, but
rather populated with all sorts of fanciful activity. Each busy
spread offers opportunity to discover colors, numbers, shapes,
animals, or opposites, all the while following Mary's ball
through a nearly wordless book.
2.88 Voce, Louise, Rosalinda Kightley, Tony Wells, Charlotte Knox,
and Julie Lacome. My First Book: Words and Pictures for the
Very Young. ISBN 1-56402-034-7. 62p. 2-6.
In an oversize book that can be read in any direction, stand-
alone couplets stretch across double-page spreads that are cov-
ered with the bright paintings of contributing artists. Objects on
the page are frequently labeled in bold, black print. One toy-cov-
ered page reads: "Do you have a teddy bear, yo-yo, or ball? /
Which is your favorite toy of all?" Other pages ask for interac-
tion. Young readers are to help baby animals find their mothers;
count picnic founds; or name foods that animals like to eat.
2.89 Weiss, Nicki. An Egg Is an Egg. Illustrated by Nicki Weiss. G. P.
Putman's Sons, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22182-4. 32p. 2-6.
"An egg is an egg until it hatches. And then it is a chick. A branch
is a branch until it breaks. And then it is a stick." Through
rhyming text and repetitive refrain, Nicki Weiss's theme is re-
played: "Nothing stays the same. Everything can change."
Everything changes, that is, except love— depicted as constant
between a mother and young son. Large, chalky illustrations are
filled with texture and pattern. A good companion book is
Raffi's Everything Grows.
2.90 Williams, Vera B. "More, More, More," Said the Baby: Three
Love Stories. Illustrated by Vera B. Williams. Greenwillow
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09174-1. 30p. 3-9 (est).
These charming full-page paintings highlight three stories of
babies and the grownups who love them. All three babies —
Little Guy, Little Pumpkin, and Little Bird — are so fast that their
daddy, grandma, and mama can barely catch them up! Each of
the gouache paintings is a brightly colored depiction of the love
and tenderness between baby and adult, and the happiness that
they bring to each other through gentle play. Caldecott Honor
Book, 1991.
48
Books for Young Children
2.91 Yorke, Jane, editor My First Look at Colors. My First Look at
Home* My First Look at Numbers, My First Look at Opposites.
My First Look at Seasons. My First Look at Shapes. My First
Look at Sizes. My First Look at Touch. Random House/Dorling
Kindersley Books, 1990. 16p. 2-5.
What enormous fun! Preschoolers learn vocabulary and con-
cepts through a brilliant array of three-dimensional color photo-
graphs. Unlikely, but singularly appropriate, objects are chosen
to illustrate the concepts of home, seasons, sizes, opposites,
touch, shapes, colors, and numbers. For example, in My First
Look at Touch, readers are treated to a rough pineapple, a soft
powder puff, and squishy marshmallows.
Counting Books
2.92 Aker, Suzanne. What Comes in 2's, 3's, and 4's? Illustrated by
Bernie Karlin. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers,
1990. ISBN 0-671-67173-1. 32p. 2-5.
This variation on a counting book presents objects that normally
come in twos, threes, and fours. Twos are hands and eyes and
feet, handles on sinks, and wings on birds. Threes are tricycle
wheels, meals in a day, and leaves on poison ivy. Fours are legs
on tables, chairs, and dogs, seasons of the year, and corners on a
book. Large illustrations make for easy counting. Teachers of
young children can make good use of the concepts.
2.93 Archambault, John. Counting Sheep. Illustrated by John Rom-
bola. Henry Holt, 1989. ISBN 0-8050-1135-8. 28p. 4-7.
Even after counting sheep, the narrator of this counting book
still can't sleep, so he begins counting some rather imaginative
animals to lift him off to dreamland — cotton-candy-spinning
cats, orange giraffes, and pink raccoons. Brilliant full-page illus-
trations splash blazing colors on a baby-blue background.
2.94 Ashton, Elizabeth Allen. An Old-Fashioned 12 3 Book. Illus-
trated by Jessie Willcox Smith. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-
670-83499-8. 32p. 3-8.
Elizabeth Allen Ashton has selected works of artist Jessie Will-
cox Smith to produce a Victorian counting book filled with
cherub-like children at play and accompanied by counting
rhymes that retrofit the paintings. The paper is creamy and
smooth; the numerals are aswirl with detail; and the paintings
77
Counting Books
49
are bordered with the same flourish to yield the intended "old-
fashioned" feel. Willcox Smith was well known for her covers
for Good Housekeeping magazine during the early twentieth cen-
tury.
2.95 Astley, Judy When One Cat Woke Up: A Cat Counting Book.
Illustrated by Judy Astley Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990.
ISBN 0-8037-0782-7. 32p. 3-7.
When one cat wakes up from its nap, it begins a romp through
the house that results in increasing mischief. That one cat steals
two fish, fights with three teddy bears, crumples four shirts, and
on and on until ten muddy pawprints mark the cat's trail back
to bed. Brightly colored drawings enhance the predictable pro-
gression of a cat having fun from one to ten.
2.96 Bennett, David. One Cow, Moo, Moo! Illustrated by Andy
Cooke. Henry Holt, 1990. ISBN 0-8050-1416-0. 30p. 4-7.
When a young boy sees one cow go running by, he wonders
why His curiosity increases as he sees that the cow is chased by
two horses that are, in turn, chased by three donkeys. The excite-
ment grows as more and more different animals (all the way up
to ten mice) pass by. The boy finds a surprising answer at the
end of this cumulative counting book.
2.97 Chouinard, Roger, and Mariko Chouinard. One Magic Box. Il-
lustrated by Roger Chouinard. Doubleday, 1989. ISBN 0-385-
26204-3. 28p. 3-8.
When one magic box, locked with two locks, falls to the Earth
one night, three socks, four policemen, and five monsters come
to inspect it. The rhyming tale continues in this counting pattern,
until, culminating at fifteen magic stars, the magic box swallows
up all of the counting objects and characters who had previously
made an appearance. Roger Chouinard creates a surrealistic
atmosphere using brilliant colors and odd perspectives against
starry, purple, pink, and black backgrounds.
2.98 Christelow, Eileen, retold by. Five Little Monkeys Jumping on
the Bed* Illustrated by Eileen Christelow. Clarion Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-89919-769-8. 30p. 3-7.
Once again those five little monkeys are jumping on the bed. In
this familiar jingle, one little monkey at a time falls off and
bumps his or her head. For each bump, Mama must call the
doctor. And, of course, the doctor said, "No more monkeys
ERIC
78
50
Books for Young Children
jumping on the bed!" The delightful surprise in Eileen
Christelow's illustrations is that once those monkey children are
tucked in bed again, Mama Monkey jumps on her bed! Crayon-
like drawings add whimsy to the monkeys' bedtime prepara-
tions.
2.99 Clements, Andrew. Mother Earth's Counting Book. Illustrated
by Lonni Sue Johnson. Picture Book Studio, 1992. ISBN 0-88708-
138-X. 44p. 3 and up.
One Earth takes center stage in this creative counting book. The
world's wildlife, climate, oceans, deserts, people, and more are
pictured in graceful pastel shades as the countable objects in-
crease to the number ten, then return to one, emphasizing the
Earth's uniqueness.
2.100 Crossley-Holland, Kevin. Under the Sun and over the Moon.
Illustrated by Ian Penney. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-
21946-3. 32p. All ages.
A boy wanders through ten gardens that serve as the organizing
framework for this unconventional counting book. The first gar-
den contains one sundial, one folded wing, one unicorn — one of
everything. Pairs, of course, are found in the second garden,
three of a kind in the next garden, and so on up to ten. The
rhyming couplets that accompany each illustration guide the
viewers in their search for sometimes-obscure items.
2.101 Dunrea, Olivier. Deep Down Underground* Illustrated by
Olivier Dunrea. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-732861-9. 32p. 3-7.
Insects, mice, toads, and other underground creatures "wriggle
and wrangle," "scurry and scamper," "scooch and scrunch,"
"dance and prance," "patter and chatter," and "slide and glide"
when they hear "1 wee moudiewort [Scottish for mole] digging,
digging deep down underground." Regrettably, cadence-break-
ing ants merely "march and stamp," while toads "burrow and
scrape." Earth-tone illustrations invite searching and counting
to ten and back in this tongue-tangling, cumulative counting
book. Notable Children's Trade Books in Science, 1989.
2.102 Fleming, Denise. Count! Illustrated by Denise Fleming. Henry
Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1595-7. 32p. 2-6.
Okay, you counters, get ready: Count one gnu of the orange-
and-yellow-speckled variety on a lavender backdrop that is bor-
dered by smears from the gnu's pallette. Next, count two zebras
ERLC
79
Counting Books
51
of impossible stripe and energy. "Jump, zebras!" reads the big,
bold text. Children can keep counting until they reach ten — all
the while performing the antics of bouncing kangaroos, wig-
gling worms, and lizards that line up. Finally, it's counting by
tens to reach fifty bees. "Count again, please."
2.103 French, Vivian. One Ballerina Two, Illustrated by Jan Ormerod.
Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10334-0. 32p.
3-6.
A young ballerina ties her shoes and then gracefully checks
those of her admirer, a rumpled younger ballerina "wannabe."
With perfect form, in a continuous-motion illustration, the balle-
rina performs ten plies. The words "10 Ten pltes" appear in crisp
print to match the crispness of her leotard. Hair and skirt
akimbo, the child does nine knee bends, and the words are
printed in her own ragged crayon script. In warmly comic
mime, the countdown continues — from pirouettes to gallops,
from pas de chat to pony trots.
2.104 Geisert, Arthur. Pigs from 1 to 10. Illustrated by Arthur Geisert.
Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-58519-8. 32p. 2-6.
During a bedtime story read by Mother Pig about a lost place
with huge stone configurations, ten little pigs decide to go on a
quest. With courage and resourcefulness, the pigs bridge an
abyss and drill through a mountain to their goal. They copy the
"stone configurations" — numerals from zero to nine — and bring
the copies home. Every intricate black-and-white, double-page
etching offers a quest for the reader as well: the numerals zero
to nine (and the ten pigs) are embedded within each illustration
for young readers to find.
2.105 Giganti, Paul, Jr. Each Orange Had 8 Slices: A Counting Book.
Illustrated by Donald Crews. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN
0-688-10429-0. 32p. 3 and up.
Although it could be a counting book for young children, this
book could also serve as an introduction to multiplication. On
each patterned page, an unseen narrator presents a set of objects
(with related subsets) and three questions: "On my way to lunch
I ate 2 juicy oranges. Each orange had 8 slices. Each slice had 2
small seeds." How many juicy oranges were there? How many
slices? How many seeds? Donald Crews's illustrations are char-
acteristically crisp, colorful, and countable.
ERIC
52
Books for Young Children
2*106 Grossman, Virginia. Ten Little Rabbits* Illustrated by Sylvia
Long. Chronicle Books, 1991. ISBN 0-87701-552-X. 25p. 2-6.
Vivid and whimsical illustrations, reminiscent of Beatrix Potter,
accompany a counting rhyme in which rabbits portray Native
Americans. Ten two-page paintings depict rabbits, attired in
traditional Native American garments, who are engaged in such
customs as performing a rain dance or sending a smoke signal.
From the Sioux to the Navajo, each tribe is described in a glos-
sary at the back of the book. IRA Children's Book Award, 1992.
2.107 Hayes, Sarah. Nine Ducks Nine. Illustrated by Sarah Hayes.
Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09535-6. 32p.
3-6.
When nine ducks go out for a stroll in the meadow, a hungry but
stupid fox follows closely and watches. One by one, the ducks
run away, "down to the rickety-bridge/' "I'm off," the departing
duck always says. Finding one lone duck in the nest built on the
rickety-bridge, Mr. Fox pounces, only to splash into the pond as
the rickety-bridge gives way. Full-page watercolor paintings hu-
morously illustrate this tale of nine clever ducks and their plan
to spoil Mr. Fox's day. Rhyming phrases, a counting sequence,
and repetitive lines are sure to invite young children's participa-
tion.
2*108 Linden, Ann Marie. One Smiling Grandma: A Caribbean
Counting Book* Illustrated by Lynne Russell. Dial Books for
Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1132-8. 24p. 2-6.
Besides "one smiling grandma in a rocking chair," the charac-
teristic fare included in this joyful Caribbean counting rhyme are
the marketplace, hummingbirds, flying fish, conch shells, sugar
apples, hairy coconuts, and sleeping mongooses. Memories of
Barbados and a special grandmother influenced the author's
choice of set and characters. One bright-eyed girl experiences
the bounty and color of her island interpreted by the artist in
sun-bathed chalks.
2*109 MacCarthy, Patricia. Ocean Parade: A Counting Book* Illus-
trated by Patricia MacCarthy. Dial Books for Young Readers,
1990. ISBN 0-8037-0780-0. 32p. 2-6.
In an ocean parade, one big glimmering fish and two little fish
swim across a blue silk page — batik gills, scales, and seafloor
edged with white-frosting-like trim. Then come three flat fish,
four thin fish, and five fat fish until patterned and rainbow fish
er|c
81
J
Counting Books
of all sizes fill the pages, swimming among the sea plants. After
nineteen transparent fish, the fish parade advances by tens to
fifty; finally, one hundred silver fish swim about a sunken treas-
ure chest.
2.110 Merriam, Eve. Train Leaves the Station* Illustrated by Dale
Gottlieb. Henry Holt/Bill Martin Books,1992. ISBN 0-8050-1934-
0. 32p. 3-6.
Dale Gottlieb's broad-lined, boldly colored illustrations for Eve
Merriam's counting verse are as simple in form as the predict-
able text that they accompany. A toy train chugs past other
nursery toys to rhythmic announcement: "Snake in the grass,
angel in heaven, train leaves the station at seven-o-seven."
When it's time for the ten-o-ten, the train is stuck in the station
again, and toys are piled high in the toy box.
2.111 O'Keefe, Susan Heyboer. One Hungry Monster: A Counting
Book in Rhyme. Illustrated by Lynn Munsinger. Little,
Brown/Joy Street Books, 1989. ISBN 0-316-63385-2. 32p. 3-7.
One by one, ten hungry monsters appear in a little boy's bed-
room and spill out into his home, where they wreak havoc upon
the entire household, especially the kitchen, in search of food.
After politely serving the ten monsters ten different foods and
receiving only tricks and shenanigans in return, the boy finally
orders them out of his house: "You are so bad / it makes me
mad!" Busy watercolored pen-and-ink illustrations portray the
chubby, green-eyed monsters as harmless rascals.
2.112 Pacovska, Kveta. One, Five, Many. Illustrated by Kveta Pa-
covskS. Clarion Books, 1990. ISBN 0-395-54997-3. 28p. 4h3.
This unique number book, with its punch-outs, paper doors,
peek windows, mirrors, and ingenious design, is a marvel of
learning made pleasurable. It covers only the numbers one
through ten, but presents them so thoroughly and imaginatively
that young readers will return with delight, reinforcing the les-
sons. The illustrations are brilliantly colored, often of whimsical
creatures, and delightful enough in themselves to bring readers
to the book again and again.
2.113 Reiser, Lynn. Christmas Counting. Illustrated by Lynn Reiser.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10677-3. 32p. 4 and up.
More than just for counting, this book, filled with colorful styl-
ized paintings, provides a wealth of opportunities for fun and
ERIC
S2
54
Books for Young Children
learning. Through a cumulative patterned story about a young
fir tree and a family young children can celebrate growth, new
life, and family traditions. The predictable text and well-
matched illustrations will have even the youngest joining in the
fun.
2.114 Scott, Ann Herbert. One Good Horse: A Cowpuncher's Count-
ing Book. Illustrated by Lynn Sweat. Greenwillow Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-688-09147-4. 29p. 2 and up.
As a young boy accompanies his cowboy father on his ranch
rounds, they describe the wide-open landscape numerically
from one to ten, to fifty, and to one hundred before heading back
home on their horse. Burnt orange, forest green, and teal hues
dominate the realistic pencil and oil paintings by Lynn Sweat.
The simple text is framed by thin orange and teal borders in
Native American style.
2.115 Sheppard, Jeff. The Right Number of Elephants. Illustrated bv
Felicia Bond. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-025616-8. 32p.
4-7.
In a counting book featuring elephants, a young girl tells the
exact number of elephants needed for various tasks. For exam-
ple, if you need to paint the ceiling "and there isn't a ladder to
be found, then the right number of elephants is . . . 9." While
nine exuberant elephants slap paint everywhere, causing a riot-
ous mess, there's a new problem: "When you go to the beach on
a very warm day, the right number of elephants for shade is . . .
8." Felicia Bond's countdown watercolors make even one ele-
phant special.
2.116 Sloat, Teri. From One to One Hundred. Illustrated by Teri Sloat.
Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44764-4. 32p. 3-7.
Here's a counting book that contextualizes the counting oppor-
tunities— even the numerals are embedded in the artwork. Ob-
jects to count are pictured at the bottom of each page. Simple to
find is one princess roasting one marshmallow on the breath of
one dragon. But how about fifty huskies pulling dogsleds past
fifty spectators and headed toward a finish line of fifty frankfurt-
ers under fifty flags? Double-page spreads invite counting from
one to ten, and then by tens to one hundred.
2.117 Thaler, Mike. Seven Little Hippos. Illustrated by Jerry Smath.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-
72964-0. 28p. 4^8.
9
:RLC
S3
A. Mother Goose's Words of Wit and Wisdom: A Book of Months by Tedd Arnold
(see 2.121). B. Ocean Parade: A Counting Bookby Patricia MacCarthy (see 2.109).
C. What Comes in 2% 3's & 4's?by Suzanne Aker; illustrated by Bemie Kariin (see 2.92).
ER?C
BEST COPy AVAILABLE
84
A. Old Black Fly by Jim Aylesworth; Illustration by Stephen GammeN (see 2.4).
B. Train Leaves the Station by Eve Merriam; illustrated by Dale Gottlieb (see 2.110).
C. Each Orange Had 8 Slices: A Counting Book by Paul Giganti, Jr.; illustrated by
Donald Crews (see 2.105).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Counting Books
55
In this familiar chant, pajama-clad hippos (instead of monkeys)
are jumping on the bed until, one by one, each bounces off and
bumps a hippo head. Youngsters instantly will be reading along
with the hippo doctor, who warns, "No more little hippos jump-
ing on the bed/' as he wraps yards and yards of bandages
around each swollen noggin. Jerry Smath's hippos are exuber-
ant, so they crack the walls, shatter the floor, and burst through
the ceiling, eventually demolishing the house.
2.118 Thornhill, Jan. The Wildlife 1 2 3: A Nature Counting Book,
Illustrated by Jan Thornhill. Simon and Schuster Books for
Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-671-67926-0. 32p. 4-8.
Wild animals from around the world accompany the numerals
1 to 20 as well as 25, 50, 100, and 1,000. Animals in natural
settings and in striking compositions are framed by detailed
designs. Some are camouflaged to provide readers with a bit of
a counting challenge. Readers can count the animals in the illus-
trations as well as in the borders. Information about each animal
appears on the final two pages entitled "Nature Notes/' Notable
Children's Trade Books in Science, 1989.
2.119 Van Fleet, Matthew. One Yellow Lion, Illustrated by Matthew
Van Fleet. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-
1099-2. 24p. 2-6.
In a simple concept book, two bold words appear on the left-
hand side of the page: "One" and "Yellow." Opposite is a huge
yellow numeral 1. Open the flap and half of that numeral be-
comes the tail of a cheerful lion cub. On the next page, the
numeral 2 opens to become the neck of a graceful swan.
After counting to ten, children can open a final five-fold
page on which all the animals reprise their roles in an animal
pyramid.
2.120 Wood, Jakki. One Bear with Bees in His Hair. Illustrated by
Jakki Wood. Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44695-8.
32p. 3-6.
In rhyming text that spreads one line at a time across the pages,
the story cumulates: One bright orange honey-eating bear
whose hair is populated by bees meets another bear, this one
with purple fur. "Two bears — that's more fun. Oh, look! Another
one!" Bears continue to meet others until they number teh and
their mass crams and overflows the pages (making counting
them a bit difficult). When all are assembled, they disperse for a
Books for Young Children
game of hide-and-seek, laughably spottable by their incongru-
ous fur colors.
Nursery Rhymes
2.121 Arnold, Tedd. Mother Goose's Words of Wit and Wisdom: A
Book of Months* Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990 ISBN
0-8037-0826-2. 32p. 4 and up.
Many, many hands "pulled miles and miles of thread through
what seemed to be acres of cloth" to produce a year-round
Mother Goose illustrated with samplers. The counted cross-
stitch and embroidered designs are bordered with raw linen,
making handsome, framable compositions on each page. A final
section explains the origin and history of traditional samplers,
children's role in producing them, and a bibliography of histori-
cal needlework sources.
2.122 Brown, Ruth. The World That Jack Built Illustrated by Ruth
Brown. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44735-4. 26p.
4-7.
Although based on the traditional cumulative tale, Ruth
Brown's message — that we must protect the environment — is
up-to-the-minute. "This is the stream that flows past the trees
that grow by the house that Jack built." Rich and sensitive paint-
ings portray a love for animals and nature's beauty. Each scene
also shows increasing human pollution as it is astutely observed
through the eyes of a black cat.
2.123 Bullock, Kathleen. It Chanced to Rain. Illustrated by Kathleen
Bullock. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989
ISBN 0-671-66005-5. 32p. 4-6.
In a whimsically illustrated adaptation of a nursery rhyme in
which it rains on a variety of animal friends out for a walk, cats,
dogs, rats, and pigs hurry home for dry clothes and a hot lunch,
only to discover that the ducks are missing. Fearing the worst,
the friends trek back out in the rain and find the ducks swim-
ming in the river. At the close of the day, most of the animals end
up in bed with sniffles, except for the ducks, who must wash all
the lunch dishes.
2.124 Butterworth, Nick. Nick Butterworth's Book of Nursery
Rhymes* Illustrated by Nick Butterworth. Viking Penguin, 1991
ISBN 0-670-83551-X. 52p. 2-7.
9
ERLC
87
Nursery Rhymes
57
Through whimsical illustrations, Nick Butterworth creates witty,
literal interpretations of twenty-two nursery rhymes. We see
Mary's lamb eagerly raising its "hoof" from behind a school
desk and Jack (the mouse) pole-vaulting over a candlestick. A
few of the nursery rhymes in this American edition of a book
first published in Great Britain are unfamiliar, but the distinctive
illustrations make them all delightful.
2.125 Cauley, Lorinda Bryan. Three Blind Mice: The Classic Nursery
Rhyme. Illustrated by Lorinda Bryan Cauley. G. P. Putnam's
Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21775-4. 28p. 4^8.
The complete adventure underlying this classic nursery rhyme
is revitalized by Lorinda Bryan Cauley's uniquely individual
mice in tiny hats, suspenders, or checked pants. The colorfully
detailed paintings give a mouse's view of a treacherous world,
evoking sympathy, horror, and then satisfaction when the mice
finally recover their sight and their tails.
2.126 Cole, Joanna, and Stephanie Calmenson, compilers. Pat-a-Cake,
and Other Play Rhymes, Illustrated by Alan Tiegreen. Morrow
Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11039-8. 48p. 1-4.
"For every mood and time of day," there are rhymes for babies'
and toddlers' fingers, hands, toes, feet, and faces; there are
rhymes for tickling, for knee riding, and for dancing. Text of the
rhymes appears beneath demonstrations of adults and children
at play. A gentle reminder cautions parents that a little stimula-
tion goes a long way, and supports them as partners in language
learning. A bibliography sends the interested reader to other
sources.
2.127 Jones, Carol, compiler. Hickory Dickory Dock, and Other Nurs-
ery Rhymes, Illustrated by Carol Jones. Houghton Mifflin, 1992.
ISBN 0-395-60834-1. 32p. 2-8.
Each of the eleven rhymes in this collection is printed on a
bordered interleafed page with a cut-out hole that allows read-
ers to preview a detail in the next full-page painting or to peek
back at a portion of the prior illustration. The mouse who ran up
the clock appears in each period-set watercolor and ink illustra-
tion.
2.128 Kemp, Moira, compiler. Baa, Baa, Black Sheep, Hey Diddle
Diddle. Hickory, Dickory, Dock, This Little Piggy. Illustrated
by Moira Kemp. Lodestar Books, 1991. 12p. 2-6.
ERLC
SB
58
Books for Young Children
The front covers of this nursery rhyme series are shaped to the
main character's ears, so the heads of a mouse, pig, black sheep,
and cat with a fiddle are discernible on each page of these simple
board books. Throughout, the cheerful characters wear just the
right clothing. For example, Baa Baa Black Sheep wears a bright
patchwork shawl and peers over her glasses at the counter of her
general store as she answers requests for wool.
2.129 Knight, Joan. Tickle-Toe Rhymes. Illustrated by John Wallner.
Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-05773-X. 32p. 2-5.
A variety of animals, including tigers, skunks, and pandas, en-
gage in activities that stimulate counting rhymes, all based on
"This Little Pig Went to Market/' Some rhymes are clever and
use atypical vocabulary in a fun way. The watercolor and ink
illustrations are amusing, detailed, and certain to prompt dis-
cussion. The animals themselves, however, are small enough
and integral enough to make counting a challenge for the very
young.
2.130 Langley, Jonathan. Rain, Rain, Go Away! A Book of Nursery
Rhymes. Illustrated by Jonathan Langley. Dial Books for Young
Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0762-2. 93p. 2-6.
With bustling energy and detail-packed pages, ninety-two fa-
vorite nursery rhymes are illustrated in bright colors with rosy-
cheeked, whimsical lads and lasses. Curly Locks has a sprin-
kling of freckles across her cherubic face; Yankee Doodle,
wearing a cowboy hat, rides a wheeled horse. Page layouts
group rhymes with common elements. For example, rainy-day
rhymes are combined into a two-page spread that features a
baker in a windmill, April showers, the Eency Weency spider,
and rain, rain that won't let Johnny go out to play.
2.131 Lawson, Carol. Teddy Bear, Teddy Bear. Illustrated by Carol
Lawson. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0970-
6. 32p. 2-6.
The familiar jump-rope rhyme is turned, line by line, into a
cheery picture book that invites instant reading and enactment
of the movements of a smiling yellow Teddy. Blue-crayon bor-
ders wrap Teddy in action — dancing on toes, touching his nose,
turning around, and touching the ground. Smears of paint muss
the edges of the pages, as though touched before it dried by a
mischievous Teddy.
ERIC M
Nursery Rhymes
59
2.132 Opie, Iona, and Peter Opie. The Little Dog Laughed* Illustrated
by Lucy Cousins. E. P. Dutton, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44573-0. 64p.
2-5.
Sixty-four Mother Goose rhymes, printed in a large, bold type-
face, are presented with the characteristic simplicity of Lucy
Cousins's art. Heavy black outlines and crayon-box primary
colors accompany captions that are primitively scrawled in
paint across each illustration. The result is a joyful, albeit un-
usual, interpretation of these classic rhymes. ALA Notable Chil-
dren's Books, 1991.
2*133 Sutherland, Zena, compiler. The Orchard Book of Nursery
Rhymes* Illustrated by Faith Jaques. Orchard Books, 1990. ISBN
0-531-05903-0. 96p. All ages.
Seventy-seven classic nursery rhymes, illustrated with period
watercolors, are gathered into this beautifully designed edition
with the feel and look of what a nursery rhyme collection should
be. Faith Jaques has done meticulous research on the houses,
domestic detail, and gardens of the Georgian period. In a palette
of soft pinks, lilacs, blues, and greens, each of the scenes and
characters is perfectly matched to its verse — and each verse is a
favorite. Zena Sutherland reports the origins of some of the
rhymes in "Selector's Notes."
2*134 Wadsworth, Olive A. Over in the Meadow: An Old Counting
Rhyme* Illustrated by David A. Carter. Scholastic Hardcover
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-590^4498-0. 32p. 2-6.
This traditional counting rhyme/song is enlivened with
meadow dwellers executed in cut-paper collage. Animal tex-
tures and details are sponge-painted or stamped. The effect is
lush springtime color, simplicity of line, and interesting detail
(such as eight yellow lizards dotted with tiny orange stars). The
entire rhyme is reprinted at the book's end, with the number
words in boldface type.
2*135 Watson, Wendy. Wendy Watson's Mother Goose. Illustrated by
Wendy Watson. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1989. ISBN
0-688-05708-X. 160p. 4-8.
Wendy Watson's collection of over two hundred nursery rhymes
is illustrated with simple, cheery scenes and characters — rang-
ing from tucked-in cameos to two-page spreads. Although only
the cover flap gives the clue, the rhymes are "art-organized"
seasonally to cover the full year.
ERIC
90
60
Books for Young Children
2.136 Yolen, Jane, editor. The Lap-Time Song and Play Book. Illus-
trated by Margot Tomes. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN
0-15-243588-3. 32p. All ages.
Sixteen nursery games and rhymes are period-set by Margot
Tomes's gouache paintings and then offered to those with chil-
dren in their care along with directions for enacting the verses.
Jane Yolen has also provided interesting background informa-
tion for each entry. For example, the Baker's Man in "Patty-
Cake, Patty Cake" may refer to Beker's man, an old Saxon term
for priest. To "mark it with T" (as in older versions) meant to
make the sign of the cross over the communion wafer. Adam
Stemple, Yolen's son has provided musical arrangements for the
piano, and Yolen offers an afterword, "About Lap Songs."
Paper Engineering
Lift-the-Flap
2.137 Angel, Marie. Marie Angel's Exotic Alphabet: A Lift-the-Flap
Alphabetic Safari. Illustrated by Marie Angel. Dial Books for
Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1247-2. 32p. 2-6.
Untie a red ribbon to unfold a nine-foot frieze printed on stiff
board. Each fold frames a different wild animal habitat— an
African coastal jungle, waterhole, and grasslands, as well as
South and Central American jungles. Readers can open small
flaps to discover an alphabet zoo — from a graceful* antelope to a
skunk-like zorilla. On the opposite side of the frieze, the names
of all the exotic animals are printed on identical habitat back-
grounds.
2.138 Argent, Kerry. Happy Birthday, Wombat! Illustrated by Kerry
Argent. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1991. ISBN 0-316-05097-
0. 20p. 1-5.
While Wombat searches high and low for his birthday present,
his assorted Australian animal friends — bandicoots, kangaroos,
and koala bears— sneak past the lovable lumberer to gather for
his surprise birthday party. Children will delight in lifting flaps
to discover telltale streamers, banners, and gifts that Wombat, in
his fervor, has overlooked. Charming illustrations offer memo-
rable details, such as Wombat's palm-tree patterned Bermuda
shorts and a multicolored patchwork quilt.
91
Paper Engineering
61
2.139 Bradman, Tony, and Margaret Chamberlain. Who's Afraid of
the Big Bad Wolf? Illustrated by Margaret Chamberlain.
Macmillan/ Aladdin Books, 1989. ISBN 0-689-71291-X. 20p. 3-6.
Three comical pigs and a big bad wolf cavort across the pages of
this lift-the-flap picture book. While the wolf threatens, bug-
eyed forest animals ask in speech balloons, "Who's afraid of the
big bad wolf?" Just lift a log or move a bush to discover the
answer: "We are!" Readers must look under flying house parts
to find the first two pigs. But with his assault on the brick house,
the wolf is foiled by a wily girl pig. "Who's afraid of the boiling
water?"
2*140 Coleridge, Sara. January Brings the Snow: A Seasonal Hide-
and-Seek. Illustrated by Elizabeth Falconer. Orchard Books,
1989. ISBN 0-531-05824-7. 28p. 3-8.
The couplets of Sara Coleridge's nineteenth-century poem an-
nounce nature's offerings during each month of the year ("Janu-
ary brings the snow; / Makes the toes and fingers glow"). The
lines of the poem appear beneath twelve windowpane borders
that focus on two children at work or at play in seasonal activi-
ties. Lift the tabs to uncover the activities of a tiny family of field
mice who are also frolicking through the seasons.
2*141 Cousins, Lucy. What Can Rabbit Hear? What Can Rabbit See?
Illustrated by Lucy Cousins. Tambourine Books, 1991. 16p. 2 and
up.
Sporting a red and white striped shirt, bespectacled Rabbit sees
and hears the world around him: "What can Rabbit see in the
pond?" Lift the flap to find a large goldfish. "Whai can Rabbit
hear in the tree?" Lift the flap to reveal a chirping bird. Young
children will discover ways to identify objects and learn com-
mon sounds, all the while delighting in illustrations that are
bold, primary colored, and childlike.
2*142 Grindley, Sally. Shhh! Illustrated by Peter Utton. Little,
Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992. ISBN 0-316-32899-5. 22p. 4^8.
Two tiny but unseen cieatures approach the giant's castle — is it
the reader and the listener? Fold out a door for an intruder's-eye
view of the giant's dining room, and the adventure begins. On
this tiptoe journey, readers can peek back through small doors
to see if the cat, the hen, and then the wife are undisturbed. At
last — the giant! Peek back. Awake! The giant is so menacing that
92
ERLC
62
Books for Young Children
readers are warned: "SHUT TOE BOOK!" Illustrations are un-
controlled strokes of exuberance.
2.143 Hill, Eric. Spot Goes to the Park. Spot Sleeps Oven Illustrated
by Eric Hill. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1990-91. lip. 1-5.
Spot the amiable puppy has adventures with his assorted animal
friends in this series of twelve books for young children. When
Spot sleeps overnight at his monkey friend Steve's house, he
brings a wagonload of toys, but forgets his teddy bear. When
Spot is at the park, a friendly duck retrieves his ball from a pond.
On each heavy page, the response to large, bold text is hidden
under flaps. Simple line drawings in primary colors promote the
elemental mood.
2.144 Pelham, David. Sam's Sandwich. Illustrated by David Pelham
and Harry Willock. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-
44751-2. 22p. 5 and up.
No child would want to eat Sam's Sandwich, but some may want
to read it and lift its flaps. Within sandwich dimensions, and
between covers of laminated styrofoam "bread," a demonic
looking brother-sister duo, Sam and Samantha, decide to make
a sandwich, to which Samantha adds lettuce, tomatoes, cheese,
watercress, cucumbers, salami, onions, and ketchup, while Sam
slips in worms, snails, ants, flies, spiders, tadpoles, and centi-
pedes.
2.145 Potter, Beatrix. Beatrix Potter's Peter Rabbit: A Lift-the-Flap
Rebus Book. Illustrated by Colin Twinn. Frederick Warne, 1991.
ISBN 0-7232-3798-0. 16p. 4-8.
Beatrix Potter's complete, original text is enlarged in this reis-
sued rebus book. Tiny picture flaps mask selected story words
that are revealed by lifting the flaps. In addition, there are some
pop-up features, including a final peep into the underground
rabbit hole. The artwork is Potter's original, but page layouts
differ to accommodate the enlarged text.
2.146 Smith, Mavis. "Fred, Is That You?" A Lift-the-Flap Book. Illus-
trated by Mavis Smith. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-80241-7.
20p. 2-5.
A concerned duck follows different sets of tracks to find his
friend, Fred, asking repeatedly: "Fred, is that you?" Beneath
each variantly shaped flap (including a beach umbrella, a bed-
sheet on the clothesline, and even a refrigerator door), the duck
93
Paper Engineering
63
finds the animal who really made the tracks and who points out
the mistake in a rhyming couplet: "No, dude, no. Can't you see
I'm a crow?" Bright colors, bold lines, and minimal backgrounds
contribute to this surprise-ending book for beginners.
2.147 Varekamp, Marjolein. Little Sam Takes a Bath, Illustrated by
Marjolein Varekamp. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-05944-8.
24p. 2-6.
In a "special effects" book, Little Sam, a roly-poly pig, gets dirty
playing in the mud and must be coaxed into the bath by a
patient mother. Children can participate by turning Little Sam
over in the mudhole, peeking into cutout windows and doors,
and sympathizing with Sam's reluctance to bathe. Most fun of
all, though, is pulling the tab that makes Sam jump into the tub
with a mighty splash, joining his pop-up seal and elephant.
Pop-ups
2.148 Carter, David A. Surprise Party: A Lift-up Pop-up Book, Illus-
trated by David A. Carter. Grosset and Dunlap, 1990. ISBN 0-
488-40062-6. 16p. 4-6.
An alligator couple attends a surprise party and encounters
"silly snakes," "beautiful birds," and "fabulous frogs" on full-
color, pop-up pages. This birthday fun honors a surprise baby
not yet hatched from a red polka-dot egg.
2.149 Dijs, Carla. Who Sees You? At the Pond; Who Sees You? In the
Jungle. Illustrated by Carla Dijs. Grosset and Dunlap, 1992. 12p.
2-5.
"Who Sees You?" is the question posed in these two Little Pop-
and-Peek Books. In every habitat, pop-up animals in vivid col-
ors against stark white backgrounds answer the question. At the
Pond features such creatures as a kelly-green frog with pop-up
legs, a face-to-face view of a turtle with a wrinkly neck, and a
shimmery blue fish with a flipping fin, while In the Jungle fea-
tures brightly colored scenes with jungle animal pop-ups. The
series also includes animals from the farm, ocean, zoo, and for-
est.
2.150 Fritz, Jean. The Great Adventure of Christopher Columbus: A
Pop-up Book. Illustrated by Tomie dePaola. Putnam and
Grosset, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22113-1. 12p. 5-9.
ERLC
94
64
Books for Young Children
In Jean Fritz's inimitable clarity, accuracy, and simplicity of style,
the Columbus adventure is retold along the side panels of six
pop-up scenes designed by Tomie dePaola. Columbus bows to
Ferdinand and Isabella, a ship skims the waves, Columbus
plants the flag of Spain, the Santa Maria runs aground, and
Columbus returns at the head of a procession. This is a pop-up
book that bears reading aloud: 'Too much! Much too much. The
queen said no and sent Christopher Columbus on his way."
2.151 Moseley, Keith. It Was a Dark and Stormy Night: A Pop-Up
Mystery Whodunit Illustrated by Linda Birkinshaw, Dial
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-1021-6. 14p. 8-10.
Even though it was a dark and stormy night, Lady Penelope Pig
wasn't going to let weather spoil her dinner party, an evening
for showing off her newest diamond. As the storm rages, Victo-
rian-clad animal guests are served by maid and butler in pop-up
English drawing-room scenes. Then a blinding flash, the lights
go out, and the diamond is stolen. Inspector Dog and careful
readers must solve the crime. A tiny sealed envelope holds the
solution at the book's end.
2*152 Rojany, Lisa. The Hands-on Book of Big Machines. Illustrated
by Joel Snyder. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-41904-4. 14p.
6-10.
On construction sites, roadways, factories, and farms, big ma-
chines lift, dig, carry, and tear down. Paper engineering enables
the monster machines in this book to move, scoop, or lift. Read-
ers can even peek into some of these gigantic machines. The final
page offers a robot arm in an auto factory as well as a dinosaur
automated by machinery. The narrative is mindful of children's
interests ("Abackhoe can dig holes deep enough for a giraffe to
jtand in") and not overwhelmingly lengthy.
2.153 Stevenson, Robert Louis. A Child's Garden of Verses: A Pop-up
Book. Illustrated by Jannat Messenger. Dutton Children's Books,
1992. ISBN 0-525-44997-3. 12p. 2-6.
Jannat Messenger has selected twelve of Stevenson's best-loved
poems and given six of them a pop-up interpretation and /or
movable features. For "The Wind," a butterfly kite spins up-
ward; by pulling a tab, two other kites are launched skyward on
curly strings. A small cadre of neighborhood children in dress-
up costumes moves to "The Marching Song." One enthusiastic
marcher claps the cymbals; another beats a drum.
ERLC
95
A. A Real Nice Clambake by Oscar Hammerstein; illustrated by Nadine Bernard
Westcott (see 2.158). B. Goodnight to Annie: An Alphabet Lullaby by Eve Merriam;
illustrated by Carol Schwartz (see 2.20). C. The Pop-Up, Pull-Tab, Playtime House
That Jack Built by Nadine Bernard Westcott (see 2.154).
9G
erJc best copy availabl-
AVOC&LV WORLD
BeterSis
f " F<^^0x%d bJ James Marsna" (see 9-12). B. An Ocean World by Peter Sis
^ee 2 174) C. Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star by Jane Taylor, illustrated by Michael
H3QUG (S66 2.163),
97
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Songs and Music
65
2.154 Westcott, Nadine Bernard. The Pop-Up, Pull-Tab, Playtime
House That Jack Built Illustrated by Nadine Bernard Westcott.
Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1991. ISBN 0-316-93138-1. 18p.
6-*.
Open the first flap to find the pop-up rat that ate the cheese in
the house that Jack built. In this action-packed version of the
best-known cumulative tale, Jack sleeps through it all. He misses
the dog-cat-rat chase, the cow with the crumpled horn kicking
over the milkpail, and even the wedding officiated by the
shaven and shorn priest. On each page, the rat who started it all
keeps popping up in unusual places, such as pockets or trousers.
With all in disarray Jack wakens to ask, "What are you all doing
in my house?"
Pull-Tabs
2.155 Zelinsky, Paul O. The Wheels on the Bus, Illustrated by Paul O.
Zelinsky. Dutton Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44644-3. 12p. 3-6.
Vivid colors, unusual typefaces, and double-page layouts make
this an exuberant rendition of the familiar children's song. Each
verse is accompanied not only by bustling illustrations rich with
subtle details, but also with movable parts related to the repeti-
tive line (such as wipers on the bus that really go swish, swish,
swish). Though young readers may have difficulty manipulat-
ing pull-tabs, an older reader can help them want to take this
trip again and again. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1991.
Songs and Music
2.156 Cauley, Lorinda Bryan, reteller. Old MacDonald Had a Farm,
Illustrated by Lorinda Bryan Cauley. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989.
ISBN 0-399-21628-6. 32p. 4-8.
Poor Old MacDonald! The chubby, cheerful farmer with round,
wire-rimmed glasses is awakened by roosters early in the morn-
ing, and is surrounded by frolicking animals that follow him
"here," "there," and "everywhere" until he sits down to have a
piece of pie at night. The animated illustrations, in bright colors
with comedic details, extend this simple folk song by showing
the many duties on Old MacDonald's farm, all of which are
continuously interrupted by the boisterous animals.
98
66
Books for Young Children
2.157 Guthrie, Woody, with Marjorie Mazia Guthrie. Woody's 20
Grow Big Songs* Illustrated by Woody Guthrie. HarperCollins,
1992. ISBN 0-06-020283-1. 48p. All ages.
Lost for over forty years, the manuscript for this collection of
songs, composed by the Guthries for their daughter, has been
replicated complete with Woody Guthrie's own original
scratchy watercolors. An arrangement and accompanying
chords for each song are included, as well as the variations
provided by additional verses. Occasionally readers are invited
to provide their own extrapolations. For "Dance Around/' chil-
dren wave, tiptoe, march, hop, run, jump, and fly.
2.158 Hammerstein, Oscar, II. A Real Nice Clambake. Illustrated by
Nadine Bernard Westcott. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-316-75422-6. 32p. 4-8.
Baskets and buckets of ingredients arrive early on the beach in
preparation for clam chowder, steamed lobsters, corn on the cob,
blueberrry pie, and watermelon. Both lyrics and music are in-
cluded for this song from Rodgers and Hammerstein's Carousel,
illustrated here as a family celebration on the beach. Spread
across the pages, the festivities include games and songs and, of
course, eating. Illustrations are filled with details for revisiting,
and pages are bordered in motifs from each spread.
2.159 Jones, Carol, compiler. Old MacDonald Had a Farm. Illustrated
by Carol Jones. Houghton Mifflin, 1989. ISBN 0-395-49212-2.
30p. 4-8.
Full-page watercolor illustrations in warm earth tones have
peepholes in the middle of the facing pages, allowing children
to guess the identity of the next animal that they will meet on
the farm and then to catch a backward glimpse of Farmer Mac-
Donald at work. Jam-packed details in the illustrations offer
children opportunities to notice and talk about other animals
and things of interest found on Old MacDonald's farm.
2.160 Larrick, Nancy, compiler. Songs from Mother Goose: With the
Traditional Melody for Each. Illustrated by Robin Spowart.
Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-023714-7. 60p. 2-6.
This hardcover collection features musical arrangements for
fifty-six Mother Goose rhymes, from the most popular to the less
familiar. The arrangements are simple and based on traditional
melodies. Appendixes include notes on Mother Goose, notes on
particular rhymes, and an index to first lines. Brightly colored
ERIC
99
Songs and Music
67
illustrations — some decorative, some depicting the action of the
rhymes — add to the overall attractiveness of the book.
2-161 Medearis, Angela Shelf. The Zebra-Riding Cowboy: A Folk
Song from the Old West. Illustrated by Maria Christina Brusca.
Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1712-7, 32p. 4-8.
When a scholarly looking greenhorn shows up at the Z-Bar
Ranch, the cowboys give him the zebra dun to ride, the orneriest
horse of all. But the city fellow keeps his seat, proving his worth
as a cowhand. In an afterword, Angela Shelf Medearis specu-
lates < about this cowboy (portrayed here as a genial African
American with a twinkle in his eye), and documents the contri-
butions of ethnically diverse cowboys in the Old West. The mu-
sical score for this cowboy ballad is also included.
2.162 Raffi. Five Little Ducks* Illustrated by Jose Aruego and Ariane
Dewey. Crown, 1989. ISBN 0-517-56945-0. 32p. 3-7.
Five little ducks go out to play, swimming in their pond and
peeking from behind lily pads. But when Mother Duck sounds
her "Quack, quack, quack, quack, . . . only four little ducks came
back/' The text of this singable countdown book in the Raffi
Songs to Read series follows the steady disappearance of the
Easter-egg-colored ducklings, who play in dirt, swing off
grasses, and slide down hills. When none remain and the sea-
sons turn round again, the ducks return, bringing their own
duck families.
2-163 Taylor, Jane. Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star. Illustrated by Mi-
chael Hague. Morrow Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11168-8.
24p. 2-6.
This 1806 nursery song is reenchanted by Michael Hague's fan-
ciful watercolor-and-ink illustrations. From an English nursery,
two young children view the nighttime sky, as revealed by fair-
ies releasing a trail of twinkling stars. The star path guides them
upward into a cloud-borne sailing ship past magical beasts and
angelic hosts. With the arrival of the Pegasus-like dawn, the
children return to the nursery. Readers will find (before they
sleep) a fold-out page with glow-in-the-dark stars.
2*164 litherington, Jeanne. Baby's Boat. Illustrated by Jeanne Tither-
ington. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-08556-3. 24p. 3-5.
In the spirit of Wynken, Blynken, and Nod, a lifelike baby sails
to dreamland in a silver moon boat. Jeanne Htherington's layers
ERLC
68
Books for Young Children
of blurred colored pencils seem to glow with starlight, creating
a gentle accompaniment to the simple, comforting lullaby: "Sail,
baby, sail / Out upon that sea, / Only don't forget to sail / Back
again to me/' A palette of lavender creates a quiet mood; the
simple lines of verse are each bordered with a lavender frame.
2.165 Young, Ruth. Golden Bear. Illustrated by Rachel Isadora. Viking
Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-82577-8. 28p. 2-6.
"Golden Bear, Golden Bear, I have seen him everywhere." In
rhyming text, this tender book tells about the playtime adven-
tures of a stuffed bear and his nameless African American friend.
From quiet rocking to skating and snowman making, the soft
pastel drawings of Caldecott Honor-winner Rachel Isadora
evoke the gentleness of the relationship between the boy and his
bear. Endpapers feature music specially composed by the author
for the book.
Wordless Books
2*166 Brown, Craig. The Patchwork Fanner. Illustrated by Craig
Brown. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07736-6. 22p. 4-6.
In a wordless text, a cheerful farmer rises with each dawn and
pulls on his overalls, ready for his day. Workaday chores besiege
the farmer's overalls, and after each mishap, he must reach into
his scrapbasket to repair the damage with a bright patch. At last,
the basket is empty of patches, the overalls full of them, and both
the farmer and his sunlit fields are a patchwork of festive color.
Pastels are freckled with ink to give texture and grit.
2.167 Butterworth, Nick. Amanda's Butterfly. Illustrated by Nick But-
terworth. Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN 0-385-30434-X. 40p. 3-^6.
In a wordless picture book, perky Amanda goes on a butterfly
hunt. Delayed by a rain shower, she ducks into a storage shed
where she discovers a tiny fairy with a torn, unusable wing.
Although Molly considers using the tools in the shed to make
the repair, none suits the delicate fairy. So Molly races to her
house for the tool that works perfectly on fairy wings — tape.
Nick Butterworth's cheerful paintings are framed squares
against glossy-white backgrounds.
2.168 Day, Alexandra. Carl Goes Shopping. Illustrated by Alexandra
Day. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-31110-2. 27p.
3-7.
101
Wordless Books
69
Carl the dog is back, and this time he is instructed to take care
of Baby in a department store while Mother runs an errand.
Baby immediately gets out of the buggy and onto Carl's back for
adventures throughout the store. Carl and Baby make it back to
their buggy just in time for Mother's praise. This book of few
words should elicit extensive elaborations as readers react to the
duo's escapades.
2.169 Geisert, Arthur. Oink. Illustrated by Arthur Geisert. Houghton
Mifflin, 1991. ISBN 0-395-55329-6. 32p. All ages.
In a nearly wordless book, Arthur Geisert achieves maximum
impact with pink-tinted pigs, black-and-white backgrounds,
and large and small "oinks." Piglets follow their mother's oinks
through the pasture to the wallow spot. When Mother naps, they
wander away, tempted by an apple tree. One by one, they make
the leap from haystack to tree, with the letter O's of their oinks
trailing behind them. The boisterous oinking wakes the alarmed
sow, who scolds with the loudest oink of all, putting her piggies
back in a row.
2.170 Graham, Alastair. Full Moon Soup; or, The Fall of the Hotel
Splendide. Illustrated by Alastair Graham. Dial Books for
Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-1045-3. 28p. 4-7.
In only a few pages of illustrations, and without a single word,
Alastair Graham tells a myriad of detailed and hilarious stories
in a cartoon-like feast. In a matter of minutes, the lunatic influ-
ence of the rising moon reduces a splendid hotel to rubble; a
series of progressive cutaway views lets us watch the hotel's
inhabitants — ordinary humans, extraterrestrials, sixteenth-cen-
tury ghosts, and a rambunctious gorilla — deal with an untold
number of zany mishaps. Guests are surprised, bumped,
haunted, and even vacuumed.
2*171 Hoban, Tana. Look Up, Look Down. Photographs by Tana Ho-
ban. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10578-5. 32p. 2-7.
Just because you have looked up at skyscrapers, hot-air bal-
loons, and tall trees or looked down at puddles and shadows
doesn't mean that you have seen "ups and downs" as Tana
Hoban has. In beautiful color photographs, readers view the
upside of bleachers, birds perched on criss-cross wires, and the
rib patterns of an open umbrella; by looking down, Hoban offers
perspectives on foraging ants, a sunlit feather, and the inside of
a spray of metal-spokes on a trash receptacle.
Iu2
70
Books for Young Children
2.172 Hoban, Tana. Shadows and Reflections. Photographs by Tana
Hoban. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-07090-6. 32p. 2
and up.
In this wordless picture book, full-page color photographs de-
pict shadows or reflections of real objects, people, and animals.
The shadow of a nearby fence is reflected on the side of a yellow
car. The upside-down reflection of a brown bear is captured in a
pool, perhaps at the zoo. Some photographs are easily recogniz-
able; others must be studied to decipher distortions in the reflec-
tions or shadows. Boston Globe-Horn Book Nonfiction Honor Book,
1990; Outstanding Science Trade Books for Children in 1990; ALA
Notable Children's Books, 1991.
2.173 Sara. Across Town, Illustrated by Sara. Orchard Books, 1991.
ISBN 0-531-08532-5. 32p. 3-7.
In this wordless book, the lone figure of a man moves down a
dark and ominous city street. Only when the man encounters a
cat that is clearly his friend does the aura of menace vanish. The
simple but dramatic artwork consists of torn, cardboard-colored
paper shapes against a black background.
2.174 Sis, Peter. An Ocean World, Illustrated by Peter Sis. Greenwil-
low Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09068-0. 24p. 3 and up.
This near-wordless book follows a whale raised in captivity once
she is released into the ocean. Through watercolor and ink draw-
ings, Peter Sis interprets the whale's search for companionship.
Across expanses of blue-green sea, she encounters whale-like
shapes — a fishing boat, a blimp, a submarine, even a littering
garbage scow — but no whale. In a satisfying conclusion, the
lonely whale takes a deep dive and finds a mate.
2.175 Tafuri, Nancy. Follow Me! Illustrated by Nancy Tafuri. Green-
willow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08774-4. 32p 2 and up.
In a wordless picture book, a young seal peeks from beneath the
flipper of its napping mother to observe the movements of a
bright red crab. As the crab moves away, the baby seal follows,
and Mama Seal follows her offspring. Up and over rocks, past
gulls, sea urchins, starfish, prawns, and sea lions, the seal wan-
ders. When the crab finds its group and dances off into the sea,
the baby seal discovers that a watchful eye was never far away.
9
:RLC
103
Wordless Books
71
2.176 Wouters, Anne. This Book Is for Us. This Book Is Too Small.
Illustrated by Anne Wouters. Dutton Children's Books, 1991.
22p. 2-5.
In companion wordless books, a cheerful polar bear and a tiny
mole experience unusual adventures. In This Book Is for Us, Mole
is frightened by encroaching "blueness" on the pages. Try as he
might, Bear cannot stave it off. At last, frightened Mole and his
protector spot a hole in the blue and widen it to provide moon-
light. In This Book Is Too Small, Bear grows too big for the bounda-
ries of the pages. Little Mole finds a solution by pulling Bear to
a double-page spread.
U'4
Celebrations
Sing, Creatures, sing,
Angels and Men and Birds and everything,
Christina G. Rossetti
105
3 Celebrations
Birthdays
3.1 Anholt, Catherine. The Snow Fairy and the Spaceman. Illus-
trated by Catherine Anholt Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN 0-385-
30422-6. 24p. 5-8. Fiction.
A boisterous little girl welcomes a lion, a king, and several other
costumed guests to her birthday party. But her rudeness makes
a timid and unhappy spaceman wish that he could go home. It
takes a game of hide-and-seek and a surprise rescue to prompt
an unlikely friendship between the shy spaceman and his snow-
fairy hostess. Lively watercolors augment the text.
3.2 Brown, Marc. Arthur's Birthday. Illustrated by Marc Brown.
Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1989. ISBN 0-316-11073-6. 30p.
4-7 (est.). Fiction.
In this thirteenth Arthur book, Arthur can't wait for his eighth
birthday When he hands out his invitations at school he discov-
ers that his classmate Muffy has scheduled her birthday party
for the same day. The class divides into two groups — the boys
decide to attend Arthur's party, and the girls, Muffy's party. But
Arthur comes up with a better plan. In the end, everyone arrives
at Arthur's house to celebrate his birthday and to give Muffy a
surprise party
3.3 Jonas, Ann. The 13th Clue. Illustrated by Ann Jonas. Greenwil-
low Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09743-X. 32p. 4 and up. Fiction.
An open diary lies on the attic floor with an unfinished entry, its
unseen writer bemoaning a day in which "nobody mentioned
anything at breakfast" and "now no one is even home." But
attached to the attic light is a note: "Find more clues." So the
diarist does. There are clues spelled out by an extension cord, cut
into the lawn, and marked by sticks. Even clues in pond moss
help to lead further toward the surprise and the best birthday
ever.
3.4 Mora, Pat. A Birthday Basket forTia. Illustrated by Cecily Lang.
Macmillan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-767400-2. 32p. 3-8 (est.). Fiction.
It is Cecilia's great-aunt's birthday Her special Tia is ninety
years old. jNoventa anos! As a present for Tia, Cecilia fills a
ERJC
Birthdays
75
basket with all the special things that she and Tia do together.
There's their favorite book, their special cookie-mixing bowl,
their teacup, the red ball that they throw, and the flowers that
Ha loves. Brightly colored collages and a Mexican American girl
with a childlike knack for perfect gift giving make for a warm,
family book. jFeliz cumpleanos!
3.5 Polacco, Patricia. Some Birthday! Illustrated by Patricia Polacco.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-
72750-8. 32p. 4-7 (est.). Fiction.
Patricia's birthday-to-remember starts out looking as though
Dad has forgotten the day completely. Instead, that night he
hatches a plan to photograph the monster of Clay Pit Bottoms —
the meanest, ugliest monster of all. So Patricia, Dad, her brother,
and her cousin gather supplies and set out. Suspense builds, and
the monster they meet is not the one they expect. When things
settle down and dry off, there's a real birthday The drawings are
family-warm, tousled, and rounded.
3.6 Samuels, Barbara. Happy Birthday, Dolores. Illustrated by Bar-
bara Samuels. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08391-8. 32p.
3- 6. Fiction.
It's Dolores's birthday, and the whole family, including Duncan
the cat, is awakened by her drum and vocal tribute to herself.
Everyone knows someone like Dolores, who prefers helmet and
boots to her party dress, who refuses to sit next to Stevie, and
who locks the cat in a closet because "little children can be very
rough with animals." When Duncan escapes and splats into the
cake, it's just another in a series of silly situations that are aug-
mented by the understated text and comical illustrations.
3.7 West, Colin. Go Tell It to the Toucan. Illustrated by Colin West.
Bantam/Little Rooster Books, 1990. ISBN 0-553-05889-4. 24p.
4- 8 (est). Fiction.
When Jumbo the Elephant wants a jamboree to celebrate his
birthday, he looks for the toucan to spread the word. Not finding
the colorful bird, Jumbo tells the tiger, who in turn tells the
zebra. So begins a series of conversations which end with a
monkey finally telling "it to the toucan." Bright watercolor illus-
trations complement this cumulative tale filled with humor and
surprise.
107
76
Celebrations
Christmas
3.8 Ahlberg, Janet, and Allan Ahlberg. The Jolly Christmas Post-
man. Illustrated by Janet and Allan Ahlberg. Little, Brown, 1991.
ISBN 0-316-02033-8. 34p. 3-8 (est.). Fiction.
Like the original Jolly Postman, this irresistible book describes the
postman's rounds and includes the mail he delivers — inserted in
envelope-like pages. Its rhymes are quiet and agreeable, the
illustrations homey and seasonal. But its greatest charm lies in
the cards and letters that are written by and to famous nursery-
rhyme characters. Children will be attracted by the story and
thrilled to examine the contents of each envelope.
3.9 Aliki. Christmas Tree Memories. Illustrated by Aliki. Harper-
Collins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-020008-1. 24p. 4-8. Fiction.
"Tinng. Tinng." When a bell sounds for Christmas Eve, two
children and their parents nestle by their candle-lit tree, drink
hot cocoa, and reminisce about Christmases past. Each home-
made ornament sparks a family recollection. Aliki's watercolor
and ink illustrations offer full-page memories, rich with the
warm details of family life. This intimate story will prompt
many readers' own holiday memories of relatives and friends.
Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
3.10 Bassett, Lisa. Koala Christmas. Illustrated by Jeni Bassett. Cob-
blehill Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-65065-2. 32p. 3-7 (est.). Fiction.
An argument between Wally Koala and his sister Carrie causes
a pre-Christmas disaster — the destruction of the family Christ-
mas tree decorations. But through cooperation, determination,
and a flock of brightly colored lorikeets, not only is the day
saved, but a magically decorated house becomes the envy of the
koala neighborhood. Watercolor illustrations of furred and
feathered creatures are irresistible.
3.11 Branley, Franklyn M. The Christmas Sky, rev. ed. Illustrated by
Stephen Fieser. Thomas Y. Crowell, 1990. ISBN 0-690-04772-X.
47p. 8-12. Nonfiction.
A bright star appeared in the sky and led three Wise Men to a
stable in Bethlehem. Never to be seen again,this star has puzzled
astronomers through time. In this award-winning book first
published in 1966, noted astronomer and science writer
Franklyn Branley presents several theories explaining the mys-
terious light. Interwoven with Biblical accounts, a revised, fact-
ERIC
108
Christmas
77
filled text offers readers a thought-provoking look at an event
that has "deep meaning to people around the world." New
full-page, dark-shaded illustrations capture the mystery and
drama. School Library Journal Best Books, 1966; Outstanding Science
Trade Books for Children in 1990.
3.12 Breathed, Berkeley. A Wish for Wings That Work: An Opus
Christmas Story, Illustrated by Berkeley Breathed. Little,
Brown, 1991. ISBN 0-316-10758-1. 300p. 4-8 (est.). Fiction.
Poor Opus! He so wants to fly, but he can't because he is a
penguin. After wistfully watching snow ducks soar, Opus writes
Santa, asking for "wings that will go." On Christmas Eve, when
Santa and his sleigh plunge into icy waters, it is Opus who
swims to the rescue, using previously unappreciated strengths.
Grateful, the snow ducks give Opus a very special Christmas
gift. Berkeley Breathed' s background as a cartoonist is apparent
in the clean, crisp illustrations which extend the text with humor
and sensitivity.
3.13 Brett, Jan. The Wild Christmas Reindeer, Illustrated by Jan
Brett. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22192-1. 29p. 4-8.
Fiction.
Santa asked Teeka, a young neighbor, to get his reindeer ready
to fly for Christmas Eve. As the days until Christmas tick by,
marked by Jan Brett's glorious side panels of elves at work,
Teeka is frustrated by her efforts to manage the wild reindeer.
After a particularly difficult session that results in a jumble of
antlers and a new understanding, Teeka finds that gentle ways
can accomplish what force and fury cannot.
3.14 Bulla, Clyde Robert. The Christmas Coat, Illustrated by Sylvie
Wickstrom. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-
99385-3. 36p. 6-9. Fiction.
Brothers Hans and Otto tire their widowed mother with their
persistent quarreling until, in despair, she draws a chalk line on
the cottage floor to mark exclusive territory. But when Hans
discovers a wrapped Christmas present on his side, the two
brothers fight so bitterly that the beautiful coat inside is badly
ripped. The common plight requires cooperative problem solv-
ing and sacrifice to ensure a Christmas for the coat's intended
recipient. Smudged line drawings filled with pastel shades re-
flect the understated lessons of old-fashioned Christmas giving.
ER?C
78
Celebrations
3.15 Bunting, Eve. The Day before Christmas. Illustrated by Beth
Peck. Clarion Books, 1992. ISBN 0-89919-866-X. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Fiction.
"Seven is a good age for your first Nutcracker." That's what
Grandpa thinks, so as a special gift he is taking Allie to the city
for the Christmas Eve performance. Even though Dad is afraid
that Grandpa may be saddened by memories of another little
girl and another performance long ago, Grandpa says, "A loving
memory is happy, not sad." It pleases Allie to know that the
mother whom she can barely remember made the same trip at
seven and loved the snow fairies best, too. Oil paintings trans-
late California scenes and delicate costumes.
3.16 Cole, Joanna. A Gift from Saint Francis: The First Crfeche. Illus-
trated by Michele Lemieux. Morrow Junior Books, 1989. ISBN
0-688-06503-1. 28p. 6 and up (est.). Nonfiction.
Joanna Cole connects gentle St. Francis of Assisi with the first
celebration of Christmas almost 800 years ago. Near Greccio,
Italy, as a gift to the people, St. Francis staged a re-creation of the
scene of the Christ Child's birth, with Mary, Joseph, shepherds,
stable beasts, and the infant himself. Little children sang a lull-
aby, perhaps the world's first Christmas carol. The period paint-
ings are in Renaissance style, golden-toned, and illuminated
with medallions.
3.17 Collington, Peter. On Christmas Eve. Illustrated by Peter
Collington. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-679-
90830-7. 32p. 3-7. Fiction.
Peter Collington's On Christinas Eve, dedicated to "chimneyless
children everywhere," will satisfy any child's curiosity about
how Santa enters a home when there is no fireplace. Story
frames on each page depict dainty fairies with tiny Christmas
tree candles guiding Santa on his appointed rounds.
Collington's use of earth tones, from the gray snow on the dap-
pled endpapers to the warm gray-browns of the neighborhoods
that Santa visits, creates a cozy wintry mood that permeates this
wordless book.
3.18 Cutting, Michael. The Little Crooked Christmas Tree. Illus-
trated by Ron Broda. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1991. ISBN
0-590-45204-5. 24p. 4-8. Fiction.
A combination of theme, intricate paper sculptures, and simple
story line will likely attract young readers to this Christmas tale.
Hi)
Christmas
79
A little tree's sacrifice to shelter a family of doves causes its trunk
to grow crooked, making it unsuitable for a Christmas tree.
Although the plot is familiar, the design and texture of the illus-
trations— from springtime on the tree farm to the glittering out-
door Christmas tree — may inspire responsive paper art produc-
tions.
3.19 Delacre, Lulu, compiler. Las Navidades: Popular Christmas
Songs from Latin America. Illustrated by Lulu Delacre. Scholas-
tic Hardcover Books/Lucas Evans Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-
43548-5. 32p. 5-11. Nonfiction.
In this collection of seasonal songs, presented in both Spanish
and English, the Christmas customs and celebrations of Latin
America, from Christmas Eve through Epiphany, are described
and explained. Lulu Delacre's paintings in the colors of her
native Puerto Rico illustrate a variety of holiday activities. De-
tailed information about each custom, musical scores at the end
of the book, and even the recipe for "Rosea de Reyes" may help
other children participate in the customs of Latin America.
3.20 dePaola, Tomie. Jingle the Christmas Clown. Illustrated by To-
mie dePaola. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22338-X.
32p. 4-«. Fiction.
In a sentimental Christmas tale set in Italy, Jingle, the youngest
clown of the circus and keeper of the baby animals, is left behind
by the other performers in a village where the people are too
poor for circuses. Jingle appreciates the wisdom and perspec-
tives of the villagers, especially Donna Chiara. His Christmas
gift for the village is a baby animal circus performed on a snowy
village street under diamond stars. In this large-scale picture
book, Tomie dePaola has painted background sets edge to edge.
3.21 Fleetwood, Jenni. While Shepherds Watched. Illustrated by Pe-
ter Melnyczuk. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992. ISBN
0-688-11599-3. 32p. 5 and up. Fiction.
Matthias is eager to celebrate his eighth birthday by spending
the night with the other shepherds. While watching the birth of
a lamb, he barely notices the brilliant light of an angel who has
come to herald the birth of Jesus. With the shepherds and new-
born lamb, he follows the star to the Bethlehem stable to see the
baby. Paintings, scratched for texture and contrast, glowingly
show the wonder and serenity of the dark night.
in
80
Zelebrations
3.22 Goode, Diane, compiler. Diane Goode's American Christmas.
Illustrated by Diane Goode. Dutton Children's Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-525-44620-6. 80p. All ages. Fiction.
From Laura Ingalls Wilder 's "Christmas on the Banks of Plum
Creek" to Carson McCullers's "Christmas Eve Rhyme," this col-
lection of poems, songs, traditional tales, and short stories cap-
tures the spirit of Christmas. Drawing upon the richness in
American culture, Diane Goode has selected entries from vari-
ous parts of the country, from different ethnic groups, and from
the works of some of America's finest authors. Framed with
decorative designs, the pages of this collection hold memorable
and traditional selections lovingly illustrated with soft-colored
paintings.
3.23 Guback, Georgia. The Carolers. Illustrated by Georgia Guback.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09773-1. 34p. All ages.
Fiction.
Five colorful carolers travel from house to house singing eleven
songs of the Christmas season. As the villagers hear them, they
put aside their holiday preparations and join the singing, caus-
ing the happy group to grow with every turn of the page. Lower
borders of words and music enable readers to join the celebra-
tion. Cut-paper collage in vivid colors adds to the joy of the
season.
3.24 Kneen, Maggie, compiler. The Twelve Days of Christmas: A
Revolving Picture Book. Illustrated by Maggie Kneen. Dutton
Children's Books, 1992. ISBN 0-525-44654-0. 12p. 4 and up. Non-
fiction.
The verses of this centuries-old carol are illustrated in muted
medieval tones within circular frames. Pull a ribboned tab, and
six picture segments revolve to illustrate the next verse. For
example, seven silky swans swim in a clear stream in sight of a
distant castle until the picture revolves to reveal eight serene
milkmaids gathered in a woven enclosure where sheep, chick-
ens, and rabbits frolic. The verses themselves are bounded by
holly, pears, bells, and packages.
3.25 Moore, Clement Clarke. The Night before Christmas; or, A
Visit of St. Nicholas: An Antique Reproduction. Philomel
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21614-6. 24p. 4-S. Fiction.
This reproduction of an antique picture book dating to about
1870 will appeal to those whose Christmas memories echo with
112
Christmas
81
the sounds of Clement Moore's traditional poem: "Merry Christ-
mas to all and to all a good night/' The book is composed of
ornate full-page illustrations of traditional Christmas scenes in-
terspersed with the text of the poem. The illustrations, created
from lithographs in soft Victorian colors, have been supple-
mented by hand-painted borders and introductory material con-
sistent with the spirit of the original.
3.26 Neville, Mary. The Christmas Tree Ride. Illustrated by Megan
Lloyd. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-0956-2. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Fiction.
"This Christmas/' Dad says, "will you help me cut the tree?"
And two eager children bundle into the station wagon for a ride
far into the country to Mr. Pennyman's Christmas Tree Farm.
Over icy streams, past houses with silver ribbons of smoke, and
up a steep, ice-covered hill is the tree of choice. Mr. Pennyman
chops it with his axe. Then it's a speedy downhill slide, followed
by wonderful paper-chain decorations, and Mr. Pennyman him-
self invited to Christmas dinner.
3.27 Niland, Kilmeny. A Bellbird in a Flame Tree: The Twelve Days
of Christmas. Illustrated by Kilmeny Niland. Tambourine
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10798-2. 32p. 3 and up. Fiction.
If "The Twelve Days of Christmas" had originated in Australia,
one's true love may have expected to receive such delights as
lorikeets, wallabies, and a bellbird in a flame tree. In celebration,
there are quokkas cooking, numbats knitting, dingoes dancing,
and koalas clowning. The panorama of Australian fauna seems
a very merry setting for the holidays.
3.28 Nixon, Joan Lowery. Thafs the Spirit, Claude. Illustrated by
Tracey Campbell Pearson. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-
83434-3. 32p. 6-10 (est.). Fiction.
Claude and Shirley's adopted kids, Bessie and Tom, anticipate
the arrival of Sandy Claus, although he's never before been to
frontier Texas. Bessie knits a Texas-sized stocking, writes a letter,
and waits. So that the children won't be disappointed on Christ-
mas Eve, roly-poly Claude dons red flannel underwear, flours
his beard, and smacks right into the real Sandy (also wearing
cowboy boots) on the roof. The dialect isn't quite Texan, but
the spirit is. Pen and watercolor are used for lighthearted
results.
ERIC
113
82
Celebrations
3.29 Nordqvist, Sven. Merry Christmas, Festus and Mercury* Illus-
trated by Sven Nordqvist. Carolrhoda Books, 1989. ISBN 0-
87614-383-4. 22p. 4-6 (est.). Fiction.
In the past, Farmer Festus and his zany cat, Mercury, have spent
the day before Christmas Eve trimming the tree, shopping for
food, and baking gingerbread. This year Festus injures his foot,
so they can't proceed with their holiday plans. Their Christmas
looks bleak until the neighbors help out, and Festus and Mer-
cury end up having the merriest of times. Full-color cartoon-like
illustrations, bursting with additional story detail and humor,
enliven each page.
3.30 Pilkington, Brian. Grandpa Claus. Illustrated by Brian Pilk-
ington. Carolrhoda Books, 1990. ISBN 0-87614-436-9. 28p. 4-8.
Fiction.
Grandpa Harry loves to dress up as Santa Claus; in fact, he may
be the best Santa impersonator in the world. Harry's beard —
long, white, and real — ensures his job for the weeks before
Christmas each year. But the worst times for Harry are the days
after Christmas, when there is nothing to do but groom his beard
and look for work. How Harry mismanages a series of part-time
jobs between Christmasses is the heart of the book. Lively, car-
toon-like drawings add to the silliness.
3.31 Ray, Jane, compiler. The Story of Christmas/La Historia de
Navidad- Illustrated by Jane Ray Dutton Children's Books, 1991.
ISBN 0-52544768-7 (English); 0-525-44830-6 (Spanish). 32p. 6
and up. Nonfiction.
The story of Christmas— beginning with the angel Gabriel's tid-
ings and ending with the safe return of Jesus, Mary, and Joseph
to Nazareth — is told in the words of the Gospels of Matthew and
Luke in the Authorized King James Version of the Bible. It is also
told through Jane Ray's bordered folk-art paintings, highlighted
with gold. Companion editions are available in English and
Spanish.
3.32 Rogers, Jacqueline. The Christmas Pageant Illustrated by Jac-
queline Rogers. Grosset and Dunlap, 1989. ISBN 0-448-40151-7.
32p. 3-7. Fiction.
As the children in a snowy New England village prepare for the
annual Christmas pageant in a barn by painting the flats, getting
fitted for costumes, and rehearsing their roles, the Biblical story
of Christmas serves as text. "Baby Jesus" squirms in a snowsuit,
114
Christmas
83
awaiting his entrance. Traditional Christmas hymns with piano
arrangements are set into the illustrations. The dress rehearsal
melts into the performance, as the "wise men" hurry through
snow drifts, carrying their cutout camel. At the pageant's end,
"Baby Jesus," fast asleep, is bundled home.
333 San Souci, Robert D. The Christmas Ark. Illustrated by Daniel
San Souci. Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-385-24837-7. 30p. 6^10. Fic-
tion.
Two girls, bound for San Francisco with their mother, are frus-
trated when their clipper ship is becalmed near the city on
Christmas Eve. Missing their father and fearful that St. Nicholas
will be unable to find them, they're reassured when a flying
ark — piloted by the old saint himself — carries them around the
world in search of the perfect place to spend Christmas. Full-
page watercolors resplendent with the blues of sky and sea
support each page of text, adding a sense of dreamy satisfaction
to this warm story of family love.
3.34 Sharmat, Marjorie Weinman. I'm Santa Claus and I'm Famous.
Illustrated by Marylin Hafner. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-
8234-0826-4. 30p. 4-8 (est.). Fiction.
It's Career Day at school, and Santa Claus is invited. Santa
indicates that he will retire some day and will need a replace-
ment. Now everyone wants to be Santa when they grow up!
Santa solves the problem by asking those interested in the posi-
tion to "try out" by showing love and by giving special presents
like caring, listening, or laughing. Told in cartoon-like blocks,
this story provides a starting point for discussion of intangible
gifts.
3.35 Slate, Joseph. Who Is Coming to Our House? Illustrated by
Ashley Wolff. G. P. Putnam's Sons/Sandcastle Books, 1991. ISBN
0-399-21790-8. 32p. 4-8. Fiction.
Stable animals prepare for the Christ child, all doing their part:
'"We must clean,' says Lamb. 'Dust the beams,' says Ram."
Woodcut-like animals emerge from heavily bordered stable
scenes. Through rhyming text distributed one line per page,
young children will soon be reading along. The repeated chorus
is a question-answer from a soft-eyed cow and a tiny mouse:
'"Who is coming to our house?' 'Someone, someone,' says
Mouse." In the well-known final scene, the refrain varies: "Wel-
come, welcome to our house."
1 15
84
Celebrations
3.36 Solotareff, Gr£goire. Noel's Christinas Secret. Illustrations by
Gn§goire Solotareff. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-
35544-4. 30p. 6-8 (est). Fiction.
When a boy named Noel discovers a huge sack in the forest with
written instructions, he is drawn into the world of the dwarf
magician toy makers, Apple, Piggy, and Thumb. If Noel follows
their instructions and keeps the secret that they whisper, who
knows what he may become? Bright primary colors and bold
lines enhance the simple tale of the origin of Santa Claus.
3.37 Stevenson, James. The Worst Person's Christmas. Illustrated by
James Stevenson. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10211-5.
32p. 4-10 (est.). Fiction.
The "worst person in the world" doesn't like anything — espe-
cially Christmas. Thinking "the worst" just needs to be shown
kindness, the neighborhood children leave a fruitcake on his
front step. But on his way to deposit the fruitcake in the garbage
can, "the worst" trips, flops onto a sled, races through town out
of control, and finally arrives at a neighborhood holiday party, a
fruitcake gift in hand. In the face of genuine welcome, "the
worst" has a change of heart (however momentary) and takes on
a more "Christmas-like" disposition.
3.38 Taylor, Theodore. Maria: A Christmas Story. Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-217763-9. 84p. 8-12. Fiction.
Without thinking, eleven-year-old Maria, tired of hearing her
two gringo friends brag about their families' elaborate floats for
the San Lazaro, California, Christmas parade, blurts out that her
family is entering this year. With no money and no help, save a
picture Maria found in an old Spanish Bible, Father builds a
simple nativity scene. After a stubborn ox sits down on the job,
twenty Mexican American men rally to pull their people's first
float. The humble scene silences the crowd and starts a tradition.
3.39 Tyler, Linda Wagner. The After-Christmas Tree. Illustrated by
Susan Davis. Viking Penguin, 1990. ISBN 0-670-83045-3. 32p.
4-7. Fiction.
Linda Wagner Tyler and Susan Davis help children transform
their sadness about the end of the holidays into the joy of creat-
ing the "after-Christmas tree." The tree, which the narrator and
her family redecorate as part of their after-Christmas party, is
symbolic of life continuing beyond the holiday season. Davis's
bright watercolors, reminiscent of folk art, capture the winter
116
A. The 13th Clue by Ann Jonas (see 3.3). B. A Birthday Basket for Tfa by Pat Mora;
illustrated by Cecily Lang (see 3.4). C. The Jolly Christmas Postman by Janet and
Allan Ahlberg (see 3.8).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE 117
B.
Big Pumpkin
c.
A. Max's Chocolate Chicken by Rosemary Wells (see 3.48). B. How Many Days to
America? A Thanksgiving Story by Eve Bunting; illustrated by Beth Peck (see 3.75).
C. Big Pumpkin by Erica Silverman; illustrated by S. D. Schindler (see 3.57).
• BEST COPY AVAILABLE
ERIC
Christmas 85
wonderland of the outdoors. After reading the book, many chil-
dren will want to set up their own "after-Christmas tree/' The
book would lend itself well to a January nature lesson in a
primary classroom.
3.40 Wildsmith, Brian. A Christmas Story. Illustrated by Brian
Wildsmith. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-679-
90074-8. 24p. 5-10. Fiction.
Brian Wildsmith tells the Christmas story from the point of view
of a little donkey who sets out after his mother on the road to
Bethlehem. Along the way, the little donkey and his child com-
panion ask travelers to point the way, until they see the glorious
star. Luminous landscapes in golds, silvers, and royal blues
establish the union of the ordinary and the miraculous.
3.41 Wilhelm, Hans. Schnitzel's First Christmas. Illustrated by Hans
Wilhelm. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989.
ISBN 0-671-67977-5. 26p. 4-7 (est.). Fiction.
Schnitzel is a puppy who has everything. When Gruff the cat
explains that Santa is coming, Schnitzel learns that he must
make a Christmas wish. But what is a pampered puppy to wish
for? Even as Schnitzel meets Santa, he still has no wish. But wise
Santa knows that a friend is the best Christmas present any
puppy could wish for. Wintery watercolors bring on smiles.
3.42 Worth, Valerie. At Christmas Time. Illustrated by Antonio Fras-
coni. HarperCollins/Michael di Capua Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-
205020-6. 32p. All ages (est.). Nonfiction.
All the warmth, sights, sounds, and tastes of Christmas are
entrapped in this collection of poems for an audience not bound
by age. In "Wrappings," the poet declares: "The plainest / Un-
derwear the / Homeliest socks, / Parceled in / golden foil and
/ Silver string, / Or even in flimsy / Red-and-green poinsettias,
/ Become the / Sumptuous offerings / Of a king/' Light strings
are likened to "a luminous vine, / Lush with the fruits / Of
paradise." Fat woodcuts enhanced with paint, cut-paper collage,
and reliefs give folk flavor.
3.43 Yolen, Jane. Hark! A Christmas Sampler. Illustrated by Tomie
dePaola. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21853-X. 128p.
All ages (est.). Fiction/Nonfiction.
Jane Yolen and Tomi dePaola pair up to offer an oversized edi-
tion of stories, history, carols, poems, and legends of Christmas,
119
86
Celebrations
set apart with the reverence and whimsy of dePaola's distinctive
illustrations and designs. Beautiful original carols include the
"Stable Hymn" and "The North Pole Express/' both with words
by Yolen and musical arrangement by her son, Adam Stemple.
Also fun and sure to be performed is "The Foolish Shepherd: A
Play in Verse/'
Easter
3.44 Easter: The King James Version* Illustrated by Jan Pienkowski.
Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-82455-5. 32p.
All ages. Nonfiction.
In dramatic silhouettes against dappled backgrounds, the story
of Easter unfolds from selected scripture verses taken from the
King James Bible. Illuminated manuscript, gilded borders, and
gold-outlined vines reach symbolically across the spreads.
Grape, poppy, ivy, and holly vines are valiantly spiked with
thorns.
3.45 Kunhardt, Edith. Danny and the Easter Egg. Illustrated by Edith
Kunhardt. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08036-7. 21p.
3-6. Fiction.
In her fourth Danny book, Edith Kunhardt offers childlike draw-
ings of the alligator preparing for Easter with his animal friends.
Danny dyes one special egg with a D for Danny. The Easter
morning egg hunt yields many treats, including Danny's special
egg. Later that day, when the family visits Granny, Danny gives
her his egg as an Easter present.
3.46 Polacco, Patricia. Rechenka's Eggs. Illustrated by Patricia Po-
lacco. Philomel Books, 1988. ISBN 0-399-21501-8. 30p. 4-9 (est.).
Fiction.
For many years Old Babushka has painted eggs in her beautiful
Ukrainian style to take to the Easter Festival to be judged. One
year, just before the festival, she discovers an injured goose. She
names the goose Rechenka and decides to nurse her back to
health. When Rechenka accidentally breaks all of Babushka's
wonderfully painted eggs, what happens next is a miracle: Re-
chenka begins to lay stunningly colored eggs, one a morning, to
replace the broken ones. The bright, detailed paintings authen-
tically reproduce the Ukrainian style of egg painting and the
spires of famed Russian cities. IRA Children's Book Award (Illus-
tration), 1989.
120
Halloween
87
3.47 Tarlow, Nora. An Easter Alphabet: From a Poem by Nora Tar-
low. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22194-8. 32p. 3-7
(est.). Fiction.
In an Easter-time rhyme, each letter of the alphabet is matched
with a springtime symbol or action and is accompanied by a
sentimental painting dating from the late nineteenth through the
early twentieth centuries. Twenty-six artists are represented,
their works selected predominately from German, English, and
American postcards. Although many artists are anonymous,
some classic Kate Greenaway is included.
3.48 Wells, Rosemary. Max's Chocolate Chicken. Illustrated by Rose-
mary Wells. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-8037-
0586-7. 32p. 3-7. Fiction.
On Easter morning Max is delighted to find a chocolate chicken
in the birdbath, but his bossy sister Ruby insists that the one who
finds the most Easter eggs is the one who gets the chicken. While
Ruby finds a basketful of eggs, Max finds mud, acorns, a spoon,
and ants, but no eggs. Yet despite his inability to stick to the task,
Max scuttles away with the prize chicken, leaving Ruby ranting,
bargaining, and bluffing. Luckily, the Easter Bunny drops a
chocolate duck into the birdbath, leaving Ruby puzzled and the
ending open for speculation.
Halloween
3.49 Bauer, Caroline Feller, editor. Halloween: Stories and Poems.
Illustrated by Peter Sis. J. B. Lippincott, 1989. ISBN 0-397-32301-
8. 82p. 6-12 (est.). Fiction /Nonfiction.
Creepy short stories and poems, both sprightly and gloomy,
comprise this Halloween collection by Caroline Fetter Bauer.
Along with works by Lilian Moore, Paul Galdone, Eleanor Far-
jeon, X. J. Kennedy, Jack Prelutsky, and Judith Viorst appear
holiday recipes, a lengthy bibliography of Halloween books,
and Peter Sis's understated black-and-white illustrations.
3.50 Bunting, Eve. In the Haunted House. Illustrated by Susan Med-
daugh. Clarion Books, 1990. ISBN 0-395-51589-0. 28p. 5-8 (est.).
Fiction.
Large and small sneakers enter a house ''where :v.e scary things
hide." Creatures of all sorts — witches, mummies, and skele-
tons— menace the unseen visitors. Finally, big sneakers ahead of
ERLC
L 21
88
Celebrations
small, the visitors race outside, revealing a small daughter, ready
to take her panting father through the Halloween House again.
Accompanying Eve Bunting's rhyming text are Susan Med-
daugh's scratchy illustrations, which are not-so-scary when ex-
amined closely: a red paint can sits behind a "blood-stained"
coffin, the skeleton is on a stick, and the horned creature has a
zipper.
3.51 Cassedy, Sylvia. The Best Cat Suit of AIL Illustrated by Rose-
krans Hoffman. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-
8037-0J517-4. 48p. 5-7 (est.). Fiction.
Matthew is having a very bad Halloween day. With a runny nose
and in a heap of self-pity, he must wear his cat suit indoors and
just watch the parade of trick-or-treaters. Back where I used to
live, Matthew grumps, Halloween wouldn't be cold, and kids
wouldn't have to wear snowsuits under their costumes. Even
the cat suits that other kids wear are judged by their failures —
until the very best cat suit of all arrives. Rosekrans Hoffman's
witty pencil and ink illustrations for this Easy-to-Read Book
can't be contained by their frames.
3*52 Christelow, Eileen. Jerome and the Witchcraft Kids. Illustrated
by Eileen Christelow. Clarion Books, 1988. ISBN 0-89919-742-6.
29p. 4rS (est). Fiction.
Jerome Alligator thinks that he is a terrific baby-sitter, much
better than his sister Winifred. "No job is too difficult," his
posters proclaim. "Don't let it go to your head," warns Wini-
fred's friend, Lulu. Then Jerome gets a baby-sitting request from
a Mrs. Witchcraft on Halloween night. Not only do the Witch-
crafts live in a haunted house, but their refrigerator is full of
eyeball sandwiches, vampire blood, and worms. When Jerome
finally discovers that Winifred and Lulu have played a joke on
him, he retaliates. Zany crayon illustrations add to the silliness.
3*53 Cohen, Miriam. The Real-Skin Rubber Monster Mask. Illus-
trated by Lillian Hoban. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-
09123-7. 28p. 6-10 (est.). Fiction.
From the author/ illustrator team that produced When Will I
Read? and First Grade Takes a Test comes another warm and
sensitive portrayal of childhood concerns. Jim's carefully chosen
rubber monster mask is so frightening that on Halloween night
it scares even him. But second-grade friends rally to ensure that
Jim gets to share half of Willy's spaghetti and meatball costume.
122
Halloween
89
Fear of scary things is the natural book talk that will emerge
from young readers and listeners.
3.54 Howe, James. Harold and Chester in Scared Silly: A Hallow-
een Treat. Illustrated by Leslie Morrill. Morrow Junior Books,
1989. ISBN 0-688-07667-X. 42p. 4-9 (est.). Fiction.
The house is dark and the Monroe family absent when Harold,
the family's shaggy dog, begins his story. Harold and his friends,
Howie, a timid puppy, Chester, a bossy cat, and Bunnicula, an
unusual rabbit, are "scared silly" when a witch enters their
house and concocts a witch's brew. Even when the mystery is
resolved, Harold and his friends remain suspicious. Boys and
girls will enjoy speculating about whether or not the witch is
really Grandma in a costume.
3.55 Limburg, Peter R. Weird! The Complete Book of Halloween
Words. Illustrated by Betsy Lewin. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN
0-02-759050-X. 122p. 8 and up (est). Nonfiction.
Here's a one-stop, fun-filled reference book for Halloween, a
compendium that traces the history of the symbols and the
words most associated with the most shivery of holidays. Read-
ers will learn, for example, that it was Shakespeare in Macbeth
who first used the word weird and that souls of the dead took the
form of bats. But unlike a strict etymological source, the text is
stuffed with intriguing facts and humorous asides. Sections ti-
tled "Do You Know" offer child-appealing background related
to Halloween traditions.
3.56 Martin, Bill, Jr., and John Archambault. The Magic Pumpkin.
Illustrated by Robert J. Lee. Henry Holt, 1989. ISBN 0-8050-1134-
X. 28p. 4-7 (est). Fiction.
Halloween magic and mishap occur when the narrator of this
ballad-like story, told in rhyming prose, chooses the wrong
pumpkin from the pumpkin patch to guard his door on Hallow-
een. The seemingly innocent pumpkin is really the leader of a
gang of mischief-makers. However, all returns to normal when
the jack-o'-lantern's candle is extinguished. Robert Lee's curly
line drawings and wispy watercolor washes add an eerie touch
to the tale.
3.57 Silverman. Erica. Big Pumpkin. Illustrated by S. D. Schindler.
Macmillan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-782683-X. 32p. 4-8 (est.). Fiction.
ERiC
123
90 Celebrations
In this variant of "The Great Big Enormous Turnip/7 a green-
faced witch raises a pumpkin that is too large to harvest: "It's big
and it's mine, but it's stuck on the vine/' So, a series of her
monstrous friends — ghost, vampire, and mummy — lends a
hand. Even so, it takes the wit of a tiny bat to propose a coopera-
tive plan that yields Halloween pumpkin pie for all. Full-page,
spirited illustrations for this cumulative tale are done in gouache
on colored papers.
3.58 Van Leeuwen, Jean. Oliver and Amanda's Halloween* Illus-
trated by Ann Schweninger. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992.
ISBN 0-8037-1238-3. 48p. 4-8 (est.). Fiction.
In an Easy-to-Read Book for beginning chapter-book readers,
Oliver and Amanda Pig's sibling relationship is realistic, but cast
with just the right degree of tolerance to make for a warm,
family book. Oliver prefers scary costumes to Amanda's benign
ones; Dad knows how to achieve compromise in carving a jack-
o'-lantern to please both; Mom accepts that little pigs climb on
things to reach donuts; and Amanda spots monsters on Hallow-
een night. Illustrations are done in watercolor-washed colored
pencils.
3.59 Watson, Wendy. Boo! It's Halloween* Illustrated by Wendy Wat-
son. Clarion Books, 1992. ISBN 0-395-53628-6. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Fiction.
The whole family is preparing for Halloween. There are cos-
tumes to make, jack-o'-lanterns to cut, cookies to bake, and faces
to paint. Then it's off to the school's haunted house for supper
and games. But the fun is not over yet. The whole village pours
onto the winding streets for trick-or-treating, and the reader is
given a bat's eye view of the festivities. Wendy Watson has
wound riddles, rhymes, and knock-knock jokes in speech bal-
loons around the characters.
3.60 Yolen, Jane. Best Witches: Poems for Halloween. Illustrated by
Elise Primavera. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21539.
47p. 5-9 (est.). Fiction.
Did you know that the modern witch does aerobic exercise and
flies on a vacuum cleaner? Or that witches participate in
"witchy" game shows and usually put a little extra poison ivy
on their pizzas? These surprising revelations and many others
can be found in this collection of Jane Yolen's witch poems. The
ERIC
124
Jewish Holidays
91
humorous verses and Elise Primavera's appealing illustrations
should attract any Halloween enthusiast.
Jewish Holidays
3.61 Gross, Judith, Celebrate: A Book of Jewish Holidays. Dlus-
trated by Bari Weissman. Piatt and Munk/AU Aboard Books,
1992. ISBN 0-448-40303-X. 30p. 5-8. Nonfiction.
Family and food take center stage on Jewish holidays, and Ju-
dith Gross emphasizes both. Joyous celebrations and the tradi-
tional demands of each occasion are colorfully illustrated. With
smiling cartoon faces, the somber Day of Atonement loses its
bleakness. The legends of Purim, Hanukkah, and Passover are
deftly outlined, blending early origins and modem interpreta-
tion.
3.62 Kimmel, Eric A. The Chanukkah Guest. Illustrated by Giora
Carmi. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-8234-0788-8. 26p. 4^8 (est.).
Fiction.
Bubba Brayna fixes potato latkes for Hanukkah, with extras for
the rabbi, who is expected to visit. When a hungry, marauding
bear comes to the cottage in the forest, Bubba, with her failing
eyesight and hearing, believes that he is her bearded guest, and
feeds him the treat. Giora Carmi's illustrations capture the hu-
mor of Eric Kimmers mischievous tale so that children, like
Bubba herself, can laugh at the absurd mistake.
3.63 Kimmel, Eric. Hershel and the Hanukkah Goblins. Illustrated
by Trina Schart Hyman. Holiday House, 1989. ISBN 0-8234-0769-
1. 32p. 4-9 (est.). Fiction.
The old synagogue is haunted by goblins who won't let the
villagers celebrate Hanukkah, so Hershel volunteers to trick the
goblins into lifting their evil curse. He must spend eight nighcs
in the synagogue, lighting Hanukkah candles each night (with-
out letting the goblins blow them out) and tricking the goblin
king into lighting the last night's candles himself. This book
includes full-color yet shadow-filled paintings of the monstrous
goblins and concludes with a description of the Jewish tradi-
tions detailed in Hershel's adventure. Caldecott Honor Book, 1990.
3.64 Koralek, Jenny. Hanukkah: The Festival of Lights. Illustrated
. by Juan Wijngaard. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN
0-888-09330-2. 32p. All ages. Nonfiction.
125
92
Celebrations
When the Romans sacked Jerusalem and caused havoc in the
Temple, a vigilant family of Jewish brothers led the resistance.
Against all odds, the eternal light continued to burn while a new
supply of oil was found. The legend is celebrated as the Jewish
festival of Hanukkah. This story, simply told, is illustrated with
classic-style paintings set off in Roman-arched frames.
3.65 Manushkin, Fran. Latkes and Applesauce: A Hanukkah Story.
Illustrated by Robin Spowart. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-590-42261-8. 32p. 6-10 (est.). Fiction.
Through the voice of the Jewish storyteller comes the story of a
special Hanukkah — "perhaps a miracle. Maybe yes, maybe no."
The Menashe family isolated by a blizzard, fears that there will
be no traditional Hanukkah feast of latkes and applesauce, and
perhaps no food at all. Nevertheless, the family takes in a stray
dog and kitten who come to their door. On the eighth night, the
dog and cat become part of the miracle, ensuring the feast and
earning new names for themselves — Latke and Applesauce.
Scenes are softly blurred impressions in muted tones.
3.66 Modesitt, Jeanne, compiler. Songs of Chanukah. Illustrated by
Robin Spowart. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-57739-1. 32p.
6-12 (est.). Nonfiction.
Fourteen songs for the eight-day holiday of Hanukkah are of-
fered in both Hebrew and English, arranged for piano, guitar,
and voice. Along with the musical scores are descriptions of the
traditions of the candle lighting and its accompanying ceremo-
nies. Rabbits and mice in human guise act out the religious and
cultural patterns, recounting the tale of Maccabean heroism
which is remembered through the lighting of candles, in games
and dance, and through special recipes.
3.67 Youdovin, Susan Schaalman. Why Does It Always Rain on
Sukkot? Illustrated by Miriam Nerlove. Albert Whitman, 1990.
ISBN 0-8075-9079-7. 30p. 4-8. Fiction.
The chief angel is handing out special gifts to all the "Holidays."
Among them, Passover, with a cohort of boisterous Israelites,
receives the Seder plate, and a bespectacled Simchat Torah is
given the tvcroll of the Law. Finally, little Sukkot, believing him-
self forgotten, sobs when presented with a sukkah. His tears are
remembered each year when it rains through the branches of
homemade sukkahs. Framed ink and watercolor paintings and a
concluding description of the holidays on the Jewish calendar
ERIC
126
Multiple Holidays
93
add charm and interest to each annual celebration. Notable 1990
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
3.68 Zalben, Jane Breskin. Leo and Blossom's Sukkah. Illustrated by
Jane Breskin Zalben. Henry Holt, 1990. ISBN 0-8050-1226-5. 16p.
4-8 (est.). Fiction.
When brother and sister bears Leo and Blossom and their
friends decide to build a sukkah to celebrate the harvest festival
of Sukkot, they get carried away and hang too many fruits,
vegetables, popcorn, and paper chains from the flimsy roof of
the booth. When everything starts to fall, they welcome their
parents' help and enjoy hearing their father tell the story of the
Jewish festival. One of Jane Breskin Zalben's three books on
Jewish holidays, this book might serve as an introduction to
celebrations enjoyed by different religions.
Kwanzaa
3.69 Walter, Mildred Pitts. Have a Happy A Novel. Illustrated by
Carole Byard. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-
688-06923-1. 106p. 7-10. Fiction.
Besides the confusion of his birthday falling on Christmas,
eleven-year-old Chris knows that his chances for getting a bicy-
cle for either Christmas or his birthday are slim. His father has
been out of work for a long time. Furthermore, nobody seems to
take a Christmas birthday seriously. -'They could just say, Have
a happy. Then I could add anything I want: happy birthday,
happy Christmas, happy Kwanzaa." It is the spirit of the African
American holiday of Kwanzaa that draws his family together in
celebration of their heritage, and problems find resolution. No-
table 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
Multiple Holidays
3.70 Baker, James W. April Fools' Day Magic. New Year's Magic.
Thanksgiving Magic. Illustrated by George Overlie. Lerner,
1989. 48p. 6-12 (est.). Nonfiction.
Three in a series of Holiday Magic Books offer directions for
holiday magic tricks. For New Year's, magicians can tell for-
tunes with a gravity-defying ring or can make a selected playing
card show up at the end of the spelling of "Happy New Year/'
For Thanksgiving, magicians can perform a trick to demonstrate
127
94
Celebrations
the never-ending nature of leftovers. At the end of each book,
performers are shown tricks for doing better magic. Step-by-step
directions are accompanied with two-color illustrations.
3.71 dePaola, Tomie. My First Chanukah. My First Easter. My First
Halloween. My First Passover. My First Thanksgiving. Illus-
trated by Tomie dePaola. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989-92. 12p. 1-5.
Nonfiction.
Young children are introduced to the basic concepts and sym-
bols of five holidays — Hanukkah, Easter, Halloween, Passover,
and Thanksgiving — with characteristic Tomie dePaola simplic-
ity and charm in the My First Holidays series. The Halloween
book tells readers that "Halloween colors are black and orange,"
while the Hanukkah book informs us that the middle candle in
a menorah is "the shamash, or 'helper candle/ We use it to light
the other candles." Watercolored ink drawings depict the most
important details of each holiday.
3.72 Low, Alice, compiler. The Family Read-Aloud Holiday Treas-
ury. Illustrated by Marc Brown. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books,
1991. ISBN 0-316-53368-8. 154p. All ages. Fiction/Nonfiction.
Suitable as a resource for classrooms, this collection offers choice
stories, excerpts, songs, and poems in celebration of holidays
great and small. Children can celebrate Grandparents' Day,
Earth Day, Book Week, and even the First Day of School with
literature read aloud. Included are works by Beverly Cleary, Jack
Prelutsky, Ann Cameron, and Jean Fritz. Throughout the book,
lively illustrations spill from Marc Brown's crayon-bordered
frames.
3.73 Seuss, Dr. (Theodor S. Geisel). Oh, the Places You'll Go! Illus-
trated by Dr. Seuss. Random House, 1990. ISBN 0-679-90527-8.
32p. 6 and up. Fiction.
As a lasting legacy from Dr. Seuss, Oh, the Places You'll Go! is
destined to be placed into the hands of those at the launch
points, crossroads, and milestones of life. Although the "Seus-
sian" pathways are pleasant, colorful nonsense, the good doctor
acknowledges life's challenges, pitfalls, and stumbling blocks.
Even so, the message is full of confidence and reassurance for
the traveler: "Today is your day! / Your mountain is waiting. /
So ... get on your wayl"
128
Thanksgiving
95
St Patrick's Day
3.74 Kroll, Steven. Mary McLean and the St, Patrick's Day Parade.
Illustrated by Michael Dooling. Scholastic Hardcover Books,
1991. ISBN 0-590-43701-1. 32p. 3-10 (est.). Fiction.
On the cover, an exuberant Irish- American lass of the nineteenth
century, wearing a perfect shamrock, rides triumphantly in Mr.
Finnegan's green-trimmed cart in the St. Patrick's Day Parade.
The story tells how (with a bit of leprechaun magic) she gets
there. Mary McLean, a refugee of the Irish potato famine, lives
with her family in a cramped basement room in lower Manhat-
tan. She is determined to ride in the parade, but Mr. Finnegan
insists that she must do something special first— like find a
perfect shamrock in the middle of the winter.
Thanksgiving
3*75 Bunting, Eve. How Many Days to America? A Thanksgiving
Story. Illustrated by Beth Peck. Clarion Books, 1988. ISBN 0-
89919-521-0. 30p. 5-9. Fiction.
"How many days to America?" asks the little girl as the small,
overcrowded fishing boat pulls away from all that is familiar
and dear to this Caribbean refugee family. Hope is the watch-
word as mother, father, son, and daughter, among others, make
their way to a new life amid much adversity. This present-day
Thanksgiving story reflects the multiculturalism that was em-
braced at the original table.
3.76 Hoban, Lillian. Silly Tilly's Thanksgiving Dinner. Illustrated
by Lillian Hoban. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-022423-1.
63p. 4-8. Fiction.
In another adventure with Silly Tilly to amuse young readers,
Silly Tilly tackles Thanksgiving dinner. Although her plans go
awry, the dinner turns out to be a success when her guests show
up with the food. Lillian Hoban's characterization of Tilly Mole
in both word and illustration adds appeal, as does the text-to-
illustrations ratio of this I Can Read Book.
3.77 Leedy, Loreen. The Dragon Thanksgiving Feast: Things to
Make and Do. Illustrated by Loreen Leedy. Holiday House,
1990. ISBN 0-8234-0828-0. 28p. 4-8. Nonfiction.
"The dragons howl at the harvest moon, 'Thanksgiving Day is
coming soon!'" And so, ten blue dragons with red scales, purple
129
96
Celebrations
wings, and bulging green eyes begin their preparations. The
busy dragons teach readers how to make such crafts as a wild
bird feeder and an edible necklace and such recipe items as
Munch & Crunch Salad. When the big day arrives, so do green
and purple guests, a parade, games, a feast, and, finally, a nap.
Dragon fans will also enjoy Loreen Leedy's A Dragon Christmas.
Valentine's Day
3.78 Buckley, Kate. Love Notes. Illustrated by Kate Buckley. Albert
Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-4780-8. 32p. 7-10 (est.). Fiction.
Katy gets the first love note from Joe. She writes back that she
loves him too, and tells her mother that she'll marry him. But
Katy's note falls into the hands of Joe's friends, and a flurry of
teasing erupts. As second graders work from "love" to "like,"
the playground is filled with familiar chants and taunts. Strips
of pictures surrounding the text offer other playground lore —
jump-rope jingles and clapping games. The satisfactory outcome
is worth talking about in classrooms.
3.79 Hoban, Lillian. Arthur's Great Big Valentine. Illustrated by Lil-
lian Hoban. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-022407-X. 64p.
5-6. Fiction.
In this latest addition to Lillian Hoban's series, Arthur and his
best friend Norman have had a disagreement and are not speak-
ing to each other. Arthur even stubbornly refuses to participate
in Valentine's Day festivities. It takes a secret from Norman's
little brother to finally get the two friends to admit that they miss
each other. This warm story, supplemented with animated illus-
trations, is an I Can Read Book.
ERLC
130
Classics
The classics should not be exempted from revaluation by virtue of
their past veneration. They should be able to compete favorably with
contemporary books. Unimpressed by vintage or lineage, children
seldom read a book because they think they should. They read more for
enjoyment than edification.
Charlotte Huck, Children's Literature in the Elementary School
ERIC
131
98
4 Classics
4.1 Barrie, J. M. Peter Pan: The Complete and Unabridged Text
Illustrated by Scott Gustafson. Viking Penguin/Ariel Books,
1991. ISBN 0-670-83608-7. 184p. All ages. Fiction.
Richer, darker, and more moving than other reissues of this
classic, Scott Gustafson's powerful, lavish, full-color oil paint-
ings set a superb frame for the magic and charm of the tale and
the dramatic depictions of pirates, Indians, children, and lost
boys. Worth a close look is the artist's rendition of the under-
ground world of the lost boys.
4.2 Carroll, Lewis (compiled by Cooper Edens). Alice's Adventures
in Wonderland: The Ultimate Illustrated Edition. Bantam
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-553-05385-X. 208p. 4 and up (est.). Fiction.
This edition of Lewis Carroll's unabridged text features selected
illustrations from more than twenty-five classic "Alice" editions,
ranging from the original in 1865 through editions of the 1930s.
Included in this visual chronicle are the artwork of John Tenniel,
Margaret Tarrant, Millicent Sowerby, Milo Winter, and Harry
Rountree, among others. The illustrations vary in color, style,
and line from shadowy, black-and-white sketches to pale, soft-
edged pastels to vibrant, bright-hued plates. This combination
of strikingly different artistic interpretations will surprise and
delight readers of all ages.
4.3 Chekhov, Anton (translated by Richard Pevear). Kashtanka. Il-
lustrated by Barry Moser. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-
21905-6. 47p. All ages. Fiction.
Russian children love this story of the foxlike Kashtanka, the lost
dog who is found by a kindly animal trainer. In his new home,
Kashtanka lives with a trained goose, pig, and cat. Eventually
he, too, must practice to become part of their circus act. But
when Kashtanka makes his debut at the circus, he is recognized
by his former owners and races from the ring. Barry Moser 's
paintings of animals are formal portraits, while his street scenes
are snowy postcards.
4.4 Dickens, Charles. A Christmas Carol. Illustrated by Scott Cook.
Random House, 1990. ISBN 0-394-92239-5. 60p. 8-12. Fiction.
132
Classics
99
Charles Dickens's own abridgment of his nineteenth-century
Christmas classic was created especially for reading aloud. Scott
Cook's twenty-one amber-toned oil paintings manage to evoke
both the warmth of the season's traditional festivities and the
sparse trappings of the miserly Scrooge.
4.5 Hale, Lucretia (adapted by Amy Schwartz). The Lady Who Put
Salt in Her Coffee. Illustrated by Amy Schwartz. Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-243475-5. 32p. 4-8. Fiction.
Poor Mrs. Peterkin adds salt instead of sugar to her coffee. Her
sympathetic family tries to help by seeking advice from the
dotty local chemist, the village herb woman, and the matter-of-
fact lady from Philadelphia. In this adaptation of Lucretia Hale's
century-old tales in "The Peterkin Papers/' Amy Schwartz's
stylized illustrations allow Mrs. Peterkin to be lovably scatter-
brained.
4.6 Hodges, Margaret, adapter. Don Quixote and Sancho Panza.
Illustrated by Stephen Marchesi. Charles Scribner's Sons, 1992.
ISBN 0-684-19235-7. 72p. 8-12 (est.). Fiction.
In her introduction, Margaret Hodges quotes the axiom that Don
Quixote should be read at least three times— once as a youth,
again in middle age, and finally in old age. If so, readers might
want to begin with this abridged edition. Here, the Spanish
knight errant sets off to defend kingdoms, protect damsels, pun-
ish the proud, and reward the humble. With a mix of idealism,
slapstick, pathos, and kindness, he tilts at windmills and ear-
nestly displays his bravery. Black-and-white illustrations are
sensitive to the times and temperaments of the heroes.
4.7 Irving, Washington. Rip Van Winkle. Illustrations by Arthur
Rackham. Dial Books, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1264-2. 124p. All ages
(est.). Fiction.
Washington Irving's classic tale of Rip Van Winkle, the amiable
ne'er-do-well who sleeps for twenty years in the Catskill Moun-
tains and misses the Revolutionary War, has been reissued with
celebrated artist Arthur Rackham's original 1905 illustrations.
The publishers have reproduced the first edition of Irving's
story using the original type and layout. The illustrations have
been "enhanced by complementary colored backgrounds/' re-
sulting in a beautifully bound edition, printed on quality paper
in a way that emphasizes the detail and care of Rackham's
illustrations.
133
100
Classics
4.8 Irving, Washington (retold by John Howe). Rip Van Winkle.
Illustrated by John Howe. Little, Brown, 1988. ISBN 0-316-37578-
0. 30p. 4-8. Fiction.
This exquisitely illustrated version of Washington Irving's clas-
sic story of a twenty-year nap in the Catskill Mountains is a
choice example of the role that children's books can play in
introducing young readers to adult fiction. The text, adapted
from the original, retains both color and reasonable complexity.
John Howe's luminous and realistic full-color paintings make
the story easy to follow and hold the reader's interest. The
wizened and gnomish faces of Howe's men are especially en-
gaging.
4.9 Kipling, Rudyard. Just So Stories. Illustrated by David Framp-
ton. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-023296-X. 122p. 5 and up
(est.). Fiction.
David Frampton's traditional woodcuts accompany twelve of
Kipling's most-beloved pourquoi tales, including "The Ele-
phant's Child," "How the Camel Got His Hump," and "How the
Leopard Got His Spots." A full-page woodcut sets off the open-
ing of each story; each major character is stylized and tinted in
ochres, blues, and golden tans; and each story is dramatically
bordered by black frames etched with the story motif.
4.10 Melville, Herman. Catskill Eagle. Illustrated by Thomas Locker.
Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21857-2. 28p. 5 and up. Fic-
tion.
These short, powerful lines from Moby Dick, set to sweeping
illustrations of the Hudson Valley by painter Thomas Locker,
make an excellent children's book. Melville's description of the
Catskill eagle, which he compares to far-seeing, deep-minded
individuals, is broad enough to be accessible to children. The
paintings portray the eagle against a breathtaking natural back-
ground; the natural affinity that children feel for animals will
draw them to these stirring depictions of eagles in flight, with
their young at the nest, and lifting fish from icy streams.
4.11 Salten, Felix. Bambi: A Life in the Woods. Illustrated by Michael
J. Woods. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1992.
ISBN 0-671-73937-9. 158p. 8-12 (est.). Fiction.
Over sixty-five years ago, John Galsworthy wrote in the fore-
word to Bambi that the book is "delicious not only for children
but for those who are no longer so fortunate." For children
ERIC
134
TREASURE
ISLAND
FrOBERT LOUIS STEVENSON ■ ■
ILLUSTRATED BY ROBERT INGPEN . . " ■■■ ^'.^y
the £adywho put salt
■ , inhercoffee
Lucretia Hale
Amy Schwartz
B.
A. Treasure Islandby Robert Louis Stevenson; illustrated by Robert Ingpen (see 4.13).
B. The Lady Who Put Salt in Her Coffee by Lucretia Hale; adapted and illustrated by
Amy Schwartz (see 4.5). C. The Antique Store Cat by Leslie Baker (see 5.12).
ERLC
135
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
A.
B.
A. The Wise Woman and Her Secret by Eve Merriam; illustrated by Linda Graves (see
5.58). B. Appalachia: The Voices of Sleeping Birds by Cynthia Rylant and Barry
Moser (see 5.63). C. Amy Elizabeth Explores Bloomingdale's by E. L Konigsburg
(see 5.56). D. The Leaving by Budge Wilson (see 5.64).
° 1 IK
ERJC AJb BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Classics
101
familiar only with the animated film, the text of the original
Bambi may be a welcome read-aloud. Felix Salten knew the
forest and its inhabitants well. Michael Woods's double-page
watercolors in pale forest shades capture the buck's action and
fear as truthfully as the fawn's idyllic glades.
4.12 Spyri, Johanna (translated by Helen B. Dole, with revisions by
John Githens). Tomi Ungerer's Heidi. Illustrated by Tomi
Ungerer. Delacorte Press, 1990. ISBN 0-385-30244-4. 310p. 8-12.
Fiction.
Illustrator Tomi Ungerer has added depth and charm to the
timeless Heidi by Johanna Spyri. Both black-and-white and color
illustrations feature characters and incidents that are at once
humorous and moving — from the delicate warm colors depict-
ing a quiet moment shared by Grandmamma and Heidi reading
by lamplight, to a black-ink sketch of an indignant Fraulein
Rottenmeier that is framed by shadows and that emphasizes the
witchlike characteristics of her profile. Ungerer's flair for cap-
turing both sentiment and fancy in illustrations make this un-
abridged version of the classic unique.
4.13 Stevenson, Robert Louis. Treasure Island. Illustrated by Robert
Ingpen. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-84685-6. 176p. 8 and
up. Fiction.
Opposite the list of color plates in Robert Ingpen's version of this
classic tale is a realistic, carefully inked map of Treasure Island,
dated 1750, ragged-edged and aged, but with its scale and let-
tering so perfectly rendered that it well serves the upcoming
adventure. In this large-scale edition, chapter openings are dou-
ble-page paintings, offering portrait-like character interpreta-
tions. Other paintings vary from a light-bathed view of Jim
Hawkins to aarkly menacing scenes. Penciled details add rich-
ness to each chapter.
4.14 Thoreau, Henry David (text selections by Steve Lowe). Walden.
Illustrated by Robert Sabuda. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-
22153-0. 30p. 4 -12. Nonfiction.
In 1845, Henry David Thoreau spent two years living alone in a
cabin he built himself on the banks of Walden Pond near Con-
cord, Massachusetts. Selected passages from Walden focus on
experiences meaningful for children to create this celebration of
Thoreau's masterpiece about life amid nature's quiet. Double-
page linoleum-print illustrations, with text inset, create a warm
o 137
ERIC
102 Classics
tone of nineteenth-century America. This book can motivate
younger readers to explore the adult version of Walden in later
years. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
4.15 Thurber, James. Many Moons. Illustrated by Marc Simont. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich/HBJ Contemporary Classics, 1990. ISBN
0-15-251872-X. 48p. 4-8. Fiction.
Originally illustrated by Louis Slobodkin and awarded the Cal-
decott Medal in 1944, James Thurber's story of the princess who
wanted the moon — and got it — has been redesigned and reillus-
trated. Artist Marc Simont uses whimsical watercolor illustra-
tions enveloped by areas of white space to bring to life the antics
of the spoiled Princess Lenore.
4.16 Ushinsky, Konstantin (adapted by Marguerita Rudolph). How a
Shirt Grew in the Field. Illustrations by Erika Weihs. Clarion
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-395-59761-7. 32p. 6-9 (est.), miction.
When Vasya was promised a new shirt made of the flax seeds
that his father sowed, he wondered how it was possible. Vasya
observes the development of the seeds into silky grass, sheaves,
woven cloth, and finally an embroidered linen shirt. New illus-
trations of a hundred-year-old tale feature rounded figures
against a Ukrainian landscape.
ERIC
13S
Contemporary
Realistic Fiction
If a children's writer presents . . . characters honestly and is truthful
about their thoughts and their feelings, he [or she] is giving . . .
readers "a means to gain a hold on fate" by showing them that they
can trust their thoughts and their feelings, that they can have faith in
themselves. He lor she] can also show them a bit of the world, the
beginning of the path they have to tread; but the most important
thing he lor she] has to offer is a little hope, and courage for the
journey.
Nina Bawden, "Emotional Realism in Books
for Young People/' The Horn Book Magazine
139
104
5 Contemporary
Realistic Fiction
Adventure Stories
5.1 Albert, Burton. Where Does the Trail Lead? Illustrated by Brian
Pinkney. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991.
ISBN 0-671-73409-1. 30p. 4-^8 (est).
Detailed scratchboard illustrations create the feel of Massachu-
setts' Nantucket Island, ripe for exploration. And where does the
trail lead? An African American boy follows it "over hills and
hollows . . . past three limbs bent by the wind, and tide-pools of
periwinkles.,, Through text that rises and falls as the tides, the
child moves past derelict vestiges of the built landscape, a rail-
road track, shanties, and a fence, before returning to picnic with
his family by the water's edge at twilight.
5.2 Crews, Donald. Shortcut. Illustrated by Donald Crews. Gieen-
willow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-06437-X. 32p. 4-7 (est).
It's getting dark, so seven children decide to take the shortcut
home — a shortcut that follows a train track along a narrow
mound, surrounded by briers and water "full of snakes." The
possibility of an oncoming train is not a concern for the frolick-
ing friends, until . . . "Whoo-whooH Klackity-klak! Klackity-
klak!" The close call sends them diving for safety. Donald Crews
portrays his frightening memory in closeup perspectives, using
watercolor and gouache paints in the shadowy colors of dusk.
5.3 George, Jean Craighead. On the Far Side of the Mountain.
Illustrated by Jean Craighead George. Dutton Children's Books,
1990. ISBN 0-525-44563-3. 170p. 8-12.
Sequel to the 1959 classic My Side of the Mountain, Jean
Craighead George's novel continues the adventures of Sam
Gribley as he carves out a life for himself on his mountain. When
Sam's sister suddenly disappears and his favorite pet, a pere-
grine falcon, is taken from him, Sam treks across the New York
wilderness to rescue both. The award-winning author's prose,
maps, and illustrations provide specific information for wilder-
id
ERLC
Adventure Stories
105
ness survival (such as the methods for constructing a water
pump, twig compass, water bag, and tree house).
5.4 George, Jean Craighead. Shark beneath the Reef. ISBN 0-06-
021993-9. 182p. 9 and up (est).
Tomas, a ninth grader on the Island of Coronado, dreams of
becoming the town's hero by catching the whale shark that rips
his family's nets. Equal to his desire for helping his family as a
great fisherman, though, is Tomas's hope of becoming a marine
biologist. The choice is a difficult one in this coming-of-age
novel about a Mexican boy. It is a good companion to Scott
O'Dell's The Black Pearl and Hemingway's The Old Man and the
Sea. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.5 Helldorfer, Mary Claire. Sailing to the Sea. Illustrated by
Loretta Krupinski. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83520-X.
32p. 5-8 (est).
A young narrator describes in poetic prose his first sailing trip
down the river to the sea: "Straight ahead are double bridges;
steel spans cut the sky into puzzle pieces/' Together, the boy and
his aunt and uncle swim, pick flowers on shore, have dinner in
a waterfront restaurant, and weather a hard storm. Finally, they
reach the sea and reunite with family members who drive to
meet them. A wide range of sea colors, perspectives, and moods
show the joyous activities of sailing.
5.6 Lyon, George Ella. Come a Tide. Illustrated by Stephen Gam-
mell. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-
08454-X. 32p. 4-7.
Snows in March, coupled with rain, cause Grandma to predict:
"It'll come a tide." As the flood-warning whistle blows, kinfolk
and neighbors begin leaving their homes, checking on each
other as they make their way to Grandma's house on higher
ground. The waters subside and families begin to dig in the
mud, searching for the buried treasure of their belongings, feel-
ing safe until next spring. Stephen Gammeirs cool-toned paint-
ings are water-drenched and neighbor-friendly. ALA Notable
Children's Books, 1991.
5.7 Radin, Ruth Yaffe. High in the Mountains. Illustrated by Ed
Young. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-775650-5. 30p. 5-10 (est.).
A child describes in warm and simple words the beauty of life
in the mountains with Grandpa. Ed Young's impressionistic
141
106
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
paintings in bright pastels help evoke the flavor of life in the
high country. A companion book for comparison could be Cyn-
thia Rylant's When I Was Young in the Mountains. Notable Chil-
dren's Trade Books in Science, 1989.
5.8 Rand, Gloria. Salty Dog. Illustrated by Ted Rand. Henry Holt,
1989. ISBN 0-8050-0837-3. 30p. 9-11 (est.).
Zack is building a boat to sail around the world, and Salty Dog
intends to stay by his side throughout the entire process. Salty
soon learns to escape his snug, fenced-in home and ride the ferry
to see Zack at the boatyard. Ted Rand's watercolors are so filled
with movement that readers will think they, too, feel the sea
spray when Zack and Salty finally embark on their maiden
voyage.
5.9 Taylor, Theodore. Sniper. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989.
ISBN 0-15-276420-8. 227p. 10-13 (est).
Ben Jepson's parents own and operate a private big-cat preserve
in Southern California. But only ten days after his parents leave
for a research trip to Africa, everything at Los Coyotes seems to
be going wrong — the chief animal handler is hospitalized, an
elusive sniper shoots at the cats night after night, and a fire
threatens the property The local authorities are mystified. Un-
able to contact his parents, fifteen-year-old Ben and his friend
Sandy find clues to the past that bring this adventure story to a
thrilling conclusion. ALA Best Books for Young Adults, 1990.
Animal Stories
5.10 Aylesworth, Jim. Mother Haiverson's New Cat. Illustrated by
Toni Goffe. Atheneum, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31465-5. 26p. 5-8.
When Mother Halverson needs a new mouser for her pantry, she
sends her husband to "look over the cats in the barn and bring
in the best of the lot." Yet despite Farmer Haiverson's efforts,
none of the crabby, flabby, nor blabby cats meet Mother Haiver-
son's expectations, and all are unceremoniously deposed. Fi-
nally, a shy tabby named Abby fulfills the job description to
perfection. Humorous full-page drawings illustrate this cat tale
with a lesson: "The nice shall inherit the mice."
5.11 Baker, Alan. Two Tiny Mice. Illustrated by Alan Baker. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0973-0. 25p. 3-8
(est.).
142
Animal Stories
107
When two tiny field mice investigate the world around them,
they discover the many wonders of their woodland home. Writ-
ten in rhythmic and descriptive verse, the book invites children
to view nature from a "mouse's point of view/' Full-color pencil
sketches silhouetted against watercolor panoramas capture the
beauty of various animals in their natural habitats.
5.12 Baker, Leslie. The Antique Store Cat Illustrated by Leslie Baker.
Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-07837-9. 28p. 5-8 (est.).
On her birthday, Alice, a calico cat who lives in a third-story
apartment, escapes to the city streets below. But Alice has
trouble finding her way home and eventually finds shelter and
company in an antique store. After her mischievous nature helps
the store owner spot a fake statue, Alice is reunited with her
owner and returns home. Soft, impressionistic watercolor paint-
ings illustrate this sequel to Third Story Cat
5.13 Barracca, Debra, and Sal Barracca. The Adventures of Taxi Dog.
Illustrated by Mark Buehner. Dial Books for Young Readers,
1990. ISBN 0-8037-0672-3. 32p. 4-8.
Through rhyming verses, Maxi, a homeless dog, tells how he
survived in the city until Jim the taxi driver adopts him and they
begin to share the front seat of Jim's yellow cab. Together, man
and dog rush a mother-to-be to the hospital, bring clowns from
the airport, and enjoy each other's company. Brightly colored
paintings (such as one of Maxi donning a Groucho Marx dis-
guise to entertain passengers) add detail and wit. A cat and often
a rabbit hide on each spread.
5.14 Calhoun, Mary. High-Wire Henry. Illustrated by Erick Ingra-
ham. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-08984-4. 40p. 5-10
(est).
When a new puppy comes home, Henry, the Siamese cat from
Hot-Air Henry and Cross-Country Cat, is no longer the center of
attention. Determined to regain his place, Henry tries to impress
his family by tightrope walking on branches and fences. Later,
when the puppy is stranded on a window ledge, Henry uses his
high-wire skills to turn rescuer. Full-page, realistic watercolors
complement this humorous story of a cat that saves the day.
5.15 Carle, Eric. The Very Quiet Cricket Illustrated by Eric Carle.
Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21885-8. 24p. 3-6.
14.1
108
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
One warm day a tiny cricket is born and begins his encounters
with other insects in his world. Yet when trying to answer their
greetings, the little cricket can produce no sound — until he
meets a female cricket and discovers his song. The rhythmic and
repetitive text is illustrated with brightly colored, tissue-
textured collage paintings. A microchip at the book's end treats
readers to a cricket's chirp, "the most beautiful sound that she
had ever heard."
5.16 Carlstrom, Nancy White. Moose in the Garden. Illustrated by
Lisa Desimini. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-021014-1. 32p.
3-8 (est.).
When a hungry moose visits the garden, Mother and Father are
none too pleased to see the intruder eat up all their broccoli,
cabbage, and cauliflower. Their son, however, has a different
perspective on the garden visitor. After all, he maintains, there
are certain vegetables that no one should have to eat — like broc-
coli, cabbage, and cauliflower. Cumulative, rhythmic text and
vibrant stylized paintings fill the pages to make this an inviting
story.
5.17 Carter, Margaret. Go Away, William. Illustrated by Carol
Wright. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-717791-2. 25p. 4^8 (est.).
William the cat likes to be near his family. The trouble is that he
gets in the middle of things — in the middle of Granny's sewing
basket, Father's typing, and Rose's garden. The response of each
family member is, "Oh, do go away, William!" But where should
a cat who likes people go? The family devises a delightful solu-
tion. Brightly colored, cartoon-like illustrations support the
book's simple and predictable text.
5.18 Cleveland-Peck, Patricia. City Cat, Country Cat. Illustrated by
Gilly Marklew. Morrow Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11645-0.
30p. 5-9 (est).
Freckle is a very mysterious country cat. His owner, David,
worries when Freckle leaves the farm for days on end, even
though Freckle always returns. Sarah owns a city cat named
Charlie, a cat with very similar characteristics. Like Freckle,
Charlie disappears for days and causes Sarah to worry dread-
fully. When Sarah decides to follow Charlie, she discovers that
this cat leads a city life as "Charlie" and a country life as
"Freckle." All ends happily when David and Sarah negotiate
dual ownership of this city-country cat.
ERIC
144
Animal Stories
5.19 George, William T. Box Turtle at Long Pond. Illustrated by Lind-
say Barrett George. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08185-
1. 25p. 5-8.
It has been a long day at Long Pond. The box turtle must find
food, water, and shelter as well as defend itself from a hungry
raccoon— all before the sun sets. Full-page, magnificently
painted illustrations bring out the details of animal lives woven
together in a simple setting. With its turtle's-eye view of the
world, this book could enrich studies of turtles and habitat shar-
ing. Notable Children's Trade Books in Science, 1989.
5.20 Gordon, Gaelyn. Duckat. Illustrated by Chris Gaskin. Scholastic
Hardcover Books, 1992. ISBN 0-590-45455-2. 24p. 2-6.
Imagine a duck that says meow, hates the water, drinks milk from
a bowl, catches mice, and chases balls of yarn. Mild little Mabel
finds such a duck to be "Odd. Very odd/' Despite her efforts to
teach her "duckat" his identity, Mabel is unsuccessful until the
duck escapes from a dog by flying to the top of a lamp post. "If
you are a cat, you'll just have to stay up there," says Mabel.
"Quack," says the duck, and flies down. It was only joking, you
see.
5.21 Gottlieb, Dale. Big Dog. Illustrated by Dale Gottlieb. Morrow
Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07382-4. 32p. 3-7.
Lilly, a city child, is afraid of things— of the dark, of elevators,
and of walking to the store. Her parents think a dog might help.
But like the puppy in Norman Bridwell's Clifford the Big Red Dog,
Lilly's beloved pet grows and grows and grows until Lilly must
decide where her dog can live best. She acts with her growing-
up head and heart to make the best decision. Stylized illustra-
tions emphasize the size differences between the little girl and
the Big Dog, whose needs she considers as well as her own.
5 22 Hindley, Judy. Mrs. Mary Malarky's Seven Cats. Illustrated by
Denise Teasdale. Orchard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08422-1. 32p.
4-7.
Each one is unique and each one is special; all together they are
Mrs. Mary Malarky's seven cats. A baby-sitter by trade, Mrs.
Malarky tells her own "bedtime" story about how seven cats
came to live with her and how all but one found a new home.
Watercolor-washed drawings illustrate this humorous tale of
seven cats and a special baby-sitter.
ERIC
145
110
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.23 Lindenbaum, Pija (retold by Gabrielle Charbonnet). Boodil My
Dog. Illustrated by Pija Lindenbaum. Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN
0-8050-2444-1. 47p. 5-9 (est.).
In this English adaptation of a Swedish story, Boodil is described
by her dog-loving owner as brilliant, strong, and brave. How-
ever, Pija Lindenbaum's whimsical pictures of Boodil the bull-
terrier cause the reader to question such a description. Would a
brilliant guard dog sleep in an overstuffed chair with her
"blankee"? Would she be suspicious of rain puddles? Would she
think the vacuum cleaner was a dangerous enemy? Children
and adults alike will agree that regardless of Boodil's shortcom-
ings, she is the perfect pet.
5.24 MacLachlan, Patricia. Three Names. Illustrated by Alexander
Pertzoff. HarperCollins/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1991. ISBN
0-06-024036-9. 32p. 5-9.
In Patricia MacLachlan's poetic prose, Great-grandfather tells of
his youth, when boys wore overalls with buckles and rode to
school in wagons. He describes a loyal dog with three names —
called something different by each member of the family. Images
of the prairie are offered in full-page, sun-kissed watercolor
impressions of life that "stretch out like a quilt all around/7
Sensory impressions— smells of harness leather, of wood, and of
hay— pervade. A likely companion book is Cynthia Rylant's
When I Was Young in the Mountains.
5.25 McDonald, Megan. Is This a House for Hermit Crab? Illus-
trated by S. D. Schindler. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08455-8. 26p. 3-7 (est.).
Hermit Crab is not happy with his old house— the shell on his
back — so he sets out in search of a new house before the hungry
pricklepine fish finds him and eats him. So he walks "along the
shore, by sea, in the sand . . . scritch-scratch, scritch-scratch" in
search of a new home. But every possible home that he finds is
too dark or too deep or has too many holes or is already some-
one else's home. Is there any house for Hermit Crab? Pastel
double-page spreads realistically depect the hermit crabs, prick-
lepine fish, and fiddler crabs of the story. IRA Children's Book
Award, 1991.
5.26 Moore, Inga. Six-Dinner Sid. Illustrated by Inga Moore. Simon
and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-73199-
8. 28p. 6-10 (est).
146
Animal Stories
111
Sid the cat has six homes and six owners; consequently, he eats
six dinners each day. But when he comes down with a cold and
is taken to the vet six times, Sid's secret is discovered, and his
six-meal-a-day life comes to an end — that is, until Sid finds new
owners who feel that he is a six-dinner-deserving cat. Full-color
sketches illustrate this humorous tale of a sociable and industri-
ous cat with a mind of his own.
5.27 Naylor, Phyllis Reynolds. Shiloh. Atheneum, 1991. ISBN 0-689-
31614-3. 144p. 8-13 (est).
When a bedraggled, uncertain beagle follows eleven-year-old
Marty home from near the Shiloh schoolhouse, Marty falls in
love with the dog and calls him Shiloh. Marty learns that the dog
is being abused by its owner, and he faces a dilemma between
social and moral responsibilities. When he decides to hide Shi-
loh in a pen beyond his family's West Virginia home, he dis-
obeys his parents, endangers the dog, and jeopardizes his fam-
ily's trust. Marty's determination and monumental effort to gain
Shiloh's freedom make for a lasting story. Nexvbery Medal, 1992.
5.28 Ormerod, Jan. Kitten Day. Illustrated by Jan Ormerod. Lothrop,
Lee and Shepard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08537-7. 32p. 3-6
(est).
When a shy little, clever little, cheeky little kitten enters a young
child's life, she must be patient and gentle and calm to win the
kitten's confidence. And so she is. One line of simple, rhythmic
text runs along the bottom of the page beneath Jan Ormerod's
trademark divided-page illustrations of a child giving loving
attention to her new pet.
5.29 Pedersen, Judy The Tiny Patient. Illustrated by Judy Pedersen.
Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-90170-3. 32p.
Simple human compassion for a wounded wild bird warms this
story. The straightforward narrative relates the way a young girl
and her grandmother care for a sparrow with a broken wing.
The nature theme is carried into the soft illustrations and even
the endpapers, colored in mellow earth-tones.
5.30 Pryor, Bonnie. Greenbrook Farm. Illustrated by Mark Graham.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-
69205^. 26p. 6-10 (est).
4-8.
112
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Springtime at Greenbrook Farm means the smell of apple blos-
soms and the arrival of baby animals. Seen through the eyes of
a young girl narrator going about her morning chores, life on the
farm is filled with the excitement and activity of a spring day
Full-page impressionistic paintings help capture the wonder of
new beginnings and the warmth of family tradition.
5.31 Ryder, Joanne. Catching tne Wind. Lizard in the Sun. Winter
Whale. Illustrated by Michael Rothman. Morrow Junior Books,
1989-91. 32p. 4-7.
The Just for a Day series invites readers to "become" a member
of a flock of Canada geese, or a chameleon, or a humpback
whale in a tropical sea. Joanne Ryder's lyrical descriptions read
almost like poetry, while Michael Rothman's naturalistic, dou-
ble-page paintings serve as background. Additional contribu-
tors to the series are zoologists, who have ensured that children
read accurate portrayals of living animals at the same time as
they enjoy imagining the world from alternative points of view.
5.32 Rylant, Cynthia. Henry and Mudge Get the Cold Shivers: The
Seventh Book of Their Adventures. Illustrated by Su?ie Steven-
son. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-778011-2. 48p. 5-7 (est.).
Two special friends, Henry and his huge, lovable dog, Mudge,
are both sick. While Henry is confined to his bed, Mudge faith-
fully stays at his side. When Henry finally recovers, Mudge
won't get up, so Mom decides Mudge must go to the vet. Now
it's Henry's turn to be the devoted bedside companion while
Mudge recuperates. This easy-to-read chapter book is the sev-
enth in a series about Henry and his dog. Children who love
dogs or who fantasize about owning a Mudge might try their
hands at writing Henry and Mudge stories or other pet adven-
tures of their own.
5.33 Schoenherr, John. Bear. Illustrated by John Schoenherr. Philomel
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22177-8. 28p. 4-8.
All alone, a young bear confronts the unforgiving wilderness.
Fearful and hungry, he faces an angry moose, an old bear, and a
stream of salmon that elude his grasp. But, with practice, he
learns to fish and to survive on his own. Double-page spreads in
realistic watercolors heighten the drama of the cub's search for
his mother. Using browns, blues, and greys, Caldecott-winning
artist John Schoenherr invites the reader into the Alaskan land-
scape.
ERIC
14S
Ethnic, Racial and Religious Groups
113
5.34 Sharmat, Marjorie Weinman. I'm the Best! Illustrated by Will
Hillenbrand. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0859-0. 29p. 6-9
(est).
Dudley the dog is called Sparky, Fluffy, Mopsy, Cedric, and Fritz
as he is shuffled from owner to owner with varying degrees of
love and affection. His most recent home, however, may be the
best of all. Robert's loss of his dog, Fritz, who looked remarkably
like Dudley, causes him to select Dudley from the many choices
at the local pound. As Robert and Dudley become acquainted,
each begins to love the other for his own unique qualities. Teach-
ers may wish to use this book for a discussion about learning to
love and get along with new members of a family or community.
5.35 Taylor, Theodore. Tuck Triumphant. Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-
385-41480-3. 150p. 9 and up (est.).
In this sequel to The Trouble with Tuck, Helen's family discovers
that Chok-Do, the Korean orphan whom they are adopting, is
deaf. Believing themselves unable to cope with his disability,
they search for a practical but loving solution. As the title sug-
gests, Tuck provides the answer. A roller coaster of emotions
results when Tuck, a blind golden Lab, and her own guide-dog,
Daisy, become the the thread which binds this story into one of
compassion and understanding for families and classrooms.
5.36 Vyner, Sue. The Stolen Egg. Illustrated by Tim Vyner. Viking
Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-84460-8. 32p. 4-6 (est.).
"Something was coming " With each successive invasion, an
egg is transported to the habitat of the thief, who compares it
with her own eggs. First, an albatross swoops down upon it, but
before long the egg is carried away, in turn, by the snake, the
crocodile, the ostrich, and the tortoise. Finally, the albatross re-
appears to carry the egg far across the seas to the place where
she found it — at the feet of a father penguin. In a patterned tale
with large-scale, realistic animals, the end is a joyous family
reunion.
Ethnic, Racial, and Religious Groups
5.37 Crew, Linda. Children of the River. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN
0-385-29690-8. 213p. 12 and up (est.).
Sundara escapes war-torn Cambodia only one step ahead of the
Khmer Rouge army, but as she flees to America she is forced to
149
114
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
leave behind her family. In America, she finds herself struggling
to keep alive her Cambodian heritage— which demands that she
wait for her missing family to arrange her marriage to a Cambo-
dian boy— while resisting the strong affection that she feels for
Jonathan, an American high school boy She cannot help but
wonder: is she disloyal to her heritage if she feels love for this
American? IRA Children's Book Award, 1990.
5.38 Dooley, Norah. Everybody Cooks Rice. Illustrated by Peter J.
Thornton. Carolrhoda Books, 1991. ISBN 0-87614-412-1. 30p. 4-9.
As Carrie goes from house to house searching for her brother,
she discovers that each family from a different country is mak-
ing a rice dish. The full-page paintings support cultural diver-
sity through the depictions of realistic family settings and char-
acters. The use of solid figures, bright colors, and specific
cultural characteristics by illustrator Peter Thornton produces
an ideal, culturally diverse neighborhood. The recipes for rice
included in the back provide a useful means for encouraging
respect for diversity in the classroom.
5.39 Guy, Rosa. The Ups and Downs of Carl Davis III. Delacorte
Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-29724-6. 115p. 10 and up.
For a New York boy of twelve possessing "intellectual ability
transcend[ing] that of most children my age/' going to live with
his grandmother in rural South Carolina is akin to exile. Carl's
puffery sets him apart from the community; kids at school con-
sider him a show-off, prattling on about black history. Grandma
is patient; she has lived the history and suffered the racism that
Carl experiences through a teacher. Grandma knows how to
speak from the heart. In a story told entirely through letters
home, Carl's frustration and confusion are replaced by growing
acceptance of others and himself. Notable 1989 Children's Trade
Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.40 Levin, Ellen. I Hate English! Illustrated by Steve Bjorkman.
Scholastic, 1989. ISBN 0-590-42305-3. 32p. 6-9.
Mei Mei hates English. In a heartwarming story of one child's
determined resistance to learning English and her real, recogniz-
able fears that she will lose her own identity in the midst of this
new language, Ellen Levine succeeds in translating an important
theme. At the Chinatown Learning Center in New York, bright
Mei Mei, a newcomer from Hong Kong, works happily — in Chi-
nese. But an inspired teacher with clever methods makes English
150
Human Relationships
irresistible. Now, Mei Mei speaks in whichever language she
chooses.
5.41 Myers, Walter Dean. The Mouse Rap. Harper and Row, 1990.
ISBN 0-06-024344-9. 186p. 8-12 (est.).
A busy summer is in store for Mouse, a fourteen-year-old boy in
Harlem. Over a period of twelve weeks, he battles a bully, falls
in and out of love, learns to dance, improves his basketball
game, and grapples with his father's possible return to the fam-
ily. Along the way, he discovers a gangster's fortune. The award-
winning author's style includes African American dialect, play-
ful slang, and a rap-lyric introduction to each chapter.
5.42 Polacco, Patricia. Just Plain Fancy. Illustrated by Patricia Po-
lacco. Bantam/Little Rooster Books, 1990. ISBN 0-553-07062-2.
32p. 4r3.
Naomi longs to have something fancy, even though it's not the
way of her Amish community. So when she discovers a fancy
egg while out gathering hen eggs, Naomi decides to keep it. She
is delighted with the peacock that hatches from the egg, until she
discovers that the Amish shun people who dress too fancy.
Though Naomi fears the worst, the outcome of this conflict is
rewarding for everyone in this Amish community.
Human Relationships
Everyday Life
5.43 Brillhart, Julie. Story Hour — Starring Megan! Illustrated by
Julie Brillhart. Albert Whitman, 1992. ISBN 0-8075-7628-X. 28p.
4-7.
On days when the baby-sitter can't come, Megan's mother, a
librarian, takes Megan and her baby brother Nathan to work.
Megan is her mother's assistant — watering plants and decorat-
ing the bulletin board. But best of all about the library, Megan
likes to read books. She can't wait to read them, and she reads
everyplace she goes — at home, at school, and in between. Then
one day, right during story hour, baby Nathan howls, and guess
who substitutes as story reader?
5.44 Bunting, Eve. No Nap. Illustrated by Susan Meddaugh. Clarion
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-89919-813-9. 32p. 2-6 (est.).
ERLC
151
116
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
"Daddy promised Mommy that Susie would take a nap." But try
as he might, Susie is resistant. Dad's every plan and indul-
gence— snacking, walking, dancing, reading sleepy books, gath-
ering favorite toys — result in Susie's refrain: "No nap." Finally,
while coaxing Susie to pretend to be a sleepy little mouse who
doesn't talk or move, Dad falls asleep in the midst of the strewn
nap offerings. Light-touch illustrations translate the humor to
small children.
5.45 Byars, Betsy. Bingo Brown's Guide to Romance. Viking Pen-
guin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-84491-8. 115p. 10-13 (est).
Bingo Brown is writing a guide to romance, dedicated to his
baby brother. At least, Bingo is planning the guide — as a ques-
tion-answer treatise, such as what if you send your true love a
photocopied love letter because it was so good that you decided
to keep a copy? Without warning, Bingo's girlfriend Melissa is
back in town, acting strangely and causing Bingo to doubt him-
self and to behave weirdly. In Bingo's fourth adventure, his
crush is funny, real, and painful.
5.46 Byars, Betsy. Wanted ... Mud Blossom. Illustrated by Jac-
queline Rogers. Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN 0-385-30428-5. 148p.
8-12.
Everything has turned upside down at the Blossom household.
Mom's new beau has canceled his weekend visit. Mad Mary, a
local homeless person who is feared by some and loved by
others, is missing. And young Junior Blossom has accused his
grandfather's dog, Mud, of eating the class hamster that he
brought home from school for the weekend. As usual, Betsy
Byars creatively brings each story to a happy conclusion while
managing to capture the absurdities of situations and the feel-
ings of each member of the Blossom family.
5.47 Carlstrom, Nancy White. The Snow Speaks. Illustrated by Jane
Dyer. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-12861-9. 30p. 6-10.
Alliterative language in a simple verse-like style reveals the
sights and sounds of the first snow as two children watch for the
snowplow, go down to the mailbox, make snow angels, and wait
for the coming of Christmas. Their bright snow suits, along with
the colors of the holiday, contrast with soft hues of the seasonal
snowfall.
5.48 Coats, Laura Jane. Mr. Jordan in the Park. Illustrated by Laura
Jane Coats. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-719053-6. 27p. 4-8 (est.).
ERiC
152
Human Relationships
117
Mr. Jordan has always loved the park. As a baby, he rode in his
carriage through the park, and as a toddler, he fed the birds. Still
later, he played games and rode his bicycle through the park,
and in time he married and shared activities in the park with his
family. Although Mr. Jordan is now old, the park is still very
much a part of his life. The simple narrative and pale tints of the
illustrations reveal the richness of a life as it passes through
different phases. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies.
5.49 Cole, Barbara Hancock. Texas Star. Illustrated by Barbara Min-
ton. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-
08420-5- 32p. 4-7.
With the first frost, Mama brings in the begonias and the family
begins preparations for winter — including preparing the house
for a quilting party to finish Mama's Texas star quilt. Even
though Papa grumbles that no new quilt is needed, he partici-
pates in scrubbing, polishing, baking, and setting up the quilt
frame in the front room. Illustrations in luminous pastel shades
offer varying perspectives on the cozy scenes. The book could be
grouped with Valerie Flournoy's The Patchwork Quilt, Patricia
Polacco's The Keeping Quilt, and others.
5.50 Downing, Julie. White Snow, Blue Feather. Illustrated by Julie
Downing. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-732530-X. 32p. 2-6.
A little boy marvels at the wonders of a wintry landscape after
a deep snow. But of all the joys of nature that he discovers, it is
the blue jay's feather, "a piece of the sky/' that he carries home
to his mother. Pastel winter scenes here contrast with the vivid
images in Jack Keats's Snowy Day. But like Keats's classic, simple
text reflects the exhilaration of snow play.
5.51 Hoban, Russell. Monsters. Illustrated by Quentin Blake. Scho-
lastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-43422-5. 32p. 6-9.
John incessantly draws monsters. Parents and teachers of young
children will recognize the behavior and the drawings them-
selves— a child's scrap-paper renderings of toothed and armed
creatures jutting firepower. Urged by his mother to draw some-
thing else — something real— John complies. As his drawing of a
really big, really serious, really threatening "something" begins
to take shape over several days and several papers, a kindly
therapist invites John to finish it. But finishing something real
means an uncertain future for the grownups in John's life.
118
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.52 Jackson, Alison. Crane's Rebound. Illustrated by Diane Dawson
Hearn. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-535-44722-9.
122p. 8 and up.
Away from home for the first time at basketball camp, Leslie
Crane must learn to deal with his attraction to a girl at the camp,
a bully who seems never to miss a shot on the court, and his little
brother, who calls almost every day. But can he also make it
through his first double-date movie with the Girl of His Dreams?
This is truly light, fun reading for kids, with no message beyond
"Enjoy yourself."
5.53 Johnson, Angela. Do Like Kyla. Illustrated by James E. Ran-
some. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-
08452-3. 32p. 4-7.
All day Kyla's younger sister follows her, imitating her every
move, whether it is braiding her hair, putting honey on all her
food, or crunching in the snow. Then something different hap-
pens between follower and leader — the roles shift. Full-page oil
paintings in bold colors depict two African American sisters as
they experience everyday life. Engaging illustrations extend the
simple account narrated by the little sister.
5.54 Khalsa, Dayal Kaur. How Pizza Came to Queens. Illustrated by
Dayal Kaur Khalsa. Clarkson N. Potter, 1989. ISBN 0-517-57126-
9. 32p. 6-9.
When Mrs. Pelligrino comes to visit from Italy, she seems sad
and lonely most of the time. It's evident that she misses pizza,
but no one knows who or what pizza is, and Mrs. Pelligrino
doesn't know enough English to explain. Then, after Penny and
May do their "homework" at the library, they buy pizza ingre-
dients for Mrs. Pelligrino, and everyone is a winner. Mrs. Pelli-
grino is happy to cook her favorite food, and an entire American
neighborhood discovers a new and exciting dish. Paintings are
brilliantly colored, folk-art simple, and 1950s-innocent.
5.55 Kimmelman, Leslie. Frannie's Fruits. Illustrated by Petra Math-
ers. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-023164-5. 32p. 5-7 (est.).
A rural summertime fruit, vegetable, and flower stand near the
beach serves as the setting for a day-in-the-life story of an ele-
mentary-school girl and her dog. The girl helps her family by
doing chores at the stand, where she learns about a range of
shoppers and their preferences. Playful, childlike paintings
ERIC
154
Human Relationships
119
match the story. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies.
5.56 Konigsburg, E. L. Amy Elizabeth Explores Bloomingdale's. Il-
lustrated by E. L. Konigsburg. Atheneum/Jean Karl Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-689-31766-2. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
On pages as yellow as New York taxis, and border-checked to
boot, Amy Elizabeth from Houston visits her grandmother in
New York. With straight-faced charm, Amy Elizabeth makes
observations on the Big Apple, comparing its attributes with her
home town: "In Houston, people who have pets don't have
pooper-scoopers because they have lawns/' All during their
event-packed visit, Grandmother promises a trip to Blooming-
dale's, but they never quite make it. It was, according to Amy,
"an excellent time not getting there."
5.57 Maestro, Betsy. Snow Day. Illustrated by Giulio Maestro. Scho-
lastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41283-3. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Gray snow skies and snow smells signal the approaching storm.
Dry brush strokes spread the snowfall across the pages. After the
storm, the town is "white and still . . . , buried in deep drifts that
cover the roads and sidewalks." Even though the children get to
sled and build snowpeople, there is plenty of work for adults as
the community digs out. Snow colors juxtapose against the or-
ange-reds and yellow-greens of snow-removal equipment turn-
ing quiet stillness into action.
5.58 Merriam, Eve. The Wise Woman and Her Secret. Illustrated by
Linda Graves. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers,
1991. ISBN 0-671-72603-X. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
When villagers seek an explanation for the wisdom of the old
woman who lives in the hills, she invites them to discover the
secret for themselves. They search her barn, test her well, and
pull at the branches of her tree — all except Jenny, who gathers
pebbles on the pathway, delights in a spider's web, and exam-
ines a penny drawn from the well. When Jenny shares the penny
with the old woman and asks a string of questions, the secret of
wisdom is revealed — to be curious, "to keep on wandering and
wondering."
5.59 Miller, Jim Wayne. Newfound. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-05845-X. 256p. 12 and up.
ERIC
155
120
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Newfound chronicles the adolescence of Robert Wells in rural
Tennessee. After his parents peacefully separate, Robert begins
exploring his family history as well as the Appalachian country-
side. He becomes closer to both sets of grandparents (who coex-
ist on the same farm), watches his mother become more inde-
pendent, goes coon hunting, and finds a girlfriend. An honest
account of the pain and tension, as well as the love, which
characterize a rather unusual extended family.
5.60 Nabb, Magdalen. Josie Smith. Illustrated by Pirkko Vainio. Mar-
garet K. McElderry Books, 1989. ISBN 0-689-50485-3. 72p. 6^-8
(est).
First published in England, this book presents three misadven-
tures of an enterprising young child, Josie Smith, who lives
alone with her mother. In the first chapter, Josie must find a way
to buy her mother birthday flowers with no money. Other story
chapters find Josie painting a chalkboard but forgetting to pro-
tect her room from splatters, and adopting a cat who doesn't
need a home. Child characters are direct with one another, and
Briticisms add interest to the discourse.
5.61 Paulsen, Gary. The Winter Room. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN
0-531-08439-6. 103p. 11 and up.
Gary Paulsen's earthy description of sights, sounds, and smells
guide a tour through the seasons on a remote northern Minne-
sota farm during the 1930s. Eldon, the narrator, lives and works
with his older brother Wayne, an eighth grader, his parents, and
two elderly Norwegians, Nels and Uncle David. Their home's
"winter room" is the setting for woodcarving, knitting, tobacco
chewing, and, especially, storytelling during bitter cold and dark
months. Newbery Honor Book, 1990.
5.62 Pfeffer, Susan Beth, Dear Dad, Love Laurie. Illustrated by Susan
Beth Pfeffer. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-
41681-2. 120p. 8-12 (est.).
This book, written entirely in the form of weekly letters from
Laurie to her divorced father in Missouri, describes a young
girl's highs and lows during sixth grade. In the course of one
year, Laurie encounters new friends, disastrous birthday parties,
fights with her mother, and loving reconciliations. The book is a
good companion piece to Beverly Cleary's Newbery award-win-
ning Dear Mr Henshaw.
156
THE ,
MOON
? LADY
MteibyGRETCHEN 5CH1ELDS
B.
The Grandpa Days
bv Joan W. Bios • illustrated by Emily Arnold McCuNy
A. The Rag Coat by Lauren Mills (see 5.
illustrated by Gretchen Schields (see 5.140).
5.146). D. The Grandpa Days by Joan W.
(see 5.75).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
ERJC
123). B. The Moon Lady by Amy Tan;
C. Weird Parents by Audrey Wood (see
Bios; illustrated by Emily Arnold McCully
15?
A
B.
A I ittlc
1 \ci lenient
A. Go Fish by Mary Stoltz; illustrated by Pat Cummings (see 5.139). B. Laura
Charlotte by Kathryn O. Galbraith; illustrated by Floyd Cooper (see 5.93). C. When
You Were Just a Little Girlby B. G. Hennessy; illustrated by Jeanne Arnold (see 5.102).
D. A Little Excitement by Marc Harshman; illustrated by Ted Rand (see 5.99).
158
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Human Relationships
121
5.63 Rylant, Cynthia. Appalachian The Voices of Sleeping Birds.
Illustrated by Barry Moser. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991.
ISBN 0-15-201605-8. 32p. 5 and up.
Through Cynthia Rylant, a native of West Virginia, and Barry
Moser, of Tennessee, readers gain "from the inside" a sense of
place and the people who live there. Lines from James Agee —
"All my people are larger bodies than mine, quiet, with voices
gentle and meaningless like the voices of sleeping birds" — in-
spire the title. Broad margins surround double-page spreads,
with blocks of text facing transparent watercolors. Boston Globe-
Horn Book Nonfiction Award, 1991.
5.64 Wilson, Budge. The Leaving, and Other Stories. Philomel
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21878-5. 207p. 11 and up.
In this collection of short stories, nine young women come of age
in the Canadian province of Nova Scotia. Told with sensitivity,
the stories delve into the conflicts that help mold each young
woman. In the title story, a young narrator accompanies her
mother on a brief journey to Halifax. The mother's temporary
escape from husband and home changes the relations between
the girl's parents, making home life more palatable. These are
graceful tales marked by their subtlety. Canadian Library Associa-
tion's Young Adult Book Award, 1991.
Family Life
5.65 Ackerman, Karen. Just like Max. Illustrated by George Schmidt.
Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-394-90176-2. 32p.
4-8 (est).
All day long, Great-Uncle Max works on suits and dresses "for
the fancy folk," while seven-year-old Aaron watches. When Max
has a stroke and can no longer work, Aaron brings him cheer by
making a dress, using the skills that he has learned from observ-
ing Max. Years later, it is Uncle Aaron, living in the same brown-
stone above his sister's family, who shows his nephew his craft —
writing. Soft, pastel illustrations create a quiet mood for this
tender story of an extended family.
5.66 Ackerman, Karen. Song and Dance Man. Illustrated by Stephen
Gammell. Alfred A. Knopf /Dragonfly Books, 1992. ISBN 0-679-
81995-9. 32p. All ages (est.).
The "good old days, the song and dance days" were when
Grandpa appeared on the vaudeville stage. But the present is
159
122
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
good, too, as Grandpa takes his three grandchildren to the attic,
opens an old trunk, dons hat and cane, and joyfully reenacts his
younger days. Stephen GammelTs award-winning colored-pen-
cil illustrations — a blaze of light and color — keep readers mind-
ful of advancing years. Caldecott Medal, 1989; ALA Notable Chil-
dren's Books, 1988.
5.67 Addy, Sharon Hart. A Visit with Great-Grandma. Illustrated by
Lydia Halverson. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-8497-5.
32p. 4-8 (est).
A little girl visits her great-grandmother who came to America
from Czechoslovakia. Even though Great-Grandma speaks little
English, her relationship with Barbara is full of communica-
tion—especially when they make kolaches together. The two
agree that they listen with their hearts. From the photographs
and mementos in her apartment, Great-Grandma shares words
from stories of long ago. Illustrations are quiet and loving, trav-
eling across space and time when Great-Grandma remembers. A
recipe for kolaches is included.
5.68 Adler, C. S. One Sister Too Many. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-
700271-3. 162p. 10-12 (est).
While trying to adjust to a new family and approaching adoles-
cence, the outspoken, impulsive twelve-year-old Case tries ever-
yone's patience. When a new sitter begins to take care of her
baby sister, Meredith, only Case is suspicious. Why does this
sitter let people believe that Meredith is her own baby? Why
does the sitter insist that Case can't love her new baby sister?
When baby Meredith is missing one afternoon, the answers
become clear. Middle-grade readers will cheer when Case solves
the mystery and saves the day in this sequel to Split Sisters.
5.69 Anderson, Lena. Stina. Illustrated by Lena Anderson. Greenwil-
low Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08881-3. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Stina loves her summer visits with her grandfather, who lives by
the seashore. While Grandpa fishes for perch and flounder, Stina
finds feathers, smooth sticks, and other cherished collectibles.
Then, during a "real blow," Stina's curiosity leads her outside to
see the storm. Rescued by Grandpa, Stina observes the storm
with her grandfather and relishes the treasures that it brings.
Lena Anderson's gentle characters are softly portrayed in water-
color.
5.70 Anderson, Lena. Stina's Visit. Illustrated by Lena Anderson.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09666-2. 32p. 4-8 (est).
160
Human Relationships
123
The summer that Stina spends with her grandfather on his tiny
island is the kind that feeds the warmest of memories. But the
most interesting of all Lena's experiences is a birthday visit to
meet her grandfather's somewhat eccentric friend, who has a
wonderfully vivid imagination.
5.71 Auch, Mary Jane. Mom Is Dating Weird Wayne. Bantam/Sky-
lark Books, 1991. ISBN 0-553-15916-X. 146p. 8-12.
Things haven't been the same at Jenna's house since Dad left and
married Gladys, "the Vanna White of the recreational vehicle
industry." Jenna's artistic, creative mom can't seem to keep a
normal job. And six-year-old Corey has become fearful and shy.
Jenna's best friend, Molly, is certain that everything could be
solved if Mrs. Bartholomew would just marry the new math
teacher. Instead, Mom meets the television weatherman — Wacky
Wayne. Would things be in such a state if Dad were home?
5*72 Barrett, Joyce Durham. Willie's Not the Hugging Kind* Illus-
trated by Pat Cummings. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-
020417-6. 32p. 5-8.
Willie liked hugging until his best friend told him that hugging
was silly. Now it seems that hugging is everywhere— his teacher
hugs the children; his sister hugs her bear; his daddy hugs his
mother— but no one hugs Willie anymore. "Willie," says his
sister, "you're just not the hugging kind. . . ," but Willie misses
hugs, and hugging trees and bath towels doesn't really work
because those things don't hug back. Pat Cummings's brightly
colored details and caramel-perfect faces translate the story's
warmth and security.
5.73 Bawden, Nina. The Outside Child. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard
Books. ISBN 0-688-08965-8. 232p. 9-12 (est.).
In this novel set in England, thirteen-year-old Jane lives with her
two eccentric and loving aunts, Sophie and Bill, short for Wil-
hemina. Her mother died when Jane was young, and her father
is a sailor. After discovering that her father remarried ten years
earlier, Jane, with the help of her best friend, Plato, learns more
about her half-brother and half-sister, who live only a bus ride
away. She wins their friendship before revealing her identity
and comes to the realization that her place is with her aunts.
5.74 Blake, Robert J. The Perfect Spot. Illustrated by Robert J. Blake.
Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22132-8. 32p. 4 and up.
161
124
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
For the artist father, the perfect spot is where light and shadows,
trees and rocks inspire a painting. For the naturalist son, a per-
fect spot is where frogs, crickets, beetles, and salamanders beg
to be caught. Together, each with his own equipment, father and
son hike the woods looking for the perfect spot. Also together,
and quite by accident, they find the perfect spot for both their
pursuits. Robert Blake's watercolor paintings capture the forest
trek.
5.75 Bios, Joan W. The Grandpa Days. Illustrated by Emily Arnold
McCully. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989.
ISBN 0-671-64640-0. 22p. 3-7.
When Philip visits his grandfather for a week, he discovers that
Grandpa once built a treehouse from special drawings. Philip
then draws his own plans, but learns that it's not possible to
make his requested rocket ships and racing cars with Grandpa's
carpenter tools. Finally, Philip designs something they can make,
and together they hammer, paint, and drill to build a new sled.
Pastel watercolors add warmth and detail to the pen-and-ink
line drawings, which capture subtle gesture.
5.76 Bonners, Susan. The Wooden Doll. Illustrated by Susan Bon-
ners. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-08282-
3. 32p. 5-S.
Although Stephanie enjoys visiting her grandparents, she is dis-
appointed that her immigrant grandfather keeps his wooden
doll out of reach. When the chance arises, she brings it down
from the top of the china cabinet and finds a family of smaller
dolls nested inside and the name "Stephania" written under-
neath. Stephanie learns that the doll belonged to her great-
grandmother in Poland and that her grandfather has been keep-
ing the doll until Stephanie is old enough to treasure it herself.
Homey, warm paintings portray family love.
5.77 Booth, Barbara D. Mandy. Illustrated by Jim LaMarche. Lothrop,
Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10339-1. 32p. 6 and up.
Overcoming her fear of the dark, Mandy sets out to find her
grandmother's treasured pin that was lost during their earlier
walk. Barbara Booth's text deals knowledgeably and sensitively
with issues related to deafness, while portraying Mandy as a
strong, determined character. The full-page illustrations express
the deep relationship between Mandy and her grandmother by
focusing on the unspoken understanding between them. Rich
162
Human Relationships
125
pinks and purples dramatize the events and show the world
from Mandy's point of view.
5.78 Bourgeois, Paulette. Big Sarah's Little Boots* Illustrated by
Brenda Clark. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-
42622-2. 32p. 3-6.
One rainy day Sarah discovers that her favorite boots no longer
fit. Her mother explains that Sarah has grown, an explanation
that Sarah rejects. Convinced that the boots have shrunk, Sarah
tries every possible way to stretch them. Eventually, though,
with the help of her understanding mother, Sarah realizes that
new and bigger boots may actually be better than her favorite
old ones. Sarah's expressions from total frustration to pure joy
are perfectly childlike.
5.79 Brandenberg, Franz. Aunt Nina, Good Night Illustrated by
Aliki. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07464-2. 32p. 2-6
(est.).
Husband and wife team Franz Brandenberg and Aliki continue
the Aunt Nina series with a colorful and appealing story. Remi-
niscent of Frances's antics in Russell Hoban's Bedtiinefor Frances,
Nina's nephews and nieces devise a series of excuses for not
going to bed, excuses that their Aunt Nina handles adeptly.
Bright, distinctive watercolor illustrations capture the energy of
the characters and make the book perfect for younger readers
and listeners.
5.80 Brooks, Bruce. What Hearts* HarperCollins /Laura Geringer
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-021132-6. 194p. 10 and up.
Bruce Brooks presents a young boy at four junctures in his life,
each of which requires that he be smart and forgiving in order
to survive his changed world. At age seven, Asa is suddenly
uprooted because of divorce, moves with his mother to a new
state, and meets Dave, his mother's future husband. At age nine,
he faces difficult decisions at school; at eleven, challenges in-
volve baseball; and at twelve, love. In all, he survives tests of
both head and heart. Newbery Honor Book, 1993; ALA Notable
Children's Books, 1993.
5.81 Bunting, Eve. Sharing Susan. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-
021694-8. 122p. 10-12 (est.).
Susan Moretti and her best friend Clemmie call it the "Big
Worry." Something is definitely wrong in Susan's normally se-
163
126
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
• cure home. Her parents stop talking when she enters the room,
her mom is constantly teary, and her dad is strained. The truth,
when it emerges, is devastating: because of a hospital mix-up
when she was born, Susan may not be her parents' child. Eve
Bunting effectively captures Susan's horror and overwhelming
confusion as two families pick through emotions to share the
sole surviving daughter — Susan.
5.82 Bunting, Eve. The Wednesday Surprise* Illustrated by Donald
Carrick. Clarion Books, 1989. ISBN 0-89919-721-3. 32p. 5-8 (est.).
When Grandmother comes to sit on Wednesdays, she always
brings a big bag of books. Then she and seven-year-old Anna
huddle over the books, heads together on the sofa, preparing for
Papa's birthday surprise. Touchingly warm, but unsentimental,
the story's surprise is withheld from the reader until the end,
where it guarantees meaty discussion. Donald Carrick's illustra-
tions are softly rendered in diffused light and shadows.
5.83 Carson, Jo. Pulling My Leg. Illustrated by Julie Downing. Or-
chard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08417-5.
32p. 4-8 (est.).
When a little girl's loose tooth interferes with eating a pork chop,
Uncle Tom declares it's time for an "ex-trac-tion." As Uncle Tom
sends for the necessary implements — pliers, hammer, screw-
driver, crowbar — the little girl isn't sure whether her uncle is
trying to pull her tooth or her leg. The cheerful colored-pencil
drawings add just the right touches of energy and humor to this
delightful story.
5.84 Caseley, Judith. The Cousins. Illustrated by Judith Caseley.
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08434-6. 24p. 4 and up.
Jenny and Jessica are first cousins. They don't look a bit alike,
and they don't act a bit alike. When they were toddlers, Jenny
liked to finger-paint; Jessica liked to knock down block houses.
Later, Jessica loved ballet lessons; Jenny preferred arts-and-craf ts
class. The girls are as opposite as can be — chalk and cheese,
night and day. This is a celebration of individuality enriched by
humorously stylized watercolor and colored-pencil art.
5.85 Caseley, Judith. Dear Annie. Illustrated by Judith Caseley.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10011-2. 32p. 4 and up.
In a book to inspire classroom correspondence, Judith Caseley
tells of Annie, whose correspondence with her grandpa began
164
Human Relationships
127
with her birth, when she would ride to the mailbox in a baby
carrier. Now in school and able to reach the box herself, Annie
has a shoe box with over one hundred treasured cards and notes
from Grandpa for show-and-tell, all simple testaments to their
affection. The text is composed almost entirely of Annie's corre-
spondence to and from Grandpa, and the illustrations are ren-
dered in watercolors and colored pencils.
5.86 Caseley, Judith. The Noisemakers. Illustrated by Judith Caseley.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09395-7. 24p. 4 and up.
Young Sam and Laura love to growl, roar, and be boisterous. On
an outing, the two friends cause trouble at a library, a restaurant,
and a shopping mall, much to the chagrin of their mothers. The
outing finally ends at a spot where noisemakers can do what
they do best, and their mothers will think they are wonderful.
Vivid watercolor and colored-pencil illustrations offer interest-
ing patterns and details and depict quite typical children.
5.87 Cohen, Barbara. The Long Way Home. Illustrated by Diane de
Groat. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09674-
3. 160p. 10 and up.
Because of their mother's chemotherapy, big changes have oc-
curred in the lives of ten-year-old twins Sally and Emily Instead
of vacationing at the beach, they must attend day camp, where
they are separated. Of the two, Sally has the most trouble feeling
positive about anything, until she gains the friendship of the
lovable but flaky bus driver, Claire. With Claire's help, Sally
learns to confront her true feelings and conflicting emotions
regarding her mother's illness.
5.88 Collier, James Lincoln. The Winchesters. Avon/Flare Books,
1989. ISBN 0-380-70808-6. 169p. 10 and up (est.).
Chris Winchester and his family are the "poor relatives" in the
wealthy Winchester clan of New England. Chris's grandfather
owns the town's major business, the mill, where dissatisfied
workers are ready to go on strike. Chris is never really accepted
by either his rich relatives or the town's blue-collar families.
Ultimately, the teenager learns that happiness comes with being
true to oneself, rather than trying to comply with the dictates of
others. Oklahoma Sequoyah Young Adult Book Award.
5.89 Collins, Pat Lowery. Taking Care of Tucker. Illustrated by Maxie
Chambliss. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21586-7. 26p.
2-7.
ERiC
165
128
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Millie's aunt and uncle are taking a trip, and three-year-old
cousin Tucker is coming to stay with Millie's family Millie
knows that she'll do a great job caring for Tucker, but homesick
little Tucker does not cooperate. He cries, he kicks, he bites, he
spits, and he screams. Finally, as Millie begins to despair, she
discovers just the way to handle Tucker. Cartoon-like ink draw-
ings filled in with bright watercolors add to the delight that
readers will take in Tucker's mischief.
5.90 DeClements, Barthe. Breaking Out Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN
0-385-30503-6. 130p. 9-12.
It's not easy having your dad in prison, and it's even worse if
some of your friends watched him get arrested. In this third
book in a series, Bart DeClements deals with thirteen-year-old
Jerry's simultaneous struggles to be accepted and to be true to
his own unique strengths. While he comes to terms with his
dad's talents and the judgments of friends, next-door neighbor
Grace wrestles for her own kind of independence in this sequel
to Five-Finger Discount and Monkey See, Monkey Do.
5.91 Delaney, Molly. My Sister. Illustrated by Molly Delaney.
Atheneum, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31460-4. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
A little girl knows all too well what it means to be the younger
sister — hand-me-downs, teasing, and a chance to lick the spoon
(only when it's been used for mud pies). But that's only part of
the story. This little sister also admits that when push comes to
shove, it's mighty nice to have a big sister.
5.92 Dionetti, Michelle. Coal Mine Peaches. Illustrated by Anita Rig-
gio. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08548-1. 32p. 4-7.
Hard work was always part of Grandfather's life, but so was
storytelling. As a boy in the coal mines, Grandfather entertained
his brothers with stories. As a young man in New York City, he
told stories to the men with whom he worked building the
Brooklyn Bridge and to the young woman who was to become
his wife. As Grandfather moved through life, in Italy and in
America, he continued to enrich the lives of his children and
grandchildren telling his stories and theirs. Muted watercolors
capture the warmth of Grandfather's storytelling tradition.
5.93 Galbraith, Kathryn O. Laura Charlotte. Illustrations by Floyd
Cooper. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21613-8. 32p. 4-8.
ERLC
166
Human Relationships
129
Laura Charlotte can't sleep, so she asks her mother for her favor-
ite bedtime story — the tale of how Charlotte the elephant came
to be hers. Long ago when Laura's mother turned five, her
grandmother sent her a gray flannel elephant, stitched from
scraps. Laura's mother lovingly tells of Charlotte's importance
in her own life and how she packed the elephant away to await
her own little girl. Full-color paintings provide nostalgic impres-
sions of the mother's childhood.
5-94 Garland, Sarah. Polly's Puffin. Illustrated by Sarah Garland.
Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08749-3. 24p. 3-6.
Having a baby brother, one who tosses everything from his
stroller, can be a real problem — especially if you're the big sister,
Polly, and the baby has tossed your very own toy puffin into the
coat hood of a stranger sitting nearby. But with an under-
standing mom and a hectic chase, things are put in order. The
baby's antics in the cheerful illustrations offset the anxiety of a
lost favorite possession.
5*95 Gauch, Patricia Lee. Dance, Tanya. Illustrated by Satomi
Ichikawa. Philomel Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21521-2. 28p. 4-8.
The soft pink and yellow casts of the watercolors convey the
warm, loving sentiment of a little girl's wish to be a ballet dancer
like her sister. Tanya's toddler-like dance is performed in her
underwear, as she trips and sprawls in her attempts to mime
both her sister's costume and graceful ballet positions. More
than anything, Tanya wants to take ballet lessons, too. After her
sister's recital, sleepy Tanya rouses herself to dance exuberantly
for the family. Soon, there are lessons for Tanya, too.
5.96 Godden, Rumer. Listen to the Nightingale. Viking Penguin,
1992. ISBN 0-670-84517-5. 198p. 7-11.
The rarified world of a London ballet school surrounds ten-year-
old Lottie, an orphan reared by the school's costume mistress.
When not in class, Lottie copes with an unusually humble home
life, friends and adversaries, her adored puppy, Prince, and the
exotic Italian family who adopt the dog when Lottie must give
him up. Mindful of Noel Streatfeild's classic, Ballet Shoes, and
with the same unhurried detail, the story winds through numer-
ous challenges before reaching a comforting finale.
5.97 Greenwald, Sheila. Rosy Cole Discovers America! Illustrated by
Sheila Greenwald. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992. ISBN
0-316-32721-2. 96p. 7-11 (est.).
167
130
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Rosy is ashamed of her humdrum family background so she
invents a more interesting past for the Columbus Day class
project Everyone must dress as one of their great-grandparents,
and only last-minute honesty brings the truth tumbling out, as
Rosy finds pride in ancestors who boasted neither riches nor
suffering.
5*98 Halak, Glenn. A Grandmother's Story* Illustrated by Glenn Ha-
lak. Simon and Schuster/Green Tiger Press, 1992. ISBN 0-671-
74953-6. 32p. 3-8 (est).
"There was an old woman who rowed out to sea. / Her neigh-
bors all thought she was mad as could be/7 In rhythmic verse, a
grandmother inexplicably keeps rowing until she "arrived
where she knew she must be," and rescues her grandson from
drowning. Paintings are as economical as the verse, rendered in
primitive style and bold colors, with only the grandmother's
broad back visible to the onlooker. Testifying to the bonds of the
heart and to miracles, the message of this rhyming story may be
best suited for late primary graders.
5.99 Harshman, Marc. A Little Excitement Illustrated by Ted Rand.
Cobblehill Books, 1989. ISBN 0-525-65001-6. 32p. 4-S (est.).
In dramatic testimony to the theme of being careful about mak-
ing wishes, a farm family battles a chimney fire soon after bored
young Willie wishes for a little excitement in his life. Ted Rand
achieves dramatic contrasts in scenes of blazing heat against a
snow-covered world. Family find neighbors band together to-
ward a common end, and narrator Willie gains appreciation for
some new friends — his brave sisters.
5*100 Haynes, Mary. Catch the Sea. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-
743451-6. 172p. 9 and up.
Thirteen-year-old Lily wishes she had as much artistic talent as
either of her divorced parents. After her father is called away
unexpectedly, Lily remains at their family beach house trying
out her own artwork on one of her father's patrons. Learning to
cope on her own and the heady acceptance of her art make Lily
more confident to begin the next year.
5.101 Henkes, Kevin. Shhhh. Illustrated by Kevin Henkes. Greenwil-
low Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07986-5. 32p. 3-6 (est.).
Every family needs an alarm clock. In this family, a tousled child
serves well. When "Everything is quiet. / Everyone is sleep-
id
ERLC
168
Human Relationships
131
ing," — Bear, Bunny, cat, dog, baby, and Mama and Papa — then
"SHHHH," it's time for the early-rising child to reach for her
horn and "WAKE THEM ALL UP!" Kevin Henke's acrylics al-
low the canvas to give texture to the warm-colored, full-paged
scenes.
5.102 Hennessy, B. G. When You Were Just a Little Girl. Dlustrated by
Jeanne Arnold. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-82998-6. 32p.
3-8.
When Grandma was a little girl, birthday cakes were just as
sweet, the same moon shone in the sky at night, and Christmas
was the best time of the year. In a nostalgic view of a simpler
time, Grandma, in rhyming text, shares her memories of child-
hood with two grandchildren who ask that she sit and talk for a
while. Wooden blocks, cookie cutters, and paper chains are art
elements that border old-fashioned images.
5.103 Hoban, Julia. Amy Loves the Rain. Illustrated by Lillian Hoban.
Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-022358-8. 20p. 3-5 (est.).
In one of four " Amy" stories, Julia Hoban offers preschoolers the
comfort of the familiar— a ride in the carseat on a rainy day to
pick up Daddy. Amy notices the sounds and colors of a rainy
day, the "swish swak of the wipers," the "splash, plash of pud-
dles," and the "black and shiny streets." Best of all, Amy has
brought an umbrella to share with Daddy, v/ho has forgotten his.
Pastel chalks offer the muted tones of a rainy day.
5.104 Hughes, Dean. Family Pose. Atheneum, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31396-
9. 184p. 9 and up.
Eleven-year-old David, in search of a new life and a new begin-
ning in the warmth and promise of California, abandons his
unhappy home life. Trying to survive on the street, David — cold,
hungry, and friendless— meets Paul, a hotel bellboy who risks
his job by letting David sleep in a vacant room. Paul sees some-
thing of himself in David, and, in time, they discover together
the meaning of human commitment. Notable 1989 Children's
Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.105 Hughes, Shirley. Angel Mae: A Tale of Trotter Street. Illustrated
by Shirley Hughes. Mulberry Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11847-X.
32p. 4 and up.
Anticipating the birth of a new baby at home, Mae has another
source of excitement at school — the upcoming Christmas pag-
ERIC
169
132
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
eant. Even though she's a little out of sorts with her mother's
weariness, Mae lands the part of the Angel Gabriel (which she
pronounces "Gave-you"). New baby and the pageant occur si-
multaneously, but Dad attends both debuts. Mae is pixie perfect,
with strands of loose hair escaping her pig tails, tiny wire
glasses, and expressive face.
5.106 Hughes, Shirley. The Big Alfie Out of Doors Storybook. Illus-
trated by Shirley Hughes. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books,
1992. ISBN 0-688-11428-8. 64p. 3 and up.
In yet another book featuring the lively and inquisitive pre-
schooler named Alfie, four stories are told. Each describes a
warm and loving family outing, and each is followed by a poem
about everyday experience. The book glows from beginning to
end with its irresistible paintings of children in their natural
surroundings.
5.107 Hurwitz, Johanna. Aldo Peanut Butter. Illustrated by Diane de
Groat. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09751-0. U3p.
8-11 (est). r
In this sequel to Aldo Applesauce, eleven-year-old Aldo's new
puppies, Peanut and Butter, are the catalysts for the hilarious
jams in which Aldo and his sisters find themselves: nocturnal
destruction of a neighbor's lawn, lobsters on the loose, and even
green hair. Short paragraphs, full of true-to-life dialogue, make
the text exceptionally readable.
5.108 Hurwitz, Johanna. "E" Is for Elisa. Illustrated by Lillian Hoban.
Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10440-1. 86p 8-12 (est.).
Four-year-old Elisa wants more than anything else to be as
grown-up as her brother, eight-year-old Russell. There are snags
along the way. Elisa still cries a lot and about a lot of things, but
she does manage some giant steps toward growing up. For
instance, she learns to keep a secret and knows that the letters of
her name (Elisa M) spell: "A Smile/' Lillian Hoban's illustrations
for this fifth in a series about Russell, Elisa, and their family are
warm and appealing.
5.109 Hurwitz, Johanna. Roz and Ozzie. Illustrated by Eileen McKeat-
ing. Morrow Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10945-4. 128p. 7-10
(est).
At eight going on nine and the new girl in school, Rosalind
Sasser thinks that the last person she needs following her around
170
Human Relationships
133
is her second-grade neighbor, Ozzie. Worse still, Ozzie is her
uncle, and he doesn't keep that information to himself. Al-
though he is a nuisance and a bit of an embarrassment with his
puppy-like traits, Ozzie's fierce loyalty and devotion win Roz's
acceptance, and compromise is achieved in this chapter book for
young readers.
5.110 Hurwitz, Johanna. Russell and Elisa. Illustrated by Lillian Ho-
ban. Morrow Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08793-0. 88p. 8-13
(est).
Little sister Elisa, now nearly four years old, comes to the fore-
front in this fourth book about Russell and his family Each of
the six stand-alone chapters, peppered with Lillian Hoban's
doe-eyed sketches of the children's predicaments, makes for an
effective read-aloud. Elisa, for example, gets trapped under the
dining table during a dinner party. Russell typically meets the
events of Elisa's day with "Big deal" and "So What," but he
pitches in like a pro to comfort Elisa when her doll Airmail is left
overnight in the library.
5.111 Hutchins, Pat. Hdy Titch. Illustrated by Pat Hutchins. Greenwil-
low Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09964-5. 32p. 4-7 (est.)
Youngest child Titch keeps his room tidiest of all. Says Mother
to Peter and Mary, "How tidy Titch's room is . . . and how messy
your rooms are. I think you should tidy them up." So Peter and
Mary dig in, and Titch offers to help. Soon castoff games, toys,
books, costumes, and hats are adopted by Titch, resulting in two
tidy rooms and one very satisfied Titch at play in a cascading
jumble. The repetitive phrase for reading along is, "I'll have
them."
5.112 Johnson, Angela. The Leaving Morning. Illustrated by David
Soman. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
531-08592-9. 32p. 4-7.
"Leavings" happen. A young African American narrator and his
sister say wistful good-byes to the familiar in their lives and then
leave "lips" on the windows of their apartment on moving day
Through one of childhood's unsettling experiences, the narrator
recalls the comfort and warmth of his neighborhood and build-
ing, but also his daddy's promise that "in a little while we'd be
someplace we'd love." David Soman's watercolors are both bus-
tling impressions of urban life and reflections of quiet faces.
171
134
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.113 Johnson, Angela. One of Three. Illustrated by David Soman.
Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08555-4. 32p. 3-6.
They are three together — Eva, Nikki, and "me/' the youngest
sister and the narrator. They walk to school together, sit together
outside the bakery to look and smell, and on snowy days they
squeeze into a taxi together with Mama, Grandma, and Aunt
Sara. But sometimes, Nikki and Eva go alone, and "I'm left
behind. Not one of three, just one." It's then that the youngest
child turns to someone else — Daddy and Mama — "and that's
fine, too." David Soman provides an urban background for a
loving African American family.
5.114 Johnson, Angela. Tell Me a Story, Mama. Illustrated by David
Soman. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-
531-08394-2. 28p. 3-6.
A five-year-old African American girl asks her mother to tell her
stories of the mother's childhood. The girl knows the stories so
well, however, that she actually ends up telling them to the
mother. The words form a dialogue between mother and child,
while the watercolor art depicts various family members in-
volved in the stories. This gentle tale about parent-child rela-
tions illustrates how the culture and stories of the family are
passed from generation to generation.
5.115 Johnson, Angela. When I Am Old with You. Illustrated by
David Soman. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-531-08484-1. 32p. 4-7.
A young African American child spends the day with his loving
grandfather. As they talk and rock together on the porch, the boy
promises that "when I am old with you, Grandaddy," the two of
them will do all their favorite things together — fishing, walking,
playing cards, riding the tractor, and having bacon, just bacon,
for breakfast. Soft watercolors create tranquil scenes and quiet
moments. Coretta Scott King Honor Book (Illustration), 1991.
5.116 Kherdian, David. A Song for Uncle Harry. Illustrated by Nonny
Hogrogian. Philomel Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21895-5. 76p. 8-
12.
To Petey, no one in the whole world is like Uncle Harry. For as
long as the twelve-year-old boy can remember, their relationship
has grown in mutual love and respect. Whether enjoying each
other's company while fishing or collecting things, the bonds
seem unchangeable. Then Petey discovers that Uncle Harry's
172
Human Relationships
135
heart holds some unshared plans. David Kherdian's Armenian
characters understand one another in this 1930s story, and Petey
comes to understand change and its relationship to love.
5.117 Lasky, Kathryn. I Have an Aunt on Marlborough Street. Illus-
trated by Susan Guevara. Macmillan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-751701-2.
31p. 6-10 (est).
Phoebe visits her aunt, who is also named Phoebe, on Marlbor-
ough Street in Boston, where the sidewalks are brick and the
houses touch shoulders. Together they make the everyday
things about city life become opportunities for fantasy and en-
joyment. The subtleties of the language and the softness and
warmth of the watercolors provide a glimpse of their relation-
ship as they experience all of the seasons together.
5.118 Lehrman, Robert. Separations. Viking Penguin, 1990. ISBN 0-
670-81646-9. 224p. 10 and up.
An aspiring tennis player, Kim feels her comfortable life torn
apart when her parents' divorce requires a move to Manhattan.
Changes! New apartment . . . city school . . Dad's fiancee . . .
Mom's career . . . even a new tennis coach! But it is the mix of
anger and love that Kim feels toward her dad that spurs a series
of events which reunite the family emotionally, if not physically.
All stages of grief over this family crisis are experienced through
Kim's eyes.
5.119 Lyon, George Ella. Basket. Illustrated by Mary Szilagyi. Orchard
Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08486-8. 32p.
4-7.
Grandmother's oak basket holds all the necessities of her fam-
ily's life, when it is not full of plums or Christmas holly. But
when Grandmother moves to the city, her basket becomes lost.
From then on, the basket takes on the disproportionate capacity
of memory. Whatever is missing, Grandmother is sure that it is
in her basket. Colored-pencil and watercolor illustrations create
a "yesterday" feel for this family history, told in a first-person
account by the granddaughter.
5.120 Martin, Ann M. Eleven Kids, One Summer. Holiday House,
1991. ISBN 0-8234-0912-0. 152p. 8-12.
All thirteen members of the Rosso family— eleven children and
two parents, plus a cat — rent a beach house on Fire Island for the
summer. Alphabetically named, from fifteen-year-old Abigail to
173
136
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
baby Keegan, the children each assume the central role in one
chapter. Island adventures range from solving mysteries to
meeting new kids to playing pranks to becoming movie extras.
Sibling rivalry and birth order contribute to the conflicts and
solutions.
5.121 Mazer, Norma Fox. C, My Name Is Cal. Scholastic Hardcover
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-41833-5. 160p. 9-12.
Two adolescent boys, Garo without a mother and Cal without a
father, are part of the unique "family" in this story. Cal's mother
works as a housekeeper for Garo's father, whose job as an airline
pilot often keeps him away from home. Cal, serious and hard-
working, is the direct opposite of Garo, yet over the course of
several years the boys forge a strong friendship, and together
they unravel some of the mysteries and challenges of adoles-
cence.
5.122 McKay, Hilary. The Exiles. Margaret K. McElderry Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-689-50555-8. 217p. 10 and up (est.).
Four sisters— Ruth, Naomi, Rachel, and Phoebe— find them-
selves "exiles" when their parents decide to use an inheritance
to remodel the kitchen. The summer of exile for the girls, whose
ages range from six to thirteen, is spent with Big Grandma, who
is as determined about child rearing as she is tall. First, Big
Grandma believes in discipline, chores, and exercise. Second,
she believes that the girls read too much, so she locks her books
away. The girls' humor, despair, letters home, and country ad-
ventures are hilarious. Guardian Children's Fiction Award, 1992.
5.123 Mills, Lauren. The Rag Coat. Illustrated by Lauren Mills. Little,
Brown, 1991. ISBN 0-316-57407-4. 28p. 4r-8.
Inspired by the stories, songs, and crafts of the Appalachian
region, and remembering a quilted coat that she herself wore,
Lauren Mills uses watercolor and pencil drawings to tell the
story of a child named Minna, daughter of a miner and a quilt-
maker, who has no coat of her own. Even though it was her
dying father's wish that Minna go to school, she can't go with-
out a coat. Kindly neighbors, scrapbags, and stories of quilt
pieces make for the warmest coat of all.
5.124 Murphy, Jill. Worlds Apart. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1988. ISBN
0-399-21566-2. 127p. 10-13 (est).
174
Human Relationships
137
Although life in London with her mother is happy, eleven-year-
old Susan launches a daring and secret quest to meet her natural
father, whose life is "worlds apart" from her own. The plot is
almost a cliche, yet Susan's lively narration and loving descrip-
tion of the adults in her life make the book enjoyable.
5.125 Oppenheim, Shulamith Levey. Waiting for Noah- Illustrated by
Lillian Hoban. Harper and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-06-024634-0. 32p. 4-7.
Noah loves to hear Nana tell the story of the day when he was
bom. On that day, Noah's daddy called to say Noah was about
to be born, so Nana spent all day clipping raspberry bushes and
shining pots, trying to keep busy as she waited for Noah. Bright,
colorful pastel drawings depict Noah and Nana in their warm
relationship, picking berries and reminiscing together.
5.126 Patterson, Nancy Ruth. The Christmas Cup, Illustrated by
Leslie Bowman. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08421-3. 80p.
8-10.
When eight-year-old Ann Megan McCallie spends her hard-
earned money to buy a worthless old milkshake cup, her grand-
mother helps her understand its value. Using the cup as a bank
during the year, Megan and Nannie decide the benefactor of the
Christmas cup contents should be someone who has meant the
most to them during the year. As Christmas approaches, Megan
makes her decision and learns the true meaning of the season.
Full-page black-and-white sketches capture the mood and spirit
of this true-to-life story about family and giving. Notable 1989
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.127 Polacco, Patricia. Thunder Cake. Illustrated by Patricia Polacco.
Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22231-6. 30p. 4^8.
Patricia Polacco reveals the magical way in which her Russian
grandmother helped her lose her fear of thunder as a little girl.
When a storm threatens on the horizon, Grandma observes that
it's "Thunder Cake baking weather" and hastens to find ingre-
dients as each clap of thunder and strike of lightning draws
closer and closer. By the time the storm arrives, a delicious
Thunder Cake is baked and a troublesome fear tamed. Colorful
folk-art drawings lend the story an old-world mood.
5.128 Porte, Barbara Ann. Taxicab Tales. Illustrated by Yossi Abolafia.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09908-4. 54p. 5 and up.
175
138
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Abigail's father drives a taxi. After work, he tells Abigail and her
brother Sam stories about his day, and their mother paints pic-
tures of the stories. Sometimes Abigail thinks the stories are
really true. In a warm, family-centered chapter book for young
readers, Daddy tells of a famous actress who rode in his cab in
disguise, of Wendell Wertzweiler who brought his goose for
show-and-tell, and of the man with a donkey head. Black-and-
white shaded sketches add to the fun.
5.129 Rice, Eve. Peter's Pockets. Illustrated by Nancy Winslow Parker.
Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07242-9. 30p. 3-6 (est.).
One Saturday morning Peter and Uncle Nick go to the boat
pond. Peter finds numerous things to collect, but his brand-new
pants have no pockets, so the feather, ball, marble, and other
objects must go into Uncle Nick's pockets. When they arrive
home, Peter's mother sews six colorful pockets onto Peter's
pants— one for each new treasure. Watercolor paints and colored
pencils illustrate this satisfying story.
5.130 Richardson, John. The Hiding Beast. Illustrated by John
Richardson. Houghton Mifflin, 1988. ISBN 0-395-49213-0. 29p.
5-^8 (est.).
Rodney lives with his aunt in a very grand house, and every
time poor Rodney tries to have some fun, Aunt Jacosta is nearby
saying, "Don't, dear!" When Rodney is sent to the family library
to "read a nice quiet book," he discovers instead a "brilliant"
book about wild, hairy things. As Rodney's beast comes to life,
John Richardson leaves the reader guessing. Is the beast real? Is
it only Rodney's imagination? Is Aunt Jocasta playing a game
with Rodney? Will the real hiding beast please stand up?
5.131 Roe, Eileen. Staying with Grandma. Illustrated by Jacqueline
Rogers. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-777371-X. 29p. 1-6.
A child describes a visit to Grandma's country house and all the
fun to be had there. Favorite activities include running in the
sprinkler, catching frogs, and using Grandma's bubble bath. The
expressive watercolor and colored-pencil illustrations dominate
the brief text and convey the special bond that can exist between
the very young and the elderly This is a book to reassure any
small child who is left behind at Grandma's house when parents
go out of town.
176
Human Relationships
139
5*132 Russo, Marisabina. A Visit to Oma. Illustrated by Marisabina
Russo. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09624-7. 32p. 4 and
up.
Every Sunday Celeste goes to visit her great-grandmother Oma.
While Oma always tells Celeste stories in a language that she
doesn't understand, this doesn't botixer Celeste, who simply
makes up a story to fit Oma's gestures and expressions. This
Sunday the story that Celeste makes up is about Oma's bravery
and independence in the face of an unwanted marriage ar-
ranged by her parents. In a story filled with warmth, Celeste's
love for Oma easily overcomes the language barrier. Bold-col-
ored illustrations are in folk-art style.
5.133 Russo, Marisabina. Waiting for Hannah. Illustrated by Mar-
isabina Russo. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08016-2.
32p. 4-7 (est.).
A little girl named Hannah asks her mother what she did while
she waited for Hannah to be born. The answer to that question
is the story of a long hot summer during which her mother went
about her daily activities impatiently dreaming of the big day.
The wait and the birth are documented in bordered, gouache
folk-art illustrations.
5.134 Russo, Marisabina. Where Is Ben? Illustrated by Marisabina
Russo. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08013-8. 32p. 3 and
up.
Although Ben's mother is busy rolling dough, peeling apples,
and making crust for a, pie, Ben keeps interrupting her work.
''Mama, come find me/' he says, and Ben's mother answers,
"Where is Ben?" She then follows telltale clues — an upside-
down laundry basket, a jumble of boots — to locate her hiding
son. The repetitive lines in Mama and Ben's hide-and-seek game
will encourage young children to read along. Marisabina
Russo's chunky gouache paintings fill right-hand pages; bold
text appears on the left.
5.135 Rylant, Cynthia. Henry and Mudge and the Forever Sea: The
Sixth Book of Their Adventures. Illustrated by Suqie Steven-
son. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-778007-4. 48p. 6-8.
When Henry and his father take Henry's dog, Mudge, to the
beach for the first time, they spend a perfect day splashing in the
water, building a sand castle, eating hot dogs, discovering crabs,
177
140
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
and eating snowcones. As with the other five Henry and Mudge
books, beginning readers can handle this one on their own.
5.136 Shefelman, Janice. Victoria House. Illustrated by Tom Shefel-
man. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1988. ISBN
0-15-200630-3. 26p. 5-8 (est.).
When architect Sarah falls in love with a vacant and long-
neglected Victorian house, she and husband Jess decide to move
the house to the city to make it their family home and office and
to fill it with "talk and laughter." The technical aspects of plan-
ning and executing such a move are scrupulously described,
right down to the architectural blueprints. Ink-line and water-
color illustrations allow for a detailed depiction of Victoria
House's authentic gazebo and gingerbread trim.
5.137 Sheldon, Dyan. The Whales' Song. Illustrated by Gary Blythe.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0972-2. 25p.
4- 8 (est).
Lilly's grandmother tells her about the whales that she loved as
a child and about their special gift of song to those who are
patient and who briiig something perfect to the water's edge.
Despite her great-uncle's dismissal of the whales' songs, Lilly
dreams of hearing the whales and is rewarded for both her gift
of a perfect flower and her faith. Gary Bly the's large oil paintings
rely on texture, light, and color to create the dream-like quality
of Lilly's experiences.
5.138 Smalls-Hector, Irene. Jonathan and His Mommy. Illustrations
by Michael Hays. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-79870-3. 32p.
5- 8 (est.).
When Jonathan's mother ties on his shoes, it's time for a walk in
the city. Past neighbors, apartments, shops, and construction,
Jonathan and his mother have special ways of walking and
talking. They take big giant steps and talk in giant voices. They
take bunny hops and baby steps, running steps and slow-motion
steps, ballet steps and crazy crisscross steps. When it's time for
walking home again, they take Jonathan-and-Mommy steps, a
loving relationship evident on each sunny page in this story
about an African American boy and his mother.
5.139 Stolz, Mary. Go Fish. Illustrated by Pat Cummings. HarperCol-
lins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-025822-5. 74p. 7-10 (est.).
ERiC
178
Human Relationships
141
Mary Stolz captures a day in the life of Grandfather, young
Thomas, and their ever-hungry cat, Ringo. Purposeful literacy
events and an African American family's love of reading, writ-
ing, and storytelling are skillfully woven into the story The
loving conversations between Grandfather and Thomas will
sound familiar to many Pat Cummings's black-and-white mul-
tiple-perspective drawings are alternately blocked or stretched
across the pages of this chapter book for young readers.
5.140 Tan, Amy The Moon Lady. Illustrated by Gretchen Schields.
Macmillan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-788830-4. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Best-selling novelist Amy Tan offers her first book for children,
a story within a story told by Nai-nai to her three restless grand-
daughters held captive by rain. Nai-nai's tale is of her childhood
in China, of her own restlessness, and of her desire to see the
Moon Lady and to convey a secret wish from her heart. Today's
children will understand the conflicting emotions, guilt, mis-
chief, calamities, growing pains, and resolution. The watercolor
paintings are brilliantly colored, detailed, and engaging Chinese
folk art.
5.141 Temple, Charles. On the Riverbank. Illustrated by Melanie Hall.
Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-61591-7. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Charles Temple says that the words and the rhythms from this
tribute to "fishin' on the riverbank" came to him as he was
playing his banjo and daydreaming on the James River. The
rhythms of memory plunk out the tune of a riverbank song that
gets feet to tapping and catfish to biting: "Can't you hear those
crickets going, 'Crick, crick, crick'?" The shades of June are
peppered with black, and the whole scratchy effect gives a danc-
ing exuberance to this African American family's fishing expe-
dition.
5.142 Thomas, Elizabeth. Green Beans* Illustrated by Vicki Jo Reden-
baugh. Carolrhoda Books, 1992. ISBN 0-87614-708-2. 32p. 5-8.
Gramma is the proper sort, a creature of habit, and the kind of
person whom people obey. But her green bean plants are an-
other story entirely. Despite Gramma's best efforts, they refuse
to grow. Only when Gramma takes a trip, leaving Dorothea and
her father in charge of the garden, does a miracle occur, and
green beans reach skyward. Dorothea's success causes Gramma
to relax her gardening routines, and some other staid rituals as
17,9
142
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
well. Vicki Jo Redenbaugh's good-natured characters are lanky
as bean poles.
5.143 Waddell, Martin. Once There Were Giants. Illustrated by Penny
Dale. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-29806-4. 24p. All ages.
To a baby, everyone larger seems to be a giant. From page to
page the gentle first-person narrative and endearing illustra-
tions show how over time the baby reaches childhood, then her
teenage years, and then college. She eventually marries and has
her own baby — who smiles up at surrounding giants. Notable
1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.144 Wallace-Brodeur, Ruth. Home by Five. Illustrations by Mark
Graham. Margaret K. McEIderry Books, 1992. ISBN 0-689-50509-
4. 32p. 5-9.
Ruth Wallace-Brodeur gently and humorously portrays Rosie, a
child who takes time to explore her city world — even it if means
not getting home on time. Although Rosie earnestly tries to
avoid distractions when given a deadline for being home, she is
a child who notices things. The author's portrayal of Rosie's
good intentions and of her parents' understanding of childhood
adds to the sweetness of the story. Mark Graham's repre-
sentational artwork relies on soft grays and browns to create
wintry scenes in which Rosie's face stands out.
5.145 Williams, Sherley Anne. Working Cotton. Illustrated by Carole
Byard. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-299624-9.
32p. 4-8.
In summer, Shelan is up before daybreak to pick cotton in the
fields of central California with her African American family.
The hard life and the transiency of peopk ^een in one field but
missing from the next is a rueful pattern, but not unpleasing to
Shelan, who enjoys doing her share of work with the family. The
simple text and vibrant acrylic paintings recapture the details of
the migrant worker lifestyle. Caldecott Honor Book, 1992.
5.146 Wood, Audrey. Weird Parents. Illustrated by Audrey Wood. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0649-9. 32p. 4-8.
"There once was a boy who had weird parents." Just how weird
are they? Well, the weird mother engages in such embarrass-
ments as blowing kisses from the bus stop, packing lunch sur-
ERLC
160
Human Relationships
143
prises, and talking about the boy as though he isn't there. The
weird father shakes hands with everyone, wears a weird hat,
and walks like a chicken in crowds. Both of them laugh out loud
in the movies. There are days when the boy wishes that they
were like other parents, but then again Audrey Wood's flam-
boyant, lovingly depicted parents frolic across the pages.
5.147 Yarbrough, Camille. The Shimmershine Queens. G. P. Putnam's
Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21465-8. 142p. 10 and up (est.).
Fifth-grade Angie has the "get-up gift." Elderly Cousin Seatta
tells her so. It's a gift of spirit traceable to slave days, a gift that
gives dreamers the "shimmershine feeling" — optimism in the
face of trouble. And Angie's troubles are many: her daddy has
gone, her mother is sick, and the kids at her inner-city school
tease her about her dark skin. Then comes a special drama
teacher who reaches Angie and her friend Michelle with an
African project in which they role-play eighteenth-century chil-
dren, stolen into slavery, who dance their defiance.
5.148 Zolotow, Charlotte. The Quiet Mother and the Noisy Little Boy.
Illustrated by Marc Simont. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-
026979-0. 28p. 4-7 (est.).
A little boy named Sandy loves noise, but his mother does not.
Not until Sandy leaves for a day's visit with relatives does his
mother discover how much she misses him. And not until the
wildest and noisiest relatives come for a visit does Sandy dis-
cover how noisy he has been. Both realize that noise and quiet
are good at different times for different things. The lesson is
shared through Charlotte Zolotow's gentle writing and Marc
Simont's exuberant color.
5.149 Zolotow, Charlotte. This Quiet Lady. Illustrated by Anita Lobel.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09306-X. 24p. 3-7 (est.).
Quiet text follows a young girl as she inspects photographs and
snapshots of her mother at varying stages of her mother's life:
"This curly-haired little girl with the doll drooping from her
hand is my mother." Anita Lobel's French-set illustrations juxta-
pose large full-color portraits of the mother against muted-tone
representations of the child-narrator. When the little girl turns to
a picture of her mother holding her as an infant, the "life" story
comes full cycle as she realizes that "here is where I begin."
144
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Friendship
5.150 Aamundsen, Nina Ring. Two Short and One Long. Houghton
Mifflin, 1990. ISBN 0-395-52434-2. 103p. 9-12 (est.).
As the summer holiday draws to a close, twelve-year-old Jonas
and his somewhat mysterious best friend Einar observe a large
Afghan family moving into their Oslo, Norway, neighborhood.
When Jonas befriends Hewad, the Afghan boy, Einar becomes
quiet and disapproving, causing Jonas to question the closeness
of their friendship. This insightful story, translated by the author
from the Norwegian, is about Einar conquering fears brought on
by a tragic past and about all three boys growing to understand
each other. Mildred L. Batchelder Award, 1990.
5.151 Aylesworth, Jim. Mr. McGill Goes to Town. Illustrated by
Thomas Graham. Henry Holt, 1989. ISBN 0-8050-0772-5. 30p.
4^8 (est.).
Mr. McGill is repairing his mill, but it's too much work for one
person. So he seeks Mr. McRae's help. Mr. McRae is cutting his
hay, and the two friends join forces on that task, but it's too much
work for two people. They must seek Mr. McCall's assistance.
But Mr. McCall is building a wall, so the three friends pitch in
on that job only to discover they need still more help. This
cumulative tale, with embedded rhyming text, culminates with
five friends working together to complete everyone's chores in
no time at all.
5.152 Barbour, Karen. Nancy. Illustrated by Karen Barbour. Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-256675-9. 32p. 4-7 (est).
Nancy moves into a new neighborhood and is ignored by four
best friends who decide not to play with her. However, once
Nancy invites the girls to her wild and wacky birthday party, the
girls become "five best friends." Modernistic gouache-and-
watercolor illustrations are done with Picasso-esque flair.
5.153 Brisson, Pat. Your Best Friend, Kate. Illustrated by Rick Brown.
Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-714350-3. 30p. 7-10 (est.).
In a book with text consisting entirely of notes, letters, and
postcards, Kate stays in touch with her best friend, Lucy, as Kate
travels with her family through eleven states. The flow of notes
gives humorous, affectionate, and informative glimpses of the
sights, as well as of the challenges of traveling with a smart-
alecky younger brother. Tucked around the edges of the pages
ERLC
182
Human Relationships
145
are state birds, flowers, and trees. Postcards from their own
particular sites may inspire young students of geography.
5.154 Bunting, Eve. Summer Wheels. Illustrated by Thomas B. Allen.
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-207000-1. 48p. 6-10.
The Bicycle Man's rules are simple: Neighborhood kids can check
out bicycles every day. For free. Just have tfiem back by four. Fix them
if they break. Lawrence and Brady have their own favorite sum-
mer wheels that they borrow. When a big kid, nearly twelve,
checks out Lawrence's bike, signing the book as "Abrehem Lin-
coln/7 the boys know that he has no intention of returning it.
Themes of trust and second chances will give children some-
thing to talk over. Hazy charcoal and pastel drawings locate this
neighborhood near your own.
5.155 Burns, Theresa. You're Not My Cat. Illustrated by Theresa
Burns. J. B. Lippincott, 1989. ISBN 0-397-32341-7. 32p. 6-9 (est.).
A little girl spends her days with an alley cat named Gus, who
she insists is not her cat. As their friendship grows, the little girl
soon realizes that Gus is her pal and a part of her life forever.
Cross-hatching and color pencil give texture and detail to this
tale of an alley cat that finds a home.
5.156 Cave, Hugh B. Conquering Kilmarnie. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN
0-02-717781-5. 176p. 10 and up.
A wild pig and a mutual need for peer companionship bring
together American-born Peter, who is still grieving over the
death of his mother and brother, and Zackie, a Jamaican island
boy. They grow to understand each other's cultures as they fight
nature and endure family circumstances. With an action-filled
plot, the story of their friendship is sure to entice the early
adolescent reader. Set on a Jamaican coffee plantation, the story
is also filled with information subtly folded into the plot.
5.157 Christopher, Matt. Return of the Home Run Kid. Illustrated by
Paul Casale. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-14080-5. 168p. 9 and
up (est.).
In this sequel to The Kid Who Only Hit Homers, Sylvester
Coddmyer HI experiences a baseball slump, making him ques-
tion his success during the previous season. Helped by a
stranger, Cheeko, Sylvester begins to play too aggressively and
to take shortcuts. Cheeko bears an uncanny resemblance to Ed-
die Cicotte, a member of the notorious 1919 Black Sox team.
ERIC
183
146
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Sylvester learns that giving his best effort is the way to play the
game. Pencil illustrations realistically depict some of the epi-
sodes.
5.158 Cleary, Beverly. Strider. Illustrated by Paul O. Zelinsky. Morrow
Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09901-7. 192p. 8 and up.
When Leigh Botts (a character in Beverly Cleary's Dear Mr. Hen-
shaw) and his friend Barry find an abandoned dog on the beach,
they develop a joint custody agreement for the dog, whom they
name Strider. Strider 's time with Leigh is spent in the no-pets-
allowed cottage that he shares with his mother. Exercising the
dog readies Leigh for the track team, but he grows in other ways
as well — in his relation with his father, in his problem solving,
and in his feelings for a dog who fills a need that children will
understand. Leigh's account is written in a series of diary en-
tries.
5.159 Clifton, Lucille. Three Wishes. Illustrated by Michael Hays.
Doubleday Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-385-30497-8.
32p. 5-8.
In this first-person account told in an African American dialect,
narrator Zenobia attests to the truth of the saying that if you find
a penny with your birthdate on New Year's Day, you can make
three wishes. As in the folktale, Nobie is careless with her first
two wishes and must use the third to right a wrong. Her wise
mother helps her to understand that good friends are the fulfill-
ment of one's greatest wish. Michael Hays's acrylic paintings
show the texture of the linen canvas and seem to emit warmth
and light.
5.160 Corcoran, Barbara. The Potato Kid. Atheneum/Jean Karl Books,
1989. ISBN 0-689-31589-9. 172p. 9 and up (est).
Fourteen-year-old Ellis's plans to spend the summer on a horse
ranch go awry when her mother is obliged to hostess a ten-year-
old girl from a poverty-stricken potato-farming family. Disap-
pointed, Ellis is charged with entertaining Lilac, with whom she
has nothing in common except circumstance. The story of how
they cope is told in a humorous, often-poignant narrative in
which both girls and the reader learn to accept and appreciate
differences in people.
5.161 Fosburgh, Lisa. Afternoon Magic. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-
735431-8. 211p. 10 and up (est).
ERIC
184
Human Relationships
147
They were all latchkey kids in an upscale neighborhood who
took comfort in meeting each other after school at Willie's house,
where they shared television and snacks. Amid the uncertainties
of Willie's life, including busy, bickering parents, an abusive
friend of the family, and an interfering grandmother, they were
a constant, even if no one knew they came. Then, into these
predictable afternoons, comes new-neighbor Harold, who per-
forms magic tricks, but also threatens, connives, blackmails,
dominates, and vandalizes.
5.162 Gibbons, Faye. King Shoes and Clown Pockets. Morrow Junior
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-06592-9. 231p. 9 and up (est.).
According to one fourth-grade reader, this book, set in Alabama,
is a "modern Tom Sawyer with everything I like in a book: drama,
comedy, and adventure." The unusual title nicknames the main
characters, Raymond Brock, youngest child of neglectful, too-
busy parents, and Bruce Manis, son of a frequently absent junk
dealer and a runaway mom. Through a series of hilarious ad-
ventures, King Shoes and Clown Pockets come to understand
their unhappy homes, cope with the unfairness of life, and ma-
ture as a result.
5.163 Gilson, Jamie. Sticks and Stones and Skeleton Bones. Illustra-
tions by Dee deRosa. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991.
ISBN 0-688-10098-8. 162p. 8-11.
Digging up a time capsule, falling down an escalator, and fist
fighting at school turn fifth graders Hobie and Nick into former
best friends. Because of a recent flood, their school meets in a
shopping mall — complete with Santa Claus. It takes two student
mediators and a not-so-jolly St. Nick to help the boys mend their
differences. Jamie Gilson presents life in the fifth grade with
smiles and hearty laughter.
5.164 Haywood, Carolyn. Eddie's Friend Boodles. Illustrated by
Catherine Stock. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09028-
1. 80p. 6 and up.
In Carolyn Haywood's last book for children, a manuscript com-
pleted shortly before her death, Eddie Wilson's friend Boodles
assumes center stage. Intrigued by the circus performance that
he and Eddie attend, Boodles attempts to teach his dog Poochie
some tricks, with the usual sorts of calamities and chuckles. But
Boodles remembers Turnip the Clown's advice: "You have to
I8f>
148
Contemporary Realistic Fiction^
believe You have to love your dog, and your dog has to love
you back/' And love does the trick.
5.165 Henkes, Kevin. Words of Stone. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN
0-688-11356-7. 152p. 10 and up (est.).
Ten-year-old Blaze Werla lives with his artist father and his
grandmother, but mostly he is alone, apart, and afraid, trying to
accept his mother's death. When brash Joselle Stark, abandoned
by her mother, "the beautiful Vicki," moves into the neighbor-
hood to live with her own grandmother, she learns details of
Blaze's fears and begins to leave messages on the hillside —
"words of stone" — that open the wounds of Blaze's past. Over
time, the two meet and become friends, and each fills the other's
needs. Blaze offers Joselle his sensitivity, and she gives him
courage to face his past.
5.166 Holmes, Barbara Ware. Charlotte Shakespeare and Annie the
Great. Illustrated by John Himmelman. Harper and Row, 1989.
ISBN 0-06-022615-3. 152p. 9-12.
Partly because her sixth-grade teacher believes in her, Charlotte
Cheetham writes a play for her class that is so funny and scary
that her father calls her Charlotte Shakespeare. As director,
Charlotte believes that her shy friend Annie should play the
lead, but brash Tina covets the part. Through coaching by Char-
lotte's father, Annie wins the part — and a lot of attention as well.
Charlotte learns some things about jealousy, about being in
charge, and about collaboration. Bravo, Charlotte, for a witty
and contemporary third-encore performance.
5.167 Jones, Rebecca C. Matthew and Tilly. Illustrated by Beth Peck.
Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44684-2. 32p. 3-6
(est).
Matthew and Tilly are the best of friends, boy and girl, black and
white. They ride bikes together, sell lemonade together, and play
sidewalk games together. But one day, while coloring together,
Matthew breaks Tilly's purple crayon, and the friendship crum-
bles, too, until each realizes how the best times depend on a best
friend. Beth Peck's dark-tone paintings are impressions of her
own childhood neighborhood of Washington Heights in New
York City.
5.168 Kherdian, David. The Great Fishing Contest. Illustrated by
Nonny Hogrogian. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22263-4.
46p. 7-10 (est.).
ERLC
166
Human Relationships
149
Best friends Jason and Sammy enter the children's fishing con-
test at the zoo, a contest which has as its grand prize a complete
spinning outfit Painstakingly, the boys plan their strategies,
their floats, and their position on the banks of the pond. They
even plan how to earn a second fishing outfit should one of them
win. In a slim book divided into chapters, Nonny Hogrogian
uses pastels to produce edge-to-edge scenes of boys who fish
smart, meet challenges, and know friendship.
5.169 Lillie, Patricia. Jake and Rosie. Illustrated by Patricia Lillie.
Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07625-4. 24p. 6-8 (est.).
When friends are friends like Jake and Rosie — exactly the same
size and with hair almost the same color — they do everything
together. They play pirates, draw monsters, trade one shoe to be
twins, and even get the chicken pox together. But when Rosie is
gone one day, Jake suffers separation pain as only young chil-
dren can until Rosie returns sporting new shoes just like Jake's.
Simple illustrations show the warm friendship between sexes
and races.
5.170 Lisle, Janet Taylor. Afternoon of the Elves. Orchard Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-531-08437-X. 122p. 9-11.
Hillary befriends the mysterious Sara-Kate because of the mini-
ature village in her backyard, which Sara-Kate claims was built
by elves. Only through the strength of their friendship does
Sara-Kate let Hillary know about her mother's mental illness
and the resulting disintegration of her family. Neivbery Honor
Book, 1990.
5.171 Mazer, Norma Fox. Babyface. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN
0-688-08752-3. 165p. 12 and up.
Award-winning author Norma Fox Mazer recounts the story of
two fourteen-year-old best friends, Toni and Julie, and the strug-
gles that envelop their families. When Julie's family shatters and
she moves away, Toni is left alone to deal with her own prob-
lems: sibling jealousy, family illness and dissension, the roller-
coaster ride of first love, and the need to balance her growing
sense of independence with an equally strong desire for family
support. Regardless of the topic (puppy love, pending divorce,
changing relationships), Mazer portrays situations realistically
with clear, easily readable prose.
5.172 Mazer, Norma Fox. Silver. Avon Books/Flare Books, 1989. ISBN
0-380-75026-0. 202p. 10 and up.
ERIC
150
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Sarabeth Silver and her mother barely manage to survive finan-
cially in their house trailer. When Sarabeth suddenly has the
opportunity to attend junior high school in a wealthy district,
her mother jumps at this chance to improve her daughter's
education. During the course of one year, Sarabeth learns that
the pains and pleasures of preadolescence cross all economic
levels. Topics sensitively portrayed include the changing family
unit, single parenting, friendships, first love, and sexual abuse.
ALA Best Books for Young Adults.
5*173 McKenna, Colleen O'Shaughnessy. Fifth Grade: Here Comes
Trouble. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41733-9.
137p. 8-12 (est).
Collette Murphy, age ten, wants to find out why she's different
from her friends, who consider her a party pooper and a fuddy
duddy. In so doing, she decides, against her better judgment, to
accept her friend Marsha's invitation to go shopping for teenage
things and to attend her boy-girl "Signpost to Maturity" birth-
day party. Shopping at Boss's in the mall turns into a nightmare,
but at the party Collette turns her attention to making sure that
Marsha's eleventh-year celebration is her greatest.
5.174 Naylor, Phyllis Reynolds. Alice in Rapture, Sort Of.
Atheneum/Jean Karl Books, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31466-3. 166p. 10-
12 (est).
This sequel to The Agony of Alice follows Alice, Elizabeth, and
Pamela through the summer before they enter junior high. For
Alice, it is also the summer of her first boyfriend. Her two best
friends have boyfriends, too, since rumor has it that having a
boyfriend is critical to seventh-grade success. Together they
struggle through adolescent worries — sometimes funny, some-
times poignant — and Alice wishes that she had a mother to turn
to. As fall arrives, Alice decides that for now she needs a "special
friend" more than a boyfriend.
5.175 Orgel, Doris. Nobodies and Somebodies. ISBN 0-670-82754-1.
152p. 8-12.
In Ms. Tatum's fifth-grade class, the girls in the in-group dress
alike and are members of an exclusive Super Stars Club. Almost
anything can cause their classmates to feel like "nobodies"
around the Supes — Laura, because she's the new girl, and Janet,
because she stutters. Even Vero, who's a member, feels uncertain
of herself and of the constancy of her family's love. In chapters
188
Human Relationships
151
titled with their names, these three girls tell their stories, and
learn about themselves, each other, and friendship.
5.176 Pendergraft, Patricia. Brushy Mountain. Philomel Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-399-21610-3. 207p. 10 and up.
Mountain dialect, an engrossing plot, and colorful characters
make this book a wonderful read-aloud. The plot is driven by
thirteen-year-old Arney's aborted and humorous attempts to
put an end to crotchety old man Hooker. Inevitably his actions
rescue the ungrateful old man instead. A pet turkey, fire, storms,
and the birth of the old man's grandchild add excitement and
humor to this warm story of a boy who learns that a thorny
exterior frequently hides an unhappy person inside.
5.177 Polacco, Patricia. Chicken Sunday. Illustrated by Patricia Po-
lacco. Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22133-6. 32p. 4rS.
Patricia Polacco's memories of childhood include Sunday's fried
chicken with Miss Eula Mae Walker and her grandsons, Stewart
and Winston. Miss Eula's African American family become like
Polacco's own. Little wonder that she wants more than anything
in the world to help her "brothers" get Miss Eula a special Easter
bonnet. Line drawings are shaded with warm skin tones, vibrant
colors, and even actual photographs tucked into cozy family
scenes. By painting and selling Ukrainian eggs, the children earn
money for the bonnet, and two cultures are blended.
5.178 Polacco, Patricia. Picnic at Mudsock Meadow. Illustrated by
Patricia Polacco. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-21811-4.
32p. 4-8.
William is sure that the eerie lights hanging over Quicksand
Bottoms are just swamp gas, and not the ghost of old Titus
Dinworthy. "Peeeeeee youuuuuuu," retorts Hester Bledden,
causing William to blush as "red as a Union City farm-fresh
tomato," and she beats him in one contest after another. In a final
attempt to better Hester, William braves the swamp. And Hester
Bledden is proud as punch to share a plate-o'-cream with the
swamp monster at Mudsock Meadow's annual Halloween pic-
nic.
5.179 Rodowsky, Colby. Dog Days. Illustrated by Kathleen Collins
Howell. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-36342-0.
131p. 7-11 (est).
152
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Rosie Riggs's summer vacation couldn't be worse. Her best
friend left for Minnesota, her mom left for work, and her favorite
baby-sitter left for Cape Cod. Summer life takes a turn for the
better, however, when "Sandy the Super Dog" and his owner, a
famous children's author, move in next door. Exciting events
turn the summer into one of important discoveries of both
friendships and fantasies.
5.180 Ross, Tony. A Fairy Tale. Illustrated by Tony Ross. Little, Brown,
1991. ISBN 0-316-75750-0. 32p. 4^8 (est).
Bessie doesn't believe in fairies or magic. But her elderly neigh-
bor, Mrs. Leaf, does. Mrs. Leaf reminds Bessie of the magic of a
perfect summer afternoon and the pure happiness of certain
Christmas Eves. Mrs. Leaf admits that even she might be a fairy,
which Bessie scoffs at since Mrs. Leaf is neither little nor pretty.
As Bessie grows and changes, so does her relationship with Mrs.
Leaf, and even Mrs. Leaf herself. Tony Ross's illustrations stroke
grays and blue-violets into milltown skies and enhance the
transformation of the characters.
5.181 Rylant, Cynthia. An Angel for Solomon Singer. Illustrated by
Peter Catalanotto. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-531-08578-3. 32p. All ages.
Living in a hotel for men in New York City with no fireplace for
sitting, no picture window for bird-watching, and no cat, Solo-
mon Singer "loved where he lived not at all." So Solomon wan-
ders the city as he wandered the fields of his native Indiana in
his boyhood. When he finds the Westway Cafe, where a waiter
named Angel smiles at him, Solomon's perceptions change. Pe-
ter Catalanotto's paintings capture the soul of the book, merging
dreamy visions with puddly reflected city lights.
5.182 Sharmat, Marjorie Weinman, and Mitchell Sharmat. The Pizza
Monster. Illustrated by Denise Brunkus. Delacorte Press, 1989.
ISBN 0-385-29722-X. 48p. 5-8.
Because Olivia Sharp is good at solving problems and good at
keeping secrets, she decides to become a secret agent. Her first
call comes from Duncan, an eternal pessimist who has lost his
best friend. The Eloise-like Olivia grabs her boa, enlists Willie
her chauffeur, and enthusiastically embarks on her first assign-
ment. Soon, though, she discovers that even fifty pizzas won't
buy a friend, and that Duncan's case will require serious work
on the fundamentals of friendship.
ERLC
! , , »;'■ \ ' / ' r c
A.
C.
A. The Exiles by Hilary McKay (see 5.122). B. What Hearts by Bruce Brooks (see
5.80). C. Matthew and Tilly by Rebecca C. Jones; illustrated by Beth Peck (see
5.167). D. Words of Stone by Kevin Henkes (see 5.165).
ERIC
191
BFST COPY AVAILABIE
A. Chicken Sunday by Patricia Polacco (see 5.177). B. Picnic at Mudsock Meadow
by Patricia Polacco (*ee 5.178). C. Willie's Not the Hugging Kind by Joyce Durham
Barrett; illustrated by Pat Cummings (see 5.72). 0. Loop the Loop by Barbara Dugan;
illustrated by James Stevenson (see 5.297).
BEST COPY WMUBtf
Human Relationships
153
5.183 Slepian, Jan. The Broccoli Tapes. Philomel Books, 1988. ISBN
0-399-21712-6. 157p. 8-12 (est.).
When Sara's family is temporarily relocated from Boston to
Hawaii, she and her brother Sam feel cut off from their mainland
friends and unaccepted in their new school. Then they must
cope with their grandmother's hospitalization and death.
Lonely Sara maintains ties with her old sixth-grade classroom
by tape-recording her experiences and her feelings. Through the
tapes, Sara tells of their discovery of a broccoli-eating cat,
trapped in lava rocks, and of the wary Eddie, as mistrustful as
the cat. The children's attempts to win the trust of both cat and
boy move the story to a poignant ending. ALA Notable Children's
Books, 1989; School Library Journal's Best Books, 1989; ALA Booklist
Children's Editors' Choices, 1989.
5.184 Snyder, Zilpha Keatly. Libby on Wednesday. Dell/Yearling
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-440-40498-3. 196p. 9-13 (est.).
Libby McCall feels more than a little different from the other
students at Morrison Middle School. Libby's feelings stem
mostly from the fact that she is attending school for the first
time. Besides being younger (only eleven), she is smaller than
the others, and initially she is too forthcoming with her intellect.
After winning a writing contest, Libby is assigned to a Wednes-
day writing workshop with four other students, and the group
members begin to reveal themselves through their writing and
responses. ALA Best Books for Young Adults.
5.185 Spinelli, Jerry. Fourth Grade Rats. Illustrated by Paul Casale.
Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1991. ISBN 0-590-44243-0. 84p. 7-9.
"First grade babies! Second grade cats! Third grade angels!
Fourth grade . . . RATS!" Suds liked being a third-grade angel,
but now his best friend Joey is after him to become a true fourth-
grade rat— to push younger kids off swings, eat baloney (not
peanut butter and jelly) sandwiches, and defy his mother — in
order to take the first steps toward becoming a "man." However,
Suds eventually learns that growing up is much more complex
than impressing Joey Peterson.
5.186 Wallace, Bill. The Biggest Klutz in Fifth Grade. Holiday House,
1992. ISBN 0-8234-0984-8. 148p. 9 and up.
A bet between characters reminiscent of Thomas Rockwell's
How to Eat Fried Worms drives the plot of this hilarious story Pat
is a klutz, and everyone knows it. He proves it by getting stuck
193
154
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
under a chain-link fence during the greatest tackle of his ten-
year-old life. But can he remain accident-free long enought to
win the bet so that Neal (and not he) has to kiss Kristine, the
Blimp, in front of the whole school? Fifth-grade jargon, short
chapters, and "don't-stop-now!" chapter endings keep the
reader engrossed all the way to the surprising ending.
5.187 Winthrop, Elizabeth. The Best Friends Club: A Lizzie and
Harold Story. Illustrated by Martha Weston. Lothrop, Lee and
Shepard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07583-5. 28p. 4-7.
Because Lizzie and Harold are constant companions, they de-
cide to establish the Best Friends Club. When Lizzie writes her
own restrictive club rules, suddenly no one but the two friends
can be admitted. Harold doesn't want to be in such an exclusive
club, and when he finds a new friend, Lizzie is hurt. Soon
Harold's diplomacy wins Lizzie over, and a new club, the No
Rules Club, is formed. Children who are just beginning to test
social relationships will find author Elizabeth Winthrop's per-
spectives both funny and informative.
Illness or Death
5.188 Ackerman, Karen. The Broken Boy. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN
0-399-22254-5. 160p. 10 and up.
At the edge of puberty, twelve-year-old Solly must learn the
limits of his responsibility for and friendship with Daniel, an
emotionally disturbed boy who lives next door. Daniel's violent
tantrums and his belief that he is connected spiritually to a polio
victim who lived in the same house years before test and finally
strengthen Solly's own belief in himself and his family. Karen
Ackerman deftly combines a strong mystery with a coming-of-
age tale.
5.189 Amadeo, Diana M. There's a Little Bit of Me in Jamey. Illus-
trated by Judith Friedman. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-
7854-1. 29p. 6-9.
Brian is confused, afraid, and angry when his younger brother
Jamey's leukemia becomes worse. Then Jamey comes home
from the hospital, and Mom, Dad, and Grandma seem to forget
about Brian, so consumed are they with concern for Jamey's
health. Eventually, Brian's anger is assuaged, and he offers a
"little bit of himself/' his own bone marrow, to help save his
brother's life. Written by a nurse, the book features characters
ERIC
194
Human Relationships
155
that are composites of her patients and their families as they
struggle with childhood cancer.
5.190 Brooks, Bruce. Everywhere, Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-
020729-9. 70p. 9 and up.
It is eleven-year-old Dooley who keeps a white boy's mind off
his grandfather, a grandfather who lies dying upstairs, a victim
of a weak heart. Dooley is Lucy's nephew, and he has accompa-
nied his African American aunt on her nursing assignment.
When Dooley suggests some soul switching between a turtle
and the narrator's grandfather, there is soul searching about
death, about life, about fear, and about trust. This is a book
worth discussion with upper graders.
5.191 Bunting, Eve. The Wall. Illustrated by Ronald Himler. Clarion
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-395-51588-2. 29p. 4-8.
This touching portrayal of a boy and his father searching *or a
name at the Vietnam Veterans Memorial speaks to both children
and adults. Through the young boy's eyes, the reader meets
other visitors to "The Wall" — a disabled veteran, a mourning
couple, and young girls on an outing with little understanding
of the memorial's significance. Eve Bunting artfully juxtaposes
the young boy's longing for his fallen grandfather and his un-
derstanding that his grandfather's name is in a permanent place
of honor. The paintings are quietly haunting.
5.192 Hamilton, Virginia. Cousins. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-
22164-6. 125p. 10 and up.
Eleven-year-old Cammy is devoted to her frail ninety-four-year-
old grandmother, now in a care home, and is reconciled to her
eventual passing. Too busy with other things, her brother and
cousins rarely visit their grandmother. When Cammy witnesses
the accidental drowning of Patty Ann, a cousin ner own age with
a seemingly perfect life, Cammy leans on Gram and learns the
process of recovery from such a dramatic event. Notable 1990
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies; ALA Notable
Children's Books, 1991.
5.193 Johnston, Tony. Grandpa's Song. Illustrated by Brad Sneed. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0802-5. 30p. 5-9.
Exaggerated caricatures captured in bold bright watercolors are
a joyful addition to this poignant tale of a young girl and her
aging grandpa. With the straightforward innocence and love
195
156
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
that only a child possesses, she responds to her grandpa's grow-
ing forgetfulness by helping him to sing their favorite song,
thereby taking away some of his fear and sadness.
5.194 Jordan, MaryKate. Losing Uncle Tim. Illustrated by Judith
Friedman. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-4756-5. 32p. 7-11.
Daniel and his Uncle Tim enjoy spending time together — they
go sledding, talk, and play with toys in Uncle Urn's antique
shop. When Daniel asks why his "favorite grown-up" has been
increasingly tired lately, he learns that Uncle Tim has AIDS and
that he will probably die. Watercolor illustrations in subdued
tones portray Daniel as he goes through a series of emotions —
pity, fear, anger, and sadness — until he begins to cope with his
uncle's disease and eventual death.
5.195 Keller, Holly. The Best Present. Illustrated by Holly Keller.
Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07320-4. 28p. 4-7 (est.).
Eight-year-old Rosie wants to visit her grandmother in the hos-
pital, but the rules state that visitors must be at least ten years
old. With the help of her friend Kate, Rosie dresses up to look
older, buys three carnations, and heads for the hospital. But the
hospital guard is not fooled, and Rosie must send up the flowers
for Grandmother with the elevator man. When Grandmother
comes home, she shows Rosie all of her get-well cards and her
favorite present — three carnations. Notable 1989 Children's Books
in the Field of Social Studies.
5.196 Laird, Elizabeth. Loving Ben. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-
29810-2. 183p. 10 and up (est).
Twelve-year-old Anna Peacock experiences troubles and tri-
umphs with girlfriends and boyfriends, with school, and with
popularity, but central to this novel is her love for her brother
Ben. When Ben is born, Anna knows something is wrong. Anna
and her family soon come to understand that their new baby is
hydrocephalic and severely disabled. Then they must deal with
Ben's death. Author Elizabeth Laird conveys to readers her un-
derstanding of the gifts that disabled children have to offer.
5.197 Madenski, Melissa. Some of the Pieces. Illustrated by Deborah
Kogan Ray. Little, Brown, 1991. ISBN 0-316-54324-1. 30p. 4-8.
With words perfectly chosen, this bittersweet story carries the
young reader from the pain of losing a parent, through the
healing process, and out of that bleak tunnel to the other side,
196
Human Relationships
157
where memories once again bring smiles. During a day of shar-
ing their memories, Dylan tells his mother, "it's like when Dad
died, he split into a thousand pieces so he could be with all the
people he loved. And I'm glad some of the pieces are with me."
Easy and comforting, Deborah Kogan Ray's illustrations befit
the story's mood and theme.
5.198 Mayne, William. Gideon Ahoy! Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN 0-
440-50126-1. 156p. Ages 10 and up.
Twelve-year-old Eva has always thought her family was a little
overwhelming, especially her brother Gideon, who is both
brain-damaged and deaf. But she never imagines that such a
horrifying accident as befalls Gideon could occur in her family
of strangers. Gideon's first job — opening and closing bridges on
a canal barge — may be his last, but it may also bring the eccen-
tric members of Eva's family closer together than they've ever
been before. Boston Globe-Horn Book Honor Book, 1989.
5.199 Polacco, Patricia. Uncle Vova's Tree. Illustrated by Patricia Po-
lacco. Philomel Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21617-0. 30p. 4-8.
A Christmas season with Uncle Vova is rich with love and his
Russian homeland traditions of dancing, special ornaments, a
sleigh ride, Russian foods, and decorating a tree for the animals.
Then comes a sad time, the Christmas when Uncle Vova is gone.
Yet through memories and the keeping of traditions, the chil-
dren discover that their uncle's love will always be with them.
Warmly colored folk-art patterns surround penciled faces, cap-
turing a simple, joyous time. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books
in the Field of Social Studies.
5.200 Roth, Susan L. We'll Ride Elephants through Brooklyn. Illus-
trated by Susan L. Roth. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN
0-374-38258-1. 29p. 3-6 (est.).
A little girl anticipates the day when Grandpa will get better.
That special day will feature a parade through Brooklyn com-
plete with elephants, balloons, a band, dancing and cartwheels,
and root beer and cupcakes. Brightly colored collage illustra-
tions enhance this celebration of a child's love for her grandpa.
5.201 Rylant, Cynthia. Missing May. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08596-1. 89p. 11 and up.
When May dies, life almost stops for Ob, her husband of many
years, and for twelve-year-old Summer, the orphaned niece
L97
158
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
whom the couple has raised in their old age. May's life spirit had
buoyed them, bringing them strength because "We had May to
brag on us both/' Summer, May said repeatedly, was the best
little girl that she ever knew. And to May, arthritic Ob was the
sim and the moon. So when Cletus, an odd neighbor boy with
his own set of gifts, brings them an ad for a spirtual medium, Ob
grasps at the chance to communicate with May once again.
Cynthia Rylant's story, set in West Virginia, offers great love and
achieves great healing. Boston Globe-Horn Book Fiction Award,
1992; Newbery Medal, 1993.
5.202 Rylant, Cynthia. Mr. Griggs' Work. Illustrated by Julie Down-
ing. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-
08369-1. 27p. 4-7.
With the sensitivity to which her readers are accustomed, Cyn-
thia Rylant tells the story of Mr. Griggs, a man who loves his
work in a small-town post office so much that he can't stop
thinking about it. When he gets sick and must miss work for the
first time ever, he is miserable. Upon recovery and return to
work, he relishes being there even more, asking his first cus-
tomer, "almost gleefully, 'First Class or Parcel Post?'" Colorful
pastel illustrations show the pride and joy that Mr. Griggs has in
his work.
5.203 Springer, Nancy. Colt. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN
0-8037-1022-4. 121p. 10 and up.
Participating in a horseback riding program for the disabled,
Colt Vittorio, at first reluctant, comes to cherish his time in the
saddle and out of his wheelchair. He gains needed physical
strength and confidence. But when he develops a physical prob-
lem that prevents him from riding, his new stepfather finds the
solution in a Paso Fino horse — a breed that does not trot. This
warm story concludes with a harrowing ride that fosters Colt's
inner strength and resources.
5.204 Stolz, Mary. King Emmett the Second. Illustrated by Garth Wil-
liams. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09520-8. 56p. 7 and
up.
In this sequel to Emmett's Pig, Emmett Murphy must deal simul-
taneously with two traumas in his life: news of the death of his
beloved pet pig, King Emmett, and a pending family move from
New York to Ohio. Emmett's initial refusal to be comforted or
cajoled by his new porch or garden or neighbors or even a new
198
Human Relationships
159
bicycle seems perfectly reasonable and childlike. Eventually,
Emmett comes to love both Ohio and a new pet. Garth Wil-
liams's intermittent sketches include a Wilbur-like remembrance
of King Emmett the First.
5.205 Thomas, Jane Resh. Saying Good-bye to Grandma. Illustrated
by Marcia Sewall. Clarion Books, 1988. ISBN 0-89919-645-4. 48p.
6-9.
At age seven, Suzie is faced with saying good-bye to Grandma.
Suzie and her mother and father travel to Grandma's funeral,
where they gather with other friends and relatives to grieve, to
bid a final farewell, and to celebrate the love that they have for
one another. From the cousins' whispered game of hide-and-
seek in the casket display room of the funeral home to the tears
that Grandpa sheds, it is both a touching and real story. Cer-
tainly this book will assist teachers, counselors, and parents as
they help children understand the death of a loved one. Joan
Fassler Memorial Book Award, Association for the Care of Children's
Health, 1989.
5.206 Thurman, Chuck. A Time for Remembering, Illustrated by
Elizabeth Sayles. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers,
1989. ISBN 0-671-68573-2. 25p. 4-8 (est.).
A boy's grandfather gave him many things, good times, and
opportunities to learn and grow. After his grandfather's death,
the boy sits in front of a fireplace and uses a flower that his
grandfather gave him on their last visit together to open a well
of memories that will keep his grandfather alive forever. Shad-
owy, expressionistic paintings are somber, yet comforting.
5.207 Wilson, Johnniece Marshall. Robin on His Own. Scholastic
Hardcover Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-41813-0. 144p. 8-12.
When Aunt Belle marries nnd moves out of town, Robin's wid-
owed father decides that he and Robin must move to a smaller
apartment, which means that Robin may lose his cat, his new
parakeet, and his friends. Robin is also trying to come to terms
with the death of his mother. Left alone one night, Robin sets out
to visit Aunt Belle, with disastrous consequences. Johnniece Mar-
shall Wilson's portrait of African American family life is warm
and convincing.
5.208 Woodruff, Elvira. Dear Napoleon, I Know You're Dead, But. ...
Illustrated by Noah and Jess Woodruff. Holiday House, 1992.
ISBN 0-8234-0962-7. 220p. 10 and up (est.).
160
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
When Marty's fourth-grade teacher asks the class to write a
letter to a famous person, Marty can think of no living hero —
none, that is, except Gramps. For weeks, though, Gramps has
been confined to a nursing home, too ill to live with Marty and
his mother. On a whim, Marty writes to Napoleon. When
Gramps hears of it, he hints of a way to get the letter across time.
In the end, Gramps has taught Marty laughter, magic, mystery,
and hope.
5.209 Ziefert, Harriet. When Daddy Had the Chicken Pox. Illustrated
by Lionel Kalish. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-026907-3. 28p.
4-8 (est.).
Ellen is fearful when her father becomes so ill with the chicken
pox that he can't go to work or attend her ballet recital. But after
a few days, his lack of interest in everything turns to requests for
food, the newspaper, and his briefcase. Stylized illustrations
chronicle the return to health as pox fade and frowns turn to
smiles.
School Life and Day Care
5.210 Baehr, Patricia. School Isn't Fair! Illustrated by R. W. Alley. Four
Winds Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-708130-3. 30p. 4-6 (est.).
Edward finds one grumble after another at school — the snack-
time carrot with the stump left on, Donny who knocks him
down, Linda who obstructs his view and splashes juice, and
Mrs. Monroe who has no sense of justice. In the end, Edward's
skill in zipping jackets brings a triumphant turn of events. Styl-
ized drawings, highlighted with colored pencil and watercolor,
complement a story of childhood that rings true. Notable 1989
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.211 Bunting, Eve. Our Sixth-Grade Sugar Babies. J. B. Lippincott,
1990. ISBN 0-397-32452-9. 146p. 9-12.
When Mrs. Oda gives her sixth-grade class an assignment in
responsibility, each student becomes "parent" to a five-pound
bag of sugar for one week. Even though their sugar babies are
never to be left alone, Vicki becomes distracted by a seventh-
grade boy and temporarily abandons her baby on the lawn.
When she returns, both "baby" and an elderly neighbor have
disappeared. Vicki must decide whether to own up to her re-
sponsibilities or to take an easier route.
2u0
Human Relationships
161
5.212 Bunting, Eve. Our Teacher's Having a Baby. Illustrated by Di-
ane de Groat. Clarion Books, 1992. ISBN 0-395-60470-2. 32p. 6-8
(est).
The title page is crayoned in a child's hand and thumbtacked to
a bulletin board. Diane de Groat's watercolors bring a classroom
family to life as Mrs. Neal explains to her first graders that
"Teachers can be mothers, too." Narrator Samantha and the
other children engage in touching baby preparations such as
putting stickers on their teacher's shirt, "right on the stretched-
out part/' writing letters, picking names, and cutting out baby
things for the bulletin board. Their questions and concerns are
childlike and honest, their teacher sensitive and open.
5.213 Carrick, Carol. Left Behind. Illustrated by Donald Carrick. Clar-
ion Books, 1988. ISBN 0-89919-535-0. 29p. 5-8.
Manifesting many children's fears, Christopher becomes sepa-
rated from his classmates on a trip to the aquarium. When he
steps from the subway to let other passengers off, the train
leaves without him. With all the worries and confusion of a lost
child, Christopher tries to maintain his bearings, read signs, and
look for help. A policeman who knows what to do and an un-
derstanding teacher make for a comforting conclusion. Water-
colors bustle with city life.
5.214 Cleary, Beverly. Muggie Maggie. Illustrated by Kay Life. Mor-
row Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08554-7. 70p. 8-12 (est.).
Third-grader Maggie Schultz decides that she has no use for
cursive writing, with its imprecise squiggles so different from
manuscript printing and writing with the computer. Her dispo-
sition gets worse when she tries writing her name in cursive at
school and it comes out "Muggie," a name that sticks. Maggie
stubbornly refuses to back down, and in the process she learns
that there is a greater significance to cursive writing than just
learning to close her loops.
5.215 Delton, Judy. My Mom Made Me Go to School. Illustrated by
Lisa McCue. Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN 0-385-30330-0. 32p. 5-8.
Summer over, Mom announces that it's time for preparations for
school. For the kindergarten-bound narrator, Archie, that means
such things as new corduroy pants (the color of peas) that hang
over his shoes, won't bend, and smell awful. It means new shoes
that pinch, a dental checkup, booster shots, and a haircut that
makes his head feel like a toothbrush. No wonder Archie de-
162
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
tides that he's not going to school. Lisa McCue's cheerful illus-
trations are suitably impish.
5.216 Hennessy, B. G. School Days* Illustrated by Tracey Campbell
Pearson. Viking Penguin, 1990. ISBN 0-670-83025-9. 32p. 3-8.
Dedicated to "all the teachers who make school fun/' this book
is a visual treat— beginning with the arrival of the school bus,
through circle time and show and tell, to the last good-bye. In
watercolor washes, children are depicted alternately playing,
listening to stories, painting a huge blue whale, tending class-
room pets, or making letter games. Rhyming text is printed as a
teacher's handwriting on writing lines along the bottom bor-
ders. The pictures are worth close inspection for humorous de-
tails.
5.217 Hoffman, Phyllis. Meatball. Illustrated by Emily Arnold
McCully. HarperCollins/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1991. ISBN
0-06-022564-5. 32p. 2-7.
Marilyn is called Meatball by her day-care teacher, Julia, because
Marilyn is round and yummy Marilyn relates in first person her
day-care routine — from morning drop-off to evening pickup.
Included are descriptions of work and play, friends and centers,
naps and snacks. The tone is gentle and comforting, as are Emily
Arnold McCully's warm, multicultural classroom scenes.
5.218 Hurwitz, Johanna. Class President. Illustrated by Sheila
Hamanaka. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09114-8.
85p. 7 and up.
As the fifth grade begins, Julio Sanchez and his friends are
assigned a new teacher who initiates some unusual activities.
One is the election of a class president. Cricket Kaufman, the
smartest girl in class, and Lucas Cott, the class clown, appear to
be the only choices until Julio's surprising nomination. Unas-
suming Julio is nominated because of his kindness, generosity,
and leadership abilities. Julio's eventual election is set against
the background of normal fifth-grade turmoils. Black-and-white
illustrations add to the story's realism.
5.219 Lowry, Lois. Your Move, J. P.! Dell/Yearling Books, 1991. ISBN
0-440-40497-5. 122p. 9-12 (est.).
J. P. Tate is twelve, a good student, a champion chess player, and
in love. The object of his crush is Angela Patricia Galsworthy,
newly arrived from England, with traits that make J. P. use
202
Human Relationships
163
deodorant and think in trite phrases: her hair is like spun gold,
her teeth like pearls, her eyes like pools. To gain Angela's affec-
tion, J. P. falls into a "web of deception" that involves a fictitious
disease and rich relatives. True friendship and gently guided
self-inspection turn things around.
5.220 Martin, Ann. Rachel Parker, Kindergarten Show-Off. Illus-
trated by Nancy Poydar. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-
0935-X. 32p. 4-7 (est.).
For the energetic, five-year-old African American narrator,
Olivia, who is "very good at kindergarten," there is great expec-
tation that the new neighbors may have a girl just her age. But
when Rachel Elizabeth Parker moves in and can also read and
write, has two first names, a puppet stage, a granddaddy who
gives candy, and a baby sister, it may be too much for Olivia to
bear. A sensitive teacher and a shared task help cement friend-
ship.
5.221 McKenna, Colleen O'Shaughnessy. Fourth Grade Is a Jinx.
Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41735-5. 168p.
8-12.
To Collette's horror and embarrassment, when her fourth-grade
teacher breaks her leg, Collette's own mother is selected as the
substitute! Although the class is pleased, Collette is not, because
the happy routine of the Murphy's home life is destroyed by her
mother's working. The familiar story problems, the somewhat
exaggerated characters of snooty Marsha and pesky Roger,
abundant conversation, and short paragraphs make this a sure
favorite of intermediate children.
5.222 Morris, Judy K. The Kid Who Ran for Principal. J. B. Lippincott,
1989. ISBN 0-397-32360-3. 212p. 8-12.
Sixth graders have reasons to work hard on their class election
project to change Daniel Webster Elementary from a "good little
school" to a "great little school": good math, good teaching, fair
rules, a soccer coach, workable equipment. Class member Bon-
nie Mann, chosen to run for interim principal, learns that more
than her shy, "good-little-girl" reputation is necessary to effect
changes. She must be assertive before the school community.
Election night arrives, and parents are surprised to learn the
depth of student commitment to the campaign.
5.223 Roe, Eliane Corbeil. Circle of Light. Harper and Row, 1989.
ISBN 0-06-025079-8. 248p. 10 and up.
164
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Lucy, a thirteen-year-old French Canadian, reluctantly agrees to
represent her Catholic school in a regional scholastic competi-
tion. During the long months of hard study, Lucy grapples with
isolation, teasing, grief over the deaths of her father and brother,
and the pains of first love. Ultimately, her discipline and matur-
ity bring honor to her school, pride and consolation to her fam-
ily, and romance to her life.
5.224 Sharmat, Marjorie Weinman, and Mitchell Sharmat. The Prin-
cess of the Fillmore Street School. Illustrated by Denise
Brunkus. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-29811-0. 44p. 5-8.
In her second adventure as Agent for Secrets, Olivia Sharp, who
is a cross between the pampered Eloise of the Ritz and the
resourceful Encyclopedia Brown, is approached by neat-freak
Desiree in her campaign to become Princess of Fillmore Street
School. With chauffeur and boa, Olivia skirts disasters and
wraps up a happy ending.
5.225 Waggoner, Karen. The Lemonade Babysitter. Illustrated by
Dorothy Donohue. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992. ISBN
0-316-91711-7. 29p. 4-7 (est.).
Molly prefers tagging along to the office with her single mom
rather than staying at home with a baby-sitter. In fact, when
elderly neighbor Mr. Herbert shows up, Molly announces that
she is too old for baby-sitters. When Molly realizes the inevita-
ble, she makes plans to ensure his resignation. Yet Mr. Herbert
remains good-natured, leading Molly to surprise him with her
own brand of homemade lemonade. Expressive ink drawings
will help readers to speculate on Mr. Herbert's return.
Humorous Stories
5.226 Blume, Judy Fudge-a-Mania. Dutton Children's Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-525-44672-9. 147p. 7-11 (est.).
"Blueberry Baby Feet/7 "Dizzy for Izzy," and "Turtle the Dog
Meets Skunk": these are possible titles for chapters in the chaos
that results when the families of Fudge Hatcher and Sheila Tub-
man spend three weeks together in the same vacation home.
And at the center of most escapades is five-year-old Fudge. As
more than half of the text consists of conversation, the book, or
one of its many hilarious episodes, lends itself to classroom
plays or amusing read-alouds.
2f>4
Humorous Stories
5*227 Brittain, Bill. My Buddy, the King* Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN
0-06-020725-6. 135p. 9-12.
Tim Quilt just happens to be at the drug store on Saturday
morning when the teenage king of Mokobway nearly chokes on
a hot dog. It's Tim who saves his life, so interested government
agents "encourage" Tim to become the king's buddy for the sake
of rich oil reserves. But more trouble awaits the young ruler in a
tussle for power among the people of Mokobway, and Urn's
quick wits are needed again. Two friends who struggle to under-
stand different cultures make for high-interest, funny episodes.
5.228 Busselle, Rebecca. Bathing Ugly. Orchard Books/Richard Jack-
son Books, 1988. ISBN 0-531-08401-9. 184p. 11 and up (est.).
When thirteen-year-old Betsy Sherman discovers that her
mother sent her to camp to lose weight, Betsy is determined to
turn her current image around and be selected this year's "Bath-
ing Beauty." Instead, because of her good-natured personality
and chubby figure, she is chosen to participate in the comical
"Bathing Ugly" contest. Told in first person, Betsy's tale of de-
signing and donning the most outrageous bathing costume in
contest history is satisfying and giggle-producing.
5.229 Byars, Betsy. The Seven Treasure Hunts. Illustrated by Jennifer
Barrett. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-020886-4. 74p. 7-11.
Fun and misadventure follow pals Jackson and Goat as the two
boys set up a series of treasure hunts, determined to outsmart
each other. During one of the hunts, Jackson inadvertently an-
tagonizes Goat's bossy older sister, Rachel, by eating her Popsi-
cle, so Rachel throws a kink into the boys' fun. Written by New-
bery award-winning author Betsy Byars, this humorous book,
enhanced by comical pen-and-ink drawings, is appropriate both
for middle-grade readers or as a read-aloud book for primary-
grade children.
5.230 Carris, Joan. The Greatest Idea Ever. Illustrated by Carol
Newsom. J. B. Lippincott, 1990. ISBN 0-397-32379-4. 167p. &-12.
Enterprising fourth-grader Gus Howard and his great ideas
manage both to impress and to vex almost every significant
other in his life — his mother; his saintly, patient teacher, Mr.
Keene; and Nanny Vincent, his female counterpart and arch-
nemesis. This time Gus tries to train a new dog and to organize
a school art show. Joan Carris tells her innocent story in simple,
166
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
plain English and weaves plot complications that are neatly tied
in this fourth book about the Howard boys.
5.231 Conford, Ellen. Dear Mom, Get Me Out of Here! Little, Brown,
1992. ISBN 0-316-15370-2. 160p. 10-12 (est.).
For thirteen-year-old Paul Tanner, the boarding school that his
parents chose, Burnside, is a cross between a medieval dungeon
and a looney bin. Orson Autrey, Paul's self-proclaimed genius of
a roommate (who tries to fly in his spare time), explains it this
way: "You have to understand that there's something wrong
with every kid here." Teachers, too, are unusual. Coach
Waldrup, for example, schedules outdoor checkers tournaments
in the snow. Then there's the malevolent Headmaster Pickles —
Paul and friends suspect that he has a dark past and try to
uncover his secrets.
5.232 Danziger, Paula. Earth to Matthew. Delacorte Press, 1991. ISBN
0-385-30453-6. 148p. 9-12.
Matthew Martin, lead character in two previous books by Paula
Danziger, begins to experience some of the pangs of growing up:
girls (in particular, one girl) are almost worth being teased
about, some of his best retorts are being left unspoken, and a
school project on the ecosystem is intriguing. In this adventure,
Matthew and his class take a field trip to the Franklin Institute
as part of their ecology study, an event that meshes story line
with some didactic content.
5.233 Danziger, Pauia. Everyone Else's Parents Said Yes. Delacorte
Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-29805-6. 115p. 9-12.
Matthew Martin can't wait until his eleventh-birthday sleep-
over. He spends the time counting the days, tormenting girls,
including his sister Amanda, and planning the list of junk food
to serve. But just before the birthday, he has a fight with his best
friend Joshua, the girls in his sixth-grade class organize to get
their revenge, and Matthew finds his plans askew. In Paula
Danziger 's breezy style, Matthew's remorse, if not sincere, is at
least funny in this first book about Matthew.
5.234 Danziger, Paula. Make like a Tree and Leave. Delacorte Press,
1990. ISBN 0-385-30151-0. 117p. 9-12.
Matthew Martin's adventure in this second book involves sib-
ling rivalry and antics associated with serving as chair of the
Mummy Committee on the Egypt Unit Project. From classmate
206
Humorous Stories
167
Brian Bruno's entrapment in a plaster mummy cast to a sudsy
pet wash that is an altruistic effort to raise money for a class-
mate's medical treatment, situations are fast-moving, making
the book well suited as a read-aloud.
5.235 Gilson, Jamie. Hobie Hanson: Greatest Hero of the Mall. Illus-
trated by Anita Riggio. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-688-08968-2. 149p. 8-12 (est.).
Hobie's dreams of heroic deeds fade as he, the child whom he's
baby-sitting, and Fido are rescued by know-it-all Molly during
a town flood. Then, when classes for the fourth through sixth
grades at Central School are forced to resume at the defunct
"Bob's Togs for All the Family" in Wilhurst Mall, it is Molly who
finds the bag of valuables that Hobie lost during his rescue. The
bag is later stolen, and Hobie's laughable ordeals while retriev-
ing his treasures from Larry Lion earn him the long-awaited title
of "Greatest Hero of the Mall."
5.236 Goode, Diane. Where's Our Mama? Illustrated by Diane Goode.
Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44770-9. 28p. 3-7
(est).
At the Gare d'Orsay, a Paris train station, Mama's hat blows off,
and she chases it out of sight. With Mama lost, her children beg
a gendarme's help in finding "the most beautiful woman in the
world." Together, they search the city — visiting a school, a baker,
a theater— but they see no one who looks or acts like Mama.
Meantime, careful readers will spot Mama flitting in and out of
scenes looking for her children. But weren't they supposed to
wait at the station? Diane Goode's period costumes and scenes
reflect the cluttered, elegant charm of the Parisian setting and a
comforting ending as well
5.237 Grossman, Bill. The Guy Who Was Five Minutes Late. Illustra-
tions by Judy Glasser. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-022269-
7. 32p. 3-6 (est).
When a baby is born just five minutes late, this sets the pattern
for his entire life. Ever after, "by night or by day, / at work or at
play," he is always five minutes late. When he is late to his own
wedding, the bride marries his brother instead. But things turn
out just fine when he meets the Princess Carrie, who shares his
late trait. Rhyming text, an identifiable theme, and stylized illus-
trations make for exaggerated fun.
ERIC
168
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.238 Hutchins, Pat. Rats! Illustrated by Laurence Hutchins. Greenwil-
low Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07776-5. 96p. 6-10 (est.).
More than anything, Sam wants a rat. He wants a rat so badly
that he buys one before asking his parents' permission. Never-
theless, after a full-tilt public relations campaign, Sam's parents
acquiesce, and Nibbles is his. But one small rat wreaks giant
havoc. Nibbles scares visitor Veronica into a faint, creates racket
enough so that the police are notified, and ends up giving birth
to nine new Nibbles. Laurence Hutchins's black-and-white
drawings are wacky matches for the text.
5.239 Levine, Evan. Not the Piano, Mrs. Medley! Illustrated by S. D.
Schindler. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1991. ISBN
0-531-08556-2. 32p. 4-7.
Despite Max's impatience, his grandmother, Mrs. Medley, can't
walk to the beach without packing half her belongings — includ-
ing table, chairs, bongo drums, her Monopoly set, and an accor-
dion. But once there, she's so smitten by the sand and the waves
that she forgets all of the paraphernalia, and the two laugh
together when they realize she has brought everything but the
swimsuits! Illustrations are filled with the humorous clutter of
Mrs. Medley's possessions and her infectious glee when she
recognizes her silliness.
5.240 Lillie, Patricia. When the Rooster Crowed. Illustrated by Nancy
Winslow Parker. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09379-5.
32p. 3-6.
For a farmer awakened by the crow of the rooster at ten minutes
to five, there is need for "ten more minutes." When his cow says
"Mmmooo," and his rooster goes "Cock-a-doodle-doo" again,
it's "five more minutes" that the farmer needs. Other barnyard
animals add to the rooster's wake-up call, but it takes them all
in chorus to make the farmer say, "ALL RIGHT!" and begin his
morning chores. Colors are morning-cheerful, shapes are sim-
ple, and scenes are uncluttered.
5.241 Lowry, Lois. Anastasia at This Address. Houghton Mifflin,
1991. ISBN 0-395-56263-5. 130p. 8-12.
Eighth in the Anastasia series, this humorous novel explores
Anastasia's misadventures in the world of romance. Responding
to a personal ad written by a wealthy, sophisticated, twenty-
eight-year-old bachelor, Anastasia begins a correspondence full
of half-truths in order to spice up her lackluster love life. When
208
Humorous Stories
169
a friend's wedding and fate intervene, Anastasia ends her "love-
letters" escapade with a big sigh of relief.
5.242 Mahy, Margaret. The Great White Man-Eating Shark: A Cau-
tionary Tale. Illustrated by Jonathan Allen. Dial Books for Young
Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0749-5. 32p. 5^8.
It is not Norvin's fault that he is an actor who looks like a great
white shark. But it is his fault that he is such a greedy boy that
he doesn't want to share the cove with other swimmers.
Through a combination of his looks, his swimming agility, his
acting talent, and a strapped-on dorsal fin, Norvin terrorizes the
summer crowd, sending people screeching to shore. His plot is
foiled, however, by the appearance of a real shark who takes a
fancy to Norvin.
5.243 Manes, Stephen. Chocolate-Covered Ants. Scholastic Hard-
cover Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-40960-3. 103p. 8-12.
It all starts when Max's little brother Adam gets an ant farm for
his birthday. That's when Max tells Adam about people eating
chocolate-covered ants. Because Adam refuses to accept that
contention, the bet is on. The taste of ants is eloquently described
in a story that is reminiscent of Thomas Rockwell's How to Eat
Fried Worms. Stephen Manes offers groaners for middle graders
that include ants sneaked into ice cream, hidden in covers, and
exploded in the microwave.
5.244 Manes, Stephen. Make Four Million Dollar$ by Next
Thur$day! Illustrated by George Ulrich. Bantam/Skylark
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-553-07050-9. 87p. 8-12 (est.).
Jason Nozzle wants to be a multimillionaire. Lucky for him, he
finds a book by Dr. K. Pinkerton Silverfish titled Make Four
Million Dollar$ by Next Thur$day. The book's instructions are to
follow Dr. Silverfish's advice without deviation and definitely
not to read ahead. So Jason buries money, pins thirty-seven
dollar signs to his clothes for a day, chants a money mantra, and,
in general, performs to code. Readers may recognize Dr. Silver-
fish as author of Be a Perfect Person in Just Three Days.
5.245 Paulsen, Gary. The Boy Who Owned the School: A Comedy of
Love. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-
08465-5. 85p. 11 and up.
Jacob Freisten does his best to slip through high school — and
life — completely unnoticed. In order to avoid flunking English,
209
170
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
he is forced by Mrs. Hilsak to help out as a stage-crew member
for the school play. When his love for the play's star, Maria
Tesser, goes unrequited, Jacob finally energizes himself, discov-
ering both romance and his own potential. Gary Paulsen's dry
humor and highly readable prose make this an easy read for less
motivated students.
5.246 Peck, Robert Newton. Higbee's Halloween. Walker, 1990. ISBN
0-0827-6969-1. lOlp. 10-12.
Halloween in Clod's Corner is unforgettable the year that the
Striker gang moves in from Siberia. When Canker, Hernia, Zitt,
and the other Strikers erect their torture-chamber fort in town,
Higbee H. Higgenbottom knows he must counter the bullies. As
told by his friend and reluctant accomplice, Quincy, the tale
centers on revenge, pumpkin pies, and a cannon on the village
green. Quincy's pompous language offsets Higbee's Huck Finn
nonchalance, and the pieces fall together for the "smashing"
climax.
5.247 Peck, Robert Newton. Soup in Love. Illustrated by Charles Ro-
binson. Delacorte Press, 1992. ISBN 0-385-30563-X. 114p. 9-12.
Soup and Rob are up to new plans and pranks in their twelfth
adventure in 1920s rural Vermont. This time the boys are aiming
to win the prize for the most unusual valentine in the village in
order to impress the town's prettiest girls. The valentine con-
struction depends on Mrs. Spazzatura's new refrigerator box, a
leftover toboggan, a white horse named Black Thunder, and a
visitor named Ox. The results are as funny and as predictable as
readers can imagine.
5.248 Pinkwater, Daniel. Uncle Melvin. Illustrated by Daniel Pinkwa-
ter. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-774675-5. 27p. 5^8.
Charles's Uncle Melvin is different from other people. Some
even say that he's crazy. Uncle Melvin says that he understands
what the birds and animals say to him. He says that his old-fash-
ioned derby keeps his thoughts from bouncing away. He even
thinks that the president is an iguana. But Charles knows that
Uncle Melvin has a special perception and understanding about
the world. Daniel Pinkwater's scribbly backgrounds, bright col-
ors, and mild faces give a lift to this warm tale for children.
5.249 Remkiewicz, Frank. Greedyanna. Illustrated by Frank
Remkiewicz. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
688-10295-6. 32p. 4-8.
8iii
Humorous Stories
171
Little Anna is "going through a phase." For her, everything
(except lima beans) is "Mine!" Brother Eddie renames her
"Greedyanna," and the family indulges her totally, even moving
to the garage so the greedy one does not have to share the house.
But Greedyanna soon learns that being selfish is lonely and not
much fun after all. Ink drawings painted with watercolor and
gouache are as comical as the words.
5.250 Sachar, Louis. Wayside School Is Falling Down. Illustrated by
Joel Schick. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-
07868-0. 179p. 8-10.
The students from the looney thirty-story Wayside School are
back in this sequel to Sideways Stories from Wayside School Back
is Mrs. Jewls, teacher on the thirtieth floor for a "class where
nobody was strange because nobody was normal." Back are the
three Erics (Fry, Bacon, and Ovens). Back is Todd, who always
rides the kindergarten bus home at noon because his name is
forever on the board. Back, too, are all the other students who
dread Mrs. Mush's cafeteria concoctions, who avoid the base-
ment at all costs, and who puzzle over the absence of a twenty-
ninth floor.
5.251 Samuels, Barbara. What's So Great about Cindy Snappleby?
Illustrated by Barbara Samuels. Orchard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
531-08579-1. 32p. 3-6.
Cool Cindy Snappleby is coming to play with Dolores's big
sister, Faye. Cindy wears pink hair ribbons and pink-dotted
dresses and thinks little children are usually messy and pesty.
Self-assured Cindy shares the secret of how she always wins in
jacks by saying, "steady as a rock and cool as a cucumber." It's
up to Dolores to shake Cindy Snappleby's calm by sharing some
secrets of her own — including a box of live frogs. Sisters align in
this Dolores story filled with bright action.
5.252 Spinelli, Jerry. The Bathwater Gang. Illustrated by Meredith
Johnson. Little, Brown/Springboard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-316-
80720-6. 59p. 7-11 (est.).
When Granny suggests to bored Bertie that a good summer
activity may be to start a gang, Granny had in mind a good
gang — one that does projects. But "gangs" have a different con-
notation for Mrs. Pickwell, the mother of Bertie's best friend,
and she refuses to let her daughter join. And ?t looks as though
Mrs. Pickwell is right: a boys' gang forms to combat Bertie's, and
ERIC
211
172
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
balloon and egg fights break out. It takes Granny starting her
own gang to settle the fracas.
5.253 Stevenson, Su?ie. Jessica the Blue Streak. Illustrated by Suqie
Stevenson. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN
0-531-08398-5. 29p. 5-8 (est.).
Daddy brings home an energetic, six-month-old puppy named
Jessica. The family dogs are not impressed with this "blue
streak/' and the children spend their day fetching things Jessica
has snatched, keeping Jessica from chewing shoes and furniture,
and cleaning up after her. Cartoon-like watercolors show ram-
bunctious Jessica in action.
5.254 Tusa, Tricia. Sherman and Pearl. Illustrated by Tricia Tusa.
Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-789542-4. 28p. 4-8 (est.).
Sherman and Pearl like to sit by their dirt road every day and
wave to all the people who pass by. But when bulldozers come
to build a freeway just beyond the old dirt road, being friendly
becomes a lot harder. Unwilling to give up hope, they wait and
wait until the people finally choose to leave the freeway behind
and return to the old dirt road. Expressive watercolors make
Sherman and Pearl a comical pair.
5.255 Wilson, Sarah. The Day That Henry Cleaned His Room. Illus-
trated by Sarah Wilson. Simon and Schuster Books for Young
Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-671-69202-X. 32p. 4-8.
The cartoon-like figures bring an animated quality to this hu-
morous account of Henry's room cleaning. Animals, scientists,
the army, and his family all help Henry get rid of the clutter, the
moss, and the mismatched socks that are lurking under his bed.
But Henry isn't happy until his old friends return.
5.256 Woodruff, Elvira. Show and Tell. Illustrated by Denise Brunkus.
Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0883-3. 32p. 4-8.
Andy has wild red hair, horn-rimmed glasses, huge front teeth,
and the most boring show-and-tell ideas in the whole kindergar-
ten— maybe even in the whole world. Once he brought a paper-
clip, another time a shoestring, and then a bent fork. Even Mrs.
Applelarney yawned. But then Andy finds a bubble jar with a
warning label attached and sets a new standard in zany show-
and-tell history.
212
Mystery Stories
173
Mystery Stories
5.257 Alexander, Sue. World Famous Muriel and the Magic Mystery,
Illustrated by Maria Frazee. Thomas Y Crowell, 1990. ISBN 0-
690-04789-4. 32p. 5-8 (est.).
When the Great Hokus Pokus disappears in the middle of an
unsuccessful rehearsal for his magic show, Professor Ballyhoo
enlists the help of the World Famous Muriel in finding him.
Armed with a batch of peanut butter cookies (which help her do
her best thinking), Muriel relies on her extraordinary powers of
deduction to trace the Great Hokus Pokus to the place where a
magician in difficulty would most likely go— the public library.
Readers will find Maria Frazee's detailed illustrations as engag-
ing as the story line.
5.258 Bunting, Eve. Coffin on a Case. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-
020274-2. 106p. 10 and up (est.).
Like Sam Spade, Paul Coffin's dad is a private detective — trench
coat, slouchy hat, and name on a frosted glass door. All Dad
needs, Paul is sure, is either for Mom to come back or for a really
gorgeous woman to ask them to take her case. Enter gorgeous
Lily Larson, age sixteen, whose mother is missing and who
needs a detective. The case falls circuitously to Paul, and before
things settle, the mystery involves wooden storks, art thieves,
and kidnapping.
5.259 DeClements, Barthe. Wake Me at Midnight Viking Penguin,
1991. ISBN 0-670-84038-6. 154p. 8-12.
Caitlin LeBlanc's neighborhood bustles with nocturnal activ-
ity—and all of it seems inexplicable. For example, someone next
door shovels in the backyard at midnight. Is it quiet, skinny,
thirteen-year-old "Bones," who Caitlin suspects doesn't get
enough to eat? And across the street, the Dorman's house has
strange comings and goings at all hours. With her new neighbor,
Missy, Caitlin is drawn into crime detection. Her own home life
with a traveling father, work-weary mother, and unexpected
baby brother offers other problems.
5.260 Dillon, Eilis. The Island of Ghosts. Charles Sciibner's
Sons/Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-684-19107-5. 151p.
10 and up.
Dara and Brendan, twelve-year-old best friends, share the sim-
ple traditions of their Irish island village, often swimming, sail-
ERIC
213
174
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
ing, and storytelling with their younger sisters. Their lives are
interrupted by an offer of tutoring for school entrance exams by
an American engineer with a mysterious past. Under the guise
of gaining the boys' friendship, the American darkly hints of
interest in a nearby island, said to be haunted; then he kidnaps
and questions the boys. As a read-aloud, this book offers much
for talking over — loyalty, family, morality, and traditions.
5.261 Giff, Patricia Reillyi Garbage Juice for Breakfast. Illustrated by
Blanche Sims. Dell/Young Yearling Books, 1989. ISBN 0-440-
40207-7. 69p. 6-9.
Campers at Camp Wild-in-the-Woods agree that garbage juice
any time tastes yucky, but solving Miss Perry's mysteries is
definitelty thrilling— especially for competitors Dawn Bosco, the
Polka Dot Private Eye, and Lizzie Lee, the Cool Cat Detective.
When the announced mystery contest is "HELP TO FIND
TREASURE," each girl is confident that she will find the treasure
first. Searching for clues in the bam and through the trails, the
two detectives, neck-in-neck, unravel the mystery of "Treasure"
and unleash some of their personal problems along the way Five
other Polka Dot Private Eye books are available tc interested
readers.
5.262 Roennfeldt, Mary. What's That Noise? Illustrated by Robert
Roennfeldt. Orchard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08572-4. 32p. 3^6.
George hears a strange noise in the night and searches for its
source. Readers will spot a chalky white cat bounding from page
to page, but sleepy George misses it all. Green, shadov/y beasts
announce the cat's passage in the briefest of speech balloons:
"screech" or "bray" or "growl." The next morning, when a very
tired, confused George dons his zookeeper uniform, a fuzzy
white cat peeks from under his bed. The zoo animals know who
made that noise in the night. "Do you?"
5.263 Sharmat, Marjorie Weinman. Nate the Great and the Halloween
Hunt. Nate the Great and the Musical Note. Nate the Great and
the Stolen Base. Nate the Great Goes Down in the Dumps.
Illustrated by Marc Simont. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989-92. 48p.
6-9.
In the spirit of the Encyclopedia Brown classics, detective Nate
the Great hunts down clues and solves cases with the aid of his
dog, Sludge, and his eccentric friend Rosamond. Each easy-to-
read story in the Nate the Great series contains a mystery com-
ERIC
214
CYNTHIA VOIGT
and the 0
STOLEN BASE
WALL
by Eye Bunting
Ronald Himler
by Marjorie
Weinman
B.
A. The Vandemark Mummy by Cynthia Voigt (see 5.267). B. Nate the Great and the
Stolen Base by Marjorie Weinman Sharmat; illustrated by Marc Simont (see 5.263).
C. The Waif by Eve Bunting; illustrated by Ronald Himler (see 5.191).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE 215
A. Greedyanna by Frank Remkiewicz (see 5.249). B. Anastasia at This Address by
Lois Lowry (see 5.241). C. The Bathwater Gang by Jerry Spinelli; illustrated by
Meredith Johnson (see 5.252). D. Fudge-a-Mania by Judy Blume (see 5.226).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
216
Mystery Stories
175
plete with clues that the reader can use to think along with Nate.
Simple illustrations in limited colors portray the action on a part
of nearly every page.
5.264 Singer, Marilyn. The Hoax on You* Illustrated by Richard Wil-
liams. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-025851-9. 59p. 8-12
(est.).
In this sixth book of the Sam and Dave mystery series, identical
twins Sam and Dave Bean find themselves tailing the new for-
eign exchange student in town. Jewelry has been stolen from the
homes that she has visited, and the junior detectives are hot on
her trail. The book's relatively short sentences, heavy reliance on
dialogue to move the plot along, and black-and-white illustra-
tions all make this an easy read for young mystery fans.
5.265 Sobol, Donald J. Encyclopedia Brown and the Case of the Dis-
gusting Sneakers. Illustrated by Gail Owens. Morrow Junior
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09012-5. 92p. 7-12.
Untouched by inflation, ageless Encyclopedia Brown still
charges twenty-five cents in each of these ten new cases. Smelly
sneakers, pink and orange canoes, and strangely carved trees
provide some of the clues. The stories, as always, are full of
humorous similes and provide readers with a chance to apply
their own knowledge of science and deduction to match wits
with the boy genius.
5.266 Trease, Geoffrey. A Flight of Angels. Lerner, 1989. ISBN 0-8225-
0731-5. 120p. 9-13.
A mysteriously marked cellar in historical Nottingham, Eng-
land, intrigues Sheila and her three classmates into exploring
underground caves and investigating a 400-year-old secret.
Aided by a history-buff librarian, the resourceful detectives use
clues and deductive reasoning to solve a mystery that involves
a religious conflict of the Middle Ages and to resolve a present-
day dilemma.
5.267 Voigt, Cynthia. The Vandemark Mummy. Fawcett Juniper
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-449-70417-3. 209p. 10 and up (est).
Moving with their college instructor father to Maine, Althea Hall
and her brother Phineas try to adjust to life in a new place
without Mom, who has a new job on the West Coast. Through
the terms of a founder's family will, Mr. Hall unexpectedly
becomes curator of a bequeathed Egyptian collection. Even
217
176
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
though the Halls take the responsibility seriously, the collec-
tion's mummy is stolen. Then Althea is missing, too, and
Phineas must do some clever sleuthing before a thief 's greed
endangers his sister's life. Characters are realistically and fully
drawn.
Respect for Nature
5.268 Allen, Judy. Tiger. Illustrated by Tudor Humphries. Candlewick
Press, 1992. ISBN 1-56402-083-5. 29p. 6-10 (est.).
When a rumor starts that there is a tiger in the woods, the
villagers plan to kill it to become strong, brave, and wealthy. A
famous hunter comes to track the tiger, and Young Lee, a boy
who does not want the tiger to die, wishes the hunter bad luck.
Through delicate earth-tone watercolors, the illustrator shares
not only the secret of "shooting" the tiger without killing it, but
the mountainous countryside and the beauty of the great South
Chinese Tiger. A concluding Tiger Fact Sheet enlists readers'
help in tiger-saving efforts.
5.269 Aschenbrenner, Gerald (adapted by Joanne Fink). Jack, the Seal
and the Sea. Illustrated by Joanne Fink. Silver Burdett Press,
1988. ISBN 0-382-09735-1. 28p. 4-7 (est.).
Jack, a fisherman like his father, nets a seal dying from water
pollution. After helping the seal, Jack is rewarded by a healthy
catch and, through a dream, is alerted to the dangers of polluting
the sea. Now Jack sails not to fish but to deliver his message that
everyone must join in the effort to clean up our seas. Both Jack
and the creatures of the sea are endearingly portrayed in realistic
black, white, and sepia drawings.
5.270 Baker, Jeannie. Window. Illustrated by Jeannie Baker. Greenwil-
low Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-08918-6. 24p. All ages (est.).
In a series of wordless, strikingly unusual double-page spreads,
a boy's view through a windowpane changes from wilderness
to city as he changes from infant to adult. Through the glass,
readers see collage constructions depicting environmental
change; on windowsill and frame they see objects depicting
advancing age. A concluding author's note, extrapolating to
humankind's destruction of wilderness and consequent extinc-
tion of species, urges each individual to protect the environment.
Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
218
Respect for Nature 177
5.271 Bjork, Christina (translated by Joan Sandin). Linnea's Almanac.
Illustrated by Lena Anderson. R & S Books, 1989. ISBN 91-29-
59176-7. 61p. 6-10 (est).
An almanac that Linnea receives for Christmas inspires her to
keep her own almanac, in which she records all her activities
and reports on what's happening in the world around her. When
the January snows come, she opens a bird restaurant; in Febru-
ary, she repots plants; and in March, Linnea spies the first spring
flower and hears the blackbirds sing. From Linnea's month-by-
month accounting of her discoveries, readers will learn scientifi-
cally verified information about their natural environment.
5.272 Blyler, Allison. Finding Foxes. Illustrated by Robert J. Blake.
Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22264-2. 32p. 6-8 (est.).
In poetic text and double-page earth-tone paintings, the move-
ment, mystery, and majesty of the red fox are illuminated for the
not-so-young reader, the hunt and the kill are urgent— "The fox
is cruelly red, in a knife of sun." Through metaphor and a tone
that is hushed and respectful, Allison Blyler offers "the ways of
the fox," while Robert Blake interprets those ways in dappled
forest scenes in which the foxes are hiding from the reader. These
gouache paintings in olives and browns show brush strokes
against canvas-like page borders.
5.273 Carlstrom, Nancy White. Goodbye Geese. Illustrated by Ed
Young. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21832-7. 34p. 4^6.
On an outdoor walk toward the end of autumn, a father poeti-
cally describes winter in answer to his child's -simple yet com-
plex questions. Each metaphoric answer stimulates another
question. The child wonders whether winter has hands, a voice,
a shape. "Does winter have ears?" the child asks. "When geese
spread their wings in the sky and fly honking south, winter
hears and winter comes." Caldecott-medalist Ed Young brings a
glowing stillness to the change in seasons.
5.274 Chall, Martha Wilson. Up North at the Cabin. Illustrated by
Steve Johnson. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992. ISBN
0-688-09733-2. 32p. 5 and up.
A child recalls her family trips to a cabin in the north, where
days were filled with swimming, canoeing, water skiing, and
fishing with Grandpa, using peanut-butter-and-worm sand-
wiches for bait. As with Cynthia Rylant's When I Was Young in
the Mountains, Martha Wilson Chall's poetic text testifies to the
219
178
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
spirit and beauty of a special place etched in dear memories.
Grandma's corn-on-the-cob is nibbled while "loons dance down
the sun." Steve Johnson's paintings catch the light and mottled
shadows of perfect summer days.
5.275 Cotler, Joanna. Sky Above, Earth Below. Illustrated by Joanna
Cotler. Harper and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1990. ISBN
0-06-021366-3. 32p. 3-5.
Patterns of sky and earth look beautiful to a little girl viewing
them through an airplane window. Joanna Cotter's simple cut-
out pictures of clouds, stars, rivers, trees, houses, and animals
are set against vividly contrasting backgrounds. Sparse text
adds drama to the minimalist shapes and patterns of the illus-
trations.
5.276 Cowcher, Helen. Antarctica. Illustrated by Helen Cowcher. Far-
rar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-30368-1. 36p. 4-8.
In this thought-provoking yet gentle tale, Helen Cowcher de-
scribes the life of Antarctic inhabitants — emperor and Adelie
penguins and Weddell seals. Paralleling predictable hazards of
natural enemies with the unknown threats of new arrivals — hu-
man beings — the author leaves the consequences of human in-
trusion upon the ancient Antarctic world an open-ended ques-
tion. Watercolor washes effectively portray a pristine
environment of mystery and ice. Outstanding Science Trade Books
for Children in 1990.
5.277 Ehlert, Lois. Feathers for Lunch. Illustrated by Lois Ehlert. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich, 1990. ISBN 0-15-230550-5. 32p. 3-8.
When the cat slips out the door, he looks around for a special
lunch. As the belled cat "jingles" his way through the garden, he
and young readers meet twelve backyard birds, including
mourning doves, a northern cardinal, and an American robin.
But despite the cat's best sneaking and snooping, all this feline
gets is "feathers for lunch." The humorous rhyming text is boun-
tifully illustrated with brilliant and clearly labeled collages of
birds and flowers. An illustrated listing of the birds and infor-
mation about their size, food, and habitat complete the book.
Outstanding Science Trade Books for Children in 1990.
5.^78 Florian, Douglas. Nature Walk. Illustrated by Douglas Florian.
Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08269-6. 29p. 3-7.
ZZ0
Respect for Nature
179
Two children and a guide go on a nature trail and discover pine
cones, hidden lakes, swallowtails, and more. Captioned, earth-
tone illustrations along with a seek-and-find activity help read-
ers to conclude that discovering nature means seeing more than
you expected to see. ALA Notable Children's Trade Books in Science,
1989.
5*279 Hamilton, Virginia. Drylongso. Illustrated by Jerry Pinkney.
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-224241-4. 64p. 8-12.
West of the Mississippi in the 1970s, dust storms come. No
matter that Mamalou covers the cracks with tatter cloths— dust
gets in everyplace. To young Lindy's family the dust also brings
Drylongso, a quiet boy of mythic proportions whose name once
meant "long-time drought." Drylongso knows about overplow-
ing, what plants hold the soil, and how to use a divining rod.
Virginia Hamilton's text sings as it teaches, and Jerry Pinkney's
illustrations transport readers through the thirsty storm and its
aftermath.
5*280 Heiligman, Deborah. Into the Night Illustrated by Melissa
Sweet. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-026382-2. 26p. 4-8
(est.).
As a little boy readies for bed, he questions his mother: "Do you
think our day is over too soon?" Together, they recall their event-
filled day. Told in rhyming couplets, the lyrical text recounts
their play, their walk through the meadows, and their discover-
ies of nature's treasures. Large pastel watercolor illustrations
capture mother and son's outdoor adventure and help to create
a reassuring story o* important life events as day passes "into
the night."
5*281 Hoi, Coby. A Visit to the Farm. Illustrated by Coby Hoi. North-
South Books, 1989. ISBN 1-55858-000-X. 24p. 4-8 (est.).
For the first time, Julie and Martin have permission to spend a
day at the farm on their own. Visiting old and new friends, the
children watch and feed many animals, including chickens,
pigs, and rabbits. Leaving with an armload of farm-fresh treats,
Julie and Martin look forward to their next visit. Torn-paper
collages against great white spaces illustrate this simple, satisfy-
ing story of a day on the farm.
5*282 Ichikawa, Satomi. Nora's Duck. Illustrated by Satomi Ichikawa.
Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21 805-X. 32p. 4-8.
ERiC
221
180
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
When Nora finds an injured duckling, she takes it to Doctor
John. During her visit, Nora meets many once-injured animals
that have come to live on this specialized farm under Doctor
John's care. Watercolor illustrations accompany this story of the
importance of all living creatures. The author's afterword pro-
vides readers with information about the real Doctor John and
his animal sanctuary in Kent, England.
5.283 Johnson, Herschel. A Visit to the Country. Illustrated by Romare
Bearden. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-022854-7. 32p. 2-8.
Even though people are always coming and going through the
country on the Mountain Express, Mike and his grandparents are
content to stay on their farm caring for Bessie, gathering eggs,
and watching nature at play. When Mike finds a cardinal nest-
ling, he and his grandparents nurture the bird until it learns to
fly Then a decision must be made about "comings and goings."
The paintings by the late African American artist Romare Bear-
den, winner of the 1987 National Medal of Arts, add drama to
this, his only children's book.
5.284 Lyon, George Ella. Who Came Down That Road? Illustrated by
Peter Catalanotto. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-531-08587-2. 32p. 4-7.
When a boy asks a question about who came down the road, the
mother responds in a reverie. She leads him back through his-
tory to her grandparents, the Civil War, the Native Americans,
the mastodons — back to the beginning of time. Brilliant, impres-
sionistic, full-page watercolors alternating light with shadow
have a dream-like quality that hints at mysteries beyond those
visible.
5.285 McDonald, Megan. Whoo-oo Is It? Illustrated by S. D. Schindler.
Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08574-
0. 32p. 2-6.
A lyrical narrative and soft, dark, naturalistic paintings mesh to
form an owl's night world. From her barnloft nest, Mother Owl
hears mysterious noises. She searches to find their source, en-
countering a snake, a dragonfly, and other night creatures, each
with its distinctive sound. Just at dawn she realizes that the eggs
she has guarded and warmed have begun to change. This book
is both an onomatopoeic experience and an evocation of the
wonder of living beings.
222
Respect for Nature
181
5.286 Murphy, Jim. The Call of the Wolves. Illustrated by Mark Alan
Weatherby Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-
41941-2. 32p. 4-S.
As a young Arctic wolf and his pack attack a herd of caribou, the
young wolf is injured by a rifle shot from an airplane and must
fight desperately through a blizzard to return to the safety of its
pack. This magnificently and realistically illustrated book is use-
ful in learning of the plight of the Arctic wolf, an endangered
species. The author has added a factual account of the past,
present, and future of the wolf and a bibliography.
5.287 Parnall, Peter. Quiet. Illustrated by Peter Parnall. Morrow Junior
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08205-X. 28p. 5-10 (est).
A child waits in quiet for a raven, chipmunk, mouse, and chicka-
dee to come close to him as he lies on the ground, "a quiet,
wrinkled thing under a pile of seeds and apple cores/' And
quietly, quietly they come. Peter Parnall's detailed illustrations
bring the forest to life. Notable Children's Trade Books in Science,
1989.
5.288 Rockwell, Anne. Apples and Pumpkins. Illustrated by Lizzy
Rockwell. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-777270-5. 22p. 4-S.
Fall brings red and yellow leaves and a trip to Comstock Farms,
where a little girl and her family pick a bushel of red apples and
the best pumpkin of all. On Halloween night, the pumpkin
shines with its jack-o'-lantern light and the apples are a treat for
costumed tricksters. Rich autumn-colored paintings help to il-
lustrate one little girl's enjoyment of the fall season. ALA Notable
Children's Trade Books in Science, 1989.
5.289 Rockwell, Anne. My Spring Robin. Illustrated by Harlow Rock-
well and Lizzy Rockwell. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-777611-5.
24p. 2-6.
Harlow and Lizzy Rockwell's large uncluttered illustrations fol-
low a young girl's discovery of signs of spring as she searches
for the special robin that flew away last fall. After such wonders
as crocuses, tiny toads, daffodils, soft rain showers, and violets
appear, the robin heralds spring's return with that special
"Cheer-up, cheerilee!" song.
5.290 Schlein, Miriam. The Year of the Panda. Illustrated by Kam
Mak. Thomas Y. Crowell, 1990. ISBN 0-690-04866-1. 83p. 8-12
(est).
223
182
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Lu Yi, a young farm boy in China, rescues an orphaned baby
panda that has moved to lower slopes in search of food because
the bamboo forests are dying. In the process of nursing the
panda back to health, Lu Yi learns about a massive government
relocation program for this endangered species. The boy accom-
panies the cub to the Panda Rescue Center and there learns even
more about the animals and how they are being protected.
5.291 Tresselt, Alvin. The Gift of the Tree, Illustrated by Henri Soren-
sen. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10685-4.
32p. 4-8 (est.).
First published in 1972 as The Dead Tree, this book depicts the
normal life cycle of an oak tree. At first a healthy haven for
wildlife, providing a "rich rain of acorns/' the tree is slowly
besieged by enemies. Over time, carpenter ants, grub beetles,
and termites eat out "passageways in wondrous patterns."
Felled by a storm, the oak continues to provide shelter and food,
nourishing the earth as it rots. Oil paintings reflect the tree's
majesty and the moods of the passing seasons.
5.292 Turner, Ann. Heron Street Illustrated by Lisa Desimini. Harper
and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-06-026185^1.
32p. 6-9.
In this lyrical story, Ann Turner chronicles the changes wrought
by human hands upon a seaside marsh. In particular, Turner's
story focuses on how the sounds of this community change over
time. Lisa Desimini's vivid illustrations in a folk-art style create
a striking complement to the story. The book could be used in
the classroom in an environment/ecology unit, or to illustrate
onomatopoeia in writing. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in
the Field of Social Studies.
5.293 Weller, Francis Ward. I Wonder If I'll See a Whale. Illustrated
by Ted Lewin. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21474-7. 32p.
4-8.
A young girl watches expectantly, even reverently, from the deck
of a whale-watching boat, hoping for more than a brief glimpse
of the humpbacks that migrate in spring to New England coasts.
The crew knows the whales by their markings and have given
them names. Suddenly, "To starboard!" someone calls, and the
adventure begins. The child's sense of excitement and awe as the
"giants" spout, breach, feed, dive, and simply register curiosity
is handled expertly both through Francis Ward Weller 's poetic
ERIC
224
Social Issues
183
text and Ted Lewin's immense, sea-splashed mammal "cous-
ins.
5.294 Wellington, Monica. Seasons of Swans. Illustrated by Monica
Wellington. Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44621-4.
32p. 3-7.
This realistic story of two swans living on Willow Pond accu-
rately describes the nesting behavior of swans, as well as how
they train their cygnets to swim and protect them from would-
be predators. After a summer of feeding on waterweeds and
insects, the baby swans grow strong and independent, leaving
their nest in early fall. Flat illustrations in dark outlines, showing
a boy and girl observing the swans' development, add to the
narrative feel of this informational text.
5.295 Williams, David. Walking to the Creek. Illustrated by Thomas
B. Allen. Alfred A. Knopf /Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-394-90598-
9. 32p. 5-8.
The love of family and the wonder of nature are central themes
of Walking to the Creek, which describes twin boys visiting their
grandparents' farm. As the boys hike to the creek near the farm,
they delight in the beauty of the natural world. Thomas Allen's
soft, earth-tone, chalk illustrations of the farm and creek comple-
ment David Williams's descriptive images. The book provides
an excellent example of figurative language.
Social Issues
5.296 Avi. Nothing but the Truth: A Documentary Novel. Orchard
Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08559-7. 177p.
9 and up.
In a collage of perspectives, accounts emerge of an incident that
occurs in Margaret Narwin's ninth-grade homeroom: track-
team hopeful Philip Mallory hums along during the taped play-
ing of "The Star-Spangled Banner." Since students are to remain
silent during the anthem, Miss Narwin sends him to the office.
The situation escalates, and eventually Philip is suspended.
Through memos, phone transcripts, letters, journals, and news
accounts, the principles reveal their views of the incident as it
grows, punishes, and creates a moratorium on rights and re-
sponsibilities. Jane Addams Award, 1991; Newbery Honor Book,
1992.
225
184
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.297 Dugan, Barbara. Loop the Loop, Illustrated by James Stevenson.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-096484. 32p. 5 and up
(est.).
This captivating story follows the relationship between a shy
girl and a passionate, life-loving old woman fighting the vicissi-
tudes of age. Anne befriends Mrs. Simpson, who laughs, wise-
cracks, and performs fabulous yo-yo tricks — from her wheel-
chair. But Mrs. Simpson's declining health forces their
relationship into new forms, a problem that the author presents
honestly and resolves gracefully. In the end we see how much
human beings can give each other. James Stevenson's whimsical
watercolors harmonize perfectly with the warm-hearted realism
of the story.
5.298 Durell, Ann, and Marilyn Sachs, editors. The Big Book for
Peace. Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44605-2. 128p.
7-12.
This anthology in many genres and graphic forms presents a
stellar company of thirty-four well-known authors and illustra-
tors, including Nancy Willard, Jean Fritz, Lloyd Alexander,
Maurice Sendak, and Diane and Leo Dillon, all of whom speak
eloquently and in their own ways for peace. Selections include
histories, humor, poems, and a song. Proceeds from the book's
sales aid five organizations that work for peace. lane Addams
Award, 1991.
5.299 Dygard, Thomas J. Forward Pass. Morrow Junior Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-688-07961-X. 186p. 12 and up.
Coach Frank Gardner finds the perfect receiver for his top-notch
quarterback in a girl basketball player, Jill Winston. Jill is eager
to join the team, her parents (with reservations) give their con-
sent, and the rules do not prohibit a girl player. But can Frank,
Jill, and the team weather public opinion?
5.300 Fox, Paula. Monkey Island. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08562-7. 160p. 10 and up.
Eleven-year-old Clay Garrity's father disappeared in the past,
and now his mother has run away from their New York City
hotel room. As Clay struggles with abandonment, homelessness,
hunger, and threats, there are counterbalancing forces — friends
on the street. There is Buddy, a young African American, com-
plex with hope and despair, yet constant in caring, and there is
philosophical Calvin, a former teacher whose tragedies include
226
Lip North
u tin ( ahin
VIRGINIA HAMILTON
SO
Jvliriam Scklcin
4
A. Up North at the Cabin by Marsha Wilson Chall; illustrated by Steve Johnson (see
5.274). B. Drylongso by Virginia Hamilton; illustrated by Jerry Pinkney (see 5.279).
C. Finding Foxes by Allison Blyler; illustrated by Robert J. Blake (see 5.272). D. The
Year of the Panda by Miriam Schlein; illustrated by Kam Mak (see 5.290).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
227
A.
B.
A. The Big Book for Peace by various authors (see 5.298). B. Amazing Grace by
Mary Hoffman; illustrated by Caroline Binch (see 5.301). C. Our Teacher's Having a
Baby by Eve Bunting; illustrated by Diane de Groat (see 5.212). D. The Lemonade
Babysitterby Karen Waggoner; illustrated by Dorothy Donohue (see 5.225).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Social Issues
alcoholism. Clay hears their stories, receives the handouts, and
works the garbage. The quiet resolution ties many of the plot
strings. Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
5.301 Hoffman, Mary. Amazing Grace. Illustrated by Caroline Binch.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-1040-2. 25p.
4-8.
Because she is a girl who loves stories — from books, from mov-
ies, and from out of Nana's head — Grace acts them out. She is a
peg-leg pirate, Aladdin of the lamp, Joan of Arc, Anansi the
Spider, or Mowgli. But Raj says Grace can't play Peter Pan in the
school play because Grace is black. Exquisitely detailed paint-
ings, rich with expression, draw readers into the warmth of a
female family in which Nana knows that if you put your mind
to it, you can be anything you want to be. Notable 1991 Children's
Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.302 Kraus, Joanna Halpert. Tall Boy's Journey. Illustrated by Karen
Ritz. Carolrhoda Books, 1992. ISBN 0-87614-746-5. 48p. 7-10.
When eight-year-old Kim Moo Yong is adopted by kind Ameri-
can parents, he is lonely and scared. He has never slept alone for
fear of tigers, nor seen long noses, nor eaten with a knife and
fork. His new father's Korean colleague, who also came to
America as a child, understands how it feels to be placed in a
new culture and is able to help the family draw closer. This
gentle, haunting book shows the universality of sensitivity and
kindness.
5.303 Muldoon, Kathleen M. Princess Pooh. Illustrated by Linda
Shute. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-6627-6. 26p. 7-10.
Princess Pooh is Patty Jean's nickname for her older sister, who
uses a wheelchair. Resentful of the extra attention the "Princess"
receives, Patty Jean finds out just how tricky and nasty the
constraint can be. With a new respect she asks, "How can you
smile all the time when you're in that yucky chair?" The illustra-
tions capture the characters' feelings in this fine launching spot
for a discussion on disabilities.
5.304 Osofsky, Audrey My Buddy. Illustrated by Ted Rand. Henry
Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1747-X. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Buddy is a boy's best friend; he's a golden retriever who "looks
like the sun is always shining on him." The narrator describes
186
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Buddy not only as his friend but also as his arms and legs,
helping him do things that he can't do for himself because of
muscular dystrophy The description of Buddy's selection, train-
ing, duties, and responsibilities is based on a real boy and his
dog, as well as on research at the Canine Companions for Inde-
pendence in Santa Rosa, California. Ted Rand's illustrations
show the bond of buddies at school and home.
5.305 Pettepiece, Thomas, and Anatoly Aleksin, editors. Face to Face:
A Collection of Stories by Celebrated Soviet and American
Writers. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21951-X. 233p. 12 and
up (est).
For the first time, nine Soviet and nine American authors for
children and young adults share their insights about humanity
in a single volume. Ranging in length from four to seventeen
pages, the short stories delve into universal themes and issues,
including taking responsibility for one's actions, understanding
the importance of loyalty, grappling with the problem of evil,
recognizing the value of family. Authors represented include
Robert Cormier, Katherine Paterson, Walter Dean Myers, Jean
Fritz, Yuri Yakovlev, and Vytaute Zilinskaite.
5.306 Shulevitz, Uri. Toddlecreek Post Office. Illustrated by Uri
Shulevitz. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-37635-2.
28p. 6 and up.
The village post office is the social hub of Toddlecreek. Each
morning Vernon Stamps, the postmaster, shares his customers'
lives and problems. But the postal inspector appears unexpect-
edly, announcing that the post office must close because of insuf-
ficient business. In vivid illustrations that are painted in glowing
orange tempered with blue, Caldecott Medal-winner Uri
Shulevitz shows how swiftly the comforting pattern of life in a
small community can be changed.
5.307 Spinelli, Jerry. Maniac Magee. Harper Trophy Books, 1992. ISBN
0-06-440424-2. 184p. 8-12 (est.).
Twelve-year-old Jeffrey Lionel "Maniac" Magee's behavior is the
stuff of legend: he scored forty-nine touchdowns in a single
game, he kept an eight-inch cockroach on a leash, he ran faster
and farther than anyone else. What's more, "Maniac" was or-
phaned at age three, fled uncaring relatives at age eight, and
now lives on his own. What is known for certain is his legacy:
kids from the East End and West End of Two Mills, Pennsylva-
230
Stories about Other Lands and People
187
nia, may now be found holding opposite ends of the same jump
rope chanting, "Ma-niac, Ma-niac / He's so cool " Boston
Globe-Horn Book Fiction Award, 1990; Newbery Medal, 1991.
5.308 Spinelli, Jerry. There's a Girl in My Hammerlock. SL. on and
Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-74684-7.
199p. 9 and up (est.).
When eighth-grader Maisie Potter fails to make the cheerleading
squad, she just knows it is because ''Luscious" Liz Lampley
didn't vote for her. So to spite Liz, who happens to be dating
wrestler Eric Delong, athletic Maisie tries out for the boys' wres-
tling team— and makes it! Fighting the disapproval of coaches,
schoolmates, and almost everyone in town, Maisie unexpectedly
finds strength, heroism, and — most importantly — self-accep-
tance.
5.309 Wojciechowski, Susan. Patty Dillman of Hot Dog Fame. Or-
chard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08410-8. 180p. 10 and up (est.).
Eighth-grader Patricia Dillman tells her humorously moving
story about how she develops from "wienie head," who gets
into trouble at school, to "Queen of the Hot Dogs." Volunteering
to serve meals to the homeless at St. Luke's Soup Kitchen is
neither her idea nor her "cup of tea." She's more concerned
about keeping her first real boyfriend, Tim, interested in her. As
Christmas nears, Patty finds herself willing to sacrifice fun with
friends for the joy of giving.
5.310 Zheleznikov, Vladimir (translated by Antonina W. Bouis). Scare-
crow. J. B. Lippincott, 1990. ISBN 0-397-32317-4. 148p. 10 and up.
Twelve-year-old Lena comes to live with her eccentric grandfa-
ther in small town, present-day Russia. On her first day of school
she is confronted by unwelcoming classmates. A persistent soul,
she tries to cover for Dimka, her new friend and crush, and takes
the blame for causing the cancellation of a field trip to Moscow.
This brings out the worst of middle-school cruelty and unkind-
ness. In Antonina Bouis's splendid translation the spirit of the
tale might be American, but the absence of a "happy ever after"
ending is unfamiliar and unexpected.
Stories about Other Lands and People
5311 Appiah, Sonia. Amoko and Efua Bean Illustrated by Carol Eas-
mon. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-705591-4. 28p. 4-8 (est.).
23i
188
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
Five-year-old Amoko and her family live in Ghana in West Af-
rica. Like many American children, Amoko goes everywhere
with her toy bear, Efua. But in her excitement over the gift of a
new toy drum, Amoko accidentally leaves Efua outdoors over-
night. When Amoko's father finds the damaged-but-repairable
bear and returns it, she is overjoyed. Through text and full-page
folk-art illustrations, readers will share a familiar experience
while becoming acquainted with an unfamiliar culture.
5312 Carlstrom, Nancy White. Light: Stories of a Small Kindness,
Illustrated by Lisa Desimini. Little, Brown, 1990. ISBN 0-316-
12857-0. 42p. 8-12.
Seven stories of children from Mexico, Haiti, Guatemala, and
New York City share a theme. In each, some act of kindness or
charity is extended: a young boy overcomes his fear in n dark
cave, a busload of Down's syndrome children escape danger, an
artist explains his inspiration for the painting of a blue parrot,
and disabled children learn to rejoice in overcoming obstacles.
An author's note indicates that one story, "Frederico's Fantastico
Day," is based on her own experiences as a teacher. Lisa
Desimini's black-and-white illustrations project strong images
from each story. Proceeds from the book's sales aid Mexican and
Haitian schools for disabled children.
5313 Dorros, Arthur. Tonight Is Carnaval. Illustrated by the Club de
Madres Virgen del Carmen of Lima, Peru. Dutton Children's
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44641-9. 32p. 5-8.
Once a year, the people of the Andes Mountains of South Amer-
ica get together with their friends from neighboring villages to
dance, feast, and sing in celebration of Carnaval. A typical family
prepares for the big event — Mama weaves cloth, Papa chops
wood, and the entire family gathers potatoes. This book's
unique illustrations are photographs of arpilleras, three-dimen-
sional wall-hangings that depict Peruvian village life. An appen-
dix includes labeled pictures showing how arpilleras are made,
as well a glossary of unfamiliar terms. Notable 1991 Children's
Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5314 Gackenbach, Dick. With Love from Gran, Illustrated by Dick
Gackenbach. Clarion Books, 1989. ISBN 0-89919-842-2. 29p. 3-6.
When Gran goes off to see the world, her grandson is the recipi-
ent of gifts from around the globe, including a gypsy wagon
ERIC 232
Stories about Other Lands and People
189
from Budapest, a Cossack suit from Moscow, an African mask
from Timbuktu, and a kangaroo from Adelaide. The best gift of
all, though, is Gran's return. Young children may enjoy locating
Gran's souvenir stops as a springboard to the study of cultures
and countries around the world.
5.315 Heide, Florence Parry, and Judith Heide Gilliland. The Day of
Ahmed's Secret. Illustrated by Ted Lewin. Lothrop, Lee and
Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08895-3. 32p. 6-9.
All day long Ahmed holds tight to his secret as he delivers
butagaz (butane gas) from his donkey cart. The streets of Cairo
bustle with merchants and shoppers — colorful stalls vending
brass, rugs, and vegetables, coops of chickens and rabbits, and
even a string of camels. Despite the sights and sounds that
clamor for attention, Ahmed concentrates on the secret that he
will share with his family at the close of the day: he can write his
name. Ted Lewin's paintings, both realistic and instructive, con-
trast the ancient and modern city. ALA Notable Children's Books,
1991.
5.316 Isadora, Rachel. At the Crossroads. Illustrated by Rachel Isa-
dora. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-05271-1. 32p. 4-7
(est.).
"Today our fathers are coming home!" Singing and dancing
children eagerly await the homecoming of their fathers, who for
many months have been working in distant gold, diamond, and
coal mines. Vibrant watercolor illustrations of expectant and
joyous young faces shine through the sorrows of family separa-
tion typical in segregated South African townships. Notable 1991
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
5.317 Isadora, Rachel. Over the Green Hills. Illustrated by Rachel
Isadora. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10510-6. 32p. 4-8
(est.).
It is the day for Zolani, his mother, and his baby sister to take a
long walk to visit Grandmother Zindzi in Transkei, an inde-
pendent black state on the east coast of South Africa. They pack
dried fish and mielies (ears of corn) for Grandmother, and Zolani
loads mussels on the goat. Mother walks with dried fish, a
pumpkin, and even a chicken on her head. The countryside is
jungle-bright with a blue, washed sky. Along the way, neighbors
send their greetings, and Zolani explores his beautiful world.
ERIC
233
190
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
5.318 Jacobs, Shannon K Song of the Giraffe. Illustrated by Pamela
Johnson. Little, Brown/Springboard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-316-
45555-5. 55p. 7-9 (est.).
Black-and-white pencil drawings help to tell the story of Kisana,
a member of the Bokuru tribe in Africa. She has a universal
problem — she feels ostracized because she is physically different
from her tribe. Much smaller than the other girls, Kisana has
both light skin and light hair. To gain acceptance from the dark-
skinned tribe, she journeys to find a special gift for the tribal
feast. The tribulations that she undergoes to find her gift make
for a warm story of growing up, family relationships, and wor-
thiness.
5.319 Major, Kevin. Blood Red Ochre. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN
0-385-29794-7. 147p. 12 and up.
In alternating chapters, this novel simultaneously offers two
Canadian stories — one, a modern tale of fifteen-year-old David's
relationship with his family and new girlfriend in Newfound-
land; the second, a narrative by Dauvoodaset, one of the last
Beothuk Indians, whose race became extinct approximately two
hundred years ago. In the final chapters, the protagonists of both
stories meet in a mystic encounter, blending past and present,
with each defending the land and people that he loves.
5.320 Mermen, Ingrid, and Niki Daly. Somewhere in Africa. Illus-
trated by Nicolaas Maritz. Dutton Children's Books, 1992. ISBN
0-525-44848-9. 32p. 3-8 (est.).
In the Africa that Ashraf knows, no lions lie in the tall grass, no
crocodiles glide through muddy rivers, and no zebras race
across the plains. Instead, Ashraf lives in a city "in the very tip
of the great African continent/7 where shops and traffic and
noise and music fill his world. The other Africa is captured
securely in his favorite library book — one he checks out again
and again. Paintings are vivid, sun-drenched, perspective-free
impressions of Cape Town.
5.321 Neville, Emily Cheney. The China Year. HarperCollins, 1991.
ISBN 0-06-024384-8. 244p. 10 and up.
When thirteen-year-old Henrietta Rich's father has a year's ap-
pointment in Beijing, she and her mother go along, too. Living
in cramped "Foreign Expert" quarters on the university campus,
Henri is fascinated by her surroundings, but homesick for New
York City. A young Chinese boy befriends her, and their unex-
Stories about Other Lands and People
191
pected cultural differences come to life as the two explore the
city and meet each other's families. This is a lively, cleverly
veiled introduction to China.
5.322 Pomerantz, Charlotte. The Chalk Doll. Illustrated by Fran£ Les-
sac. J. B. Lippincott, 1989. ISBN 0-397-32319-0. 30p. 3-7 (est.).
Rose loves the tales of her mother's humble Jamaican childhood.
She envies the simple homemade rag doll that her mother
would have traded for a store-bought "chalk doll." She hears
how three pennies provided a wonderful birthday gift, and how
as a little barefoot girl her mom made high heels with mango
pits dipped in road tar. Primitive paintings in bold colors illus-
trate the shared memories. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in
the Field of Social Studies.
5.323 Schami, Rafik (translated bv Rika Lesser). A Hand Full of Stars.
Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44535-8. 195p. 12 and
up (est).
As a young boy in modern Damascus grows from a child to an
adult, he begins to see the world around him in a different light.
From his simpler observations about love and friendship, he
begins to see the injustices of his government, the brutality of a
system that is unconcerned about the poor or the helpless, and
he pours his feelings of anger into his daily journal. At length he
finds a dangerous outlet for his frustration — a forbidden under-
ground newspaper. Mildred L. Batchelder Award, 1991.
5.324 Schermbrucker, Reviva. Charlie's House. Illustrated by Niki
Daly. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-84024-6. 28p. 3-8.
Watercolor washes help to tell the story of young Charlie, who
lives in a corrugated iron and scrap shelter in Guguletu, South
Africa. After the rains cause a leaky roof, a determined Charlie
goes outside to build his own dream house in the mud beside
the soggy shelter. He fashions big rooms, with a bedroom for his
mother and granny and another all for himself. His imaginary
world encroaches upon his reality, until one way or another, his
dream comes true. Notable 1992 Children's Trade Books in the Field
of Social Studies.
5.325 Staples, Suzanne Fisher. Shabanu: Daughter of the Wind. Al-
fred A. Knopf, 1989. ISBN 0-394-94815-7. 240p. 12 and up.
Eleven-year-old Shabanu finds herself torn between the tradi-
tions of her Pakistani culture — traditions that demand she
ERIC
235
192
Contemporary Realistic Fiction
marry the man of her beloved father's choosing — and her inner-
most desire to rebel against a marriage to a man for whom she
feels nothing but contempt. How can she betray her father, Dadi,
and the centuries-old ways of her people without giving up her
own happiness? Newbery Honor Book, 1990,
5.326 Williams, Karen Lynn. Galimoto* Illustrated by Catherine Stock.
Mulberry Books, 1991. ISBN 0-668-10991-8. 32p. 4-8.
Seven-year-old Kondi, who lives in a village in Malawi, Africa,
treasures all the belongings that he keeps in an old shoebox. One
day, when he decides to make a galimoto, a toy vehicle made
from wire, Kondi goes about the village asking, begging, or
offering to trade his keepsakes for pieces of wire for his project.
Kondi's traditional push toy is a great success, and children will
rejoice in his ingenuity. Watercolor paintings are awash with the
patterns and bustle of village life.
Survival
5.327 Paulsen, Gary. The Voyage of the Frog. Orchard Books/Richard
Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08405-1. 143p. 10 and up (est.).
Fourteen-year-old David is caught in a fierce storm when he
goes out on his sailboat to scatter the ashes of his recently de-
ceased uncle. For nine days he struggles against becalmed seas,
sharks, killer whales, and more storms. By the end of his journey,
David has learned important lessons about conquering fear,
grieving for his uncle, and developing self-reliance. This book is
a good companion piece to the author's Hatchet
5328 Wild, Margaret. Let the Celebrations Begin! Illustrated by Julie
Vivas. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08537-6. 32p. 3-6.
Miriam is helping the women with whom she lives to stitch a toy
for each child so that they can celebrate when the soldiers come
to liberate the concentration camp. Until then, home is Hut 18,
the scene of remarkable hope. Heads shaved and gaunt from
long hunger, the women transform inch after inch of tattered
clothes into toys. Julie Vivas's illustrations create a luminous joy
that extinguishes the macabre reality.
ERIC
Fantasy
At heart, the issues raised in a work of fantasy are tltose we face in
real life. In whatever guise — our own daily nightmares of war,
intolerance, inhumanity; or the struggles of an Assistant Pig-Keeper
against the Lord of Death — the problems are agonizingly familiar.
And an openness to compassion, love, and mercy is as essential to us
here and now as it is to any inhabitant of an imaginary kingdom.
Lloyd Alexander, Newbery Award
Acceptance Speech for The High King
237
/
194
6 Fantasy
Adventure and Magic
6.1 Alexander, Lloyd. The Jedera Adventure, E. P. Dutton, 1989.
ISBN 0-525-44481-5. 152p. 8-12 (est).
Returning a library book may be routine, but not when it in-
volves the adventure-loving heroine Vesper Holly. Accompanied
by her beloved guardian Brinnie and with the help of several
Jedera inhabitants, including a blue-faced warrior, Vesper treks
across the desert of Northern Africa to Bel Saaba and once again
foils one of Dr. Helvitius's insidious plots to rule the world.
Tribal feuds, ill-tempered camels, romance, and mysterious se-
crets help to create another action-packed adventure with Lloyd
Alexander's dauntless heroine.
6.2 Alexander, Lloyd. The Philadelphia Adventure. Dutton Chil-
dren's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44564-1. 160p. 10 and up.
The year is 1876, and the Centennial Exposition is about to open
in Philadelphia. But danger and political embarrassment
threaten to mar the opening, and President Grant must seek the
help of the city's most adventurous citizen, Vesper Holly. True to
her nature, Vesper, with the help of her memorable friends, once
again foils the evil Dr. Helvitius's scheme to conquer the world.
Woven with bits of American history, this final novel in Lloyd
Alexander's series of tales about the daring heroine is filled with
adventure, humor, and action-packed surprises.
6.3 Alexander, Lloyd. The Remarkable Journey of Prince Jen. Dut-
ton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-545-44826-8. 273p. 10 and up
(est).
Bearing six unusual gifts, Prince Jen begins his journey to the
kingdom of T'ienkuo. But the journey is filled with peril and
misfortune, and the young prince must struggle with evil forces
and also with himself to fulfill his destiny as king. Weaving
details from the culture of ancient China, Lloyd Alexander once
again creates an intriguing and suspenseful fantasy about the
true meaning of "kingdom on earth."
6.4 Balian, Lorna. Wilbur's Space Machine. Illustrated by Lorna
Balian. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-8234-0836-1. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
er|c
233
Adventure and Magic
195
Violet and Wilbur live alone in the middle of nowhere, and they
like it that way. Gradually, though, people begin to move into
their valley, until they find themselves with no room at all. In
desperation Wilbur builds a "space machine7' that enables them
to find peace and quiet in a most unexpected way Expressive
and humorous watercolors show Wilbur's resourcefulness.
6.5 Ballard, Robin. Cat and Alex and the Magic Flying Carpet
Illustrated by Robin Ballard. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-
020390-0. 32p. 3^7.
As Alex watches the rain fall outside his window, he sees his
friend Cat arrive in a strange-looking cloak. Cat explains that his
wrap is a magic flying carpet and tells Alex of his wondrous
adventures around the world. Alex, longing for a trip to the
moon, joins Cat on the carpet. Falling asleep, they take a magical
ride together. Stylized watercolors illustrate this story of friend-
ship.
6.6 Bentley, Nancy. I've Got Your Nose! Illustrated by Don Madden.
Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-385-41296-7. 32p. 4-8.
Nahzella the witch conforms to witches' standards on most
measures, except that her nose is a cute little button nose more
suitable for a princess. No spell from her spell book can produce
a just-right witch's nose. So Nahzella looks up a spell for "Steal/'
and tries to change her nose another way. Still, no matter for
which nose she "exchanges" hers, there are always unantici-
pated problems: the farmer's nose is allergic, the dog's too sen-
sitive. Eventually, of course, Nahzella settles happily for her
button nose.
6.7 Berger, Barbara Helen. Gwinna. Illustrated by Barbara Helen
Berger. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21738-X. 128p. 6 and
up (est.).
When a woodcutter and his wife wish for a child, the Mother of
the Owls gives them Gwinna with the stipulation that at the age
of twelve, she must return. As Gwinna grows up, she follows the
owls back to their grotto, where Mother of the Owls shows
Gwinna her wings. After learning to fly, Gwinna is drawn to the
mountain where she meets a golden griffin and another friend
who give her the secret of the wind's song. Luminescent, haunt-
ing illustrations embellish this magical tale of an enchanted
young girl who fulfills her dream.
196
Fantasy
6.8 Bradshaw, Gillian. The Dragon and the Thief* Greenwillow
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10575-0. 154p. 10 and up.
Prahotep, the hapless son of a deceased ancient Egyptian farmer,
discovers the lair of a she-dragon, Hathor. He persuades Hathor
to travel with him up the Nile to Nubia, where other dragons are
rumored to be alive. Their journey is one of danger and excite-
ment as they are pursued by the evil priest/magician Ne-
fersenet. Gillian Bradshaw brings ancient Egyptian society to life
in this lively, very original historical fantasy.
6.9 Clement, Claude (translated by Lenny Hort). The Voice of the
Wood- Illustrated by Frederic Clement. Dial Books, 1989. ISBN
0-8037-0635-9. 22p. 8-12 (est.).
This short and simple tale expresses powerfully the fundamen-
tal mystery of music. Surrealistic illustrations depict a Venetian
craftsman as he creates a cello from the wood of a beautiful tree,
a tree in which wind and birds made captivating music long ago.
But the famed musician who attempts to play the cello must first
learn about the deeper harmonies of humanity and nature before
he can draw sound from the instrument. The text is clear and
spare, the illustrations quiet and haunting, and the overall tone
one of reverence for the miracle of music.
6.10 Cole, Joanna. The Magic School Bus Inside the Human Body
Illustrated by Bruce Degen. Scholastic, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41427-5.
38p. 8-13.
This is one in a series of books that takes readers on magical
science trips aboard a mysterious school bus. This time the class
of strange Ms. Frizzle sets out on a field trip to the science
museum, but they end up on a journey through the digestive
and circulatory systems of a fellow classmate. Taking the phi-
losophy of meaningful student involvement to its extreme, Ms.
Frizzle, in wild science garb, cleverly teaches both children and
adults about the wonderful workings of the human body.
6.11 Jacques, Brian. Mariel of Redwall. Illustrated by Gary Chalk.
Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22144-1. 387p. 10 and up.
Against the backdrop of Redwall Abbey and Mossflower
Woods, Brian Jacques offers the fourth in his series of medieval
adventure tales, this one featuring an intrepid heroine, the
mousemaid Mariel, in a mission of revenge against the vicious
sea-rats of Terramort Island. Jolly hares, badger warriors, brave
mice, and a host of moles, hedgehogs, and otters play support-
240
V
A. The Remarkable Journey of Prince Jen by Lloyd Alexander (see 6.3). B. The
Jedera Adventure by Lloyd Alexander (see 6.1 ). C. Shiloh by Phyllis Reynolds Naylor
(see 5.27). D. The Widow's Broom by Chris Van Allsburg (see 6.21).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
241
TilUe
and
tneWall
Leo L
m
Quentin Blake
COCKATOOS
Who Is the Beast?
15 Y IU I ! H It \ K I" K
A. Wie and the Wall by Leo Lionni (see 6,88). B. Cockatoos by Quentin Blake (see
6.198). C. Who Is the Beast? by Keith Baker (see 6.26).
ERIC
242
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Adventure and Nlagic
197
ing roles in this swashbuckling tale with enough scheming,
swordplay, piracy, violence, and triumph to pique the interest of
Redwall fans.
6.12 Kelleher, Victor. The Red King, Dial Books, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-
07584. 176p. 11 and up.
The people of Forest Land fear the evil Red King, who rules his
kingdom through fear and the threat of a feverish disease. His
tyranny is unchallenged until a band of traveling tricksters,
facing danger and death, puts an end to the reign of the myste-
rious and haunting ruler. Filled with suspense and intrigue,
Victor Kelleher 's well-written tale is sure to please fans of the
supernatural.
6*13 Le Guin, Ursula K. A Ride on the Red Mare's Back* Illustrated
by Julie Downing. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-531-08591-0. 48p. 4-7.
In a northern land where the winter days are short and snow is
deep, the troll people have stolen a girl's little brother. With only
her brave heart and her carved red wooden horse, the little girl
sets out to rescue him. When the beloved toy becomes a real
horse for one night, the girl has a champion that can travel over
snow and distract the trolls. Julie Downing's paintings turn the
traditional Swedish Dalarna Horse into a spirited steed.
6.14 Lindbergh, Anne. Travel Far, Pay No Fare. HarperCollins, 1992.
ISBN 0-06-021776-6. 201p. 10 and up (est.).
Son of a famous children's book author, Owen Noonan prefers
TV and their quiet Boston life to reading. But now his mother is
marrying Uncle Jack in Vermont, and Owen is about to become
big brother to an avid reader, nine-year-old Parsley. Parsley's
plans for putting the wedding asunder include the use of a
magical bookmark that delivers on its promise to "Travel far,
pay no fare." Anne Lindbergh interweaves characters and pets
across literary selections in thought-provoking ways.
6.15 Mahy, Margaret. The Dragon of an Ordinary Family Illustrated
by Helen Oxenbury. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN
0-8037-1062-3. 42p. 4-8.
The Belsakis are an ordinary family who live in an ordinary
house on an ordinary street. Then, to prove he is not a fuddy-
duddy, Mr. Belsaki buys an extraordinary pet for his son, Or-
lando. As in Steven Kellogg's The Mysterious Tadpole, the new pet
198
Fantasy
quickly outgrows his surroundings. Luckily, though, dragons
can fly, and so this pet takes all the Belsakis for a lovely vacation
on the Isles of Magic. Bowlers, umbrellas, and British breakfast
fare cue where the story was originally published.
6.16 Morgan, Helen. The Witch Doll. Viking Penguin, 1992, ISBN
0-670-84285-0. 143p. 8-12.
The curious work bag that bounces from the junkman's cart has
a doll inside — a wooden doll with shiny black hair and a trans-
fixing, evil gaze. For Linda, who finds the doll, it becomes the
centerpiece of an unfolding story that moves between the pres-
ent and the past to explain the origin of the doll and its powers
to transform through witchcraft. Heroine Linda is a plucky sort
who makes for effective contrast with the threats around her.
6.17 PacovskS, Kveta (translated by Anthea Bell). The Little Flower
King. Illustrated by Kveta PacovskS. Picture Book Studio/Mi-
chael Neugebauer Books, 1992. ISBN 0-88708-221-1. 32p. 4-8
(est.).
Readers peering through a clear dust jacket and then through a
colorfully framed cutout in the covers will see from the front a
solitary king, but from the back they will see a king and queen.
Between the covers is the tale of a princess who is found in a
tulip that the king planted in his own palace garden. This mod-
ern, vibrantly colored, mixed-media, playful, humorous, and
sometimes-puzzling fairy tale comes from the imagination of
Czech artist Kveta PacovskS, the 1992 Hans Christian Andersen
medalist.
6.18 Pendergraft, Patricia. The Legend of Daisy Flowerdew. Phi-
lomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22176-X. 190p. 10 and up.
After Granny Henry passes away, Daisy goes to live with her
real mother, Jesse. But Daisy is quiet and perceived as being
different. She finds solace in two magical paper dolls. When
Jesse and her husband arrange Daisy's marriage to money-seek-
ing Elmer Goots, Daisy disappears with the help of her two
magical friends. The town of Vineyard Flats searches for a way
to explain the mysterious events surrounding the legend of
Daisy Flowerdew.
6.19 Silverman, Maida. The Magic Well. Illustrated by Manuel Boix.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-617-
67885-X. 32p. 4-8.
244
Adventure and Magic
199
Meeting the fairy queen at a magic well, Janet willingly goes
with her to the kingdom of the fairies, leaving behind only a
single rose as a sign to her mother that she is well. When Janet
asks to return to her mother, she finds herself a captive of the
fairies. Only through her own clever efforts and her mother's
love is Janet finally saved. Manuel Boix's delicate and detailed
paintings complement the magic of a tale inspired by an ancient
ballad.
6.20 Turner, Ann. Rosemary's Witch. Harper Collins/ Charlotte Zolo-
tow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-06-026128-5. 164p. 10-12.
When her family moves to an old New England farmhouse,
nine-year-old Rosemary looks forward to making the house her
home and establishing her own identity. But a 150-year-old
witch who lived in the house as a young girl threatens Rose-
mary's plans, and the Morgenthau family faces the possiblity of
forfeiting their dreams. In the end, Rosemary gives the witch the
love that she needs, and as a result, Rosemary brings peace to
the New England countryside. Understanding and personal dis-
covery are woven into this eerie tale filled with mystery and
witchcraft.
6*21 Van Allsburg, Chris. The Widow's Broom. Illustrated by Chris
Van Allsburg. Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-64051-2. 32p.
8 and up (est.).
A witch makes an unexpected stop when her broom loses its
power to stay aloft right over Widow Shaw's garden. Under the
widow's tender care, the witch recovers from the fall, but she
leaves her broom behind. Not totally worn-out, the broom
proves useful to the widow. It chops wood, mops floors, feeds
chickens, and even plays the piano. But suspicious neighbor
Spivey accuses the broom of devilment and says that it must go.
Surrealistic images in textured sepia capture the magic, but the
action sequence is never far from a smile.
6.22 Yolen, Jane. The Dragon's Boy. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN
0-06-026790-9. 120p. 8-13 (est.).
In this original King Arthur story, the young orphan, Artos, has
trouble becoming a part of castle life. Then he finds a dark cave,
home of a wise old dragon, who helps him, with the aid of a
magical sword, become friends with Lancelot and other young
men at the castle. As Artos gains wisdom, he also learns that his
real name is Artos Pendragon and that he is the son of Merlin-
ER?C
24;"
200
Fantasy
nus, the old apothecary who is also the wise dragon in disguise.
Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
Animal Fantasy
6.23 Anderson, Wayne. Dragon. Illustrated by Wayne Anderson. Si-
mon and Schuster/Green Tiger Press, 1992. ISBN 0-671-78397-1.
32p. 6-10 (est.).
When a precious egg drops from the sky, the mother screams,
but it is too late. And so, deep within the sea, comforted by
fishes, a newborn creature hatches. "Where is my mother?" and
"What am I?" he asks. In his search for his kind, the creature
discovers that he shares traits with fish, dragonflies, birds,
snakes, and crocodiles. But it takes a child who reads to know
the creature's identity and to steer him safely home. Muted
greens interpret the wrenching despair of a lost dragon.
6.24 Asch, Frank. Dear Brother. Illustrated by Vladimir Vagin. Scho-
lastic Hardcover Books, 1992. ISBN 0-590-43107-2. 32p. 6-9.
Joey and Marvin discover a bundle of letters in the attic, illus-
trated with "interesting pictures." All night the two mice read
the correspondence between their great-great-uncles, Timothy,
who stayed in the country, and Henry, who settled in the city.
Affectionate letters recount the milestones of the brothers7 years
apart and memories shared, and ingeniously record urban and
rural lifestyles of the past. Paintings in dyes, gouache, and wa-
tercolors neatly frame the action opposite the actual letters.
6.25 Ashabranner, Brent. I'm in the Zoo, Too! Illustrated by Janet
Stevens. Cobblehill Books, 1989. ISBN 0-525-65002-4. 28p. 4-S
(est).
Burl the squirrel lives at the the zoo but not in the zoo. Curious
about the difference, which his mother assures him is important,
Burl sets out to find the answer. Although all his animal friends
fail to explain the distinction, Burl discovers it when he unwarily
decides to perform in a cage. Activity-filled, detailed watercolor
paintings make the book "readable" by all ages.
6.26 Baker, Keith. Who Is the Beast? Illustrated by Keith Baker. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich, 1990. ISBN 0-15-296057-0. 32p. 3-7.
"The beast, the beast!" Smaller jungle animals flee the beastly
tiger whose tiger parts are revealed one-by-one in lush Henri
Rousseau-like paintings, set against chantable, rhyming text.
24o
Animal Fantasy
201
"The beast?" thinks the tiger. "I see no beast. I just see me."
Gently, he matches each of his fearsome characteristics against
those of the jungle creatures, helping everyone to discover the
commonalities of nature.
6.27 Barasch, Marc Ian. No Plain Pets. Illustrated by Henrik
Drescher. HarperCollins,4991. ISBN 0-06-022473-8. 36p. 4-«.
In vibrantly illustrated rhyming text, a child muses about the pet
he wants. "I don't want one that's plain — / Some dumb Puff or
Fluff / With a parakeet brain." Maybe a big, black gorilla, an
electric eel, or a jungle snake. But the main thing is, as with all
good pet owners, the pet will be loved. Illustrations are stylized,
quirky, and crowded with figures, doodles, and textures.
6.28 Birchman, David F. Brother Billy Bronto's Bygone Blues Band.
Illustrated by John O'Brien. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books,
1992. ISBN 0-688-10424-X. 32p. 5 and up.
"There was Rex the King Tyrone / on the slide trombone / and
Brother Billy on the bass. / There was a mean / allosaurus
saxophonist / nicknamed Lizard Lips Grace." Long ago, dino-
saur Dixieland could be heard on Basin Street. But because of
demand "from throughout the land," the beasts take an ill-fated
train ride which lands the blues "in a pool of ooze." Dappled
watercolors on ink drawings enliven the musical mood.
6.29 Blackwood, Mary. Derek the Knitting Dinosaur. Illustrated by
Kerry Argent. Carolrhoda Books, 1990. ISBN 0-87614-400-8. 32p.
3-8 (est).
Derek is more green and more gentle than his dinosaur brothers,
Fang and Fearless. Although a part of Derek wants to look and
act more like a real dinosaur, Derek prefers knitting to roaring
about. Derek's knit products stockpile until brightly patterned
sweaters, socks, vests, mittens, scarves, and pants overflow his
stone house. And then something strange happens. The world
becomes colder, and fierce dinosaurs need woolly things. Expan-
sive watercolored figures accompany the rhyming text.
6.30 Breathed, Berkeley. The Last Basselope: One Ferocious Story.
Illustrated by Berkeley Breathed. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-
316-10761-1. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Cartoonist Berkeley Breathed advises in his second book:
"Best results will be obtained when read in an open, sunny
meadow. . . . Under no conditions should a television be in the
247
202
Fantasy
vicinity/' Airbrushed backgrounds and vibrant surface colors
add to the adventure of Opus, the Great and Famous Discoverer,
who, with his team of 'Volunteers'' (Milquetoast, Ronald-Ann,
and Bill the Cat) searches for the Last Great Bassclope— of razor
horn and slobbery fang. But the Basselope is different from
expected, and needs protection from thundering hordes of me-
dia.
6.31 Brett, Jan. Berlioz the Bean Illustrated by Jan Brett. G. P. Put-
nam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-22248-0. 32p. 4^8.
Inspiration for Jan Brett's bass-playing bear came both from the
nineteenth-century composer Hector Berlioz and from her own
double-bass-playing husband who, like Berlioz the bear, once
noticed a loud buzz in his bass. The buzzing so distracts Berlioz
the bear that he drives the orchestra's bandwagon into a large
hole in the road. The temperamental mule pulling the wagon
refuses to budge until an angry bee persuades the mule to get
moving. Elaborately detailed Bavarian scenes include embroi-
dered costumes, painted carts and cottages, and Brett's trade-
mark borders, foreshadowing the town in preparation for the
gala ball at which Berlioz is to perform.
6.32 Brown, Marc. Arthur Babysits. Illustrated by Marc Brown. Lit-
tle, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992. ISBN 0-316-11293-3. 32p. 4-8
(est.).
Good-humoredly, Arthur agrees to baby-sit for the terrible Tib-
bie twins while their grandmother is out. Everyone, especially
his sister D. W., warns him that the Tibbie twins are trouble.
Dressed in cowboy suits and brandishing firearms, the twins
torment Arthur with the stereotypic baby-sitter's initiation rites,
including tying him to a chair. Despite D. W.'s continuing phone
calls with advice, Arthur figures out for himself the best baby-
sitting trick of all — a good storytime.
6.33 Brown, Marc. Arthur Meets the President Illustrated by Marc
Brown. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1991. ISBN 0-316-11265-
8. 30p. 4-8 (est.).
When Arthur's class enters a national essay contest on "How I
Can Help to Make America Great," Arthur wins, and his entire
class is invited to attend a special ceremony at the White House.
Everyone is excited except Arthur, who must recite his speech
from memory before the president. In the Rose Garden, his note-
ERIC
243
Animal Fantasy
203
cards scatter; Arthur panics and forgets his speech. But resource-
ful sister D. W. comes to his rescue with an innovative cue card.
634 Brown, Marc. Arthur's Pet Business. Illustrated by Marc Brown.
Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1990. ISBN 0-316-11262-3. 30p.
4-8.
Wanting a new puppy, Arthur opens his own pet business to
show his family his "responsible" side. But when business
booms, Arthur finds himself baby-sitting a myriad of animals,
one of which suddenly disappears. In the satisfying end, Arthur
finds the missing pet and is rewarded with one of her new
puppies. Fourteenth in the Arthur series, this adventure humor-
ously invites readers both to laugh and to think about responsi-
bility.
6.35 Browne, Anthony. Bear Goes to Town. Illustrated by Anthony
Browne. Doubleday, 1989. ISBN 0-385-26525-5. 32p. 3-6.
Like Harold with his purple crayon, Bear has a magic pencil.
Traveling to town, Bear meets a companionable cat and imme-
diately draws Cat something to eat. But when Cat is captured by
the animal patrol, Bear draws roller skates to chase the van, a
ladder to reach Cat's "cell," and a saw to remove the bars. Bear
can even draw a door to release all the animals, banana skins to
aid their escape, and a rolling pastoral setting for their happy
home.
6.36 Browne, Anthony. I Like Books. Illustrated by Anthony Browne.
Alfred A. Knopf/ Dragonfly Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-94186-1.
18p. 3-7 (est.).
An adorable chimp announces the fact that he likes books. In ten
simple sentences he lists his favorite kinds of books. They range
from funny books to books about dinosaurs to strange books.
With each declaration, the illustration reflects the book genre.
6.37 Bucknall, Caroline. One Bear in the Hospital. Illustrated by
Caroline Bucknall. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN
0-8037-0847-5. 30p. 3-6.
Caroline Bucknall's bouncing bears and the rhyming, rhythmic
text that accompanied them in two previous books return for
more read-along fun. This time, Ted Bear has a bicycle accident,
and although he is doubtful about a hospital stay, he receives
tender care in the "cubs" wing. At home again, Ted is back in the
ERIC
249
204
Fantasy
races — this time in a wheelchair with his broken leg. Black ink
and crayon-like shades give touchable texture to the bears.
638 Carlson, Nancy. Take lime to Relax! Illustrated by Nancy
Carlson. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83287-1. 32p. 2-6
(est).
The not-so-subtle message in Nancy Carlson's picture book is
that families overschedule their lives. With computer classes,
aerobics classes, cake decorating classes, and dance classes, the
Beaver family is always on the go. "Until one morning ... it was
snowing like crazy." While snowbound, the family tells stories,
sings, builds a fire, and pops corn. When the snowplow finally
makes its way through, the family stays put. Paired with the
rhyming text are warm home scenes that show Beavers in robes
and pajamas taking some time to relax.
6.39 Carlson, Nancy. A Visit to Grandma's* Illustrated by Nancy
Carlson. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-0670-83288-X. 32p. 4-8
(est).
As Tina and her parents plan a holiday visit to Grandma's new
Florida condominium, they imagine her knitting by the fire and
baking her special Thanksgiving pies. But Grandma has
changed! Now she wears lavender pants, loud jewelry, and pink
sunglasses. Grandma drives a sports car, takes aerobics classes,
plays charades until midnight, buys her pies, and makes reser-
vations for Thanksgiving dinner. At first wary, Una and her
parents begin to loosen up. Nancy Carlson's scenes are Florida-
bright, and her beaver characters are amusing.
6.40 Cazet, Denys. Daydreams. Illustrated by Denys Cazet. Orchard
Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08481-7. 32p.
4-7.
All the little animals in Miss Williams's class love her very
dearly. Even so, on one blustery day, they can't stop the invasion
of daydreams. Imaginations create desert heroes, threatening
dinosaurs, and even giant snack foods. Miss Williams under-
stands. She reads a story that feeds daydreams. ''Wishes and
hopes travel with daydreams," she says. By the close of day,
Miss Williams has some daydreams of her own about the chil-
dren's futures. Half-tone watercolors and placid faces give a
sweet-dreams flavor.
ERIC
250
Animal Fantasy
205
6.41 Cazet, Denys. Mother Night Illustrated by Denys Cazet Or-
chard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08430-2. 32p. 3-6.
With a simple, poetic story line that traces a cycle from dusk to
dawn, animal parents put their children to bed following famil-
iar routines, and then lovingly awaken them in the morning.
Denys Cazet's watercolor and pencil illustrations in soft shades
of blue, green, and pink create the enchanting world of animal
dreams. This story may comfort young children who have night-
time fears.
6.42 Cazet, Denys. Never Spit on Your Shoes. Illustrated by Denys
Cazet. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-
08447-7. 26p. 4-6.
Mother listens as Arnie describes the hardships that he encoun-
tered during his first day in first grade: sitting at a desk, finding
the "boys' room," and nostalgically watching the kindergarten
bus pull away. But Arnie also explains the joys of making a new
friend, determining classroom rules, drawing pictures with new
crayons, and counting to sixteen. Told with cartoon-like style,
this is a book for waylaying first-grade fears and preparing for
the first day of school.
6.43 Chambless, Jane. Tucker and the Bear. Illustrated by Jane Cham-
bless. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN
0-671-67357-2. 36p. 4-8 (est.).
Tucker lives alone on the edge of the woods, reading, drawing,
and enjoying his daydreams. When a bear joins Tucker for the
winter in exchange for helping with the housework, Tucker soon
finds that he has bargained for trouble along with the bear's
companionship. But when the bear leaves, Tucker discovers the
loneliness of a lost friendship, and he welcomes the bear's return
with heartfelt gratitude. Detail-filled illustrations make this
story even more endearing.
6.44 Charles, Donald. Paddy Pig's Poems: A Story about an Amus-
ing Fellow and His Friends. Illustrated by Donald Charles.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-671-
67081-6. 27p. 5-10 (est).
Paddy Pig, a literary individualist, writes delightful and, at first
glance, predictable verse. However, at the end of the final line of
each poem, Paddy inserts a nonrhyming word. When Paddy's
conventional friends criticize his unusual style, Paddy sends
25 1
206
Fantasy
6*45
6*46
6*47
648
them home. Young readers and writers may want to try some
unconventional writing of their own.
Cherry, Lynne. Archie, Follow Me* Illustrated by Lynne Cherry.
Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44647-8. 32p. 4-6.
Richly detailed pen-and-ink and watercolor illustrations of an
adventuresome tabby cat, Archie, and his devoted mistress illu-
minate this first-person narrative. According to his young mis-
tress, Archie is there at wake-up time, follows her around the
house until she leaves for school, and is ready for their afternoon
adventures in the woods after she returns from school. But after
dark, the roles reverse, and Archie is the leader, offering a world
where one can see the night "through a cat's eyes."
Chorao, Kay. The Cherry Pie Baby* Illustrated by Kay Chorao.
E. P. Dutton, 1989. ISBN 0-525-4435-1. 27p. 4-7 (est.).
Annie, an only child, wants a baby brother in the worst way, so
she strikes a bargain with a newfound friend. She offers young
Beau five pies from her father's wagon in exchange for Beau's
baby brother, Claude. After sneaking Claude home, Annie's fan-
tasies about baby brothers begin to fade as an inconsolable
Claude ruins her toys, breaks her tea set, and wails continuously.
When Papa discovers this unexpected guest, Annie must return
little Claude to his family. Kay Chorao's portrayal of an only
child's desires, told with dog characters, rings true.
Conly, Jane Leslie. R-T, Margaret, and the Rats of NIMH* Illus-
trated by Leonard Lubin. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-
021364-7. 260p. 9-12.
When Margaret and Artie (R-T) get lost in the woods, they
stumble upon a secret colony of superintelligent rats. With the
help of Christopher and the rest of the famous rats of NIMH,
who first appeared in Robert O'Brien's Newbery Award-win-
ning Mrs. Frisby and the Rats of NIMH, the two humans survive
and learn a lot about life in the process. But home again, the
children face difficulties in keeping their promise not to reveal
the rats' whereabouts. Unpredictable events and disclosures of
secrets help build to an exciting climax. The second sequel of
superb fantasy novels by the daughter of the late O'Brien con-
tinues to capture children's hearts and imaginations.
Conover, Chris. Mother Goose and the Sly Fox* Illustrated by
Chris Conover. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-
35072-8. 28p. 4-8.
ERLC
252
Animal Fantasy
207
In the rich Dutch decor of this retelling, the setting is detailed
with fine lace, windmills, tulips, and Delft pottery and tiles.
Rather than a preyed-upon passel of lambs, the innocents are
adorable, lace-ruffed goslings and their caregiver mouse.
Mother Goose, in fine winged cap, returns home to discover that
six of her children have been flummoxed by the fox. But clever
Mrs. Goose knows how to substitute stones for children in a
sack. Chris Conover's version doesn't allow the goslings to get
consumed, and the fox learns his lesson.
6.49 Cushman, Doug. Camp Big Paw. Illustrated by Doug Cushman.
Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-021368-X. 64p. 6-8.
It's summer, and the campers have arrived at Camp Big Paw.
When the contests for camping badges begin, newcomer Cyril
the Cat and his cabin mates, Ben and Obie, run into trouble with
the camp bully, Nigel Snootbutter. In the end, Cyril, with Nigel's
unsuspecting help, "uses his head" to win a very special badge.
Colorful cartoon-like illustrations complement this I Can Read
chapter book about a group of animals' misadventures at sum-
mer camp.
6.50 Cushman, Doug. Possum Stew. Illustrated by Doug Cushman.
E. P. Dutton, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44566-8. 32p. 3-6.
Possum likes nothing better than tricking folks. Finally, though,
he tricks Bear and Gator one time too many. Determined to have
the last laugh, Bear and Gator invite Possum to dinner, and
Possum himself almost ends up in the stew pot. Both the text,
written in the tradition of the trickster tale, and the illustrations
will keep children laughing.
6.51 Delacre, Lulu. Time for School, Nathan! Illustrated by Lulu
Delacre. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41942-0.
32p. 3-7.
Eager to start school, Nathan the elephant explains to his best
friend Nicholas the mouse that school is something that he,
Nathan, must do alone. But Nicholas, not easily dissuaded,
stows away in Nathan's schoolbag. At school, Nicholas makes
mischief — singing during storytime, upsetting things, and dis-
rupting Nathan's budding friendships. When Nathan acts glum,
Nicholas admits his fear of losing his best friend. Reassurances
and rebuilding contribute to the gentle theme. In the muted-
toned illustrations, Nathan's "elephantness" seems a perfectly
normal classroom occurrence.
253
208
Fantasy
6.52 dePaola, Tomie. Bon jour, Mr* Satie. Illustrated by Tomie de-
Paola. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21782-7. 28p. 5-9.
Tomie dePaola slyly advises that if anyone in his story looks or
sounds familiar, he's "not the least bit surprised." The range of
players who appear in Gertrude's 1920 Paris salon will certainly
be familiar to adults — Zelda Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway,
Ezra Pound, and Isadora Duncan, to name only a few whose
countenances are identified by first name on the book jacket. The
debonaire cat, Uncle Satie, must judge an exhibition of the paint-
ings of Henri (Matisse) and Pablo (Picasso), and his diplomacy
ends the artists' feud. Vibrant teal, orange, and purple illustra-
tions dominate the tale.
6.53 dePaola, Tomie. Haircuts for the Woolseys. Too Many Hopkins.
Illustrated by Tomie dePaola. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. lOp.
2- 5.
Spring arrives at Fiddle-Dee-Dee Farms in two warm-hearted
tales illustrated in characteristic Tomie dePaola style. In the first
book, the Woolseys, a family of sheep, get their spring haircuts.
However, when a cold north wind blows in, leaving the bare-
headed Woolseys chilled, Granny saves the day with a special
surprise. In the second book, when all fifteen rabbit children
descend upon their garden to plant vegetables, the result is a
muddy mess. So Mommy Hopkins takes charge and organizes
her brood with efficiency.
6.54 dePaola, Tomie. Little Grunt and the Big Egg: A Prehistoric
Fairy Tale. Illustrated by Tomie dePaola. Holiday House, 1990.
ISBN 0-8234-0730-6. 30p. 4-8.
When Little Grunt finds a huge egg for a prehistoric omelet, no
one in the family realizes that it will hatch into George, a lovable
but fast-growing brontosaurus pet. But growing is what George
seems to do best, and soon he is much too big for the cave. Little
Grunt is distraught over turning his pet out into the wild. Then
a powerful volcanic eruption proves how handy big friends can
be. Tomie dePaola's recognizable flat, jughead characters wear
furs and winsome expressions against softly watercolored set-
tings.
6.55 Donnelly, Liza. Dinosaur Beach. Illustrated by Liza Donnelly.
Scholastic/Lucas Evans Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-42175-1, 32p.
3- 7.
Animal Fantasy
209
Take one dinosaur-loving boy and his dog, Bones, add the dis-
covery of an elasmosaurus on their trip to the beach, and you
have the ingredients for an adventure sure to please dinosaur
fans. Although all the other beach visitors rush screeching away,
the story hero simply slips onto the back of the elasmosaurus
and is whisked away to Dinosaur Beach. There other friendly
dinosaurs jam and play volleyball — and even build a sand
sculpture of the boy and his dog.
6.56 Dumbleton, Mike. Dial-a-Croc. Illustrated by Ann James. Or-
chard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08545-7. 30p. 4-S (est.).
To become rich, Vanessa captures a crocodile in the Australian
outback. "You have a choice/' she tells him. "You can be ten
handbags and five pairs of shoes, or you can help me make
lots of money." So "Dial-a-Croc" works a variety of jobs, in-
cluding Swim Team Scarer, Ice Crusher, and Ticket Puncher.
But he misses home. "You have a choice," he says to Vanessa.
"You can be my breakfast ... or you can take me home." Hu-
morous illustrations add levity to an exploitation that turns to
friendship.
6.57 Dunbar, Joyce. Four Fierce Kittens. Illustrated by Jakki Wood.
Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1992. ISBN 0-590-45535-4. 32p. 2-6.
Four mischievous kittens set out for some excitement on the
farm. Pretending to be tigers, leopards, and lions, the kittens
soon learn that a kitty "meow" is not nearly as frightening as a
"cluck" or an "oink" or a "quack." But can a "meow" scare a
puppy? Indeed. Four fierce kittens make a puppy "scat." Water-
color paintings illustrate this rhythmic, repetitive text.
6.58 Ehlert, Lois. Circus. Illustrated by Lois Ehlert. HarperCollins,
1992. ISBN 0-06-020252-1. 32p. 2-6 (est).
A border of stars frames the circus-act pages, which are nar-
rower than the book's covers. In collages bolder than even Lois
Ehlert fans have come to expect, each vivid circus act is com-
posed of shapes akin to a child's pegboard game. Electric-blue
striped Samu the Tiger jumps wildly through a flaming hoop
against glossy black, and grass-green goats tumble against
fuschia. Fluorescent, geometric graphics make for an atypical
circus of marching snakes, leaping lizards, and the flying Zuc-
chinis.
255
210
Fantasy
6.59 Elzbieta. Brave Babette and Sly Tom. Illustrated by Elzbieta.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-8037-0633-2. 36p.
4-8.
Almost immediately after the birth of Babette the mouse in a
blackbird's nest in the Luxembourg Gardens, her mother is
chased away by a nasty cat named Sly Tom. Fortunately, the
blackbird adopts Babette, who grows up to be such a feisty little
mouse that she is able to best Sly Tom. Illustrations are textured
backdrops in earth-gray and brown overlaid with impressions
of trees and the simply drawn animals.
6.60 Emberley, Michael. Ruby. Illustrated by Michael Emberley. Lit-
tle, Brown, 1990. ISBN 0-316-23643-8. 32p. 3-7 (est.).
Ruby, a Red Riding Hood-like mouse, sets off in her red cloak to
deliver triple-cheese pies to her granny. Although Ruby's
mother warns her not to talk to strangers (especially cats), Ruby
is defended on the street by a well-dressed, whiskered stranger
when a grimy reptile accosts her. Like the wolf, the stranger
races ahead to Granny's house — by taxi in this urban tale. But a
clever Ruby makes a quick phone call to ensure a satisfying,
surprise ending. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1991.
6.61 Engel, Diana. Josephina Hates Her Name. Illustrated by Diana
Engel. Morrow Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07796-X. 32p. 4^8
(est).
Josephina the alligator hates her name — she thinks it's ugly,
old-fashioned, and too unusual. When she plays with her
friends, she even suggests that they trade names, but no one ever
wants Josephina's name. Then, Grandma tells Josephina all
about the remarkable great-aunt after whom she is named.
When Josephina tells the story to her friends, they are more than
ready to trade names, but Josephina won't hear of it.
6.62 Ernst, Lisa Campbell. When Bluebell Sang. Illustrated by Lisa
Campbell Ernst. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-733561-5. 32p.
5-7 (est).
Farmer Swenson discovers that one of his dairy cows, Bluebell,
can sing beautifully. After performing for the local community,
Bluebell falls victim to a greedy talent agent, Big Eddie, who
takes Swenson and Bluebell on tour in a scheme to make Blue-
bell famous and himself rich. Dressed in the latest fashion, Blue-
bell is indeed a success. Although she is a trendsetter wherever
ERIC
25o
Animal Fantasy
211
she goes, Bluebell and Swenson are homesick. Finally, they de-
vise a clever plan to return home to the farm and resume a life
of peace and anonymity.
6.63 Geraghty, Paul. Over the Steamy Swamp* Illustrated by Paul
Geraghty. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-15-200561-7. 32p. 3-6.
A steamy swamp is the setting for this circular cumulative tale
with a food chain theme. A mosquito is threatened by a dragon-
fly who is threatened by a frog who is threatened by . . . and on
and on, until the greatest threat of all appears— a hunter, who
falls prey to the mosquito! Exaggerated actions fill the swamp
scenes with color and humor.
6.64 Giffard, Hannah. Red Fox. Illustrated by Hannah Giffard. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0869-6. 25p. 4-8
(est).
Hungry Red Fox sets out at night to find food for himself and
his mate. But his typical hunting routine meets with unusual
misfortune, and so Red Fox must brave the city to find some-
thing to eat. Returning home with a city-style meal, Red Fox
finds that he now has a few more mouths to feed. Brightly
colored stylized paintings, highlighted with white, illustrate this
nocturnal adventure of a determined fox.
6.65 Grossman, Bill. Tommy at the Grocery Store. Illustrated by Vic-
toria Chess. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-022409-6. 32p.
3-7.
Is Tommy the Pig a potato? Well, he does have eyes! Or maybe
a ruler? After all, he has feet! After Tommy's mother inadver-
tently leaves him at the grocery store, customers mistakenly
identify him as various grocery items and whisk him home.
Though each case of mistaken identity is discovered before dis-
asters occur, Tommy's predicaments and separation may be dis-
concerting for very young children. Victoria Chess's bright, de-
tailed watercolor illustrations bring out the humor of Bill
Grossman's rhyming text.
6.66 Guarino, Deborah. Is Your Mama a Llama? Illustrated by Steven
Kellogg. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41387-2.
32p. 4-7.
In a rhyming and patterned text, a curious baby llama named
Lloyd asks each of his animal friends the same question: "Is your
257
212
Fantasy
mama a llama?" The friends, in turn, give Lloyd clues to the
identity of their mamas. In the end, with help from his friend
Llyn, Lloyd gets the answer to his question and finds his own
llama mama. Steven Kellogg's detail-rich watercolor illustra-
tions capture the innocent beauty of animal mothers and their
babies.
6.67 Hawkins, Colin, and Jacqui Hawkins. Crocodile Creek: The Cry
in the Night Illustrated by Colin Hawkins. Doubleday, 1989.
ISBN 0-385-24980-2. 30p. 3-8 (est.).
On his houseboat, Baby Crocker wakes one morning out of sorts
and feeling snappy. Besides crankiness, his teething pains make
him bite off a table leg and chew up a life preserver. Baby even
chews off the mooring rope of the houseboat, and he and the
houseboat float off alone toward Fatal Falls. But it's Gran the
windsurfer to the rescue. This humorous story follows Baby
Crocker's family and frenzies in cartoon illustrations and dia-
logue.
6.68 Hayes, Sarah. This Is the Bear and the Scary Night, Illustrated
by Helen Craig. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1992. ISBN 0-
316-35250-0. 24p. 3-6 (est.).
"This is the boy who forgot his bear and left him behind in the
park on the chair." In rhyming text, the cumulative story un-
folds. A boy's favorite bear is forgotten and must spend the night
in the park. The poor bear is swept up by an owl, dropped into
a pond, rescued by a trombone player, and eventually reunited
with his young owner. Perky drawings are shaded with faded-
jeans blues and park-bench greens.
6.69 Henkes, Kevin. Julius, the Baby of the World. Illustrated by
Kevin Henkes. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08944-5.
32p. 4-7 (est).
Lilly's excitement about the new baby turns to jealousy when
her brother arrives and gets lots of parental attention. Lilly alter-
nates between ignoring Baby Julius and undermining his up-
bringing. Over his mouse crib, she scrambles the alphabet, whis-
pers "you're ugly," and tries to make him disappear. But when
a visiting cousin insults Baby Julius, Lilly rises to his defense and
insists that Julius is "The Baby of the World." Lilly's mouse
moods are hilarious, recognizable, and captivating. ALA Notable
Children's Books, 1991.
Animal Fantasy
213
6.70 Himmelman, John. A Guest Is a Guest. Illustrated by John Him-
melman. Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44720-2.
32p. 3-8 (est).
"A guest is a guest and we must show them our best/' So say the
Beanbucket family when their pigs move into the farmhouse
with them. Because the pigs are accepted, in come the chickens.
With pigs taking over the kitchen, and hens on every cushion,
the cows and horses move in. Finally, patient Farmer Bean-
bucket reaches his limit: "Enough is enough/' he cries. So — the
animals throw the Beanbuckets out! Charming animals make
themselves at home in overstuffed watercolor comfort.
6.71 Howe, James. Hot Fudge. Illustrated by Leslie Morrill. Morrow
Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09701-4. 32p. 5 and up.
Harold, the Monroe family's large, loquacious, and chocolate-
loving canine, is left at home on a Saturday morning along with
a pan of homemade fudge. But Harold is not alone. Sharing the
household are the Monroe's other pets: Chester, their arrogant
cat, little Howie, the dachshund, and Bunnicula, the vampire
bunny Soon after Chester reads in the morning newspaper that
there are robbers in the neighborhood, the fudge is missing.
Harold, Chester, and Howie try to solve the crime.
6.72 Hurd, Thacher. Blackberry Ramble. Illustrated by Thacher
Hurd. Crown, 1989. ISBN 0-517-57105-6. 29p. 3-8 (est.).
It is a beautiful day, and Mother and Father Mouse are trying to
complete their spring cleaning. At first, Baby Mouse is "just
noodling around," but she soon gets into mischief. The patient
parents finally give up their cleaning project for a picnic with
Baby. Mouse antics continue, including a wild ride with Baby
Mouse at the wheel, and a splattering fall into the blackberry pie.
Thacher Hurd's bright illustrations will make any reader long
for a spring day on the farm.
6.73 Jacques, Brian. Mattimeo. Illustrated by Gary Chalk. Philomel
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21741-X. 446p. 10 and up.
When Slagar the Fox and his evil band of mercenaries kidnap
the young of Redwall Abbey and enslave them in the kingdom
of Malkariss, warrior mouse Mathias and his followers must
rescue Redwall's future leaders. Those remaining at the abbey
face an equally perilous threat from General Ironbeak and his
gang of wicked birds. As the final battle begins, the warriors find
259
214
Fantasy
new strength, and Mattimeo, son of Mathias, fulfills his destiny.
This final episode in the Redwall trilogy finds human-like he-
roes triumphing over evil
6.74 Jorgensen, Gail. Crocodile Beat. Illustrated by Patricia Mullins.
Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-748010-0. 32p. 1-6.
Brilliant tissue-paper and paint collages across double-page
spreads display hissing snakes, booming elephants, swishing
birds, chattering monkeys, splashing ducks, and growling bears
"dancing and playing and stomping their feet/' Roaring King
Lion, shouldered by two bears on his bright red throne, leads the
noisy parade. When the crowd awakens a mean, snapping
crocodile, King Lion steps in to save the day. Young children will
enjoy the sing-song text and the subtle expressions on the faces
of the abundant animals.
6.75 Joyce, William. Bently and Egg. Illustrated by William Joyce.
HarperCollins/Laura Geringer Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-020386-
2. 28p. 3-8.
Artistic frog Bently Hopperton is entrusted with the single egg
of his best friend, Kack Kack, when the duck is away. Unlike
Horton, Bently is a less-than-faithful steward. Because the egg is
bald and bare, Bently paints it in dazzling colors. The Easter-like
egg then attracts the attention of a boy who promptly "eggnaps"
it! Poor Bently must brave all sorts of hilarious challenges to
retrieve the precious egg. Large-scale watercolors in a spring-
green palette are perfect for the woodland characters.
6.76 Kalman, Maira. Ooh-La-La (Max in Love). Illustrated by Maira
Kalman. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-84163-3. 32p. 8 and
up.
Max Stravinsky, the millionaire poet dog, takes a whirlwind tour
of Paris, where he loses his heart to the beautiful Crepes Suzette.
In a satiric spoof on the salon, Maira Kalman gives wit, savoir
faire, and a touch of the dramatic to his cast: Fritz from the Ritz,
Madame Camembert, Charlotte Russe, Peach Melba, and Pierre
Potpourri. A panoply of styles moderne (including a Blue Suite
in salute to Picasso) and printing which flows across the illustra-
tions give this picture book for older readers a lighthearted and
energetic style.
6.77 Karlin, Nurit. Little Big Mouse. Illustrated by Nurit Karlin.
HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-021608-5. 32p. 3-6 (est.).
ERIC 2Fj()
Animal Fantasy
215
A tiny mouse is dissatisfied with his size. Everyone, it seems, is
bigger than he. More than anything, he wants to be really BIG.
With knapsack on his back, he sets out to discover how to get
big. Out in the world, he meets a circus elephant, who explains,
"I think I was big even when I was little." Then Mouse's nose
tickles, and a tiny flea asks how Mouse got so big. Simple text
and bold-stroke illustrations are good companions.
6.78 Keller, Holly. The New Boy, Illustrated by Holly Keller. Green-
willow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-09828-2. 22p. 4-7 (est.).
When Milton the mouse arrives in Miss Higgins's kindergarten
class, chaos erupts. He puts caterpillars in lunch boxes, knocks
over blocks, and eats all the cherries off the special cupcakes that
Gregory brings for a snack. Even when Milton decides to be
good, things don't work out much better. When a new boy
arrives, readers will enjoy predicting how he will behave and
how Milton will be affected. Holly Keller's simple illustrations
have humor that will engage beginning readers.
6.79 Kettner, Christine. An Ordinary Cat. Illustrated by Christine
Kettner. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-023173-4. 26p. 6^10
(est.).
To his family, William is an ordinary cat. But at night, William
becomes "extraordinary" as he drives a cab, delivers important
fares, and even plays in a band. At dawn, William returns home
and resumes his ordinary existence. Bold-colored cartoon-like
drawings illustrate the secret nighttime adventures of a proper
daytime cat.
6.80 King-Smith, Dick. Ace: The Very Important Pig. Illustrated by
Lynette Hemmant. Crown, 1990. ISBN 0-517-57833-6. 134p. 8-12
(est).
Marked by an ace of clubs on his side, Ace is more than just an
average pig. As Farmer Tubbs soon discovers, this unusual
great-grandson of Babe, the sheepherding pig whose story is
told in Dick King-Smith's Babe: The Gallant Pig, not only can
understand human speech, but he also likes to watch television.
After Ace appears on the BBC, he becomes a celebrity and a
"very important pig." Set in the English countryside, this hu-
morous animal fantasy is filled with colorful animal characters
that children will enjoy getting to know.
6.81 King-Smith, Dick. Martin's Mice. Illustrated by Jez Alborough.
Crown, 1989. ISBN 0-517-57113-7. 128p. 8-12.
261
216
Fantasy
Instead of hunting mice like other barn cats, Martin adopts
them. In a bathtub-style cage, Martin keeps the mouse mother
Drusilla and her children, caring for and protecting them. But
the mice request their freedom. It is only when Martin himself is
sold and kept as a pet in a city apartment that he comes to
understand independence. After a daring escape, Martin returns
to the farm to establish a true friendship with Drusilla.
6.82 King-Smith, Dick, compiler. The Animal Parade: A Collection
of Stories and Poems. Illustrated by Jocelyn Wild. Tambourine
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11375-3. 93p. 6 and up.
Dick King-Smith indicates that he has collected his favorite ani-
mal tales — some comical, some dramatic, some frightening, and
some even tragic. Along with fables by Aesop, there are excerpts
from Wind in the Willows, Alice in Wonderland, The Jungle Book, The
Tale of Jeremy Fisher, Black Beauty, and White Fang. Sprinkled
throughout are selections from the author's own poems and
stories. Illustrator Jocelyn Wild has given the animals in this
collection both texture and feelings.
6.83 Kraus, Robert. Phil the Ventriloquist Illustrated by Robert
Kraus; Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-07988-1. 32p. 3-7
(est).
Phil the rabbit is a ventriloquist. He can make the scrambled
eggs talk and the telephone ring. His parents beg him to use a
ventriloquist's dummy instead of making chairs say, "Don't sit
on me." But Phil won't listen. He'd rather make his father's
shoes sing and his mother's hat tell jokes. Then one day a bur-
glar breaks into Phil's house, and ventriloquism saves the day.
As in his Spider and Daddy Long Ears books, Robert Kraus's
drawings and text are big, bold, and simple.
6.84 Kwitz, Mary DeBall. Shadow over Mousehaven Manor. Illus-
trated by Stella Ormai. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN
0-590-42034-8. 128p. 7-11.
When Minabell Mouse receives an urgent request to visit her
gravely ill Aunt Pitty Pat in their ancestral home, Lvlinabell must
set out in a Christmas Eve snowstorm to Mousehaven Manor.
Despite warnings from a secret agent and an encounter with an
evil pack of rats, the courageous mouse continues on her jour-
ney, determined to rescue her aunt and her family home from
the Prairie Pirates, a dangerous band of rodents. With the help
of friends, Minabell and her aunt foil a treacherous plan and
ERIC
262
Animal Fantasy
217
save the manor and the state of Illinois from destruction. Black-
line sketches illustrate this animal adventure story.
6.85 Kyte, Dennis. Zackary Raffles. Illustrated by Dennis Kyte. Dou-
bleday, 1989. ISBN 0-385-24653-6. 28p. 4-8 (est.).
Like all young mice who reach the age of six, Zackary Raffles is
eligible to join the Mouse Soldiers, Brave and True. To do so, he
must pass three tests: walk the Rope of Courage, solve the mys-
terious riddle, and spend the night standing guard on Lookout
Rock. But Zackary is afraid of the dark— so afraid that he never
sleeps at night and he carries a lantern in the daytime in case the
sun goes behind a cloud. Humorous watercolor illustrations will
allow comparisons of mouse- and human-scaled objects. Chil-
dren who share Zackary's fear will take comfort in his triumph.
6.86 Le Guin, Ursula K. Catwings Return. Illustrated by S. D. Schin-
dler. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-
08403-5. 48p. 6-10 (est.).
In this sequel to Catwings, Ursula Le Guin continues her flying
cat fantasy with this heartwarming family-reunion tale. Now
living in safety, four winged tabby cats, perfectly detailed in ink
with color washes, reminisce about their mother and their first
home in the city. When two of the cats decide to visit their alley
birthplace, they discover and rescue a tiny winged kitten from a
building being demolished. Learning the kitten is their sister,
they take her home to the country.
6.87 Lindbergh, Reeve. The Day the Goose Got Loose. Illustrated by
Steven Kellogg. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-
8037-0409-7. 32p. 4-8.
When the goose gets loose, the havoc begins, and before it's all
over both the farm and the town are in for a comical spree. The
frolicking goose lets loose the chickens, the sheep, and the
horses, and teases the bull into a charging mode. What got into
that goose? The farm child dreams an enchanting answer. Reeve
Lindbergh's rhyming text includes a repetitive phrase. Steven
Kellogg's action-packed illustrations beg to be examined closely.
6.88 Lionni, Leo. Tillie and the Wall. Illustrated by Leo Lionni. Al-
fred A. Knopf /Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-92155-0. 27p. 4^8
(est.).
Ullie and her companion mice wonder about the other side of a
wall that "had been there ever since the mice could remember/'
ERIC
263
218
Fantasy
It is too high to climb over, too thick to drill through, and too
long to go around, but Tillie is inspired by earthworms to bur-
row underneath the wall. On the other side, she discovers mice
like herself who receive her joyously and follow her back
through the tunnel. Leo Lionni's familiar collage-style mice are
in harmony with the simplicity of the message. Notable 1989
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
6.89 Marshall, James. Fox Be Nimble. Illustrated by James Marshall.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0761-4. 48p.
4-8.
Fox is busy practicing to be a rock star, but his mom interrupts
his starring role, sending him to baby-sit the mischievous Ling
children. Discovering his baby-sitting duties to be more than he
expected, Fox climbs new heights to get the job done. In the
process he achieves stardom, albeit not the kind he wanted. This
collection of three fun-filled stories, all humorously illustrated,
is another book about lovable and trouble-finding Fox in the
Easy-to-Read Books series. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1991.
6.90 Maxner, Joyce. Lady Bugatti. Illustrated by Kevin Hawkes.
Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10341-3. 32p.
5 and up.
In lilting and clever poetry, this picture book tells the story of a
chic and urbane ladybug hostess as she entertains insect guests.
The text is amusing; the illustrations are irresistible. Lady
Bugatti's friends are sophisticated urbanites, and we see them in
lushly colored urban settings in art-deco paintings. Like Joyce
Maxner 's Nicholas Cricket, this book will charm young readers
with its detailed and humorous depiction of insects and animals
as glitterati from the Roaring Twenties.
6.91 Maxner, Joyce. Nicholas Cricket. Illustrated by William Joyce.
HarperCollins/Harper Trophy Books, 1989. ISBN 0-06-024222-1.
20p. 3-8 (est.).
The soft, luminous paintings of William Joyce — in which insects
and small animals dress and act like fashionable Americans of
the 1920s — give an entrancing air to this picture book. The verse,
clever and musical, describes the cricket banjo player's part in
an all-night fest at his cabaret. The art-deco illustrations provide
a perfect setting for the energetic re-creation of Nick's sophisti-
cated chums, and no child will be able to resist this tantalizing
glimpse of their night life.
ERIC 264
Animal Fantasy
219
6.92 McCully, Emily Arnold. The Evil Spell- Illustrated by Emily
Arnold McCully Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-024154-3.
32p. 5-«.
In this sequel to ZaZa's Big Break, Emily Arnold McCully's droll
illustrations tell yet another humorous tale of the loving, theat-
rical bear family. When Edwin at long last gets a leading role and
a chance to deliver the lines that break the evil spell and save the
day, he is overcome with stage fright and runs away, too embar-
rassed to face the theater again. However, his wise and loving
parents convince him to return. Perhaps more important, Edwin
is able to break his own "evil spell" and to believe in himself.
6.93 McCully, Emily Arnold. Speak Up, Blanche! Illustrated by
Emily Arnold McCully. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-024228-
0. 32p. 4rS (est.).
When the benefactress of Farm Theater asks Bruno and the other
actors to teach the craft of acting to her grandchild, Blanche, the
animals cannot refuse. But Blanche is very shy and makes a
challenging pupil. Her tiny lamb voice is printed in the smallest
of type. She can't act, seU tickets, or collect props. But she is
never without her sketchbooks, and eventually she gains the
courage to convince the troupe that she would make a perfect
set designer.
6.94 McPhail, David. Pig Pig Gets a Job. Illustrated by David
McPhail. Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44619-2.
24p. 4^8.
In Pig Pig's newest adventure, he learns an elementary lesson of
economics: if one wants to buy something, one must work. Pig
Pig's visions of what he can do to earn money are humorously
exaggerated in David McPhail's illustrations — baker of mud
pies, builder of tumbledown houses, and maniacal car me-
chanic. All wild plans are gently reproved by Mother Pig, who
helps Pig Pig decide what tasks are sensible for a young pig.
6.95 Meddaugh, Susan. Martha Speaks. Illustrated by Susan Med-
daugh. Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-63313-3. 32p. 4^8
(est.).
Martha is a perfectly ordinary dog until she eats alphabet soup
and begins to talk. At first her family is delighted that Martha
can speak, even though her words aren't always appropriate,
such as "Why is that man so fat?" Finally, Martha talks so much
that her words blanket the pages and the family yells, "Martha,
265
220
Fantasy
please! SHUT UP!" But she redeems herself during a burglary,
and children will appreciate her cleverness.
6.96 Minarik, Else Holmelund. Am I Beautiful? Illustrated by Yossi
Abolafia. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09912-2. 24p. 3
and up.
As Little Hippo walks through the jungle, he overhears parents
exclaiming over their children's beauty and grace. In each in-
stance, Little Hippo asks the parent, "Am I beautiful, too?" In no
case — whether by lioness, heron, or human mother — is his
beauty confirmed. So, Little Hippo does what all children learn
to do — he asks his own mother, who answers: ". . . all hippos are
beautiful. And you are the most beautiful of all, because you are
mine!" Watercolor paints edged in black ink offer airy interpre-
tations of an important question.
6.97 Minarik, Else Holmelund. Percy and the Five Houses. Illus-
trated by James Stevenson. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-
688-08105-3. 20p. 4-10.
Creator of the Little Bear stories, Else Holmelund Minarik teams
simple text with James Stevenson's breezy art to tell the story of
Percy, a river beaver who finds a piece of real gold. Conned by
Ferd the Fox, Percy uses the gold to join the House of the Month
Club, a club that mails out new houses for each month of the
year. But cardboard castles, crepe-paper trees, and igloos are no
match for a beaver's natural habitat, and Percy discovers that his
dam is the best house of all.
6.98 Modrell, Dolores. Tales of Tiddly, Illustrated by Ellen Eagle.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-671-
69204-6. 36p. 5-7 (est.).
This is a set of three simple stories about Tiddly, a small home-
less kitty, Mr. Bones, a very sophisticated and well-organized
cat, and Uncle Meezo, a white terrier with the kindest face that
Tiddly has ever seen. The two friends generously take in Tiddly,
making him a part of their family The resulting adventures may
serve as a lead-in to classroom discussions about families' simi-
larities and unique characteristics.
6.99 Norman, Philip Ross. The Carrot Wan Illustrated by Philip Ross
Norman. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-61200-6. 32p. 4-7 (est.).
266
Animal Fantasy
221
Just before the Midsummer Feast, the Horrible Hares, carrot
thieves of the first magnitude, pilfer every Rabbit carrot, and
"bunnynap" Carbuncle, the Rabbits7 Carrot Expert. In true Tro-
jan style, tiie peaceful Rabbits build a giant bunny-filled carrot
to gain access to the Hares' fort. The details of the fort and the
plans for assault beg to be inspected. Revenge is funny and
harmless in its effect. For example, Black Ear, the Horrible Hare
Emperor, is doused with a flagon of carrot wine.
6.100 Norman, Philip Ross. A Mammoth Imagination. Illustrated by
Philip Ross Norman. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-61201-4.
32p. 4rS (est).
Little Bonbon, a wild boar, has a wild imagination. He needs it
because the grownup wild boars are boring. While the others
just eat and look for mushrooms to eat again, Bonbon exercises
his imagination. Then, following some huge footprints, he dis-
covers a herd of friendly mammoths who have toys and paints
and beds for jumping. There is even mammoth music for danc-
ing. Back home again, Bonbon is certain that he will always have
a playmate — because of his "mammoth imagination/'
6.101 Novak, Matt. While the Shepherd Slept. Illustrated by Matt
Novak. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08515-5. 32p. 3-7 (est.).
A tired little shepherd nods off under a shady tree while his fat
white sheep quietly sneak away, as they always do. They're off
to the theater where each afternoon they don costumes and
perform vaudeville routines, songs, and dances. When the mati-
nee is over, they nibble their way back to the shepherd, ready for
sleep in their warm barn. Then, in a surprising twist, the little
shepherd goes to the theater, where, under the same spotlight,
he dances until dawn.
6.102 Numeroff, Laura Joffe. If You Give a Moose a Muffin. Illus-
trated by Felicia Bond. HarperCollins/Laura Geringer Books,
1991. ISBN 0-06-024406-2. 28p. 6-11 (est.).
When a moose comes for a visit, a little boy tries to make it feel
at home by offering a muffin. But it doesn't take long before the
host conjectures that a moose may not be so easily satisfied, and
that it may request other things to go with the muffin— jam,
more muffins, and maybe a sweater. The moose may even want
socks, then make a puppet show, and need to paint scenery.
267
222
Fantasy
Laura Joffe Numeroff's characters have just the right touch of
whimsy when creating their jolly havoc.
6-103 Otto, Carolyn. Dinosaur Chase* Illustrated by Thacher Hurd.
HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-021 614-X. 32p. 2-6 (est.).
When only dinosaurs populate the world, they swim and surf,
fish and fly But some masked dinosaurs are stealing jewels!
Over the bridge they run, pursued by dinosaur police. Posing as
dinosaur statues in the park, the robbers are unable to fool the
police. With very little text and rhyming phrases ("Dinosaur
chase, dinosaur race, hiding in a dinosaur place"), this bedtime
dinosaur adventure will encourage young readers. Edge-to-
edge paintings are in transparent watercolors, shaded, and out-
lined with India ink.
6.104 Patz, Nancy. Sarah Bear and Sweet Sidney. Illustrated by Nancy
Patz. Four Winds Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-770270-7. 28p. 6-10.
It is practically springtime, and Sweet Sidney is ready to
awaken, but Sarah Bear is content to continue hibernating until
spring really arrives. So, to pass the time, Sweet Sidney does the
spring cleaning, prepares a picnic, and finally falls back to sleep.
When spring does arrive, both bears awaken and prance off to
the meadow to enjoy honey-nut rolls and laugh in die sunshine.
The rhythmic text, occasionally expressed in rhyme, brings the
bears' adventures to life. Dynamic illustrations, in pencil, water-
color, and inks, animate the text and capture the passing of
winter.
6.105 Pearson, Susan. Well, I Never! Illustrated by James Warhola.
Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-671-
69199-6. 32p. 4-S (est).
It is a strange Saturday on the farm. First Pa bales the sheep
instead of the hay. Then Ma feeds the chickens popcorn, which
pops inside their stomachs, causing them to bounce on the barn
roof as Ma runs back and forth, trying to catch their eggs in the
laundry basket. When the family finally discovers the cause of
their outrageous problems, the challenge is to find a solution.
Zany illustrations are the perfect complement to this tall tale.
6.106 Pfister, Marcus (translated by J. Alison James). Rainbow Fish.
Illustrated by Marcus Pfister. North-South Books, 1992. ISBN
1-55858-010-7. 32p. 5-8.
263
VIRGINIA WOOLF
Nurse Lugton's
Gubjain
ILLUSTRATED BY JULIE VIVAS
B.
A. Piggins and the Royal Wedding by Jane Yolen; illustrated by Jane Dyer (see 6.165).
B. Nurse Lugton's Curtain by Virginia Woolf; illustrated by Julie Vivas (see 6.163).
C. If You Give a Moose a Muffin by Laura Joffe Numeroff; illustrated by Felicia Bond
(see 6.1 021. D. You Silly Goose by Ellen Stoll Walsh (see 6. 1 48).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
26,9
c.
A. Little Mouse's Painting by Diane Wolkstein; illustrated by Maryjane Begin (see
6.160). B. Tuesday by David Wiesner (see 6.155). C. Frog Odyssey by Juliet and
Charles Snape (see 6.125).
ERIC
270
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Animal Fantasy
223
An extraordinary fish takes pride in his shimmering scales —
scales of such beauty and reflected gleam that he is amazing to
other fish. But pride leaves Rainbow Fish lonely until he learns
the lesson of sacrifice and the rewards of generosity. The world
of Rainbow Fish is washed in blues, greens, and lavenders. His
scales are enhanced with defraction foil, an innovative holo-
graphic technique that creates depth, color change, and reflected
geometric patterns as the pages are shifted in the light.
6.107 Pochocki, Ethel. The Attic Mice. Illustrated by David Catrow.
Henry Holt, 1990. ISBN 0-8505-1298-2. 113p. 8-10 (est.).
Living in the attic of an old doll farmhouse in the middle of a
linoleum yard, a family of mice share hair-raising adventures,
growing pains, understanding, and love. The story of their ev-
eryday experiences and their acceptance of a "good-for-noth-
ing" horse chestnut into the family is colorfully and humorously
told. Pen-and-ink drawings detail this warmhearted tale.
6.108 Pomerantz, Charlotte. Flap Your Wings and Try. Illustrated by
Nancy Tafuri. Gieenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08020-0.
20p. 4-8.
With encouragement and patience, a baby seagull learns to fly.
Once aloft in the sky, the bird then encourages others to "flap
your wings and try." Nancy Tafuri's full-page illustrations,
beautifully created with watercolor and black ink, capture the
effort and the achievement. The rhyme and predictable pattern
of Charlotte Pomerantz's text will encourage young children to
try their own wings at reading.
6.109 Quackenbush, Robert. Danger in Tibet. Evil under the Sea. Lost
in the Amazon. Illustrated by Robert Quackenbush. Pippin
Press, 1989-92. 32p. 6-10.
Unabashed environmentalist Miss Mallard, the world famous
"ducktective," solves ecological mysteries around the globe. In
Australia, someone or something is destroying the Great Barrier
Reef. In the Amazon, the rain forests are in danger. And in Tibet,
it is Mr. Everest that could be destroyed. Miss Mallard (and
young readers) pick up clues amid lots of information, eventu-
ally deducing the solutions. Full-page watercolors, humor, and
thin volumes in the Miss Mallard Mystery series will invite
young readers.
6.110 Ravilious, Robin. Two in a Pocket. Illustrated by Robin
Ravilious. Little, Brown, 1991. ISBN 0-316-73449-7. 24p. 4-8.
27i
224
Fantasy
With spring's arrival, Snippet the dormouse finds herself in new
surroundings, sharing a coat-pocket home with Jenny the wren.
When Jenny is hurt by a cat, Snippet nurses her back to health,
and the two unlikely housemates develop a strong friendship.
When summer comes, the coat is carried away by the farmer to
make a scarecrow. Home again in her field, Snippet settles hap-
pily into one pocket, with Jenny in the other. Softly colored
pencil sketches illustrate this heartwarming story of friendship.
6.111 Reeves, Mona Rabun. I Had a Cat Illustrated by Julie Downing.
Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-775731-5. 30p. 4-7 (est.).
In this fanciful story written in rhyme, a little girl's house is filled
to overflowing with a rambunctious menagerie. To deal with the
problem of too many animals, she visits the zookeeper, a farmer,
and a boy; they all help her out by taking various animals. Then,
beginning to feel somewhat lonely, the little girl returns home
and is relieved to discover that she still has her cat. Bright,
exuberant watercolors create a chaotic mood.
6.112 Robertus, Polly M. The Dog Who Had Kittens. Illustrated by
Janet Stevens. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0860-4. 28p.
6-10 (est).
When Eloise has her kittens, Baxter the bassett hound feels like
an outcast. But when he becomes a full-time baby-sitter for the
kittens, Baxter understands the joy of fatherhood. Then the kit-
tens are given away to new homes, and Baxter is lonely until he
discovers a newfound friendship with Eloise. Watercolored
black-crayon drawings capture the emotions of this heartwarm-
ing story about the need for companionship.
6.113 Ross, Christine. Lily and the Bears. Illustrated by Christine
Ross. Houghton Mifflin, 1991. ISBN 0-395-55332-6. 24p. 4-8.
Lily wants to be "something big and brave . . . and tough/' So
every morning, instead of getting dressed up in children's
clothes, she puts on a bear suit and acts like a wild bear, much
to her mother's, father's, and grandmother's dismay. One day,
Lily's class goes to the zoo, and Lily finds herself mistakenly
locked into the bear cage. There she discovers what wild bears
are really like. Delicately drawn wax pencil and watercolor illus-
trations enrich Lily's story with humorous details.
6.114 Ruch, Sandi Barrett. Junkyard Dog. Illustrated by Marjory
Wunsch. Orchard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08442-6. 89p. 8-11
(est.).
Animal Fantasy
225
The widowed junkman, Zlotnick, obtains what he thinks is a
fierce guard dog named Max. But little Huey, one of the junk-
man's four children, makes friends with Max without Zlotnick's
knowledge. Zlotnick changes his mind about Max when Huey
is accidentally trapped in an old refrigerator, and Max rescues
him. Max then becomes a member of the family. Sandi Barrett
Ruch tells her black-and-white illustrated story from the unique
point of view of an observant toad, a longtime resident of the
junkyard.
6.115 Ryder, Joanne. The Bear on the Moon. Illustrated by Carol La-
cey. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-G8110-X. 32p. 6-10
(est.).
When "there was nothing at the top of the world but the sea
where the white bears lived/' one observant, curious bear
climbed the northern lights to explore the moon. In a creation
myth based on Joanne Ryder's own childhood wonderings and
imagination, the polar bear tosses the moon's snowy, icy surf ace
to the bears below, building the Arctic ice cap and accounting for
the waning moon. Carol Lacey's furry, wet polar bears are real-
istic against expressionistic backdrops, her compositions bal-
anced and peaceful.
6.116 Schotter, Roni. Bunny's Night Out. Illustrated by Margot Apple.
Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1989. ISBN 0-316-77465-0. 29p.
4-8 (est).
Bedtime is not Bunny's favorite time of the day. So one night,
when the moon seems to call him out to play, Bunny crawls out
of his rabbit home and begins a series of nighttime adventures,
including sharing a leftover meal with a band of raccoons. But
when the rain begins to fall, a cold and wet Bunny hops home
and realizes that his bed is the best place to be. Soft, colored-
pencil drawings illustrate this adventurous bedtime story.
6.117 Schwartz, Henry. How I Captured a Dinosaur. Illustrated by
Amy Schwartz. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-531-08370-5. 28p. 4-7.
When dinosaurs are sighted along the Baja Peninsula of Mexico,
Liz Bradford is determined to see one for herself. Luckily, her
family is about to embark on a camping vacation, and she is able
to convince them to set up camp near the sightings. Liz's first-
person account of how she lures "Albert" (short for Albertosau-
rus) with a hamburger and how she domesticates him will stir
the imagination of any young dinosaur lover.
ERIC
273
226
Fantasy
6.118 Schwartz, Roslyn. Rose and Dorothy. Illustrated by Roslyn
Schwartz. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08518-X. 32p. 3-7.
Two very different creatures— Dorothy a huge singing elephant,
and Rose, a tiny mouse — transcend size differences to become
the best of friends, in a story reminiscent of William Steig's Amos
and Boris. But these two friends cohabitate, and Dorothy's size
eventually drives delicate Rose to near collapse. Hurt feelings
are resolved through a good talk, and buying the big house next
door makes for a happy ending. Ink and crayon drawings pro-
vide hilarious detail. Watch for Dorothy at the art gallery!
6.119 Seligson, Susan, and Howie Schneider The Amazing Amos and
the Greatest Couch on Earth. Illustrated by Susan Seligson and
Howie Schneider. Little, Brown/Joy Street Books, 1989. ISBN
0-316-78033-2. 30p. 4-8 (est.).
Varoom! Amos the dog is off on his second journey. With just a
flick of his paw, Amos can make his favorite couch move. His
owners, Mr. and Mrs. Bobson, rarely worry about him because
they know he is a good driver. However, the Bobsons are un-
aware that this time Amos's adventure has taken him to a circus
where he and his fantastic couch are a part of the show. Again,
Amos's exploits are filled with fun, imagination, and lively ani-
mation.
6.120 Sharmat, Andrew. Smedge. Illustrated by Chris L. Demarest.
Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-782261-3. 30p. 4-9 (est.).
What do pets do all day when their owners go to work? Well,
one dog, Smedge, the Pettey's perfect pet, dons suit and brief- .
case to serve as topdog adviser to the president of the United
States. The Petteys never suspect that Smedge is escorted each
day, by limousine, to a posh Washington office to meet with
high-level officials and to lunch at clubs. Even as insightful
Smedge manages to save the country from a disastrous trade
agreement, his owners continue to think of him as their lovable,
lazy (but obedient) pet.
6.121 Silverman, Erica. Warm in Winter. Illustrated by Michael J.
Deraney Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-782661-9. 30p. 4-S (est.).
It's summer, and new friends Rabbit and Badger enjoy lemon-
ade, checkers, and each other's company. When winter comes,
Badger is lonesome and decides to accept an invitation to visit
her friend Rabbit. Trudging through an icy snowstorm, Badger,
thinking that she will never be warm and dry again, finally
274
Animal Fantasy
227
arrives at Rabbit's house. Snuggling up by the fire in warm
flannel, the two friends once again enjoy each other's company,
and Badger discovers the true meaning of "warm in winter/'
Pencil and watercolor illustrations in earth-tone hues help to tell
a story that is sure to warm children's hearts.
6.122 Simon, Carly. Amy the Dancing Bear. Illustrated by Margot
Datz. Doubleday, 1989. ISBN 0-385-26721-5. 36p. 5-8 (est.).
It's bedtime, but try as she might, Amy's mother cannot per-
suade her daughter to stop dancing and get ready for bed. Only
when Mother Bear falls asleep does Amy realize that it really is
time to say goodnight. Though singer Carly Simon's text is
written in florid Victorian-like prose that may be unusual for
children, Margot Datz's illustrations convey the warmth of the
mother-daughter relationship.
6.123 Singer, Marilyn. Chester the Out-of-Work Dog. Illustrated by
Cat Bowman Smith. Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1828-X. 30p.
5-8 (est.).
Chester is a happy, hard-working Border collie who protects and
herds his family's sheep. But when Chester and his family move
to the city, he feels displaced and at loose ends. He tries herding
squirrels and pigeons, but it's not the same. Finally, after herding
some lost children in costumes to Chester A. Arthur Elementary
School, Chester lands a job as the school's ever-so-capable cross-
ing guard, Although teachers and young readers will have to
look beyond Marilyn Singer's ail-too- traditional depiction of
male and female roles, Chester's circumstances could stimulate
discussions about change.
6.124 Smith, Wendy. Think Hippo! Illustrated by Wendy Smith. Carol-
rhoda Books, 1989. ISBN 0-87614-372-9. 24p. (est.).
It's time for school to begin, and Desirge, the third of three hippo
children, nervously thinks about her first day. Fearing that she
will be neither as smart nor as tough as her brother and sister,
Desir6e seeks advice from her siblings and timidly swims away
to school. When a "hippo-sized" problem at recess is sur-
mounted by a "Desir£e-style" solution, she becomes confident
in herself and about school. Bright watercolor illustrations com-
plement this humorous story of courage and individuality.
6.125 Snape, Juliet, and Charles Snape. Frog Odyssey. Illustrated by
Juliet and Charles Snape. Simon and Schuster Books for Young
Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-671-74741-X. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
ERiC
275
228
Fantasy
Albert and the other frogs live in a polluted pond at the city's
edge, now threatened by new construction. With a jar for trans-
porting the tadpoles and carrying their favorite diving post, the
frogs begin their odyssey to safety, eluding an alley cat, sewer
rats, and traffic, and eventually reaching a perfect new home in
the city park. The realism of these distinctive watercolor frogs
and city scenes makes a fantasy adventure almost believable.
6.126 Stefanec-Ogren, Cathy Sly, EL: The Case of the Missing Shoes.
Illustrated by Priscilla Posey Circolo. Harper and Row, 1989.
ISBN 0-06-024632-4. 48p. 6-9.
It's opening night at the ballet, and Sly, EL, a self-made fox
detective, visits his old friend Miss Lotta Oink, a renowned
ballerina. When Lotta discovers that first her toe shoes and then
her costumes are missing, Sly investigates the case and finally
uncovers the culprit. Simple black-and-white drawings accom-
pany this easy-to-read backstage whodunit.
6.127 Steig, William. Dr. De Soto Goes to Africa. Illustrated by Wil-
liam Steig. HarperCollins/Michael di Capua Books, 1992. ISBN
0-06-205003-6. 32p. 3-8 (est.).
More than a decade has passed since Dr. De Soto outfoxed the
fox, so a whole new generation of children is ready for a sequel.
The "one-in-a-million, hum-dinger of a dentist" is off to Africa
in response to the plea of an elephant with an unbearable tooth-
ache. This time Dr. De Soto's nemesis is a rhesus monkey named
Honkitonk, who kidnaps the doctor. Mrs. De Soto ably pinch-
hits as a substitute dentist, and the happy ending hints that the
mice duo may be bound for further adventures.
6.128 Sundgaard, A old. The Bear Who Loved Puccini. Illustrated
by Dominic Catalano. Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22135-
2. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Robert Remsen "Barefoot" Rainfield is an extraordinary north-
ern Minnesota bear. First, he falls in love with the music of
Puccini, and then, encouraged by Chief Shorty John Sundown,
Barefoot sets out to seek his fortune as an opera singer in St.
Paul. When a famous La Scala maestro discovers Barefoot sing-
ing Puccini in a St. Paul cafe, the message is clear: the most
unlikely dreams can come true. Pastel watercolors are shaded
and hatched with black.
ERLC
276
Animal Fantasy
229
6.129 Talbott, Hudson, as told to. Your Pet Dinosaur: An Owner's
Manual by Dr. Rex. Illustrated by Hudson Talbott. Morrow
Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11338-9. 32p. 7 and up.
Dr. Rex, a fellow at the Museum of Relatively Natural History,
produces his third book about his own species — a pet owner's
guide to choosing, caring for, training, and living with one's
own dinosaur. The headings are right out of more traditional
"guides"— "Bringing the Baby Home," "Housebreaking," and
"Discipline"— but the scenes depict hysteria. Imagine, for exam-
ple, housebreaking a brontosaurus, or territory wars between
neighborhood pets. Other features of the guide include letters to
Dr. Rex, fashions for dinosaurs, and photos of Show Dinos.
6.130 Taylor, Scott. Dinosaur James. Illustrated by Scott Taylor. Mor-
row Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08577-6. 32p. 5 and up.
This book describes in rhyme a little boy who has dinosaurs on
his clothes, on his lunchbox, and in his bedroom. At first James's
obsession appears excessive: '"Will you come out to the play-
ground to play?' 'No,' says James, 'I'd rather stay,'" as he builds
a giant dinosaur with his toys. However, when a schoolyard
bully picks on James, it turns out that dinosaurs can be quite
helpful after all. Bordered ink and watercolor illustrations bring
James's passion to life.
6.131 Teague, Mark. The Trouble with the Johnsons. Illustrated by
Mark Teague. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-
42394-0. 32p. 5-8.
Elmo and his cat Leon hate their new home in the city, so one
night they hop a train to their old house in the country. Although
the current occupants, the Johnsons, are receptive and kind, they
are also dinosaurs, In time Elmo realizes that he misses his
parents, and he decides that his real home is his new home.
Alternating richly colored and black-and-white illustrations
lend a surrealistic quality to this dream-like book.
6.132 Thomas, Patricia. "Stand Back/' Said the Elephant, "I'm Going
to Sneeze!" Illustrated by Wallace Tripp. Lothrop, Lee and
Shepard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09339-6. 32p. 4-7.
Stand back ... the elephant is about to sneeze! Creatures remem-
ber how depleted they were after its last sneeze. The zebra lost
stripes, the bees their stings, and the bear turned bare. In rhyme,
all the animals beg the elephant, "Please don't sneeze!" When
the tiny mouse scares away the sneeze, the elephant's great
277
230
Fantasy
guffaws of delighted laughter are just as destructive as the
sneeze! Wonderfully expressive animals draw sympathy as well
as amusement in this newly illustrated reissue.
6.133 Tolhurst, Marilyn. Somebody and the Three Blairs- Illustrated
by Simone Abel Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08478-7. 32p.
3- 6.
When Mr. and Mrs. Blair and Baby Blair go on an outing, some-
body comes to explore their home. This somebody (who hap-
pens to be a bear) makes himself at home in the Blairs' house. He
samples all the food, tries out everyone's chair, and even selects
the best bed for a nap. This variant is the perfect companion
volume for the original Goldilocks and the Three Bears.
6.134 Tompert, Ann. Grandfather Tang's Story. Illustrated by Robert
Andrew Parker Crown, 1990. ISBN 0-517-57272-9. 32p. 4 and up
(est.).
Little Soo listens to Grandpa Tang tell the story of the two fox
fairies, Wu Ling and Chou, and watches him illustrate his tale
with seven-piece paper tangrams. He rearranges the pieces
deftly to show the fox fairies change from one animal form to
another as they compete and argue and chase each other. The
traditional Chinese puzzle pieces share pages with watercolor
illustrations, and a final note describes how children can invent
their own designs and stories.
6.135 Turner, Ann. Hedgehog for Breakfast. Illustrated by Lisa
McCue. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-789241-7. 30p. 4-10 (est.).
For a young fox, "having a hedgehog for breakfast" can only
mean one thing — a tasty meal. So when Papa Fox tells George
and Charles to invite Mrs. Hedgehog for breakfast, the two set
about their plans to cook their guest. Unaware of these plans,
Mrs. Hedgehog enjoys her hot bath and drying time in the oven.
When Papa and Mama return, the confusion is cleared up and
all the foxes sit down with their guest to a breakfast of oatmeal
and cream. Colorful drawings, rich in detail, help to tell this
amusing tale of idiomatic confusion.
6.136 Turner, Charles. The Turtle and the Moon. Illustrated by Melissa
Bay Mathis. Dutton Children's Books. ISBN 0-525-44659-1. 32p.
4- 8 (est.).
A lonely turtle spends each day alone, napping, walking, and
swimming. Then one night, he wakes and discovers the moon
273
Animal Fantasy
231
for the first time. Challenging the moon to a race in the lake, the
turtle finds that the moon's luminous reflection is a perfect com-
panion. As she follows the turtle through day and night, Melissa
Bay Mathis captures, in beautiful pastels, the ever-changing
lights and colors of nature.
6.137 Van Caster, Nancy. An Alligator Lives in Benjamin's House.
Illustrated by Dale Gottlieb. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-
21489-5. 28p. 3-7.
A variety of animals live in Benjamin's house. Ah alligator is
hiding under his bed, waiting to pounce r a his mother's feet
when she's vacuuming. A snake winds down the stairs, a lion
lurks under the kitchen table, and a monkey does tricks in the
living room. Rabbits, puppies, kittens, whales, and bears take
their turns as manifestations of a young boy's imagination, and
each shares some trait with Benjamin. Colorful, offbeat paintings
contribute to the whimsy.
6.138 Van Laan, Nancy. Possum Come a-Knockin'. Illustrated by
George Booth. Alfred A. Knopf /Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-394-
92206-9. 22p. 3-6 (est.).
Cartoon-like illustrations accompany the high-spirited rhyming
text in this cumulative tale, making it a perfect read-aloud. An
impish little possum decked out in a forest green stovepipe hat
knocks continually at the door of a house, much to the irritation
of its occupants: Pa, Granny, Pappy, Ma, Baby, Sis, Tom-cat,
Coon-dawg, Brother, and Sister. The possum fools them all, glee-
fully hanging by his tail from a tree.
6.139 van Pallandt, Nicolas. The Butterfly Night of Old Brown Bear.
Illustrated by Nicolas van Pallandt. Farrar, Straus and Giroux,
1992. ISBN 0-374-31009-2. 32p. 4-6 (est.).
Old Brown Bear collects butterflies and mcths, some with names
so long that "they reach from his door to the other side of the
rivers." One day, while lolling about in his garden, he is teased
by a brilliant blue moth — a tantalizing new species. With butter-
fly net a-whizzing, Brown Bear charges, but the elusive moth
flutters higher and higher until Brown Bear is taking bouncy
steps across lunar craters. One memorable painting shows
Brown Bear teetering perilously from the topmost twig of an
ancient elm.
ERIC
279
232
Fantasy
6.140 Velthuijs, Max (translated by Anthea Bell). Frog in Love. Illus-
trated by Max Velthuijs. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN
0-374-32465-4. 23p. 4-10 (est.).
There can be only one reason why Frog feels funny and his heart
goes "thump-thump": Frog is in love! Setting out to win his
beloved Duck's affection, Frog paints pictures and picks flowers.
But when Frog is injured as he attempts to show Duck his love
by setting a high-jump record, it is Duck who comes to help. As
Duck nurses Frog back to health, the two discover their love for
one another. Bright watercolor paintings illustrate the simple
message: "Love knows no boundaries."
6.141 Vincent, Gabrielle. Ernest and Celestine at the Circus. Illus-
trated by Gabrielle Vincent. Greenwillow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-
688-08685-3. 24p. 3-6 (est.).
In softly watercolored browns and grays, Gabrielle Vincent cre-
ates a new "adventure" for her gentle characters: Ernest, the
bear, and Celestine, the mouse. Ernest returns to his act as a
circus clown, enlisting Celestine as his reluctantly shy, but
proud, assistant. Loving and supportive friendship undergirds
the story told exclusively through the characters7 dialogue.
6.142 Waddell, Martin. Fanner Duck. Illustrated by Helen Oxenbury.
Candlewick Press, 1992. ISBN 1-56402-009-6. 32p. 4^8 (est.).
A duck works day after day for a lazy old farmer who lounges
in bed and calls repeatedly, "How goes the work?" All day long
the duck fetches the cow, gathers the hens, saws the wood, and
irons the clothes, eventually growing "so sleepy and weepy and
tired" that the farm animals take pity. They band together, toss
the lazy farmer out, take over the farm, and happily share the
chores. Helen Oxenbury's animals are gentle and sympathetic,
while the farmer is a burly, hairy lummox.
6.143 Waddell, Martin. Owl Babies. Illustrated by Patrick Benson.
Candlewick Press, 1992. ISBN 1-56402-101-7. 32p. 4-7 (est.).
Three wide-eyed baby owls — Sarah, Percy, and Bill — stare out
from their hole in the tree, a background created with black ink
and watercolor cross-hatching. They have awakened to find that
their mother is missing, so the babies wait and wait for her
return. Although Sarah and Percy are reassuring, Bill's repeated
chorus is recognizable: "I want my mommy!" As loneliness and
worries get bigger, the babies climb onto one branch for comfort.
ERLC
2o0
Animal Fantasy
233
Closing their eyes, they wish their mother home. "AND SHE
CAME/7
6.144 Wagener, Gerda (translated by Nina Ignatowicz). Leo the Lion.
Illustrated by Reinhard MichL HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-
021657-3. 32p. 5-7 (est.).
Leo is the loneliest lion in the world. He wants to be loved and
petted just like Mr. Brown's pet cat, Katrinka. But Leo is just too
big, and everyone is afraid of him. So off goes Leo to find
someone who will hold him on a lap and pet him. Leo encoun-
ters many different people with the same result: they don't un-
derstand that Leo is big "only on the outside/7 so they run. After
a runaway locomotive crashes in the desert, Leo meets a female
lion who returns his love.
6.145 Wagner, Karen. Silly Fred. Illustrated by Normand Chartier.
Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-792280-4. 30p. 4r-6 (est.).
Fred is a pig who loves to sing songs like "Leafity leafity leaf,
loofity loofity loo, loo-hoo, loo-hoo, loo-hoo, loo, loo, loo" and
to turn somersaults on the bed. He likes being silly and, in fact,
doesn't know how to act any other way. But one day he meets a
beaver who does not approve of silliness. Fred tries to be more
serious, only to discover that life is not much fun without som-
ersaults and songs. Pink-dominated pencil and watercolor illus-
trations depict expressive pigs.
6.146 Wahl, Jan. The Sleepy time Book. Illustrated by Arden Johnson.
Tambourine Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10276-X. 32p. 3 and up.
In misty pastels, lovable anthropomorphic creatures go about
their nighttime activities. A moose with a soft striped scarf
around his neck settles down in a nest of tall grasses. Frogs in
neckties croon together under a full moon, and thrushes perch
with closed eyes and bowed heads. The text is simple, rhythmic,
and alliterative. Everything culminates with a sleeping baby
snuggled under a blue and white flowered quilt. Lullaby ca-
dences and the appeal of familiar animals make this a soothing
choice for sleepy-time reading.
6.147 Wallace, Bill. Totally Disgusting! Illustrated by Leslie Morrill.
Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0873-6. lllp. 7-11 (est.).
Because a little kitten repeatedly mews and kisses his new
owner, Jessica, she announces that his name will be "Mewkiss."
Even though Mewkiss adores Jessica, he finds such a name to be
234
Fantasy
totally disgusting! Through wise advice from an elderly neigh-
borhood cat, Mewkiss learns to see his name in a different light
and eventually saves Jessica from a fateful encounter with a local
rat. As usual, Bill Wallace's fondness for and knowledge of ani-
mals shines through, complemented by Leslie Morrill's expres-
sive black-and-white drawings.
6*148 Walsh, Ellen Stoll. You Silly Goose- Illustrated by Ellen Stoll
Walsh. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-299865-9.
32p. 3-8.
Cut- and torn-paper collages shape George the responsible
mouse, his friend Emily the goose, and Emily's newly hatched
downy yellow goslings. When George announces that he has
seen the fox "with his big ears, bright eyes, and sleek, shiny fur/'
nosy neighbor Lulu thinks that George himself fits that descrip-
tion, and flips him into the pond. When the real fox shows up,
George must save Lulu, forcing Emily to ask, "Now who is the
fox and who is the silly goose?"
6.149 Waters, Tony. The Sailor's Bride. Illustrated by Tony Waters.
Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-345-41441-2. 28p. 6 and up (est.).
When Susanna marries Whitewhiskers, the sailor mouse, every-
one warns her that her life will be lonely, for "Sailors love only
the sea." When Whitewhiskers is presumably lost at sea,
Susanna takes the children and sets out to find her beloved
husband. Reunited once again, the two mice realize their special
bend, and Whitewhiskers discovers the special qualities of his
"sailor bride." Inspired by a famous painting and the work of
Beatrix Potter, Tony Waters has created a heartwarming story of
love and adventure.
6.150 Wellington, Monica. The Sheep Follow. Illustrated by Monica
Wellington. Dutton Children's Books, 1992. ISBN 0-525-44837-3.
32p. 3-6 (est).
At first the sheep follow the shepherd, but when the shepherd
falls asleep, the sheep follow a butterfly, waddling geese, a cat,
and then some pigs, rabbits, fish, and ducks. Finally, a dog barks
and chases the sheep back to the shepherd. A rested shepherd is
ready to go, but the tired sheep won't follow. Simple text with
repetitive refrain ("And the sheep follow") ensures immediate
success for an early reader. Bright, simple illustrations could
easily become flannelboard retellings.
Animal Fantasy
235
6*151 Wells, Rosemary. Don't Spill It Again, James* Illustrated by
Rosemary Wells. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-
8037-2119-6. 48p. 3-7.
Having a big brother can sometimes be difficult. But as James
discovers, older siblings can also be loving and caring. In this
collection of three rhyming short stories, Rosemary Wells invites
children to share in the special relationship between James and
his older brother. The book's colorful and endearing drawings
are sure to elicit laughter and will encourage children to offer
their own ideas about growing up with brothers and sisters.
6.152 Wells, Rosemary. First Tomato. The Island Light. Moss Pillows.
Illustrated by Rosemary Wells. Dial Books for Young Readers,
1992. 32p. 3-6 (est).
"Far beyond the moon and stars, / Twenty light-years south of
Mars, / Spins the gentle Bunny Planet / And the Bunny Queen
is Janet." Each little bunny in Rosemary Wells's Voyage to the
Bunny Planet series needs a placexrf escape when troubles stack
up. Felix, for example, gets sick in front of his whole art class and
has to take medicine that tastes like gasoline. Things are differ-
ent on the Bunny Planet, where Queen Janet shows Felix the day
that should have been. Other books show other rabbits having a
bad day. In gentle rhyme, everything is made right on the Bunny
Planet.
6.153 Wells, Rosemary. Fritz and the Mess Fairy. Illustrated by Rose-
mary Wells. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-
0983-8. 29p. 4^8 (est).
Everyone in the skunk family is fed up with Fritz. Wherever he
goes, he leaves a big mess. When his science experiment goes
awry, Fritz is visited by the Mess Fairy, who creates an even
bigger mess in the house and helps Fritz realize the importance
of being neat. Large colorful watercolors illustrate this humor-
ous look at responsibility.
6.154 Wells, Rosemary. Max's Dragon Shirt. Illustrated by Rosemary
Wells. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0945-5.
. 22p. 3-7.
Even though Max loves his old blue pants, his sister Ruby has
the task of shopping with Max for new clothes. But Max only
wants to buy a dragon shirt, and Ruby gets sidetracked trying
on dresses. Frantic when separated, the two rabbits are comfort-
283
236
Fantasy
ingly reunited in another satisfying, simple story of attachment,
responsibility, and an ice-cream-covered dragon shirt.
6.155 Wiesner, David. Tuesday, Illustrated by David Wiesner. Clarion
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-395-55113-7. 32p, 4-10 (est.).
In David Wiesner's Caldecott Medal acceptance speech, he ex-
plained his choice of title: " ... the more I said T-u-e-s-d-a-y/ the
more I like the 'ooze' quality it had. It seemed to go with frogs."
Flying lilly pads that send their riders aloft through the night
sky, terrifying a turtle, causing a midnight snacker to mistrust
his eyes, teasing a dog, and providing a surreal amphibian expe-
rience, make for a wonderful, wordless adventure. Caldecott
Medal, 1992.
6.156 Wild, Margaret. My Dearest Dinosaur. Illustrated by Donna
Rawlins. Orchard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08603-8. 32p. 4-7.
Through a series of letters, a mother dinosaur lovingly tells her
mate of the status and changes in their family while he has been
away seeking a safer place for them to live. In sparse but poign-
ant prose, she describes a Tyrannosaurus attack, hungry snakes,
and the antics of their fearless offspring, The Cheeky One.
Against Cretaceous landscapes, the saurolophus-like beast re-
flects loneliness, pride, hope, and fear for her absent mate.
6.157 Wilhelm, Hans. More Bunny Trouble. Illustrated by Hans Wil-
helm. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1989. ISBN 0-590-41589-1,
32p. 4^.
It's the day before Easter, and Ralph the bunny is busy decorat-
ing eggs and watching his baby sister, Emily. But when Emily
crawls away and becomes lost in tall grass, Ralph once again has
"bunny trouble." With the sun setting and an uninvited red fox
in pursuit, Ralph and the rest of the rabbits join paws and locate
the little lost bunny. This sequel to Bunny Trouble offers children
not only another adventure with Ralph, the soccer-playing rab-
bit, but a lesson in responsibility.
6.158 Wilkon, Piotr. Rosie the Cool Cat. Illustrated by Jozef Wilkon.
Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83707-5. 24p. 4^10 (est.).
Rosie the cat is not like anyone in her family — she has orange fur
and she "did everything differently from her sisters and broth-
ers." So Rosie sets out on her own, becomes a famous rock star,
and eventually has her own kittens, one of which is different
28 4
Animal Fantasy
237
from all the rest Full-color chalk illustrations of hairy, bright-
eyed cats celebrate the importance of individual differences.
6.159 Winch, Madeleine. Come by Chance. Illustrated by Madeleine
Winch. Crown, 1990. ISBN 0-517-57667-8. 31p. 5-8 (est.).
When Bertha discovers a tumble-down, abandoned house, she
sweeps, mends, patches, and scrubs until she has a home. One
evening, stormy weather brings cows, dogs, cats, and birds,
among other animals, to her door seeking shelter. Bertha wel-
comes these new friends who found her '^>y chance." All but a
cat depart when spring arrives, but chances are that next win-
ter. . . . Colorful double-page spreads display an irresistible me-
nagerie.
6.160 Wolkstein, Diane. Little Mouse's Painting. Illustrated by Mary-
jane Begin. Morrow Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-07610-6. 32p.
4 and up.
As Little Mouse paints at her easel, her friends disagree about
the subject of her painting, for each sees himself in her art.
Readers see the painting only at the end of the book, thereby
understanding the ambiguity of art and the possibilities for ex-
pression. Maryjane Begin's layered watercolor and acrylic paint-
ings are richly textured, glowing portraits.
6.161 Wood, Audrey. Little Penguin's Tale. Illustrated by Audrey
Wood. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-246475-1.
32p. 3-6 (est.).
Grand Nanny Penguin tells her seven charges a tale from the
past. The seventh penguin isn't listening and sneaks away into
the snowy, polar world to have some fun, where his antics par-
allel Nanny's story: he dances with the gooney birds, cavorts at
the Walrus Polar Club, and narroWly escapes being eaten by a
whale. Vivid watercolor and colored-pencil illustrations bring
this rollicking tale to life.
6.162 Wood, Audrey. Oh My Baby Bear! Illustrated by Audrey Wood.
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1990. ISBN 0-15-257698-3. 32p. 2-6.
Oversized, pastel-colored illustrations follow Mama and Papa
Bear as they awaken Baby Bear, dress him, feed him, care for him
all day, give him a bath, and then tuck him into bed with a story
and a kiss. When Baby Bear tries *o perform these tasks by
himself, he makes quite a mess, to which his parents respond:
"Oh my Baby Bear! Let me show you how." Eventually he learns
:RLC
285
238
Fantasy
to do these tasks, and then he is called Little Bear. But . . . there
is still one thing he is not too big for.
6.163 Woolf, Virginia. Nurse Lugton's Curtain. Illustrated by Julie
Vivas. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1991. ISBN
0-15-200545-5. 32p. 7 and up.
In a tale of fancy that Virginia Woolf probably wrote in 1924,
Nurse Lugton dozes over her stitches, "and on her knees, cover-
ing the whole of her apron, was a large piece of figured blue
stuff." At her fifth snore, "the blue stuff" turns to blue air, and
the wild animals on the drawing-room curtains come to life.
From elephants to mongooses, an imaginatively painted menag-
erie gambol over the grassy, flower-strewn "curtain" to the lake
near Millamarchmantopolis to drink.
6.164 Yektai, Niki. Hi Bears, Bye Bears. Illustrated by Diane deGroat.
Orchard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08458-2. 32p. 3-6.
Bears of all stripes — short, long, weak, strong — and in all sorts
of costumes, roles, and situations cover the pages of this rhym-
ing text for young children. Eventually, readers learn that all of
the bears are for sale, and that young Sam must pick just one.
After Sam makes his choice, the text asks, "Which bear would
you choose?" It will mean some turning back, some thinking
over, and some talk.
6.165 Yolen, Jane. Piggins and the Royal Wedding. Illustrated by Jane
Dyer Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-261687-X.
32p. 4-8.
It's the day of the royal wedding, and Piggins, the mystery-solv-
ing porcine butler, is helping the Reynard family prepare for the
festivities. When the royal wedding ring disappears before the
ceremony, Piggins solves the mystery and clears young Rexy
Reynard, the ring bearer, of the crime. Following in the tradition
of Piggins and Picnic with Piggins, Jane Yolen and Jane Dyer once
again team up to create an English-style mystery complete with
humor and suspense. Colored pencils and dyes entertainingly
capture the ceremony of nineteenth-century British aristocracy.
Folk Literature
6.166 Alexander, Lloyd. The Fortune-Tellers. Illustrated by Trina
Schart Hyman. Dutton Children's Books, 1992. ISBN 0-525-
44849-7. 32p. 6-10 (est).
ERLC
Folk Literature
239
When a young carpenter seeks to have his fortune change, he
asks a fortune-teller about his future. "Rich you will surely be,"
the old man assures him. "On one condition: that, you earn large
sums of money." Each query for his future is similarly received.
Returning to ask the fortune-teller further questions, the young
carpenter is mistaken for the old man transfigured, and fortunes
foretold come true. Ink, acrylic, and crayon illustrations are set
in Cameroon in West Africa, and filled with the remarkable
colors, patterns, and textures of marketplaces and villages.
6.167 Bernatova, Eva. The Wonder Shoes. Illustrated by Fiona
Moodie. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-38476-2.
24p. 6-8 (est.).
Emma, a new girl in the village, experiences isolation when the
other children will not play with her. After seeing the circus
come to town, Emma receives a new pair of shoes from a dancer
and decides to involve the other children in creating their own
circus. The stylized paintings add detail to the simple story,
providing a medieval backdrop for the timeless themes of lone-
liness and connection.
6.168 Brown, Judith Gwyn. The Mask of the Dancing Princess, Illus-
trated by Judith Gwyn Brown. Atheneum, 1989. ISBN 0-689-
31427-2. 46p. 5^8.
Petulant Princess Rosamond wishes only one thing for her tenth
birthday: a child who looks exactly like herself. The kingdom is
searched in vain for a child as beautiful as the spoiled princess
until, at last, a child of wandering troubadors performs a mas-
querade in the princess's image. Through mistaken identity,
Princess Rosamond is whisked away and held captive by the
actors. Over time, she learns to dance and laugh and love. Full-
page oils and charcoals translate the French court and gypsy
fires.
6.169 Fleischman, Sid. Here Comes McBroom! Three More Tall Tales.
McBroom's Wonderful One-Acre Farm: Three Tall Tales. Illus-
trated by Quentin Blake. Greenwillow Books, 1992. Approx. 70p.
6 and up.
Newbery-winner Sid Fleischman originally wrote these six tall
tales about the adventurous McBroom family twenty-five years
ago. The McBrooms — narrator Josh McBroom, his "dear wife,
Melissa/7 and their eleven (or is it twelve?) children — own a
farm in Iowa, where the soil is so rich that if you drop a nickel,
2S7
240
Fantasy
it grows into a quarter. The individual stories are reprinted as an
anniversary edition in a two-book set with large-type text and
action-filled line drawings.
6.170 Goble, Paul. Beyond the Ridge. Illustrated by Paul Goble. Brad-
bury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-736581-6. 32p. All ages.
In this poignant Plains Indian tale of the spiritual journey of
death, Paul Goble's paintings and graceful language are charac-
teristically sensitive to tribal traditions. As an old woman lies
dying, and the family prepares her body for burial, the woman's
spirit walks in afterlife to a steep slope beyond the ridge— a
place "from which we came and to which we shall return/'
Bright opaque and transparent watercolors are applied almost
to the inked outlines, leaving thin white lines that give brilliance
and clarity.
6.171 Gwynne, Fred. Pondlarken Illustrated by Fred Gwynne. Simon
and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-671-70846-
5. 30p. 4-10.
It is no small wonder that after Pondlarker the frog hears his
favorite story told over and over, his greatest ambition is to be
kissed by a princess and become a handsome prince. When
Pondlarker's lifelong dream almost becomes a reality, he finds
that his expectations about the wonderful life of princes have
been exaggerated. In the process, Pondlarker discovers that he
prefers just being a frog. Fred Gwynne's quirky, double-page
illustrations are drawn in froggy greens and blues.
6.172 Hazen, Barbara Shook. The Knight Who Was Afraid of the
Dark. Illustrated by Tony Ross. Dial Books for Young Readers,
1989. ISBN 0-8037-0668-5. 32p. 4^8.
Sir Fred is a bold and brave knight— except when he must face
the dark. When Melvin the Miffed, the castle bully, discovers this
"crack in Sir Fred's armor," Melvin devises a scheme to expose
Sir Fred and his fears. At Melvin's urgings, Lady Wendylyn
invites Sir Fred to a midnight rendezvous, and so the brave
knight faces a challenge and a decision. In the end, the knight
and his lady reveal their fears and find love. Tony Ross's light
and colorful cartoon-like drawings amusingly illustrate this me-
dieval tale that ends happily ever after.
6.173 Kesey, Ken. The Sea Lion. Illustrated by Neil Waldman. Viking
Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83916-7. 48p. All ages.
Folk Literature
241
On pages the colors of sunsets and sea, dramatic graphics inter-
pret the characters and sea-cliff setting of the text. Eemook
(meaning 'The Broken Gift"), an orphaned Native American
boy with a crooked back and shriveled leg, is adopted by the
ancient rootwoman and grows to be clever and insightful. Al-
though Eemook is repudiated by the chief of the Sea Cliff People
and scorned by all but Shoola, the chief's daughter, he alone
recognizes the evil in a strange visitor, and his bravery and
cleverness break the spell and save his tribe.
6.174 Kroll, Steven. Princess Abigail and the Wonderful Hat Illus-
trated by Patience Brewster. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-
0853-1. 30p. 4r*.
What's a princess to do? Her vain father has promised her hand
to the designer of the most sumptuous hat — and to the prin-
cess's horror, the successful haberdasher is short, ugly, and long
in the tooth. She runs away, only to encounter a large, beneficent
green lizard, who helps her resolve her predicament. In the end,
innocence triumphs, and vanity is left powerless. This original
fairy tale has the whimsy, predictability, and happy ending of
classic tales, and is humorous, too. Detail and expressiveness in
the richly colored illustrations will intrigue readers.
6.175 Lattimore, Deborah Nourse. The Dragon's Robe. Illustrated by
Deborah Nourse Lattimore. Harper Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-
023723-6. 30p. 6-11.
This original tale, an amalgam of Chinese historical material and
motifs, centers on an orphaned weaver girl, Kwan Yin. When
two of the emperor's nobles anger the rain dragon and thus
bring drought and invasion to China, Kwan Yin begins to weave
a robe to place before the shrine of the rain dragon. The two
nobles try to prevent her from completing her task, as does the
great Khan, leader of the invading army. Can she finish the robe
in time to save her country? Like Deborah Ncurse Lattimore's
other picture books (The Prince and the Golden Ax: A Minoan Tale
and Why There Is No Arguing In Heaven: A Mayan Myth), this book
personalizes a distant culture through a young protagonist. It
also imparts that culture's flavor through powerful, full-color
paintings in imitation of classical works.
6.176 Levitin, Sonia. The Man Who Kept His Heart in a Bucket.
Illustrated by Jerry Pinkney. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991.
ISBN 0-8037-1030-5. 28p. 5 and up (est.).
ERIC
289
242
Fantasy
Hurt by his first love, Jack carries his heart in a bucket, deter-
mined never to lose it again. When a lovely maiden steals the
heart Jack must solve a riddle to get it back. But along the way,
he discovers that his "heart is in the right place" after all. Richly
illustrated in watercolors and colored pencil, Jark's village and
its citizens are bustling with life. Cream paper enriches the
warm earth tones of these village scenes.
6.177 Lobel, Anita. The Dwarf Giant Illustrated by Anita Lobel. Holi-
day House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0852-3. 30p. 5-8.
Life in this Japanese kingdom is peaceful until a strange, magical
dwarf — with European features and clothing — appears. Hood-
winking the prince with his tricks, the dwarf reveals his pur-
pose: to destroy the prince and princess and usurp their power
Anita Lobel's full-color illustrations for this original Japanese
story are imitations of Japanese art. Her wise princess makes an
admirable and levelheaded heroine. Whether meant to be anti-
imperialistic or not, the story ends happily — with a hint of more
adventure to come. Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field
of Social Studies.
6.178 Ludwig, Warren. Good Morning, Granny Rose. Illustrated by
Warren Ludwig. G. P. Putnam's Sons/Whitebird Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-399-21950-1. 32p. 3-8 (est).
On a wintry Ozark morning, Granny Rose and her dog Henry
go for a walk to watch the sunrise. When a sudden snowstorm
hits, the two seek shelter in a cave, only to discover that the cave
already has a furry, sleeping occupant The restless bear stirs,
and resourceful Granny applies a folk remedy: she stuffs the
bear's paw right back into his mouth. Broadface Granny in tiny
glasses and faithful Henry the beagle register perfect expres-
sions throughout the story.
6.179 Mahy, Margaret. The Queen's Goat. Illustrated by Emma Chich-
ester Clark. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-
0938-2. 23p. 6-12 (est.).
When an invitation to a pet show arrives, the queen, who has no
pets, decides to take Carmen, the royal gardener's goat. But
Carmen gets loose and races pell-mell through the kingdom,
leaving disaster in her wake and arriving at the pet show deco-
rated with two tambourines, naval flags, a satin nightgown, a
frilly lace petticoat, red long johns, and the royal petunias. Thus
adorned, Carmen is awarded the prize for the best-dressed pet
2SQ
Folk Literature
243
in the parade. Frenetic Carmen provides comic contrast with the
staid park scenes.
6.180 Martin, Jacqueline Briggs. Good Times on Grandfather Moun-
tain. Illustrated by Susan Gaber. Orchard Books, 1992. ISBN
0-531-08577-5. 30p. 6-10 (est.).
Old Washburn is an optimist. In the proportions and language
of a folktale, Old Washburn meets his trials and turns them into
triumphs. When his cow runs away, he just whittles her milk pail
into a drum. When his cabin is destroyed by a storm, he whittles
himself a fancy fiddle. The varied perspectives of illustrator
Susan Gaber offer such surprises as an eyeball-to-eyeball inspec-
tion of the cow, the whittler's view of wood shavings spewing
from deft strokes, and a roof-top, cabin-raising view of moun-
tain dancing.
6.181 Paterson, Katherine. The King's Equal. Illustrated by Vladimir
Vagin. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-022497-5. 64p. 6-10 (est.).
Katherine Paterson says that she wrote The King's Equal, a tale
with a feminist slant, especially for the Russian artist Vladimir
Vagin's crisp and elegant paintings. Arrogant Prince Raphael is
charged by his dying father, the king, to find a princess as
beautiful, intelligent, and wealthy as the prince believes himself
to be. Although the prince's advisers search far and wide, hope
wanes until a beautiful, wise, and good shepherdess proves that
she is not only the future king's equal — but his superior.
6.182 Paterson, Katherine. The Tale of the Mandarin Ducks, Illus-
trated by Leo and Diane Dillon. Lodestar Books, 1990. ISBN
0-525-67283-4. 36p. 5-8.
This collaboration between a respected author and equally re-
nowned artists has produced a colorful and engaging original
Japanese folktale. When a cruel lord captures a beautiful man-
darin duck for its plummage, kindly servants take pity and
release it. The servants are then sentenced to death, but their
kindness is magically repaid. Flat and spacious illustrations in
Japanese ukiyo-e style match the mood in this tale of compassion
and love. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies; ALA Notable Children's Books, 1991; Boston Globe-Horn
Book Picture Book Award, 1991.
6.183 Pattison, Darcy. The River Dragon. Illustrated by Jean and Mou-
Sien Tseng. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-
10427-4. 32p. 4-8 (est).
:RLC
29i
244
Fantasy
Ying-Shao the blacksmith crosses a dragon-haunted river when
he travels to the home of his betrothed. Her father disapproves
of Ying-Shao's trade and tries to stir up tiv dragon's wrath
against the young suitor. This modern tale, inspired by Chinese
folklore, is based on the reassuring notion that the "small can
overcome the huge through cleverness. The watercolor and ink
illustrations, particularly those of the dragon among the mists of
the river gorge, are vibrant and riveting.
6.184 Polacco, Patricia. Boat Ride with Lillian Two Blossom. Illus-
trated by Patricia Polacco. Philomel Books, 1988. ISBN 0-399-
21470-4. 32p. 4-7.
On a quiet summer day, two children are out fishing on the pond
and wondering what makes the wind blow, the rain fall, and the
sim, the moon, and the stars shine. Suddenly, old Lillian Two
Blossom appears, offering to answer the children's questions.
The three paddle off together on a mystical boat ride, exploring
Native American interpretations of nature's wonders. Patricia
Polacco's airy watercolor illustrations and remarkable perspec-
tives create a dream-like effect, pulling the reader into the chil-
dren's experience.
6.185 Rosen, Michael, editor. South and North, East and West: The
Oxfam Book of Children's Stories. Candlewick Press, 1992.
ISBN 1-56402-117-3. 95p. 6-12 (est.).
To honor the fiftieth year of the international charity organiza-
tion Oxfam, which receives the book's proceeds, this collection
of stories was gathered by Oxfam staff from the peoples of
Africa, Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean. To accompany
the twenty-five diverse tales, twenty-two artists, largely from
England, Canada, and New Zealand, were selected to represent
the tales' cultural traditions and flavors. For example, David
Sim's colored woodcuts dramatically interpret a Zimbabwe tale
of a greedy father.
6.186 Sanderson, Ruth. The Enchanted Wood: An Original Fairy Tale.
Illustrated by Ruth Sanderson. Little, Brown, 1991. ISBN 0-316-
77018-3. 32p. 5-8.
This original fairy tale includes many traditional elements, in-
cluding three noble princes who must enter the Enchanted
Wood seeking the Heart of the World in order to save their
father's drought-stricken kingdom. All who enter the Enchanted
Wood are bewitched by images of that which they desire most.
92
11
B.
A. Soutf) and North, East and West: The Oxfam Book of Children's Stories edited by
Michael Rosen (see 6.185). B. A Nice Walk in the Jungle by Nan Bodsworth (see
6.200). C. The Horrendous Hullabaloo by Margaret Mahy; illustrated by Patricia
MacCarthy (see 6.211). D. Silly Sally by Audrey Wood (see 6.223).
293
9
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
B.
A. Beyond the Ridge written and illustrated by Paul Goble (see 6.1 70). B. The Man
Who Kept His Heart in a Bucket by Sonia Levitin; illustrated by Jerry Pinkney (see
6.176). C. The Fortune-Tellers by Lloyd Alexander; illustrated by Trina Schart Hyman
(see 6.166).
C BEST COPY AVAILABLE
294
Folk Literature
245
In the end, however, the good-hearted youngest prince and the
gatekeeper's daughter are kept safe by the selflessness of their
desires. Intricately detailed, romantic paintings accompany the
story, combining realism and a medieval atmosphere in muted
shades.
6.187 Scieszka, Jon. The Frog Prince, Continued* Illustrated by Steve
Johnson. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83421-1. 30p. 5 and
up.
Here's a story where they don't live happily ever after. After the
frog has been soundly kissed by the princess and turned into a
prince physically, his mannerisms remain quite froggish, and he
and the princess are miserable together. So the prince sets off to
find some magic that will transform him back into a frog. Steve
Johnson's illustrations are captivatingly illogical caricatures. Al-
though not all readers will appreciate the mild satire, modern
children are sure to enjoy what eventually becomes, surprisingly
enough, a fable about relationships. ALA Notable Children's Books,
1992; ALA Recommended Books for Reluctant Readers, 2992.
6.188 Segal, Jerry. The Place Where Nobody Stopped. Illustrated by
Dav Pilkey Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1991. ISBN
0-531-08497-3. 160p. 11 and up.
Contented but lonesome in his isolated Russian hamlet, Yosip
the Baker cheerfully grants Mordechai ben Yahbahbai and his
family temporary lodging. The nineteenth century draws to a
close, the family multiplies, and the baker's joy increases as he
protects his household from the czar's soldiers. The family is
Jewish, but this is never mentioned, even though it is central to
the plot. A lively tale of ethnic compatibility, the book is appro-
priate for readers and listeners across a broad age range.
6.189 Sherman, Josepha. Child of Faerie, Child of Earth. Illustrated
by Rick Farley. Walker, 1992. ISBN 0-8027-8112-8. 159p. 12 and
up.
Lovely Graciosa is raised by an unloving father whose jealous
second wife, a sinister enchantress, punishes her stepdaughter
severely. Graciosa is courted and protected by the dashing
Prince Percinet, who is half mortal and half faerie. Graciosa must
decide whether to give up the world she knows, admit to the
magical powers that lie dormant within her, and live forever in
the kingdom of Faerie. Her emotional struggles are with the
issues of possessing "powers" and the potential godlessness of
magic and those who possess it.
295
246
Fantasy
6.190 Singer, Marilyn. The Golden Heart of Winter. Illustrated by
Robert Rayevsky. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-07718-
8. 40p. 6 and up.
To determine his heir, an aging father sends his three sons on a
quest to find something of great value. It is his youngest son,
Half, who recognizes beauty in the world around him and the
value of living things. In an act of courage that revives the
Golden Heart of Winter and prevents Death's triumph in the
world, Half brings his father the object of greatest value — a good
and faithful heart. Ink, watercolor, and acrylic paintings inter-
pret the tale in a surrealistic style.
6.191 Threadgall, Colin. Proud Rooster and the Fox. Illustrated by
Colin Threadgall. Tambourine Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-11124-6.
32p. 4-8 (est.).
A tenacious Fox outwits a proud Rooster through a series of foxy
attempts to invade the chicken coop. Because old Rooster's vi-
sion is keen, Fox's disguises don't work. So wily Fox proposes a
game of hide-and-seek: Fox hides, and Rooster must crow when
he spots Fox. All day long the game goes on until a weary
Rooster with laryngitis can't even make a tiny croak when Fox
steals the hens. But no matter — Fox only wanted fresh eggs for
breakfast. Colin Threadgall's illustrations are perky.
6.192 Watts, Bernadette. Tattercoats. Illustrated by Bernadette Watts.
North-South Books, 1989. ISBN 1-55858-002-6. 25p. 6-10 (est.).
When the children visit Tattercoats, a ragged scarecrow, they
bring companionship as well as scarves and gloves. Yet in the
fall and winter, Tattercoats feels abandoned and lonely because
the children stay inside and do not visit him. With the coming of
spring, he is restored to a place of honor, close by the house,
looking after the garden. Full-page impressionistic illustrations
enhance the themes of loneliness and caring. Notable 1989 CM-
Arm's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
6.193 Wood, Douglas. Old Turtle. Illustrated by Cheng-Khee Chee.
Pfeifer-Hamilton, 1992. ISBN 0-93858648-3. 43p. 3-6 (est.).
Old Turtle has the answer that all the other creatures do not: Old
Turtle knows who and what God is. Filled with lifelike watercol-
ors depicting nature in its most amazing glory, this book offers
a charming tale of spiritual renewal and appreciation for the
world around us. Old Turtle's message of hope is simple yet
298
Humorous Fantasy
247
profound: God is, he says. And the beauty of the Earth is the
proof. IRA Children's Book Award, 2993.
6.194 Yolen, Jane. Dove Isabeau. Illustrated by Dennis Nolan. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-224131-0. 29p. 7-11
(est.).
Haunting blue and gray watercolors touched with red illumi-
nate this original fairy tale, complete with all of the traditional
elements, in which a jealous stepmother turns the gentle and
lovely Dove Isabeau into a fire-breathing dragon. The evil spell
is broken by the king's son, Kemp Owain, with assistance from
Dove's faithful white cat, but then Dove and the cat must undo
a spell cast on the prince. Kemp and Dove marry and happily
rule the kingdom together. Dennis Nolan's dragon is as fierce
and ugly as his Dove is bewitchingly beautiful.
6.195 Yolen, Jane. Sky Dogs. Illustrated by Barry Moser. Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, 1990. ISBN 0-15-275480-6. 32p. 4-8.
From Blackfoot Indian legends, Jane Yolen creates a new story
about a motherless young boy who is a member of the first band
of Native Americans to see horses. Believing that they are large
dogs sent from the sky, from the creator of all things, the people
call the them "Sky Dogs." In first-person narration, He-who-
loves-horses describes the strange beasts and how he overcomes
his fear of them. Dramatic burnt-orange, yellow, and brown
watercolors provide a reverent backdrop. ALA Notable Children's
Books, 1991.
Humorous Fantasy
6.196 Agee, Jon. The Return of Freddy Legrand. Illustrated by Jon
Agee. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1992. ISBN 0-374-36249-1. 32p.
4-7 (est.).
"Curses!" cries pilot Freddy LeGrand, as his airplane, The Golden
Gull, plummets toward Earth. But all is well, and the famous
pilot parachutes to safety, rescued by Sophie and Albert, farmers
with a curiosity about flight. No farmer himself, Freddy returns
to Paris and a hero's welcome. Even so, his second plane, The
Silver Swan, meets disaster in the Alps, but look ... up in the sky
. . . it's Sophie and Albert and the refurbished Golden Gull.
Heavy black outlines give Jon Agee's comical illustrations
weight and panache.
248
Fantasy
6*197 Ball, Duncan. Jeremy's Tail- Illustrated by Donna Rawlins. Or-
chard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08551-1. 32p. 3-6.
Jeremy is determined to pin the tail on the donkey. So with
blindfold in place, he proceeds straight ahead, all the time think-
ing that he is in the living room. However, the reader knows
otherwise. Donna Rawlins's humorous illustrations show
Jeremy marching onto a bus, through the city, eventually around
the world, and through space, as he perseveres in his quest to
pin the tail on the donkey
6.198 Blake, Quentin. Cockatoos. Illustrated by Quentin Blake. Little,
Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-09951-1. 32p. 6-9 (est.).
A man of habit, the slightly stuffy, slightly daft Professor Dupont
greets his ten prized cockatoos in the same way every day:
"Good morning, my fine feathered friends!" Finally, the cocka-
toos, nearly crazed by the sameness of it all, escape through the
conservatory window and hide. The baffled professor searches
all about his house, but fails to find a single cockatoo. Yet, there
among the characteristic scrawl of Quentin Blake's comic art-
istry, the reader can spot the birds in absurd camouflage poses.
6.199 Biundell, Tony Beware of Boys. Illustrated by Tony Blundell.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10925-X. 32p. 4 and up.
Readers will find a model of resourcefulness in this zany tale of
a boy who is captured by a wolf. Convincing the wolf that boys
taste better cooked, the hero dispatches the animal hither and
yon to gather the unlikely ingredients for boy recipes. The drool-
ing villain lugs barn doors, barrels of bricks, and a seashore of
sand — as well as daffodils and a red bicycle. Finally, the ex-
hausted wolf collapses. Poetic justice reigns as the boy peddles
home on a red bicycle bringing flowers for his mother.
6.200 Bodsworth, Nan. A Nice Walk in the Jungle. Illustrated by Nan
Bodsworth. Viking Penguin/Puffin Books, 1992. ISBN 0-14-
054127-6. 32p. 4-8 (est).
When Miss Jellaby's class goes on a nature walk in the "jungle/7
they spot all sorts of wildlife — spiders, crickets, and lizards. But
only Tim spots the pink, purple, and green boa constrictor gob-
bling children at the back of the line. Spread within the tropical
foliage are plenty of real jungle inhabitants for readers to dis-
cover. When the last child is swallowed, a now-alert teacher
punches out the boa constrictor, rescues her children, and takes
everyone to the Burger Bungalow.
293
Humorous Fantasy
249
6.201 Cecil, Laura, compiler. Stuff and Nonsense, Illustrated by
Emma Chichester Clark. GreenwiUow Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-
08898-8. 93p. All ages.
Laura Cecil explains in her introduction that she always loved
the imaginative idea that objects have lives of their own. Here,
she has collected a set of stories and rhymes in which objects
("inanimate stuff") come to life and live out their nonsensical
dramas. Included in the collection is Joseph Jacobs's "Johnny-
cake," a version of the gingerbread boy, Hans Christian An-
dersen's "The Shepherdess and the Chimney Sweep," and "The
Sorcerer's Apprentice." Cecil's own tale of "The Voracious Vac-
uum Cleaner" plays on an early fear of many children.
6.202 Cole, Babette. King Change-a-lot. Illustrated by Babette Cole. G.
P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21670-7. 29p. 4-8.
Things in the land of Spendfortune couldn't be worse, so baby
Prince Change-a-lot decides that he can run the kingdom better
than his mom and dad. With the help of a genie, the prince
becomes king and makes a few changes that save the kingdom
from ruin. In the tradition of her Princess Smartypants and Prince
Cinders, Babette Cole tells a story with a royal touch that is sure
to tickle the funny bone.
6.203 Cole, Babette. Tarzanna! Illustrated by Babette Cole. G. P. Put-
nam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-21837-8. 32p. 4-8.
Tarzanna has yellow straw-like hair, wears skimpy animal skins
and red lipstick, and swings on vines with her friends, the ani-
mals. One day she captures a strange animal who happens to be
a boy studying spiders in the jungle. Gerald teaches Tarzanna
English and takes her home with him. In New York, Tarzanna
misses the jungle, sets the zoo animals free, runs away with
Gerald and the animals, and even saves the president — who
gratefully pays everyone's airfare back to the jungle.
6.204 Coville, Bruce. My Teacher Fried My Brains. Illustrated by John
Pierard. Pocket Books/Minstrel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-671-72710-
9. 136p. 8-12.
In the sequel to My Teacher Is an Alien, seventh-grader Duncan
Dougal discovers that the aliens that caused nerdy Peter
Thompson's disappearance have not yet vacated planet Earth.
Since Duncan has a reputation for being a troublemaker, no one
is likely to believe him. No one, that is, except vulnerable Miss
Karpou, the new home economics teacher. But is Miss Karpou
ERIC
293
250
Fantasy
really who she seems? Bruce Coville mixes realism with just the
right elixir of fantasy, humor, and issues.
6.205 Cummings, Pat. Petey Moroni's Camp Runamok Diary Illus-
trated by Pat Cummings. Bradbury Press, 1992. ISBN 0-02-
725513. 32p. 5-8 (est.).
The kids at Camp Runamok have been losing their snacks — their
cheese twists, their Puff 'n' Stuff pastries, and their Caramel
Crunchies. But the clues are telling: furry hand, little footprints,
good climber. Petey Moroni keeps track in his bright yellow
diary. By "Day 5," readers get a good look at the robber raccoon,
which continues to elude the campers. A final hilarious spread
shows an overstuffed raccoon flat on its back awash in junk food
wrappers and candy bits.
6.206 Dahl, Roald. Esio Trot Illustrated by Quentin Blake. Viking
Penguin, 1990. ISBN 0-670-83451-3. 64p. 6-9 (est.).
Mrs. Silver loves her tortoise, Alfie. Mr. Hoppy, her neighbor,
loves his garden. But Mr. Hoppy also secretly loves Mrs. Silver.
In this happy little tale, Mr. Hoppy devises a "magical" scheme
to convince Mrs. Silver that Alfie is growing swiftly, all in the
hope of winning her affection. Mrs. Silver offers to be his "slave
for life" if murmuring "Esio Trot" (tortoise spelled backward)
will help Alfie grow. Quentin Blake's familiar penned drawings
reflect the whimsical plot.
6.207 Gilman, Phoebe. Grandma and the Pirates, Illustrated by
Phoebe Gilman. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-
43426-8. 32p. 5-8.
Grandma, Melissa, and Oliver the parrot are kidnapped by pi-
rates. At first, life on board a pirate ship isn't so bad. Oliver
learns to sing pirate songs, Grandma cooks lots of noodle pud-
ding, and Melissa helps sail the ship. But the pirates are mean
and nasty, so Grandma, Melissa, and Oliver repeatedly, though
unsuccessfully, try to escape from the ship. Then, when Melissa
realizes their tactics have been wrong all along, the tables are
finally turned.
6.208 Henwood, Simon. The Clock Shop. Illustrated by Simon Hen-
wood. Farrar, Straus and Giroux. ISBN 0-374-31380-6. 24p. 4-7
(est).
The townspeople have all kinds of clocks, from the mundane to
the somewhat fantastic, and the clockmaker is always ready
ERLC
300
Humorous Fantasy
251
with his took to fix the broken ones. Sometimes the clockmaker
worries about what would happen if every clock stopped at the
same time, but he knows that could never happen. Zany, action-
packed illustrations reflect the action-packed life of the town's
most responsible citizen.
6.209 Lent, Blair. Molasses Flood. Illustrated by Blair Lent. Houghton
Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-45314-3. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Charley Owen Muldoon lives near a molasses tank by the Bos-
ton waterfront at the turn of the twentieth century. On one warm
January day, the molasses tank expands and explodes, flooding
Boston with a "heavy, sticky, slow-moving sea." Exaggerating
from an actual historical event, the author has created a Boston
of his mother's time, as well as an explanation for its configura-
tion. Charley's house, along with trolleys, carts, and ferries,
floats on molasses past identifiable landmarks.
6.210 Mahy, Margaret. The Blood-and-Thunder Adventure on Hurri-
cane Peak. Illustrated by Wendy Smith. Margaret K. McElderry
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-689-50488-8. 132p. 8-12 (est.).
In a zany tale of magic, mayhem, and mistaken identities, a
wicked industrialist learns that crime does not pay, and a scien-
tist and magician learn to respect each other's crafts. Besides all
that, young Huxley and Zaza Hammond learn that Hurricane
Peak School is a perfect place for writing and illustrating their
blood-and-thunder stories — especially since hurricanes are a
daily occurrence, the head prefect is a talking cat, and the head
mistress has been missing for forty years.
6.211 Mahy, Margaret. The Horrendous Hullabaloo. Illustrated by
Patricia MacCarthy. Viking Penguin/Vanessa Hamilton Books,
1992. ISBN 0-670-84547-7. 26p. 4-8 (est.).
Peregrine the Pirate is certain that his aunt and his parrot would
not enjoy the horrendous hullabaloos at the pirate parties that
he attends, so he leaves the two of them at home to cook and tidy
up while he enjoys his pirate's life. But one day his auntie and
parrot have had enough of abandonment; they join together to
plan a hullabaloo of their own, one with plenty of rumplebump-
kins and alliterative phrases. Patricia MacCarthy's trademark
white-edged paintings contrast with the hullabaloo colors.
6.212 Mahy, Margaret. The Pumpkin Man and the Crafty Creeper.
Illustrated by Helen Craig. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books,
1991. ISBN 0-688-10348-0. 32p. 5-8.
3'Ji
252
Fantasy
When a talking plant begs Mr. Parkin to save it from the cruel
life that it leads in Lily Rose Willowherb's garden, he feels com-
pelled to respond to its plight. Yet when the plant shows its true
colors and becomes a conniving, demanding creeper, it is poor
Mr. Parkin who needs rescuing. The plant gains increasing
prominence illustration by illustration until Mr. Parkin's even-
tual rescue.
6.213 Marshall, James. The Cut-Ups Crack Up. Illustrated by James
Marshall. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-84486-1. 32p. 3-8
(est).
Joe and Spuds, the cut-ups of all time, exaggerate just a bit too
much to friends Charles Andrew Frothingham and Mary
Frances Hooley. This time the boys claim that they have their
own car. To prove it, they intend to video themselves "just sit-
ting" in Principal Lamar J. Spurgle's fancy red sports car. But
once in the car, Joe and Spuds are off for a wacky ride. As in all
their adventures, the cut-ups are sassy and sly, but also good-hu-
mored, constantly surprised, and funny.
6.214 Patron, Susan. Burgoo Stew. Illustrated by Mike Shenon. Or-
chard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08516-3.
32p. S-6.
In this French folktale, five quarrelsome, rowdy boys set out to
find Old Billy Que to see if he has some food that they can steal.
The answer is burgoo stew— a version of the old favorite, "Stone
Soup," with its "secret ingredient." The boys help out with po-
tatoes, carrots, onions, and stew fixings as Old Billy requests.
Illustrations are humorous watercolor scenes of good stew and
a wise cook curing the crankies and the hungries. (At least "they
were never, ever quite so bad or quite so hungry again.")
6.215 Provensen, Alice. Punch in New York. Illustrated by Alice
Provensen. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-82790-8. 32p. 3-8.
When the bag containing Punch, the brawling star of the Punch
and Judy puppet show, is stolen from Professore Tucci-Piccini at
the smoggy New York City airport, the city itself has much to
fear. Punch rips off a hot dog vendor, foils a band of muggers,
beats a nasty man, and becomes chauffeur for the richest man in
the world before reuniting with his friends. While Punch's noto-
rious escapades could benefit from an adult's explanation, Alice
Provensen's comical oil paintings are rich with the characteristic
energy of New York City. New York Times Best-Illustrated Chil-
dren's Books, 1991.
3<j2
Humorous Fantasy
253
6.216 Pulver, Robin. Nobody's Mother Is in Second Grade. Illustrated
by G. Brian Karas. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN
0-8037-1211-1. 32p. 4^8 (est.).
Of course mothers don't go to second grade. "That would be
ridiculous/' Cassandra says. But what if Mother loved second
grade and desperately wishes she could go back? The only solu-
tion is for Mother to visit second grade disguised as a plant (so
as not to be ridiculous). "There is something peculiar about that
plant/' the children whisper — a plant that plays on the play-
ground, eats lunch, and gives hugs. The cartoon-like plant mom
is truly (and purposefully) ridiculous.
6.217 Remkiewicz, Frank. The Last Time I Saw Harris. Illustrated by
Frank Remkiewicz. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN
0-688-10292-1. 32p. 5 and up.
Little rich boy Edmund and his best friend, a talking parrot
named Harris, like to play with color flash cards. When Harris
gets blown out the window in a windstorm, Edmund and Hig-
gins, the chauffeur, set out to find him. Traveling in a long
limousine, they show color flash cards to many different birds
until they find the one that knows the entire color wheel. Bor-
dered watercolor line drawings supplement the text with their
humorous portrayal of the trappings of wealth.
6.218 Sabraw, John. I Wouldn't Be Scared. Illustrated by John Sabraw.
Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08418-
3. 32p. 4^6.
John Sabraw's first book humorously explores the theme of con-
fronting one's fears. A gallant boy hunts an imaginary beast
through his neighborhood, imagining how he would defeat his
foe at every turn. The hero is distinctively drawn, with large
round eyes, pencil-thin arms, and coonskin cap. Sabraw's car-
toon-like illustrations convey whimsy and humor. Elementary
students could create their own drawings of monsters to defeat.
6.219 Smith, Lane. Glasses (Who Needs 'em?). Illustrated by Lane
Smith. Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-84160-9. 30p. 5-8 (est.).
When the young narrator finds out from his optometrist that he
needs glasses, the boy indignantly refuses. So, the slightly daffy
doctor points out that "lots of folks wear glasses and love 'em."
Beginning with the boy's mom and dad and moving on to pota-
toes, planets, and "short, fuzzy bunnies," the mad doctor be-
comes more and more agitated as he enumerates a bizarre list of
3 J 3
254
Fantasy
eyeglass wearers. Lane Smith's characteristically surreal illustra-
tions provide an added dimension of wackiness and fun. ALA
Notable Children's Books, 1992.
6.220 Stevenson, James. National Worm Day. Illustrated by James
Stevenson. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08772-8. 40p. 5
and up.
A worm, snail, rhinoceros, and mole are the cast of characters in
this collection of three witty vignettes. Together they celebrate
National Worm Day, friendship, and the fact that being different
is what makes each one special. The pithy text is primarily
dialogue, supported by James Stevenson's watercolor and black-
pen illustrations of the four friends in action.
6.221 Stevenson, James. Rolling Rose. Illustrated by James Stevenson.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10675-7. 24p. 3 and up.
One day baby Rose rolls unnoticed out of the kitchen door in her
baby stroller. She is soon joined by eighty-four other babies on
wheels for a city tour and a cioss-country jaunt. James Steven-
son's light and cheery watercolors fit the mood of the story
perfectly, right down to the cows' blank faces as the baby parade
rolls past. This rollicking peripatetic adventure introduces a
baby who knows how to get real mileage out of her baby stroller.
6.222 Willis, Val. The Surprise in the Wardrobe. Illustrated by John
Shelley. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-37309-4.
30p. 5-8 (est.).
In the second tale of Bobby Bell's unusual surprises, Bobby
amazes his classmates with a witch who lives in his wardrobe.
The children have a riotous time with a witch who can do loop-
the-loops on her broom and turn cabbage and stew into french
fries and hot dogs. But mean-spirited Jenny Wood gets fat green
frogs on her plate, and defiant Peter Drew sets off a spell of bats
and beetles. Detailed borders surround action-packed scenes
and bear close inspection.
6.223 Wood, Audrey. Silly Sally. Illustrated by Audrey Wood. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-274428-2. 32p. 3-7.
When red-haired Silly Sally goes to town, she walks "back-
wards, upside down." Along the way, she meets a pig, a loon,
and a sheep, with whom she dances, plays leapfrog, and finally
falls asleep. It's forward-walking, right-side-up Neddy Butter-
cup that tickles Sally and thereby gets the gang up and active
Imagination and Dreams
again. This rhyming tale is illustrated in big, bright pastel colors
and contains lively characters with rosy cheeks and spirited
expressions.
6.224 Yorinks, Arthur. Oh, Brother. Illustrated by Richard Egielski.
Farrar, Straus and Giroux/Michael di Capua Books, 1989. ISBN
0-374-35599-1. 32p. 6-9.
In a tongue-in-cheek Horatio Alger story, two naughty brothers
are shipwrecked, washed up in New York, and "not spared the
harshness of life/' Through all their depression-era travails, they
never stop arguing. But fate turns when Nathan, the old tailor,
makes them his sons and apprentices. At Nathan's death, the
two boys disguise themselves as old men and continue to run
the tailor shop. That, of course, is when they meet Mrs. Guggen-
heim, who takes them to the Queen
6.225 Yorinks, Arthur. Ugh. Illustrated by Richard Egielski. Farrar,
Straus and Giroux/Michael di Capua Books, 1990. ISBN 0-374-
38028-7. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
In a Cirderella-like spoof, a cave boy, Ugh, has a miserable life.
His brothers and sisters command him: "Rub feet!" "Get grub!"
"Mop floor!" When cave scientist Oy invents the wheel, the cave
world is not impressed ("Wheel stink!" announces the hunter,
Eh). But Ugh uses the wheel to make a bicycle. Amazed, the cave
world looks high and low for the one who can ride this creation:
"Whoever make this, he be king!" And so, with action aplenty,
Ugh, "be big-shot boy."
Imagination and Dreams
6.226 Alcorn, Johnny. Rembrandt's Beret; or, The Painter's Crown.
Illustrated by Stephen Alcorn. Tambourine Books, 1991. ISBN
0-688-10207-7. 32p. 6 and up.
The Alcorn brothers, author and illustrator, tell young readers to
"seek out paintings by the Old Masters They will speak to
you." The painter grandfather who narrates this tale is recount-
ing a time in his youth when he was locked in the Uffizi Gallery
of Florence, Italy. The paintings not only spoke to him but even
contested the right to paint his portrait. Winner over Rubens,
Caravaggio, Michelangelo, and Titian was Rembrandt, who
loaned his beret and brushes to the painter-to-be. Thickly ap-
plied oils capture the Old Masters7 styles.
256
Fantasy
6.227 Allison, Diane Worfolk. This Is the Key to the Kingdom, Illus-
trated by Diane Worfolk Allison. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-
03432-0. 30p. 4-S (est.).
Diane Worfolk Allison's full-page, subtle watercolors and famil-
iar children's chant lead readers through the kingdom to the city,
to the town, to the street, to the lane The reader follows a
young African American child leaving a bleak urban environ-
ment behind as she travels through a splendid fantasy kingdom
filled with beauty and love. But there's more at work here than
imagination. In the end, she must retrace her travels. Still, other
lives are enriched by her contact with imagined kingdoms, prov-
ing love is the real key.
6.228 Anderson, Joan. Harry's Helicopter. Photographs by George
Ancona. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09187-3. 32p. 5
and up.
Harry Hopkins likes helicopters better than anything else. On
Harry's birthday, his father makes him a bright red cardboard
helicopter big enough for Harry to climb into. Steering with a
plumber's friend, Harry pretends to fly his chopper, dreaming
of a time when he and his helicopter will really fly. And then it
happens. With George Ancona's sharp color photographs,
young readers can fly with Harry over houses and steeples
toward Central Park, skyscrapers, and even the Statue of Liberty.
6.229 Baillie, Allan. Drac and the Gremlin. Illustrated by Jane Tanner.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-8037-0628-6. 32p.
Drac, a sun-kissed Warrior Queen of lirnol Two, must capture
the Gremlin of the Groaning Grotto (sometimes known as her
brother). There are really two stories here — one in text, the other
in pictures. The children's imaginations elevate the text to high
fantasy, much like Calvin in his adventures with Hobbes, while
the realistic paintings are of two children playing with their pets.
Because the planet is saved, the White Wizard (sometimes called
Dad), rewards them with Twin Crimson Cones (sometimes
called ice cream).
6.230 Bate, Lucy. How Georgina Drove the Car Very Carefully from
Boston to New York. Illustrated by Tamar Taylor. Crown, 1989.
ISBN 0-517-57142-0. 32p. 3-6.
One day while bouncing on her mother's knee, little Georgina
announces, "I drive the car." So begins her imaginary family trip
ERLC ° 0
Imagination and Dreams
257
to visit grandparents in New York. There are sights to be seen
along the way, but not for Georgina; she is too occupied with
driving very carefully; although she does have time for a real
kid-style meal en route. Through simple text and stylized draw-
ings, being responsible is cast in a clearly positive light.
6.231 Bax, Martin. Edmond Went Far Away. Illustrated by Michael
Foreman. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-22105-7.
48p. 4-8.
Edmond lives on a farm where he has many animal friends.
After he tells each of his friends that he is going away, he follows
the path over the hill to "far away/' imagining that he is accom-
panied by them. When Edmond returns home the next morning,
all of his friends are happy to see him, including the sow and her
brand new piglets. Rich, descriptive language and Michael Fore-
man's watercolors evoke a warm, secure feeling. This story is a
good example of the "home-adventure-home" pattern in litera-
ture.
6.232 Bios, Joan W. Lottie's Circus. Illustrated by Irene Trivas. Morrow
Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-06747-6. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
For something special to happen, Lottie explains to her cat and
her toys, "you make-believe/' Storybooks help with Lottie's
imagining. As readers turn the pages, Lottie's imagination cre-
ates the extravaganza of a circus from preparation to perform-
ance. Irene Trivas's paintings show an energetic child, her cat
Famous, and her toys in their circus roles — as ringmaster, per-
formers, and audience. The imaginative adventure is a big-top
success. Later, snug on her father's lap for story time, Lottie's
adventure tucks itself in.
6.233 Burningham, John. Hey! Get Off Our Train. Illustrated by John
Burningham. Crown, 1989. ISBN 0-517-57643-0. 32p. 2-6 (est.).
When a pajama-clad boy and a pajama-case dog are scooted to
bed, they climb aboard a toy train and begin a dream journey
through the habitats of endangered species. One by one, an
elephant, seal, whooping crane, tiger, and polar bear board the
train. Each is met with the shout: "Hey! Get off our train." Each
in turn explains its plight and, in cumulative fashion, warns that
"soon there will be none of us left." Sparse text and wispy line
drawings of characters are juxtaposed against full-page impres-
sions of lemon skies, frothy snows, and drenching rains.
er|c 3''7
258
Fantasy
6.234 Carlstrom, Nancy White. Who Gets the Sun out of Bed? Illus-
trated by David McPhail. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-12862-
7. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
"IN THE COLD DARK WINTER, / who gets the sun out of
bed?" Come the whispered replies: "Not the spruce tree "
"Not the stars " As the turning Earth reveals the glowing
four-poster bed of the rising sun, part of the answer is revealed:
Moon! "Get the sun out of bed, Moon!" Bunny Midnight has a
role to play as well, as does the boy, Nicholas. Moon nudges
Midnight, who kisses the boy, who greets the sun. Peeking from
beneath his covers, Sim opens one eye.
6.235 Cassedy, Sylvia. Lucie Babbidge's House. Thomas Y. Crowell,
1989. ISBN 0-690-04798-3. 243p. 9-12.
Lucie's unhappy life at the orphanage is changed when she finds
a dollhouse with a family of dolls. Lucie, called Goosey-Loosey
by her classmates, retreats to the perfect life of her new make-be-
lieve family, and this secret life becomes her reality.
6.236 Desaix, Frank. Hilary and the Lions. Illustrated by Debbi Dur-
land Desaix. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-33237-
1. 30p. 4^8 (est).
After losing her parents in the hubbub of New York City, Hilary
falls asleep against one of the two great stone lions in front of the
library steps. When the lions come alive for their one magic
night a year, Hilary rides them through the streets of New York.
Debbi Durland Desaix's use of muted browns, grays, and greens
evokes a dream-like quality appropriate for the night's adven-
ture and making new friends.
6.237 Dorros, Arthur. Abuela. Illustrated by Elisa Kleven. Dutton
Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44750-4. 40p. 4-8.
Abuela is the ideal melding of story and illustration. In Arthur
Dorros's joyful, loving story, a young girl fantasizes flying over
New York City with her beloved grandmother. The love between
granddaughter and grandmother shines through the lyrical lan-
guage and rich illustrations. Dorros's natural incorporation of
Spanish words into the story and the folk-art style of Elisa
Klevin's mixed-media illustrations give the book a unique mul-
ticultural flavor. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1992.
6.238 Farber, Norma. Return of the Shadows. Illustrated by Andrea
Baruffi. HarperCollins /Laura Geringer Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-
020519-9. 38p. 4-8.
Imagination and Dreams
259
When Mimi falls asleep, her shadow slips out, leading other
shadows to break free and roam in unlikely places. A camel's
shadow rests under an iceberg, and a rhino's shadow leans on
the Washington Monument. A skyscraper's shadow creeps into
the jungle, and a bicycle's shadow rides on clouds beside a
plane. At twilight, the shadows become bewildered and disori-
ented, "no longer sure of what they were." In darkness, shadows
long for home and the shape that they know best. At sunrise,
each rushes to find the place it had been born. The pictures are
silent and surreal-^like shadows.
6*239 Gilden, Mel. Harry Newberry and the Raiders of the Red
Drink, Henry Holt, 1989. ISBN 0-8050-0698-2. 151p. 9-13 (est.).
Frequently comic-book characters come alive in a child's imagi-
nation. But what happens when the whole family (except un-
imaginative Dad) and the entire town start seeing the comic-
book heroes invading their community? Harry Newberry has
reason to believe that his own mother may be super hero Tuatara
herself. A visit to Aunt Agnes provides an exciting adventure
which helps unravel the mysterious goings-on. Fact is difficult
to distinguish from fantasy throughout this fun and farfetched
mystery.
6.240 Heine, Helme (translated by Ralph Manheim). The Marvelous
Journey through the Night Illustrated by Helme Heine. Farrar,
Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-38478-9. 26p. 5-10.
German author /illustrator Helme Heine has created an evoca-
tive and whimsical explanation for dreaming — a "marvelous
journey" that one undertakes without hindrance from passport,
money, or luggage. The text is simple and poetic, describing
irresistible Sleep who, with his moon lantern, makes your eye-
lids droop and leads you to his sister, Dream, who can guide you
to the land of Heart's Desire. Full-color surrealistic paintings are
dream-touched, but comforting.
6*241 James, Betsy. The Dream Stair. Illustrated by Richard Jesse Wat-
son. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-022788-5. 32p. 5-7 (est.).
At bedtime, a young Hispanic child receives a candle from her
grandmother to keep her safe. As she dreams, Granny's candle
leads her up the dream stairs to play in an attic room, then down
the stairs to the cellar room for more play, then to bed. In the
morning, Granny is there to hear about her dreams. Bold color
splotches of a aream world where inanimate things have life
contrast with the warm-toned realism of Granny's home.
o 3-ja
ERIC
260
Fantasy
6.242 Jones, Diana Wynne. Yes, Dear. Illustrated by Graham Philpot.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11195-5. 28p. 4 and up.
Autumn leaves are falling, and Kay catches a magic one. Unfor-
tunately, no one in her family has time to listen to stories about
a golden leaf's wonderful talents. Then Kay approaches Grand-
mother, who understands because she, too, had a magic leaf as
a child. The watercolored pen-and-ink drawings add humorous
details and interesting perspectives.
6.243 Leverich, Kathleen. Hilary and the Troublemakers. Illustrated
by Walter Lorraine. Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10857-
1. 138p. 6-9 (est).
For Hilary, troublemakers are just part of life. A huge, home-
work-eating owl waylays her on the way to school. Her piggy
bank absolutely refuses to yield her savings when she truly
intends to buy her family gifts. Even innocent-looking snow
people, built when she was supposed to be baby-sitting indoors,
become blackmailing terrorists at her bedroom window, de-
manding her crayons and her baby cousin. With straight-faced
humor, Kathleen Leverich sketches Hilary's imaginative crea-
tures so that they feel real to readers, too.
6.244 Lindbergh, Reeve. Benjamin's Barn. Illustrated by Susan Jeffers.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-0614-6. 24p.
3-8.
The talented author and illustrator of Midnight Farm team up
again to produce in gentle verse and intricately detailed paint-
ings the warmth and imaginative possibilities that an ordinary
barn has for a small boy. For Benjamin's barn is so big, tall, wide,
and soft that it can shelter such fantasies as elephants, pteradac-
tyls, a pirate ship, an entire brass band, or a royal family. But
since the barn is already full of its own standard residents, a
satisfied Benjamin decides that he " won't let the rest in after all/7
6.245 Martin, Rafe. Will's Mammoth. Illustrated by Stephen Gammell.
G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21627-8. 29p. 4-8 (est.).
Even though no one else believes that mammoths exist, a very
special one is still alive and well in Will's imagination. Stephen
Gammeirs beautiful illustrations depict a day in which Will has
a wordless romp in the snow with his very own mammoth and
several other beasts before his mother calls him to dinner. Chil-
dren with an interest in prehistoric creatures will want this on
3i0
Imagination and Dreams
261
their reading lists. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1989; School Li-
brary Journal Best Books, 1989; Horn Book Fanfare, 1990.
6.246 McLerran, Alice. Roxaboxen, Illustrated by Barbara Cooney.
Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-07593-3. 30p.
5-^8.
To those who have not been to Roxaboxen, it looks like any hill
in the desert — nothing but sand, cactus, rocks, and old discarded
boxes. But to Marian and her friends, Roxaboxen is a special
place with buried treasure, ice cream parlors, and houses of
jewels. Barbara Cooney's pastels, shimmering with desert- hues,
take us to a multidimensional world of fantasy and play.
6-247 McPhail, David. The Party, Illustrated by David McPhail. Little,
Brown/Joy Street Books, 1990. ISBN 0-316-56330-7. 32p. 4-8.
Beneath his bed light, a young boy and his stuffed animals plan
a midnight party. When Dad comes to read the bedtime story, he
falls sound asleep on the bed. But the party must go on. Stuffed
friends become live friends, floating on balloons, riding the elec-
tric train, dancing, and then heading to the kitchen for snacks.
Even sleeping Dad rides the elephant to the kitchen. David
McPhail's pajama-clad host and his lovable menagerie are qui-
etly raucous.
6.248 Minarik, Else Holmelund. The Little Girl and the Dragon. Illus-
trated by Martine Gourbault. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN
0-688-09914-9. 24p. 3-7 (est.).
Once a little girl had a book about a dragon, and all was well.
Then one day, the dragon gets out of the book, swallows the
girl's toys, and refuses to give them back. It takes the girl's quick
wits and intrepid spirit to entrap the dragon and regain what
belongs to her. Outsized by the sprawling lavender-green mon-
ster, the child is more than a match for the creature's intellect.
The dragon book is instantly recognizable as the one the reader
holds, making the possibility of an escaping dragon ongoing.
6.249 Pfanner, Louise. Louise Builds a House. Illustrated by Louise
Pfanner. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08396-9. 32p. 3-6.
When Louise sets out to build her dream home, she imagines
every conceivable detail — a flat roof for kite flying, big windows
for reading, a tower for observing the stars, and even a moat for
her boat. After seeing Louise's wonderful house, depicted with
311
262
Fantasy
elemental line drawings and watercolor washes, children may
want to create their own imaginary dream houses.
6.250 Polacco, Patricia. Appelemando's Dreams. Illustrated by Patri-
cia Polacco. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21800-9. 30p. 4-S.
Appelemando is a quiet, slow boy who lives in a very drab
village but who dreams wondrously beautiful dreams for his
friends. One day his dreams escape, exuding fantastic images
into the lackluster village. At first, the elders don't believe in the
existence or worth of Appelemando's special gift, but after a
crisis, even the suspicious elders cannot deny the value of this
gift. Patricia Polacco's detailed drawings evoke the sentiments
of an ethnic village and the magic of believing.
6.251 Pringle, Laurence. Jesse Builds a Road. Illustrated by Leslie
Holt Morrill. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-775311-5. 30p. 3-6.
Acclaimed nonfiction author Laurence Pringle tries his hand at
writing for younger children in this, his first picture book. While
Jesse plays with his dog and his miniature construction machin-
ery, his toys spring to life. A brief but factual description of the
digging, scraping, and paving required to build a road evolves
in ttie setting of Jesse's playtime. Watercolor illustrations are
painted from perspectives which lend energy to the action.
6.252 Reed, Lynn Rowe. Rattlesnake Stew. Illustrated by Lynn Rowe
Reed. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-36190-8. 32p.
3-7 (est.).
A nighttime wind whirls and swirls Billy out of his bed; roaring
and soaring, it transports him into a world of cowboys, cacti,
and prairie dogs. Bright oil pastels depict the dream sequences
in a closeup, surrealistic style, while lyrical text tells of Billy's
adventures. As the winds return Billy to his own bed, his mother
is calling him in to taste the rattlesnake stew that she has made
for him.
6.253 Riddell, Chris. The Trouble with Elephants. Illustrated by Chris
Riddell. Harper and Row/Harper Trophy Books, 1990. ISBN
0-397-32273-9. 22p. 3-7.
According to one little girl, the trouble with elephants is that
they spill bathwater, leave a pink elephant ring around the tub,
and slide down the bannister to breakfast. But as she as well as
others who share this book soon discover, the real trouble with
elephants is that "you can't help but love them/' Humorous
312
Imagination and Dreams
263
full-page illustrations that depict pachyderms in a variety of
„ " troublesome" predicaments bring to life a little girl's imagina-
tion and adoration for a much-loved stuffed animal.
6.254 Ringgold, Faith. Tar Beach. Illustrated by Faith Ringgold.
Crown, 1991. ISBN 0-517-58031-4. 32p. 4 and up (est).
"Sleeping on Tar Beach was magical. Lying on the roof in the
night, with stars and skyscraper buildings all around me, made
me feel rich, like I owned all that I could see." As Cassie sleeps
on the rooftop of her Harlem apartment building, she magically
flies over the city, claiming ownership of a beautiful bridge and
buildings as a means to fulfill her dreams. Text appears beneath
each double-page acrylic folk-art painting, as does a reproduced
segment of Faith Ringgold's story quilt, Tar Beach, one of five
autobiographical works in the Women on the Bridge series
hanging in New York City's Guggenheim Museum. Caldecott
Honor Book, 1992; Coretta Scott King Award (Illustration), 1992.
6.255 Rodgers, Frank. Doodle Dog. Illustrated by Frank Rodgers.
Dutton Children's Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-44585-4. 32p. 3-7.
Little Sam wishes hard for a pet, a little dog that can fetch and
catch and sleep on his bed. So Sam and his mother draw the dog
that he wants — a kind of doodle picture that Sam names Doodle.
Frank Rodgers's charming story captures a child who wants
something so badly that the dream comes alive. Colorful,
friendly illustrations give Sam, Mother, and Doodle appeal.
6.256 Rosenberg, Liz. Adelaide and the Night Train. Illustrated by
Lisa Desimini. Harper and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-06-025103-4. 30p. 3-7 (est.).
Late one night, Adelaide, lying wide awake, boards the whis-
tling train that passes by her house. She watches nighttime hap-
penings from its window — a waitress serving hamburgers at an
all-night diner, an owl gliding noiselessly in search of food, and
babies dreaming in their cribs. After this extraordinary trip,
Adelaide always listens for the night train to lull her to sleep at
bedtime. Poetic, rhythmic prose and surrealistic acrylic paint-
ings supply a dreamy mystery to the night train's ride.
6.257 Rovetch, Lissa. Trigwater Did It. Illustrated by Lissa Rovetch.
Morrow Junior Books /Seashore Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08058-
8. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
ERiC
313
264
Fantasy
Trouble seems to follow Arnie, and everyone assumes that he is
the trouble-maker. No one believes that his green friend Trigwa-
ter is causing the difficulties; after all, no one else can even see
Trigwater. Finally, when the principal gives Arnie an ultimatum,
he knows that he must teach Trigwater some manners. The out-
come of Arnie's campaign delights everyone. Stylized watercol-
ors contribute to the mischievous mood.
6.258 Van Laan, Nancy. A Mouse in My House. Illustrated by Mar-
jorie Priceman. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-
679-90043. 32p. 3-7 (est).
" A mouse is in my house— and it acts like me!" Just like a mouse,
a small boy invades the cookie jar. ("It climbs and it wriggles as
it nibbles and it giggles.") In rhyming, rhythmic text ideal for
reading aloud, the boy becomes other creatures as well: he's a
pouncing cat, a toy-scattering dog, and a slippery, bathtime fish.
Whatever persona is adopted, the actions are guaranteed to be
rambunctious. Splashes of watercolor spill over the ink line
drawings, giving a hasty energy to the animal-like antics.
6.259 Weir, Alison. Peter, Good Night. Illustrated by Deborah Kogan
Ray. E. P. Dutton, 1989. ISBN 0-525-44464-5. 24p. 2-6.
Peter snuggles in bed with his stuffed animals and looks out of
the window. One by one, the stars, the moon, the clouds, the
treetops, the night bird, the fog, the breeze, and the cat wish him
good night. In this warm and gentle book, with colored pencil
illustrations in muted shades, the repetitive, lyrical prose will
appeal for bedtime reading.
6.260 Wiesner, David. Hurricane. Illustrated by David Wiesner. Clar-
ion Books, 1990. ISBN 0-395-54382-7. 32p. 4-8.
Delightful, detailed, and realistic watercolor paintings bring
preparations for a hurricane to life. After the storm passes, two
brothers' imaginations are kindled by a fallen tree. Their days
are filled with forays into its branches, which become imaginary
jungles, oceans, and even outer space: "The tree was a private
place, big enough for secret dreams, small enough for shared
adventure." The arrival of men with a chainsaw is a disaster, but
the boys eye the remaining tree in the yard with childlike hope.
6.261 Willard, Nancy. The High Rise Glorious Skittle Skat Roarious
Sky Pie Angel Food Cake. Illustrated by Richard Jesse Watson.
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1990. ISBN 0-15-234332-6. 64p. 6 and
up.
ERiC
314
Imagination and Dreams
265
To bake her mother the best birthday cake of all, a young girl .
must first find her great-grandmother's secret-ingredient recipe
for a High Rise Glorious Skittle Skat Roarious Sky Pie Angel
Food Cake. Luckily, Great-Grandmother left some clues in her
ledger books. Well-timed heavenly intervention also helps to
ensure that the cake is baked with both "evol" and a golden
thimble. The heavenly "hosts'' are a festival of color in their
robes, feathers, ribbons, and flowers.
6.262 Wood, Don, and Audrey Wood. Piggies. Illustrated by Don
Wood. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991. ISBN 0-15-256341-5.
32p. 3-6 (est.).
The narrator, whose chubby, childlike hands are in each double-
page illustration of this wonder-filled book, has ten little imagi-
nary piggies — fat piggies sit on the thumbs, smart piggies on
the index fingers, long piggies stretch out on the middle fingers,
silly piggies clown on the ring fingers, and wee piggies play on
the little fingers. Together, they get hot, cold, clean, and dirty —
and misbehave at bedtime. Pink- and-golden-toned oil paint-
ings depict the piggies' activities with closeup, whimsical
detail.
6.263 Yolen, Jane, and Martin H. Greenberg, editors. Things That Go
Bump in the Night: A Collection or Original Stories. Harper
and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-026803-4. 280p. 10 and up.
This collection of eighteen eerie, fantastic stories by such popu-
lar writers as William Sleator, Dianna Wynne Jones, Anne
Crompton, and lone Yolen herself offers encounters with ghosts,
wizards, living chairs, and talking rabbits. Readers learn that
appearances can be deceiving, and that the devils within their
own psyches can be the most terrifying of all.
6.264 Zolotow, Charlotte. The Seashore Book. Illustrated by Wendell
Minor. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-020214-9. 32p. 4-9.
Close your eyes and imagine as a mother vividly paints with
words the seashore that her young son has never seen. Then
open your eyes and expand that vision with watercolored
seascapes that invite you to step right onto the sand with birds
and sea creatures among the lapping waves. The day ends
with the satifying feeling that your imagination can take you
anywhere.
315
266
Fantasy
Other Worlds
6.265 Le Guin, Ursula K. Tehanu: The Last Book of Earthsea.
Atheneum/Jean Karl Books, 1990. ISBN 0-689-31595-3. 226p. 11
and up (est).
In the fourth book of the Earthsea fantasy series, Ged has lost his
powers as Archmage. Goha, now a middle-aged widow, has
taken under wing Therm, a small, severely abused little girl.
During the course of the novel, these three characters encounter
wicked wizards, good kings, fiery dragons, and powerful magic.
Due to several sensitive issues that are presented (rape, child
abuse, differences between the sexes, feminism), the novel is
recommended for advanced, mature readers.
6.266 Pinkwater, Daniel. Guys from Space, Illustrated by Daniel Pink-
water. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-774672-0. 29p. 5-8.
If a spaceship landed in your yard and if the friendly "space
guys" inside asked if you could go for a ride in space, would
you? Wearing the dog's dish for a space helmet, the hero of
Daniel Pinkwater 's farce gets permission from Mom ("That's
nice") to travel to a strange new planet with talking rocks and
with "space things" who serve root beer floats — all for the cost
of a plastic fish.
6.267 Rodda, Emily. Finders Keepers, Illustrated by Noela Young.
Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-10516-5. 184p. 10 and up.
An Australian preteen, Patrick, is contacted by computer from a
parallel world on the other side of a time-space divider called
the Barrier. When the Barrier ruptures, objects from each side fall
through to the other side and are lost to their owners. Patrick
must find three objects on his side that individuals on the other
side desperately want returned. His search raises some interest-
ing moral issues about ownership, loyalty, and trust. This is a
witty, well-constructed science fantasy.
6.268 Young, Ruth. A Trip to Mars. Illustrated by Maryann Cocca-Lef-
fler. Orchard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08492-2. 32p. 2-6.
Want to know how to plan for a trip to Mars? As a young girl
packs, we learn about appropriate clothing and necessary sup-
plies for the Martian climate and topography. Four concluding
pages of facts from the young traveler's space journal, along
with brightly colored and humorous illustrations, round out this
introduction to the red planet.
318
fuCP
BY
Nancy
Wilkr<l
ILLUSTRATED BY
LoaldDahl
MinpinS
I Illustrated by Patrick Benson
A. Piggies by Audrey Wood and Don Wood (see 6.262). B. The High Rise Glorious
Skittle Skat Roarious Sky Pie Angel Food Cake by Nancy Willard; illustrated by Richard
Jesse Watson (see 6.261). C. Tehanu: The Last Book of Earthsea by Ursula K. Le
Guin (see 6.265). D. The Minpins by Roald Dahl; illustrated by Patrick Benson (see
6.319).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
317
HM\TiN
5iepfiEN
GAMMOL
A. Will's Mammoth by Rafe Martin; illustrated by Stephen Gammeil (see 6.245).
B. Tar Beach by Faith Ringgold (see 6.254). C. Abuela by Arthur Dorros; illustrated
by Elisa Kleven (see 6.237). D. Benjamin's Barn by Reeve Lindbergh; illustrated by
Susan Jeffers (see 6.244).
318
3EST COPY AVAILABLE
Science Fiction
267
Science Fiction
6.269 Asimov, Janet, and Isaac Asimov. Norby and Yobo's Great Ad-
venture. Walker, 1989. ISBN 0-8027-6894-6. lOOp. 9 and up (est.).
Like its seven predecessors in the Norby series, this latest adven-
ture carries space-cadet Jeff and his teaching robot, Norby, into
perilous situations. With Admiral Yobo, the trio travel back in
time to prehistoric Earth to investigate the origins of a family
relic. After being gored by a woolly mammoth and rescuing a
young girl, Jeff realizes that they have altered the past and
therefore the future. Danger awaits as they try to rectify their
actions in Ice-Age Eurasia.
6.270 Barron, T. A. Heartlight Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-
22180-8. 272p. 10 and up.
Cosmic forces are anchored in fundamental human experiences
in this exciting, well-crafted science fantasy. With the aid of Pure
Condensed Light (PCL), Kate Prancer follows her astrophysicist
grandfather across the universe to the great star Trethoniel,
which is mysteriously draining energy from the Earth's sun. She
meets some extraordinary creatures from the planet Nel Sauria,
and through confrontations with The Darkness, she helps save
the universe. Elements of mysticism, mystery, and horror inter-
twine in this tale.
6.271 Chetwin, Grace. The Starstone: From Tales of Gom in the Leg-
ends of Ulm. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-718315-7. 240p. 10
and up.
In this sequel to The Riddle and the Rune, Gom, the young boy
from Windy Mountain, serves as apprentice to a wizard who
isn't teaching him the magical arts fast enough. Katak, the Evil
One, is becoming more aggressive in his attempts to climb the
shelter-giving Crystal Stairs. Gom's innate senses and some new
friends help him to protect the Crystal Stairs and recover the lost
emerald seal, and Gom becomes a legendary wizard himself.
6*272 Gilden, Mel. Outer Space and All That Junk. J. B. Lippincott,
1989. ISBN 0-397-32307-7. 167p. 10 and up.
This sci-fi mystery would be a perfect read-aloud during an
ecology unit. The plot hinges on the premise that those piles of
junk littering our homes and countryside are really outer-space
aliens waiting for the opportunity to go home. The main charac-
ters, Myron Duberville, eccentric Uncle Hugo, Letitia Reticuli,
313
268
Fantasy
and Myron's cohort, Princess, the boss's niece, are brought to life
through vivid description, abundant dialogue, and a rich variety
of sentence structures.
6*273 Kitamura, Satoshi. UFO Diary* Illustrated by Satoshi Kitamura.
Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-38026-0. 32p. 3-7
(est).
When a strange flying object takes a wrong turn at the Milky
Way, the navigator encounters the big, blue marble Earth. One
innovative illustration demonstrates the spacecraft's approach
through successive layers of the atmosphere on multiple strips
across the page. The spacecraft descends until the alien/narrator
spots a friendly looking Earth creature. Readers never see the
alien, but view some of the action from its perspective. After a
ride on the spacecraft, the earthling boy offers a gift from his
planet — a growing thing.
Supernatural. Tales
6.274 Ackerman, Karen. The Banshee* Illustrated by David Ray Phi-
lomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-21924-2. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
When night falls, the banshee, a legendary wailing Irish spirit,
comes to the village seeking someone to share her loneliness. At
each house, though, the banshee encounters love and warmth,
which leave no room for her sad song. The contrasts between
light and dark found in the illustrations serve as the perfect
vehicle for contrasting the worlds of the banshee and the villag-
ers.
6.275 Brighton, Catherine. Dearest Grandmama. Illustrated by Cath-
erine Brighton. Doubleday, 1991. ISBN 0-385-41844-2. 32p. 4-8.
From the sailing ship Meralda, a young girl traveling with her
father writes a series of letters to her grandmother, all dated in
the closing months of 1830. The letters are the only text of this
eerie account of Maudie- Ann's encounter with a silent boy who
climbs from the sea to become her shipboard companion. Mys-
teriously, the boy carries a letter dated forty-two years into the
future, makes no reflection in the mirror, and saves her life.
6.276 Brittain, Bill. Professor Popkin's Prodigious Polish: A Tale of
the Coven Tree. Illustrated by Andrew Glass. Harper and Row,
1990. ISBN 0-06-020727-2. 152p. 8-12.
320
Supernatural Tales
269
Fifteen-year-old Luther Gilpin decides to become a salesman,
hoping to make his fortune and leave his family's farm. He
orders a case of Professor Popkin's Prodigious Polish, unaware
that the polish brings to life whatever objects on which it is
applied. In this newest mystery in Bill Brittain's Coven Tree
series, Luther's adventures selling and dealing with the polish
teach him lessons about appreciating what he already has. An-
drew Glass's illustrations add an eerie feel to the mystery.
6 277 Browne, Anthony. The Tunnel. Illustrated by Anthony Browne.
Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-94582-4. 24p.
4-8 (est).
Jack and Rose, a brother and sister as different as can be, are
always arguing. When they are sent outside by their mother,
Jack discovers a tunnel. Rose refuses to explore it, so Jack goes
alone. When he doesn't return, Rose must overcome her fear
through courage and love, even enduring the threatening woods
at the end of the tunnel to save her brother. Through surreal
images, Anthony Browne manages to infuse a contemporary
story with folktale menace; the heroine even wears a red cloak.
6.278 Cecil, Laura, compiler. Boo! Stories to Make You Jump. Illus-
trated by Emma Chichester Clark. Greenwillow Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-688-09842-8. 93p. 4-8 (est.).
If not making readers jump, this collection of poems, traditional
tales, and lore could at least give them delicious shivers. In-
cluded are funny, scary stories authored by Margaret Mahy and
Diana Wynne Jones, and spooky rhymes by Ogden Nash, Jack
Prelutsky, and Ben Jonson. There are ideal choices for reading or
telling. In particular, watch for those selections that allow the
ending to be shouted.
6.279 Cole, Joanna, and Stephanie Calmenson, compilers. The Scary
Book. Illustrated by Chris Demarest, Marilyn Hirsh, Arnold
Lobel, and Dirk Zimmer. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-
688-10654-4. 127p. 4 and up.
This compilation of stories, poems, tricks, riddles, and jokes
offers easy reading for the middle-grader, who will also be most
likely to appreciate the ''tricks," including instructions for mak-
ing "bloody finger in a box" and playing the dead man game.
The story collection includes the benign "Strange Bumps" by
Arnold Lobel, as well as the more threatening "Bony-Legs" by
ERIC
321
270
Fantasy
Joanna Cole herself, a tale of a child-eating witch who is foiled
by a young girl. Be warned: the jokes and riddles are groaners.
6.280 Conrad, Pam. Stonewords: A Ghost Story. Harper and Row
1990. ISBN 0-06-021316-7. 130p. 10 and up. ^ '
Zoe Louise died in 1870 when she was eleven years old. Now a
present-day Zoe discovers the ghost of Zoe Louise when she
goes down an unused back staircase in her house. Two lives
become intertwined as the two Zoes search for a way to travel
back in time to save Zoe Louise from the fire that took her life
Boston Globe-Horn Book Honor Book, 1990.
6.281 Fleischman, Sid. The Midnight Horse. Illustrated by Peter Sis
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09441-4. 96p. 8 and up.
Recently orphaned, young Touch arrives by stagecoach in Crick-
lewood to meet his grouchy and wicked great-uncle, Judge Wig-
glesforth, the kind Miss Sally who runs Red Raven Inn, and The
Great Chaffalo, a ghostly magician who is said to turn straw into
horses. With his own courage and a bit of magic, Touch outwits
his villainous great-uncle, reclaims his rightful inheritance, and
saves the Red Raven Inn for Miss Sally. Applause. ALA Notable
Children 's Books, 1991.
6.282 Hamilton, Virginia. The All Jahdu Storybook. Illustrated by
Barry Moser. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991. ISBN 0-15-
239498-2. 128p. 8 and up.
From a world where Trouble is a giant with a barrel for an
earring, where magic can make Sweetdream or Nightmare,
where Yin and Yang speak to a magical little being named Jahdu,
Virginia Hamilton has fashioned tales in which folklore and
contemporary life seamlessly coexist. In these strange, gripping
stones, Jahdu, the child-trickster, meets dangers and opportuni-
ties, winning out in the end and allowing young readers to
explore the dark and light of the world.
6.283 McKissack, Patricia C. The Dark-Thirty: Southern Tales of the
Supernatural. Illustrated by Brian Pinkney. Alfred A
Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1992. ISBN 0-676-91863-9. 122p. 10 and up
(est.). r v
The thirty minutes of twilight when it is neither day nor night
are the best time to tell one of these spine-tingling tales rooted
in African American history and its oral storytelling tradition
from slavery to the civil rights era. Each of the ten original
9
ERJC
322
Supernatural Tales
271
stories is accompanied by a dramatic black-and-white scratch-
board illustration. Coretta Scott King Award (Writing), 1993; New-
bery Honor Book, 1993.
6.284 Naylor, Phyllis Reynolds. The Witch's Eye. Illustrated by Joe
Burleson. Delacorte Press, 1990. ISBN 0-385-30157-X. 179p. 9-12.
In Phyllis Reynolds Naylor 's fourth tale of witch spells and
magic, best friends Lynn and Mouse are plagued by a talisman
of Witch Tuggle, who died in a fire. After Mrs. Tuggle's green
glass eye is discovered in the ashes of the fire, mysterious behav-
ioral changes overcome Lynn's family Lynn and Mouse demon-
strate remarkable pluck in their attempts to triumph over the
eye's powers. The extraordinary occurrences are set against an
ordinary family's pursuits, making the events feel even more
chilling.
6.285 Robertson, Joanne. Sea Witches. Illustrated by L£szl6 G£l. Dial
Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-1070-4. 28p. 4-8.
Eerie and riveting full-color depictions of witches and ship-
wrecks, bordered by a surrealistic collage of sea creatures, pro-
vide a haunting glimpse into Scottish superstition. For example,
a Scottish grandmother warns her grandson to crush his egg-
shells after meals, since witches use unbroken shells as boats and
then go to sea to destroy ships by sorcery. The rhythmic haiku
prose, though reminiscent of Old English poetry, is completely
accessible to young readers.
6.286 Schertle, Alice. Witch Hazel. Illustrated by Margot Tomes. Har-
perCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-025141-7. 32p. 3-« (est).
Because Johnny is too little to help with the plowing, his older
brothers give him a handful of pumpkin seeds to plant. Because
Johnny needs a scarecrow to guard his pumpkin vines, his
brothers cut a witch hazel branch, and Johnny dresses "Witch
Hazel" in a gingham dress. Under the edge of her skirt, the
largest pumpkin grows, full of magical promise and testimony
to a young boy's faith. In earthen browns, grays, and greens,
Margot Tomes's illustrations match the story's mood.
6.287 Shecter, Ben. The Big Stew. Illustrated by Ben Shecter. Harper-
Collins/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-06-025610-9.
32p. 2-6 (est).
On a stew day, a cheery, rounded couple set about adding "a
little of this, a little of that" to their stewpot. Their enthusiasm
323
272
Fantasy
for adding more and still more transforms them into frenzied
witches, dumping snakes, toads, rats, and bats into the stew.
When the pot finally erupts into a scary goblin, the words "TOO
MUCH" cover the pages, and the couple returns to normal to eat
their stew, learning "enough is enough/'
6.288 Shyer, Marlene Fanta. Ruby, the Red-Hot Witch of Blooming-
dale's, Viking Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-83473-4. 151p. 8-12.
Caught in a rainstorm on their way to visit their father, eight-
year-old Thomas and his older sister Petra run into Blooming-
dale's department store, where they encounter a friendly
"witch" named Ruby. Ruby has cures for everything, including
Thomas's idiosyncratic hiccups and Petra's longing for a recon-
cilliation of her parents. Marlene Fanta Shyer never admits that
Ruby can actually work magic, so the reader is left uncertain.
This is a book for libraries courageous enough to provide a
playful, magical story for middle-grade students, even if it does
include a witch's spell or two.
6.289 Wangerin, Walter, Jr. Elisabeth and the Water-TrolL Illustrated
by Deborah Healy. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-6-026354-7. 64p.
7-12.
Written in an oral style, the tale of the water-troll tells of preju-
dicial fear. Grieving for the death of her mother, Elisabeth weeps
tears into the well of a lonely water-troll and touches his heart.
Intending to comfort her, he steals her from her bed. At first, the
troll frightens Elisabeth, but soon she senses his gentleness.
When the villagers discover her absence, they set a blazing fire
around the troll's well, testing his allegiance to Elisabeth. Styl-
ized paintings interpret the poignancy of the troll's sacrifice.
6.290 Wyllie, Stephen. Ghost Train: A Spooky Hologram Book. Illus-
tations by Brian Lee. Dial Books, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1163-8. 24p.
4-8 (est).
Three spooky friends — Headless Hector, the Gray Lady, and the
Silver Skeleton — happily haunt Ravenswick Castle for nearly
four hundred years until the castle falls into ruin. In a saga
narrated by the Silver Skeleton, the three friends wander aim-
lessly for a time until they find a perfect new home — the Ghost
Train ride at the amusement park. The story seems secondary,
however, to the book's execution: shivery holographic images
spring from the pages, eyes following the reader, the skeleton
even opening and closing its mouth.
324
Time Fantasy
273
6.291 Yolen, Jane. The Faery Flag: Stories and Poems of Fantasy and
the Supernatural. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08438-8.
120p. 10 and up.
Award-winning author Jane Yolen creates new worlds that
blend traditional folktales and fairy tales with original modern
fantasy. In these tales and poems, a young girl sprouts wings,
unicorns heal abused children, and maligned storybook wolves
tell their side of the story. Fairies, witches, dragons, and prin-
cesses abound, providing enjoyable reading for child and adult
alike.
Time Fantasy
6.292 Bellairs, John. The Trolley to Yesterday. Illustrated by Edward
Gorey. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1989. ISBN 0-8037-0582-4.
183p. 10 and up.
In this sixth Johnny Dixon adventure involving Professor Chil-
dermass, thirteen-year-old Johnny and his friend, Fergie, are
worried by Professor Childermass's strange behavior. Then the
professor proposes something even stranger — travel through
time on a red and green trolley with faded gold paint. The
professor's destination is Constantinople in 1453 during the
Turkish invasion of the Byzantine Empire. Together, the three
face great dangers from the battles and from trying to save from
death or enslavement the people who seek refuge in the Church
of the Holy Wisdom. But the professor knows the events of
history.
6.293 Climo, Shirley. T. J/s Ghost. Thomas Y. Crowell, 1989. ISBN
0-690-04691-X. 151p. 10 and up (est).
T. J/s boring vacation with Auntie Onion and Uncle Will at their
California beach cabin takes a mysterious turn when eerie
moans come from the foggy ocean. Only T. J. can hear the voice
calling her by name. The mystery unfolds as she discovers an
Australian ghost boy who stowed away on a ship which
wrecked 120 years ago. As T. J. struggles to help him, she also
learns to love and appreciate the eccentricities of her aunt and
uncle.
6.294 Fleischman, Paul. Time Train. Illustrated by Claire Ewart. Har-
perCollins/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-06-021710-3.
32p. 5-9 (est).
325
274
Fantasy
On a class trip, a group of students from New York board the
Rocky Mountain Unlimited at the train station, and find them-
selves traveling not only across the country to Utah, but also
back in time. At their destination, they ride a stegosaurus and
eat scrambled pterodactyl eggs. The children's adventures are
boldly depicted, with unusual perspectives and surreal water-
colors.
6.295 L'Engle, Madeleine. An Acceptable Time, Farrar, Straus, and
Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-30027-5. 343p. 10 and up (est.).
Continuing the Murry family saga begun in A Wrinkle in Time,
Madeleine L'Engle's newest novel recounts the adventures of
Meg Murry's teenage daughter, Polly O'Keefe. While staying at
her grandparents' New England farmhouse, Polly unexpectedly
slips through a "time gate" and finds herself in a land and
society that existed three thousand years ago. Thus begins a
dangerous, exciting, time-travel escapade in which she learns
about druids, Celtic customs, and the importance of love for
every era and culture.
6.296 Lindbergh, Anne. Three Lives to Live. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN
0-316-52628-2. 183p. 11 and up (est.).
When Garet Atkin's seventh-grade class is assigned the task of
writing autobiographies, Garet begins her wry chronicles with
the previous summer, when she met her "twin sister" Daisy for
the first time. Daisy entered Garet's life suddenly and unexpect-
edly when she fell down the laundry chute in Grandmother
Gratkin's old house. Notwithstanding her strange arrival, Daisy
seemed different — completely at home in Grandmother's house,
but fascinated by electronics. Because Grandmother won't an-
swer questions, Garet must untangle the mysterious identity of
Daisy, and eventually her grandmother, and even herself.
6.297 Murphy, Shirley Rousseau (with Welch Suggs). Medallion of
the Black Hound. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-024369-4.
182p. &-12.
Through the magical powers of the Medallion of the Black
Hound, young David Shepard is transported back through time
to the ancient land of Meryn and finds himself in the middle of
a struggle of good versus evil. Using the powers of his medallion
and his own courage, David helps to defeat the evil of Balcher,
preserving the kingdom and his family's legacy. Woven with
326
Toys and Dolls
275
Celtic lore, this well-written fantasy will cany the reader into a
world of intrigue and suspense.
6.298 Peck, Richard. Voices after Midnight. Delacorte Press, 1989.
ISBN 0-385-29779-3. 181p. 10 and up.
Fourteen-year-old Chad looks forward to his family's two-week
vacation in New York City. The one-hundred-year-old town-
house that his family rents, though, has an eerie quality about it.
When Chad and his little brother try to track down the ghostly
voices that they hear at night, they suddenly find themselves
pulled back in time to the winter of 1888. Thus begins the beys7
adventure as they frantically work to save the lives of the young
people who lived in the house over a century ago.
6.299 Scieszka, Jon. The Good, the Bad, and the Goofy. Knights of
the Kitchen Table. The Not-So-Jolly Roger. Illustrated by Lane
Smith. Viking Penguin, 1991-92. Approx. 57p. 7-11.
The three adventurous heroes of the Time Warp Trio — Fred,
Sam, and Joe — are up to rollicking fun in their escapades of the
past. Whether escaping from mean and ugly pirates, from a
skewer-bearing knight, or from cattle stampedes, finding "The
Book" (a gift from Joe's magician uncle) in their new time zone
is the only way to recross time barriers. Lane Smith's zany black-
and-white drawings are action-packed.
Toys and Dolls
6.300 Adler, C S. Help, Pink Pig! G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1990. ISBN
0-399-22183-2. 160p. 9-11 (est.).
Moving to Los Angeles to live with her single mother, latchkey
child Amanda escapes boredom and the torment of the apart-
ment bully by entering a fantasy world with her miniature rose
quartz pig. Robbie, another lonely and unhappy young neigh-
bor, and Amanda enter a magical world together and face a
dragon and a cruel knight. These imaginary adventures help the
children cope with life and assert themselves in contemporary,
urban L.*a.
6.301 Babbitt, Natalie. Nellie: A Cat on Her Own. Illustrated by
Natalie Babbitt. Farrar, Straus and Giroux/Michael di Capua
Books, 1989. ISBN 0-374-35506-1. 26p. 5-10 (est.).
Nellie is a cat marionette who loves to dance. When her mistress
dies, she is left alone and fears she will never dance again. But
327
276
Fantasy
Nellie's friend Tom, a real cat, takes her to a special gathering of
friends. There, in the moonlight, Nellie dances again — this time
on her own.
6.302 Baker, Keith. The Magic Fan. Illustrated by Keith Baker. Har-
court Brace Jovanovich, 1989. ISBN 0-15-250750-7. 20p. 4-8 (est.).
Keith Baker's lushly illustrated picture book tells the story of
Yoshi, a Japanese boy who loves to build things, but who has run
out of ideas. When he finds a magic fan, which depicts illustra-
tions of what to build next, his inspiration returns. It takes a near
disaster for Yoshi to realize that the magic is not in the fan, but
in himself. Alternate fan-shaped pages and rich jade tones con-
tribute to the book's uniqueness and appeal. Notable 1989 Chil-
dren's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
6.303 Hissey, Jane. Little Bear Lost. Illustrated by Jane Hissey. Phi-
lomel Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-21743-6. 32p. 3-6.
Soft-hued nostalgic drawings accompany the story of Little Bear,
who gets lost from the other nursery animals during a game of
hide-and-seek. After a thorough search, and even after painting
a "lost bear" poster, the worried friends find a very full, napping
Little Bear inside the picnic basket. The polite exchanges among
the stuffed friends are reminiscent of A. A. Milne's writings.
6.304 Polacco, Patricia. Babushka's Doll. Illustrated by Patricia Po-
lacco. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN
0-671-68343-8. 28p. 6-10 (est.).
Natasha is a very demanding child. She only wants to play, and
she doesn't like to wait for anything. When her grandmother,
Babushka, goes to the store, she lets Natasha play with her own
childhood doll. When the rambunctious and impatient doll
comes to life, Natasha learns what being mischievous is all about
and, as a result, becomes a "not so naughty little girl." Colorful
pencil, marking pen, and acrylic illustrations help to tell this
Russian tale. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies.
6.305 Rendal, Justine. The Dancing Cat. Illustrated by Bernhard Ober-
dieck. Simon and Schuster Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN
0-671-72637-4. 28p. 6-10 (est.).
A toy cat believes that she's made to dance. But her dreams are
shattered when her owner adds her to a collection of stuffed
fighting cats. When the cat does not fulfill her owner's needs,
323
Unique Beings
277
she is given away to Ben, a gentle boy who names her Tasha
because he too believes that she is a dancer. Adorned in a danc-
ing costume end placed on a stage, Tasha realizes her dream and
becomes the Dancing Cat. Soft-toned colored pencil drawings
illustrate a spirited story.
Unique Beings
Humans with Special Powers
6306 Ayres, Becky. Victoria Flies High. Illustrated by Robin Michal
Koontz. Cobblehill Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-65014-8. 32p. 4-*.
When her kite is destroyed, it looks as though there is no way
for Victoria the pig to beat her arch-enemy Arnold in the kite-
flying contest, then Mr. Orsini, the magician, transforms Victo-
ria herself into a kite, and she discovers the value of determina-
tion, courage, and a little magic.
6.307 Brittain, Bill. Wings. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-020649-7.
137p. 9-12 (est).
Ian's back wrenches with agonizing pain as strange, tender pro-
tuberances grow larger at his shoulder blades. Meanwhile, he is
increasingly isolated by family members who desperately seek
conformity and acceptance. As in Susan Green's Self-Portrait with
Wings, the images of sprouting wings are vivid in Bill Brittain's
story. Readers not only can sense the strange awkwardness but
can vicariously experience the spectacular feat of learning to fly.
For Ian, flying is analogous to freeing himself from percoived
limitations, both physical and emotional. A strong friendship
develops with another class outcast.
6.308 Bursik, Rose. Amelia's Fantastic Flight. Illustrated by Rose Bur-
sik. Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-8050-1872-7. 32p. 4-6 (est.).
"Amelia loved airplanes. So she built one.,/ Then "she took it for
a little spin" — around the world. For each country Amelia visits,
an alliterative phrase describes her reactions ("She got a kick out
of Kenya"), while an inset map marks her journey, continent to
continent. Each sharp-lined, detailed painting highlights geo-
graphical features, archeological sites, or natural history scenes.
Then it's back home in time for dinner.
6.309 Carle, Eric. Draw Me a Star. Illustrated by Eric Carle. Philomel
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-1877-7. 32p. 4 and up.
278
Fantasy
"Draw me a star. And the artist drew a star." Eric Carle's crea-
tion-like story begins with a young boy at work painting a
five-pointed star. The star, which "was good/7 asks for the sun,
so the artist draws that, too. Rendered in acrylic-splattered lay-
ered tissue, each creation asks for another until the aging artist
has painted trees, people, animals, insects, and flowers. At last,
the moon asks for a star. Having come full circle, the old artist
and his star transcend the night sky
6310 Clement, Claude. The Man Who Lit the Stars. Illustrated by
John Howe. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-14741-9. 32p. 6-10
(est.).
"He was a man with no belongings, no family, no hearth to
welcome him home, a vagabond from nowhere with no destina-
tion." Yet the stranger's mission was worthy. When confronted
by hulking, dice-throwing woodcutters, the vagabond explains,
"I polish the stars." Intrigued, perhaps half-believing, a home-
less ragged child watches the starlighter adjust his long ladder
and begin the climb. From this allegorical tale with its silky,
Rennaisance-era paintings comes fresh perspective on the
streaking comets of a clear night sky.
6.311 Green, Susan. Self-Portrait with Wings. Little, Brown, 1989.
ISBN 0-316-32677-1. 206p. 10-12 (est.).
Jennifer Rosen, almost twelve, loves to ice skate, but her twirls
and leaps and arabesques never quite match those of the natural
athlete Penelope, nor even those of the other girls at the rink. To
skate to adulation, Jennifer imagines she needs the lift of wings.
In a self-portrait she sketches the wings that she needs, and,
miraculously, the wings appear. As in Mail-Order Wings by Bea-
trice Gormley, the wings cause both Jennifer and her friend
Angela some embarrassments, some duplicity, and some grand
adventure.
6.312 Heller, Nicholas. A Troll Story, Illustrated by Nicholas Heller.
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08971-2. 24p. 3-7 (est.).
Lewis can turn himself into a troll whenever he wants. Of
course, his family would never approve, so he only turns him-
self into a troll late at night. Nicholas Heller's whimsical, light-
hearted story allows readers and listeners to try on another
personality. Flat, bold patterns are achieved with bright water-
color paints and black ink against stark white backgrounds,
330
A. The Trolley to Yesterday by John Bellairs (see 6.292). B. June 29, 1999 by David
Wiesner (see 6.328). C. 7770 Tub People by Pam Conrad; illustrated by Richard
Egielski (see 6.316).
331
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
A. Trouble with Trolls by Jan Brett (see 6.317). B. The Dark-Thirty: Southern Tales
of the Supernatural by Patricia C. McKissack; illustrated by Brian Pinkney (see 6.283).
C. The Rainbabies by Laura Krauss Melmed; illustrated by Jim LaMarche (see 6.323).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
332
Unique Beings
279
adding childlike simplicity in art to the appealing humor of the
story.
6313 Kehret, Peg. Sisters, Long Ago. Cobblehill Books, 1990. ISBN
0-525-65021-0. 149p. 10 and up.
Willow Paige nearly drowns on her thirteenth birthday. Her
near-death experience reveals a past life in ancient Egypt as well
as special powers. As she struggles to understand these revela-
tions, she tries to use her powers to help heal her sister, Sarah,
who suffers from leukemia. Although the loving energy that
Willow feels cannot save her sister, she comes to understand the
importance of love, joy, and kindness in her own life.
6314 Rawlins, Donna. Digging to China* Illustrated by Donna Rawl-
ins. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08414-0. 32p. 4-7.
Young Alexis learns a secret from her elderly neighbor Marj,
who has learned the secret from her mother: if you dig deep
enough into the earth, you will find yourself in China. Marj is
sure that China is an exotic place, but feels that she is too old to
go. So Alexis digs the hole alone to bring Marj a birthday sur-
prise. Donna Rawlins illustrates her friendship story with
warmly colored flat drawings bordered like well-framed photo-
graphs. A realistic counterpart is How to Dig a Hole to the Other
Side of the World by Faith McNulty.
6315 Woodruff, Elvira. The Wing Shop. Illustrated by Stephen Gam-
mell. Holiday House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0825-6. 32p. 6-10 (est).
Matthew's new house doesn't suit him as well as the one back
on Main Street. If only he could fly, he would go back. A pigeon
leads Matthew to Featherman's Wing Shop, where wings of all
sizes, shapes, and colors can be taken for test flights. After some
faulty starts, Matthew glides over his old house to discover
changes. Stephen Gammell's feathery tones and billowy clouds
lend just the right imaginative flair to the flight and comfort to
the realization that home is wherever you live.
Make-Believe Characters
6.316 Barker, Cicely Mary. The Fairy Necklaces. Illustrated by Cicely
Mary Barker. Frederick Warne, 1991. ISBN 0-7232-4000-0. 62p.
All ages.
The delicate touch of Cicely Mary Barker's watercolor illustra-
tions, most often seen in her once-popular "Flower Fairies"
333
280
Fantasy
books, sends readers back to a time when fairies and elves used
their magic to ease the burdens of poor children. In this tale,
young Jenny, a poor country girl, wishes for a necklace for each
day of the year. Much to her surprise, the fairies oblige. Now it's
up to Jenny and her family to use her newfound riches wisely
This small reprint of Barker's 1946 tale has been faithfully and
elegantly produced.
6.317 Brett, Jan. Trouble with Trolls. Illustrated by Jan Brett. G. P.
Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22336-3. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
The trouble with trolls all begins when fearless Treva decides to
visit her cousin across Mount Baldy. With her dog Tuffi, she sets
off, leaving her chalet far below. Meantime, underground, frol-
icking trolls make preparations for a dog of their own, gathering
collar and water bowl and making a basket bed. At each turn in
her path, Treva must rely on her quick wits to meet challenges
from these dognapping trolls. As usual, the details in Jan Brett's
paintings make re-viewing a mandate.
6.318 Conrad, Pam. The Tub People. Illustrated by Richard Egielski.
Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-021341-X. 29p. 2-8.
For all children who have stared with a combination of wonder
and terror at their disappearing bathwater and the swirling
drain, this story may introduce a little comfort. Tub Child, one
of a family of wooden tub toys, is pulled down the drain and
must be rescued by a "big people" plumber. Richard Egielski
manages to impart a static life to the rigid figures and a feeling
of peaceful resolution.
6.319 Dahl, Roald. The Minpins. Illustrated by Patrick Benson. Viking
Penguin, 1991. ISBN 0-670-84168-4. 42p. 3-8.
Bored little Billy disobeys his mother's warnings and ventures
beyond the garden gate to explore the allegorical Forest of Sin.
Chased by a terrible, smoke-blowing, fire-breathing Cruncher,
Billy escapes by climbing a tall tree where he discovers the
Lilliputian-like Minpins. The giant Billy devises a clever plan to
save the Minpins and himself. Published posthumously, the
story reflects Roald Dahl's glee in providing delicious scaries for
the young and exquisite language for reading aloud. The illus-
trations contrast size and power and offer magic in perfect
strokes.
6.320 Hutchins, Pat. Silly Billy! Illustrated by Pat Hutchins. Greenwil-
low Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10818-0. 32p. 3-6 (est.).
334
Unique Beings
281
A green monster named Hazel has a typical problem: her little
brother Billy constantly disrupts her toys and games. "SILLY
BILLY! You've spoiled my game!" shouts Hazel each time. Fi-
nally, Hazel decides to sleep in the toy box, which Billy naturally
wants to do, too Familiar subject matter, repetitive text, and
lively watercolor illustrations of lime green monsters in orange
vests and purple dresses make this a book which promises to
join its companions, The Very Worst Monster and Where's My
Baby?, as a favorite for young children.
6.321 Kehret, Peg. Horror at the Haunted House. Cobblehill Books,
1992. ISBN 0-525-65106-3. 132p. 8 and up (est).
Near Halloween, Ellen Streater and her brother Corey act in a
"haunted house" production to support the renovation of the
Clayton mansion. Ellen, always sensitive to the vibrations of
others, is visited by the ghost of Lydia Clayton, former mistress
of the mansion. The ghost wants Ellen's help in protecting her
Wedgwood china collection, but Ellen does not understand why
the china is in need of protection. When Ellen decides to inves-
tigate, she exposes herself both to danger and to a crime.
6.322 Le Guin, Ursula K. Fish Soup. Illustrated by Patrick Wynne.
Atheneum, 1992. ISBN 0-689-31733-6. 32p. 6-9 (est.).
The Thinking Man of Moha and the Writing Woman of Maho are
best friends, although completely different. When one day the
Thinking Man suggests that they need a child to run messages
between them, the result is a magical tale of expectations too
great and too small, as well as a parable on parenting and friend-
ships. Patrick Wynne's detailed pen-and-ink illustrations are
done on creamy paper, inhabited by flying mice and fish and
revealing the eccentricities of opposite characteristics in friends.
6.323 Melmed, Laura Krauss. The Rainbabies. Illustrated by Jim La-
Marche. Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-
10756-7. 32p. 6 and up.
The luminous surrealistic illustrations on front and back covers
will draw readers into this magical tale of an old couple who
have everything in life except the one thing that they want
most — a child. Adventures abound after a magic moon shower
delivers twelve tiny moonbabies. With a happy ending and folk-
tale style, this story will be asked for again and again.
6.324 Nones, Eric Jon. Wendell. Illustrated by Eric Jon Nones. Farrar,
Straus and Giroux, 1989. ISBN 0-374-38266-2. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
335
282
Fantasy
Wendell is a cat who shares his house with his owners and a
troop of gnomic mischief-makers. Only Wendell can see the tiny
gnomes so he gets blamed for all their deeds — from cracked
plates to missing eyeglasses. Even when he is put outdoors, he
is blamed for all that goes wrong. Fortunately, Wendell is a good
mouser so he redeems himself and sends the gnomes packing.
The fun of being "in" on the invisible trouble-makers and Wen-
dell's innocence will appeal to anyone ever falsely accused. Il-
lustrations depict muted 1950s~style home furnishings and char-
acters spread edge to edge. Only the Muppet-like gnomes and
Wendell are vivid.
6325 Peck, Sylvia. Seal Child. Illustrated by Robert Andrew Parker.
Morrow Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08682-9. 200p. 8-12.
Molly is fascinated by the seals on Ambrose Island when her
family takes a winter vacation to their Maine cottage. Although
her father is a zoologist, it is Ruby, an elderly, full-time island
resident, who teaches Molly about seals. After Molly has a
deeply moving experience looking into the eyes of an orphaned
seal pup, Ruby introduces her to Meara, a pale, odd girl who
suddenly and mysteriously appears on the island. The story is
inspired by the legends of selkies, seals in human form.
6.326 Steig, William. Shrek! Illustrated by William Steig. Farrar, Straus
and Giroux/Michael di Capua Books, 1990. ISBN 0-374-36877-5.
28p. 5-10.
Unabashedly proving that beauty is indeed in the eye of the
beholder, Shrek the monster, with his fumes, lice, repulsive man-
ners, and occasional nasty temper, pursues his true love, Apple
Streudel, "the most stunningly ugly princess on the surface of
the planet." Sprinkled with rhyme and elevated with William
Steig's lofty language, the tale will appeal more to middle grad-
ers and may even send them scrambling for dictionaries. Water-
color and ink illustrations are reminiscent of Steig's Sylvester and
the Magic Pebble.
6.327 Teague, Mark. Moog-Moog, Space Barber. Illustrated by Mark
Teague. Scholastic Hardcover Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-43332-6.
32p. 6-9.
Elmo gets the most embarrassing, terrible haircut — it is so bad
that he and his cat, Leon, travel to the wondrous outer-space
barber, Moog-Moog, to have his hair fixed. The next day at
school it is comforting for Elmo to see his friend Buford also
ERIC
336
Unique Beings
283
wearing a baseball hat to cover his haircut (and for the same
reason). Amicable space monsters and exhilarating full-color
illustrations round out the story.
6328 Wiesner, David. June 29, 1999. Illustrated by David Wiesner.
Clarion Books, 1992. ISBN 0-395-59762-5. 32p. 6-12 (est).
Holly Ever's science experiment is extraordinary indeed for a
child of her age in 1999. To measure the effect of the ionosphere
on plant growth, Holly uses weather balloons to launch her
seedling cups. Not since Judith Barrett's Cloudy with a Chance of
Meatballs has such giant food fallen from the sky. But are these
vegetables really Holly's experiment gone awry? The fantasy is
enhanced by the realism of the landing sites, the perspective
shifts, and the incredulity of the observers — both earthbound
and extraterrestrial.
ERLC
337
Fine Arts
Art is universal.
The barriers of
language,
time,
and culture
crumble in a moment of looking.
Jan Greenberg and
Sandra Jordan
The Painters Eye:
Learning to Look at
Contemporary American Art
333
286
7 Fine Arts
Performing Arts
7.1 Fonteyn, Margot, reteller. Swan Lake, Illustrated by Trina Schart
Hyman. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1989. ISBN
0-15-200600-1. 32p. All ages. Fiction.
Margot Fonteyn retells the story of Tchaikovsky's classic ballet
as a fairy tale. Prince Siegfried's love for the swan queen, Odette,
promises to break the spell that keeps her imprisoned as a bird.
But tricked by the wizard, Siegfried pledges his true love to the
disguised Odile, the wizard's daughter, and dooms his true love
through his innocent act of betrayal. Despairing, Siegfried fol-
lows Odette in death. Trina Schart Hyman's acrylic and pastel
paintings, edged with thin ink lines, are alternately romantic,
threatening, and moon-splashed.
7.2 Greaves, Margaret, reteller. The Magic Flute: The Story of
Mozart's Opera. Illustrated by Francesca Crespi. Henry Holt,
1989. ISBN 0-8050-0887-X. 32p. 5-8 (est.). Fiction.
The story of Prince Tamino and his rescue of the beautiful Prin-
cess Pamina is retold with rounded, childlike figures in Oriental
costumes, and set against stage flats or, alternately, against plain
white pages, each bordered and illuminated. The action of
Mozart's last opera follows both Tamino and his magic flute, as
well as the bird catcher, Papageno, with his magic bells. Scenes
are posed to represent their drama, while Papageno's cavorting
provides relief.
73 Haskins, James. Black Dance in America: A History through Its
People- Thomas Y. Crowell, 1990. ISBN 0-690-04659-6. 232p. 12
and up. Nonfiction.
From jazz dancing to break dancing, many of the dances of
today descended from African dances that have been performed
for hundreds of years. This exploration of the evolution of black
dance in America includes insightful stories of the lives of some
of America's most famous African American dancers, such as
Bill "Bojangles" Robinson and Michael Jackson. Filled with fas-
cinating black-and-white photographs of African American
dancers at work, this book offers a unique perspective on the
ERJ.C
c.
A. The Day the Goose Got Loose by Reeve Lindbergh; illustrated by Steven Kellogg
(see 6.87). B. The Frog Prince Continued story by Jon Scieszka; illustrations by
Steve Johnson (see 6.187). C. Little Penguin's Tale by Audrey Wood (see 6.161).
ERIC
BEST COPY AVAILABLE '
iiuusrrarions bythc onions
I SPY
—Ah Alphabet In Art—
Devised & selected by Lucy Mickletbwait
B.
POEM-
^ to Begin \XrriUn„
"tgfioetr
HvraCobnLm
wgston
A. Pish, Posh, said Hieronymus Bosch by Nancy Willard; illustrated by Diane Dillon
and Leo Dillon (see 7.1 8). B. / Spy: An Alphabet in Art devised and selected by Lucy
Micklethwait (see 7.14). C. Aida told by Leontyne Price; illustrated by Leo Dillon and
Diane Dillon (see 7.5). D. Poem-Makir,^: Ways to Begin Writing Poetry by Myra Cohn
Livingston (see 10.110).
341
eESrcoPVAVAIMBLE
Performing Arts
287
roots of modern dance. Coretta Scott King Honor Book (Writing),
1991.
7.4 Isadora, Rachel, adapter. Swan Lake. Illustrated by Rachel Isa-
dora. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1991. ISBN 0-399-21730-4. 32p. 6-12
(est.). Fiction.
Rachel Isadora's adaptation of the transformation tale that is
portrayed in Tchaikovsky's classical ballet about the prince who
falls in love with the swan queen sets light-bathed ballerinas
against watercolor-washed backdrops. Impressionistic scenes
vary from murky, swirling night skies to airy onion-dome
scenes. The illustrations beg for the music. Children may also
enjoy comparing Isadora's dancers with those created by Chris
Van Allsburg for Mark Helprin's version of Swan Lake or with
Trina Schart Hyman's illustrations for Margot Fonteyn's version.
7.5 Price, Leontyne, reteller. Aida. Illustrated by Leo and Diane
Dillon. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich /Gulliver Books, 1990. ISBN
0-15-200405-X. 32p. 8 and up (est.). Fiction.
When her homeland is invaded, Princess Aida of Ethiopia is
captured and enslaved to the Egyptian Princess Amneris. When
Aida falls in love with Radames, a captain in Egypt's great army,
she must choose between her love for country and her Egyptian
captain. In this retelling by soprano Leontyne Price, Verdi's
tragic opera is brought to life with rich prose and magnificent
artwork. The Dillons' exquisite marbleized paintings, enriched
with Egyptian architecture and gold-sculptured borders, help to
dramatize the conflicts of courage and honor. ALA Notable Chil-
dren's Books, 1991; Coretta Scott King Award (Illustration), 1991.
7.6 San Souci, Robert, reteller. The Firebird. Illustrated by Kris
Waldherr. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-
0800-9. 32p. 4-8. Fiction.
Robert San Souci retells the tale of Prince Ivan's love for the
beautiful Princess Elena and his efforts to save her from her
captor, an evil wizard. Using a magical talisman — a feather from
a grateful Firebird whom Prince Ivan has set free — the prince
and princess undertake a series of trials to bring about the wiz-
ard's demise. Oil paintings, applied over golden acrylic, offer
stylized medieval landscapes and castle scenes in this adapta-
tion of Stravinsky's ballet.
342
288
Fine Arts
7.7 Verdy, Violette. Of Swans, Sugarplums and Satin Slippers: Bal-
let Stories for Children. Illustrated by Marcia Brown. Scholastic
Hardcover Books, 1991. ISBN 0-590-43484-5. 80p. 7-11. Fiction.
Violette Verdy a principal ballerina for the New York City Ballet
between 1958 and 1976, tells the stories of six ballets, The Firebird,
Coppelia, Swan Lake, The Nutcracker, Giselle, and Sleeping Beauty.
Each story begins with background information on the ballet,
including Verdy's response to her own role in the ballet. Some of
Marcia Brown's full-page paintings of the sets are painted in a
folk-art style, bright and flat; however, the Wilis of Giselle and
the Sugar Plum Fairy are diaphanous images.
7.8 Werner, Vivian, reteller. Petrouchka: The Story of the Ballet.
Illustrated by John Collier. Viking Penguin /Bry on Preiss Books,
1992. ISBN 0-670-83607-9. 32p. 8 and up (est.). Fiction.
Vivian Werner gently tells the story of Stravinsky's ballet about
Petrouchka, the clown-puppet with a heart, who yearns for his
freedom from the Old Magician so that he can both dance freely
and love the beautiful Ballerina. Like Tomi dePaola's Clown of
God, Petrouchka is transformed in the final tragic scene, freed at
last to dance and to catch snowflakes on his tongue. John Col-
lier's pastel and gouache illustrations forebode tragedy, even
when the text describes festivity and color.
Visual Arts
7.9 Cummings, Pat, compiler and editor. Talking with Artists: Con-
versations with Victoria Chess, Pat Cummings, Leo and Diane
Dillon, Richard Egielski, Lois Ehlert, Lisa Campbell Ernst,
Tom Feelings, Steven Kellogg, Jerry Pinkney, Amy Schwartz,
Lane Smith, Chris Van Allsburg, and David Wiesner. Bradbury
Press, 1992. ISBN 0-02-724245-5. 96p. 9 and up. Nonfiction.
Preceding "conversations'' with fourteen prominent, contempo-
rary American illustrators of books for children is a page ad-
dressed "Dear Reader/' intended to enlighten and inspire bud-
ding artists. Each artist profile features the artist's signature,
photographs of the artist as child and adult, an autobiographical
sketch, answers to eight standard questions frequently asked by
children, and full-color reproductions of sample artwork. Con-
cluding is a glossary and a booklist composed of the artists' five
favorite books that they have illustrated. Boston Globe-Horn Book
Nonfiction Award, 1992.
343
Visual Arts
289
7.10 Day, David. Aska's Animals* Illustrated by Warabe Aska. Dou-
bleday Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-385-25315-X. 32p.
All ages. Nonfiction.
Imagining the beginnings of animals from around the world —
kangaroo, polar bear, musk ox, camel — Canadian artist Warabe
Aska created fourteen oil paintings as intriguing to adult as to
child. Each is large, brilliantly colored, and unique for its realis-
tic depiction of groups of animals which, through subtle grada-
tions, come to blend seamlessly into the landscape. For example,
lifelike deer that were once "tree spirits" bound in a marshy
foreground, and appear as a forest of antlers in the background.
David Day's interpretive poems keep readers in the spell.
7.11 Garza, Carmen Lomas, as told to Harriet Rohmer (translated by
Rosalma Zubizarreta). Family Pictures/Cuadros de familia. Il-
lustrated by Carmen Lomas Garza. Children's Book Press, 1990.
ISBN 0-89239-050-6. 32p. 4-8 (est.). Nonfiction.
Carmen Lomas Garza is a folk artist who painted more than a
dozen pictures of her memories of growing up in a Texas border
town. She was then interviewed to create the text which appears
first in English, then in Spanish. Oils, acrylics, gouache, and
paper cutouts are her media for depicting a trip to the fair,
harvesting oranges, hitting a pinata at a birthday party, making
tamales, and other important scenes of childhood. ALA Notable
Children's Books, 1990.
7.12 Greenberg, Jan, and Sandra Jordan. The Painter's Eye: Learning
to Look at Contemporary American Art. Delacorte Press, 1991.
ISBN 0-385-30319-X. 96p. 10 and up. Nonfiction.
"The Painter's Eye provides the necessary tools for young readers
to begin a lifetime appreciation of paintings and the work that
painters do— as well as the magic they create." It fully achieves
those objectives through conversations with the artists them-
selves, reproductions of postwar American paintings, photo-
graphs of the artists at work, interviews and quotes, an art
glossary, museum lists, a bibliography, an index, and a readable,
informative text.
7.13 Lattimore, Deborah Nourse. The Sailor Who Captured the Sea:
A Story of the Book of Kells. Illustrated by Deborah Nourse
Lattimore. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-023711-2. 30p. 7-10.
Fiction.
344
290
Fine Arts
Three Irish brothers find out, in turn, that circumstances call
forth their hidden creativity. In the end, their creative struggle
saves their monastery home. This fictive account of the making
of the magnificent Book of Kells personalizes distant historical
achievements; its theme concerns the individual's struggle to
find fulfilling work. The compelling watercolor illustrations are
lightly washed to simulate the look of ancient parchment, and
each page is bordered with intricate designs reminiscent of
manuscripts sumptuously illustrated by monks of old. Notable
1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
7.14 Micklethwait, Lucy I Spy: An Alphabet in Art. Greenwillow
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-116779-5. 64p. All ages. Nonfiction.
In this alphabet "I Spy" game, Lucy Micklethwait presents
twenty-six well-known paintings and invites their close inspec-
tion. On one page, simple text announces: "I spy / with my little
eye / something beginning with [a letter name]"; on the facing
page is a beautifully reproduced print. Finding a "B" object is as
simple as finding the ball in Henri Rousseau's Football Players.
Among the other artists whose works are represented are Ver-
meer, Miro, Renoir, Chagall, Seurat, Matisse, Goya, Steen,
Boticelli, and Picasso.
7.15 National Gallery of Canada and Anne Newlands. Meet Edgar
Degas. J. B. Lippincott, 1989. ISBN 0-397-32369-7. 30p. 6 and up
(est.). Nonfiction.
Letters, notebooks, and other archival records make possible a
first-person narrative in which Edgar Degas leads readers on a
tour through a gallery of his paintings, stopping before each to
describe what it represents, his reasons for choosing the subject,
and the technique that he has employed. Beautifully reproduced
on quality paper, the paintings make a delightful introduction to
Degas. Throughout the book the artist's times, attitudes, abili-
ties, and interests are revealed.
7.16 Peppin, Anthea. Nature in Art. People in Art. Places in Art.
Williams, Helen. Stories in Art. Millbrook Press, 1991-92. 48p.
7-12. Nonfiction.
Four companion volumes on people, places, nature, and stories
in the visual arts reach over time and place to spell out how
primitive and studied techniques combine with creativity to
capture the magic of art. Not only does the large-format, full-
color, profusely illustrated design of the Millbrook Arts Library
ERIC
Visual Arts
291
introduce artists throughout history, but the specific questions
and instructions help readers to think about art and to become
involved in artistic experiences.
7.17 Roalf, Peggy. Families: Looking at Paintings. Horses: Looking
at Paintings. Landscapes: Looking at Paintings. Seascapes:
Looking at Paintings. Hyperion Books for Children, 1992. 48p.
8-12. Nonfiction.
Created to "inspire young readers to observe their world and to
use their imaginations to see like a painter/' these four paper-
bound volumes in the Jacques Lowe Visual Arts Projects series,
complete with glossary and index, demonstrate that great artists
have viewed the same subject in varied ways. Double-page
spreads feature an individual painting, with a color photograph
on the right and text discussing period, artist, and artistic tech-
nique on the left.
7.18 Willard, Nancy. Pish, Posh, Said Hieronymus Bosch. Illustrated
by the Dillons. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1991. ISBN 0-15-
262210-1. 32p. All ages (est.). Fiction.
In elegant, whimsical, and accessible verse, Nancy Willard tells
of a housekeeper working for the famous Flemish painter Hi-
eronymus Bosch. But the bizarre creatures of Bosch's paint-
ings— including pickle-winged fish, three-legged thistles, and
human drainpipes — give her no rest. Magnificent illustrations
by Leo, Diane, and Lee Dillon include full-color paintings and
monochrome line drawings in imitative homage to the classical
painter. Readers of Willard's other books — such as A Visit to
William Blake's Inn — as well as new readers will be thrilled with
this masterpiece.
7.19 Yenawine, Philip. Color. Lines. Shapes. Stories. Museum of
Modern Art and Delacorte Press, 1991. 22p. 4-8. Nonfiction.
The Art Books for Children series presents basic artistic concepts
and vocabulary to young children through the use of full-color
reproductions of works from the collections of the Museum of
Modern Art in New York. Questions on each page invite readers
to look closely at works of art. Each book ends with a two-page
synopsis of the art presented, including the artist, the title, the
media used, and a brief description.
34f>
Historical Fiction
The man without a past is fiction; even willful ignorance cannot erase
our history. Only in eternal night will man be shadowless, and the
past not follow the present into the future Knowledge of the
past — of history— gives perspective to our world.
Erik Christian Haugaard, The Rider and His Horse
347
294
8 Historical Fiction
Prehistoric Times
8.1 Nolan, Dennis. Wolf Child. Illustrated by Dennis Nolan.
Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-768141-6. 40p. 7-10 (est.).
Nine-year-old Teo lived 18,000 years ago when humans first
used animals for companions. Though ill and weak, the boy
experiences love through the friendship of an orphaned wolf
cub and pride through his talent, learned as an apprentice, of
crafting stone tools. Photorealistic watercolor paintings are re-
markable in their detail and feeling. Notable 1989 Children's Trade
Books in the Field of Social Studies.
Medieval Times
8.2 Dana, Barbara. Young Joan. HarperCollins/Charlotte Zolotow
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-06-021423-6. 371p. 10-13 (est.).
Born in France during the Hundred Years' War, young Joan of
Arc lives a simple life, surrounded by her loving family But she
soon discovers that her future involves the fulfillment of an old
prophecy that tells of a young maiden who saves France.
Guided by the voices of saints and strengthened by her faith in
God, Joan faces danger and eventual death in her struggle to
save her country in its battle with England. This fascinating
novel describes how a French heroine grows to understand and
fulfill her destiny.
Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries
8.3 Conrad, Pam. Pedro's Journal: A Voyage with Christopher Co-
lumbus, August 3, 1492-February 14, 1493. Illustrated by Peter
Koeppen. Boyds Mills Press/Caroline House, 1991. ISBN 1-
878093-17-7. 84p. 7-10 (est.).
Pedro de Salcedo was a cabin boy on the Santa Maria, not be-
cause he liked the sea or because he had nautical skills, but
because he could read and write. At the captain's behest, Pedro
kept a journal with dated entries which included not only de-
scriptions of the events during Columbus's first trans- Atlantic
voyage but also sketches of the sights. Pam Conrad's storytelling
er|c
348
Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries
295
and Peter Koeppen's black-and-white line drawings are based
on the best guesses of historians about events and sights on the
journey.
8.4 Dorris, Michael. Morning Girl. Hyperion Books for Children,
1992. ISBN 1-56282-285-3. 74p. 8 and up.
In alternating chapters and from differing perspectives, twelve-
year-old Morning Girl, who loves the day, and her younger
brother, Star Boy, who loves the night, share imagery-filled inci-
dents from everyday Taino life. The year is 1492. Crises like a
tropical storm and their mother's miscarriage are surmounted.
All is well on their Caribbean island until the closing pages
when Morning Girl goes for a swim and encounters a canoeful
of 'Visitors/' The book ends with a disturbing passage from
Columbus's diary. Scott O'Dell Award for Historical Fiction, 1993,
8.5 Foreman, Michael, and Richard Seaver. The Boy Who Sailed
with Columbus. Illustrated by Michael Foreman. Little,
Brown/Arcade, 1992 . ISBN 1-55970-178-1. 71p. 8-13 (est).
The log of Christopher Columbus documents the wreck of one
of his ships on Christmas Day, 1492, when a ship's boy, left in
charge, fell asleep. In this fictionalized picture book in impres-
sionistic watercolor, the full story of Leif, the ship's boy, is spun
out — from his signing on through the historic voyage to the days
and years after the voyage. Left behind by Columbus, Leif is
captured by a native tribe and apprenticed to the tribal medicine
man. Years later, fully acculturated and a grandfather, he once
again sees European sailors, and in a telling gesture, he packs up
his family and moves westward.
8.6 Locker, Thomas. The Land of Gray Wolf. Illustrated by Thomas
Locker. Dial Books, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-0937-4. 32p. All ages.
Thomas Locker illustrates this account of contact between Euro-
peans and Eastern Native Americans with oil paintings in a
semi-primitive, sweeping style that evokes the luminous, open
spaces of unsettled North America. Running Deer, an Indian
boy, is approaching adulthood at a time when his tribe's very
existence is threatened by the coming of the whites. In a straight-
forward style, the narrative presents the various problems that
tribal Americans faced and leaves the reader with a mixed hope
for a return to this natural way of life. Notable 1991 Children's
Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
349
296
Historical Fiction
8.7 Smith, Barry. The First Voyage of Christopher Columbus, 1492.
Illustrated by Barry Smith. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-
84051-3. 30p. 4-8 (est.).
A young sailor in need of a job signs on, unknowingly, with
Christopher Columbus. Simple text tells the sailor's version of
the voyage and safe return. In addition, map details on each
page allow readers to locate the ships' positions en route, while
a fold-out map at the back of the book tracks the entire voyage.
Bordered watercolors give a sense of the action and attitudes,
including strident gray waves and both Columbus and his sailor
with upside-down smiles.
8.8 Stolz, Mary. Bartholomew Fair. Greenwillow Books/Beech Tree
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-11501-2. 160p. 11 and up (est).
Mary Stolz takes readers along to the "clamor and clatter and
color and confusion" of London's Bartholomew Fair in 1597.
Action follows six characters' ventures to the fair — two school-
boys of opposite social standing, a maligned apprentice, a
wealthy cloth merchant, a vegetable washer from the queen's
kitchens, and Queen Elizabeth herself. Each brings expectations,
all come together in logical ways, and each leaves with some
satisfaction. Stolz's text is beautifully crafted yet challenging,
with terms and speech reflective of the historical period.
8.9 Ventura, Piero. 1492: The Year of the New World. Illustrated by
Piero Ventura. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22332-0.
93p. All ages.
Piero Ventura provides "an imaginary journey through the
Europe of 1492" and a chance to sail with Columbus himself.
The time-frame is given social perspective by an imaginary citi-
zen of each old-world country, while detailed sketches and maps
help to interpret the history and geography of the regions. Read-
ers are also introduced to the civilizations of the New World —
the Tainos, Aztecs, Maya, Incas, and Buffalo Hunters. Succinct
concluding sections address "Europe After Columbus" and the
effect of the voyages on Native Americans.
8.10 Yolen, Jane. Encounter. Illustrated by David Shannon. Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-225962-7. 32p. 6-12.
A threatening dream of three great-winged birds with voices like
thunder disturbs the sleep of a child of the Taino tribe on the
island of San Salvador. From his wary perspective, the boy tells
in cadence-like speech of the arrival of "three great sailing ca-
Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries
297
noes" of Christopher Cohimbus: "We did not know them as
human beings, for they hid their bodies in colors, like parrots."
Despite the child's warnings, the tribe offers welcome, feasts,
and gifts, and in return receives beads, bells, and extinction.
Acrylic paintings, jungle-lush and eloquent, are based on writ-
ten descriptions.
Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries
United States
8.11 Cooney, Barbara. Island Boy. Illustrated by Barbara Cooney.
Viking Kestrel, 1988. ISBN 0-670-81749-X. 32p. 4^8 (est.).
Matthais's pa built the first house on Tibbets Island, and for the
rest of his long life, Matthais would find himself coming back to
that island again and again. This charming tale of a child's
growth into a father (and a grandfather) is enhanced by colorful
paintings in the tradition of old-world artists, paintings that
reflect a time when life in New England was dedicated to family,
community, and the land. Spanning Matthais's entire life, this
book recalls a forgotten way of life. Boston Globe-Horn Book
Honor Book, 1989.
8.12 Fleischman, Paul. Saturnalia. HarperKeypoint/Charlotte Zolo-
tow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-021913-0. 112p. 10-12 (est.).
In 1681, the working populace of Boston is composed of masters
and servants, journeymen and apprentices, shopkeepers and
tithingmen. Paul Fleischman weaves their lives together
through the story of William, a fourteen-year-old Narragansett
Indian who has been apprenticed for six years to kindly Mr.
Currie, the printer, after his tribe was slaughtered by the Eng-
lish. Although he has come to accept his new family, William
does not repress his longing for the old. Each night, he slips
through Boston's streets, playing his bone flute, desperately
searching for his twin brother and his past. Boston Globe-Horn
Book Honor Book, 1990.
8.13 Harness, Cheryl. Three Young Pilgrims. Illustrated by Cheryl
Harness. Bradbury Press, 1992. ISBN 0-02-74643-2. 32p. 5-10.
Cheryl Harness tells the fictionalized tale of the Allerton family
and their children, Mary, Remember, and Bartholomew, whose
travels and travails were representative of other Mayflower Pil-
grims who sailed for a new land. Although an author's note
351
298
Historical Fiction
denies that the book is intended as a scholarly work, the water-
color, gouache, and pencil illustrations inform through labeled
maps, cutaways, time-lines, and both panoramic and detailed
views of the family's struggles, leading to the first Thanksgiving.
8.14 Hudson, Jan. Dawn Rider. Philomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-
22178-6. 170p. 10 and up.
In syntax echoing the spirit of the Blackfoot, Jan Hudson tells the
story of sixteen-year-old Kit Fox, who questions the values and
traditions of her tribe, but who must nevertheless adhere to
them. Women are not to hunt, yet Kit yearns to develop those
skills. Only men may ride horses, yet Kit, with the help of her
cousin Found Arrow, tames a wild stallion. These new abilities
are tested when Kit must save her Blackfoot tribe from a raid by
their traditional enemy, the Snakes.
8.15 Keehn, Sally M. I Am Regina. Philomel Books, 1991. ISBN 0-399-
21797-5. 240p. 10 and up.
Regina, a ten-year-old Pennsylvania girl, is kidnapped by Na-
tive Americans in 1755 and is forced to live as a member of their
tribe. Based on a true story, the novel realistically portrays both
the cruelty and compassion that Regina experiences during her
nine years of captivity. When the French and Indian War ceases
and Regina is ultimately reunited with her mother, this mature,
indomitable young woman empathizes with the victims of both
sides of the war.
8.16 Luhrmann, Winifred Bruce. Only Brave Tomorrows. Houghton
Mifflin, 1989. ISBN 0-395-47983-5. 190p. 10 and up.
Leaving her comfortable life in England behind, Faith Ralston
comes to Massachusetts with her father to make a new home in
the colonies. When she is left alone after surviving an Indian
massacre, Faith's struggles lead to a discovery of her own
strengths and her future. Set during King Philip's War in the late
1600s, this poignant story chronicles a young girl's efforts to find
and establish her own place in the world.
8.17 Rinaldi, Ann. A Break with Charity: A Story about the Salem
Witch Trials. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1992.
ISBN 0-15-200353-3. 256p. 10 and up.
Told in flashback, Ann Rinaldi's historically accurate novel re-
counts the hysteria and terror surrounding the Salem witch tri-
als of 1692. Fourteen-year-old Susanna English learns that ring-
352
Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries
299
leader Ann Putnam is faking her "bewitched" state. But if
Susanna reveals Putnam's dissembling, she fears that her own
family will assuredly be accused of witchcraft and condemned
to death. Ultimately, the young teen's honesty and courage are
rewarded.
8.18 Turner, Ann. Katie's Trunk- Illustrated by Ron Himler. Macmil-
lan, 1992. ISBN 0-02-789512-2. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Katie's Trunk is based on a true incident in the life of one of the
author's ancestors at the beginning of the American Revolution.
Young Katie and her Tory family flee to the woods when a group
of colonists threatens their home. At the last minute, though,
Katie boldly returns to protect their property. Realizing the futil-
ity of her resistance, she climbs into a trunk filled with clothing,
and there discovers that goodness exists even in conflict. Water-
color paintings set graceful period scenes.
World
8-19 Garfield, Leon. Young Nick and Jubilee, Illustrated by Ted Le-
win. Delacorte Press, 1989. ISBN 0-385-29777-7. 135p. 10 and up
(est.).
Leon Garfield, award-winning British author of juvenile histori-
cal fiction, once again sets his tale in eighteenth-century London.
Ten-year-old Nick and his younger sister, orphaned and desti-
tute, hope to attend the city's charity school. Needing a "father"
to sponsor them, they persuade Mr. Owen, bachelor and pick-
pocket extraordinaire, to perform the role. Thus begin the trio's
adventures as a family. Ted Lewin's black-and-white illustra-
tions provide readers with additional information about English
life in the 1700s.
8.20 O'Dell, Scott. My Name Is Not Angelica. Dell/Yearling Books,
1990. ISBN 0-440-40379-0. 130p. 8-12.
In Scott O'Dell's tragic last novel, sixteen-year-old Raisha and
her betrothed, Konje, an African tribal chief, are captured and
sold into slavery by members of a neighboring village. Descrip-
tive, fast-paced prose follows their arduous voyage on a stifling
slave ship to the West Indies of 1733. On St. Johns, Konje escapes,
becoming the leader of a band of runaway slaves who commu-
nicate with talking drums to plan revolt. Beautiful Raisha, called
Angelica by her planter-owner, knows her fate still lies with
Konje.
ERLC
353
300
Historical Fiction
Nineteenth Century
United States
8.21 Avi. The Man Who Was Poe. Orchard Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-
08433-7. 208p. 11 and up.
When Edmund and his sister are seemingly abandoned in a
strange hotel room in nineteenth-century Rhode Island, Ed-
mund must finally disobey his aunt and leave to get food. But
he returns to find that his sister has disappeared! This ghostly
tale relates Edmund's search to unravel the mystery of his fam-
ily's disappearance, aided by the reluctantly helpful Auguste
EHipin (a.k.a. Edgar Allan Poe). Since fragments of the real Poe's
personality and tragic life are interwoven into the plot, the book
would enhance a literature unit on mysteries.
8.22 Beatty, Patricia. Sarah and Me and the Lady from the Sea.
Morrow Junior Books, 1989. ISBN 0-688-08045-6. 182p. 9-12
(est).
The Flood of 1894 bankrupts twelve-year-old Marcella Abbott's
family. They are forced to sell their Portland, Oregon, home and
to live year-round in their summer home on the coast of Wash-
ington. Their pampered and privileged world is gone, and
Marcy has trouble adjusting to a new lifestyle. Through a shared
loss and a mysterious woman, Marcy becomes friends with
Sarah Kimball, whom Patricia Beatty's readers first met in The
Nickel-Plated Beauty. Marcy and Sarah share presents, confi-
dences, and the discovery of the identity of the lady from the
sea — a shipwrecked Russian. Beatty offers another lively charac-
terization in this suspenseful tale.
8.23 Beatty, Patricia. Who Comes with Cannons? Morrow Junior
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-11028-2. 186p. 10 and up (est.).
Orphaned Tabitha Ruth (Truth) moves from Indiana to live with
her Quaker relatives in North Carolina. At the dawn of the Civil
War, Truth becomes part of her aunt and uncle's Underground
Railroad station, sending slaves northward. Shy and uncertain
of her place within her new family, Truth gains courage as story
events unfold. Threats to her pacifist family from slaveholders
and from the encroaching battlefront require courage. She must
even petition Mrs. Lincoln to gain her cousin's freedom from a
Yankee prison.
c.
A. Morning Girl by Michael Dorris (see 8.4). B. Young Joan by Barbara Dana (see
8.2). C. Encounter by Jane Yolen; illustrated by David Shannon (see 8.10).
ERIC
355
3 WIIVAV AdOO 1S38
A. Three Young Pilgrims by Cheryl Harness (see 8.13). B. Katie's Trunk by Ann
Turner; illustrated by Ron Himler (see 8.1 8). C. Grasshopper Summerby Ann Turner
(see 8.43). D. Mirette on the High Wire by Emily Arnold McCuily (see 8.52).
i cST COPT AVAILABLE m
Nineteenth Century
301
8.24 Beatty, Patricia, and Phillip Robbins. Eben Tyne, Powder-
monkey. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08884-8. 227p.
9-13 (est.).
Eben Tyne, almost fourteen, is separated from family and friends
when he is selected to be a powdermonkey (the boy who scur-
ries to the ship's hold and back to refill the powder supply for
the cannons) on the crew of the Merrimack, renamed the Virginia
by the Confederates during the Civil War. Through the ship's
preparation and then a furious, smoking, clanging battle, Eben
learns about loyalty and strength of purpose. The historical
novel is so rampant with detail that diagrams and maps will be
a necessary supplement.
8.25 Conrad, Pam. My Daniel. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-
021314-0. 137p. 10 and up.
Julia Creath Summerwaite sits at last in the natural history mu-
seum looking at the dinosaur bones that her brother found long
ago when they were children. The story that she begins to tell
her grandchildren is of the harshness of her Nebraska child-
hood, and how young Daniel Creath discovered the bones in the
river and lost his life trying to protect his find from dinosaur
grave robbers. The plot moves between the present day and the
memories of her brother's sacrifice. Notable 1989 Children's Trade
Books in the Field of Social Studies.
8.26 Fleischman, Sid. Jim Ugly. Illustrated by Jos. A. Smith. Green-
willow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-10886-5. 144p. 8 and up.
Jim Ugly is a very loyal but very ornery dog who is part mongrel
and part wolf. He belongs to an actor in the days of the Califor-
nia gold rush, and the owner's possession of forty pounds of
diamonds gets him "buried." But is he really dead? His son,
twelve-year-old Jake, and an irascible bounty hunter think not.
Their race to find him, with Jim Ugly's sense of smell as Jake's
only guide, takes the pair on a journey from Nevada to Califor-
nia and introduces a troupe of characters that enlivens the route.
8.27 Harvey, Brett. My Prairie Christmas. Illustrated by Deborah
Kogan Ray Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-8234-0827-2. 29p. 5S.
This is the Plaisted family's first Christmas season on the prairie,
away from their beloved Maine. When Christmas day arrives,
Papa, caught in a blizzard, still has not returned home. But
Mama, in true pioneer fashion, helps the children keep their
hopes and Christmas spirit alive. Papa finally arrives, bearing a
357
302
Historical Fiction
"goodie-filled" barrel from Maine. Earth-tone sketches capture
the times and spirit of frontier America and help to set the tone
of a heartwarming story of family and the true meaning of
Christmas. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
8.28 Holland, Isabelle. The Journey Home. Scholastic Hardcover
Books, 1990. ISBN 0-590-43110-2. 192p. £-12.
When their mother dies, sisters Maggie and Annie are sent west
on the orphan train to be adopted by a pioneer family. Taken in
by the Russells, the two girls struggle to make a new life, over-
coming religious prejudice, illiteracy, and the fear of losing one
another. Set in the late 1800s, this story of two Irish Catholic
sisters' journey to find a new home captures the spirit of new
beginnings.
8.29 Hoobler, Dorothy, Thomas Hoobler, and Carey-Greenberg Asso-
ciates. A Promise at the Alamo: The Story of a Texas Girl.
Illustrated by Jennifer Hewitson. Silver Burdett Press, 1992.
ISBN 0-382-24147-9. 64p. 9-12.
As Santa Anna's troops gather outside the walls of the Alamo,
Maria and her family prepare to defend the newly forming
Republic of Texas. Set in 1836, this story of a girl's courage and
determination to keep a promise brings to life the heroic battle
of the Alamo, This book both recounts an important event and
celebrates the Hispanic culture.
8.30 Hooks, William H. The Ballad of Belle Dorcas. Illustrated by
Brian Pinkney. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1990. ISBN 0-394-
84645-1. 32p. 6-10 (est).
In this conjure tale from North Carolina, the beautiful Belle
Dorcas gives up her freedom to marry her true love, the slave
Joshua. When the master forces them to be apart, Belle seeks a
powerful spell from Granny Lizard, the conjurer. Brian Pink-
ney's colorful, etching-like illustrations highlight this haunting
love story.
8.31 Karr, Kathleen. It Ain't Always Easy. Farrar, Straus and Giroux,
1990. ISBN 0-374-33645-8. 229p. 10 and up (est.).
Plucky orphans, eleven-year-old Jack and eight-year-old Mandy,
travel from New York City to the Pennsylvania countryside in
1882, looking for love and a family. Eventually they find both,
with help from Miss Blackman of the Children's Aid Society and
358
Nineteenth Century
303
a burly Nebraska rancher named Redbeard. With crisp dialogue
and effective characterization, Kathleen Karr has produced an
engrossing story of survival in a society which neglects and even
abuses its homeless children, reminiscent of (but superior to) the
"rags-to-respectability" novels of Horatio Alger, Jr.
832 Kimmel, Eric A. Four Dollars and Fifty Cents. Illustrated by
Glen Rounds. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN 0-8234-0817-5. 32p.
6-10 (est).
Here's a tale for reading aloud both for its cowboy lingo and its
surprise ending. Although "it's a terrible thing to call a cowboy
a deadbeat, ... in Shorty Long's case it was true." Shorty owed
Widow Macrae a walloping four dollars and fifty cents, and she
was determined to collect — even if she had to "lay him out
flatter 'n the bottom of a skillet." To escape his creditor, Shorty,
fakes his death, and the widow kindly offers to bury him. Line-
and-crayon drawings are trail dust-spewing images of an un-
kempt West.
833 Levin, Betty. Brother Moose. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN
0-688-09266-7. 210p. 10 and up (est.).
Nell and Louisa, two orphan girls being delivered to separate
families in Canada in the late 1800s, have their plans disrupted.
First Nell's prospective family suddenly leaves for Maine with-
out her. Then Nell rescues Louisa from the abusive home in
which she's been placed. Together they head for Maine to find
Nell's new family. With Indian Joe and his grandson, the girls
encounter blizzards, illness, a train wreck, and a friendly moose
before reaching their new home.
8.34 Lyon, George Ella. Cecil's Story. Illustrated by Peter
Catalanotto. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08512-0. 32p. 4-8
(est.).
With great poignancy, a child's concerns and imaginings merge
during the Civil War: "If your papa went off to war, / he might
get hurt / and your mama might go to fetch him." As he stays
with the neighbors, waiting, helping, hiding tears, time passes,
beautifully illustrated across one spread by the development
and hatching of a chick. The scene shifts to the campfires at the
front and the child's imagining what life would be like "if . . .
papa should not come home." Muted colors allow the merger of
fears and hopes.
359
304
Historical Fiction
835 Lyons, Mary E. Letters from a Slave Girl: The Story of Harriet
Jacobs. Charles Scribner's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-684-19446-5. 146p.
10-13.
In a fictionalized account told entirely through letters "written"
by Harriet Jacobs (1813-97), an African American child born into
slavery, Mary Lyons portrays a life of courage, hope, and great
injustice. As a twelve-year-old, Harriet writes to her dead Mama,
describing her loneliness, expressing her grief, and confessing
the sexual harassment that she is experiencing. As an adult, she
chooses the life of a runaway, spending seven years in an attic
crawlspace, separated from her two children. Although the con-
tent of the book is heartrending, Harriet's saucy spirit shines
through.
836 Meyer, Carolyn. Where the Broken Heart Still Beats: The Story
of Cynthia Ann Parker Harcourt Brace Jovanovich/Gulliver
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-15-200639-7. 192p. 8-12.
When Cynthia Ann Parker (18277-1864) was "rescued" from her
Comanche captors, the Texas legislature voted her a state hero.
But "Sinty Ann" yearned to return to her Comanche husband
and two sons, and she struggled throughout her captivity by her
pioneer relatives to pass her Indian ways on to her young
daughter. In finely wrought chapters that alternately tell the
story from the points of view of Cynthia Ann and her cousin
Lucy, the cultural conflict between Native Americans and pio-
neers is honestly and evenly discussed.
837 Myers, Walter Dean. The Righteous Revenge of Artemis Bon-
ner. HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-020846-5. 140p. 10 and up.
With rolling good humor masquerading in the cadences of for-
mal speech, Artemis Bonner, a fifteen-year-old African American
boy, writes his journal of planned revenge against Catfish
Grimes: Catfish, it seems, shot dead Artemis's uncle, Ugly Ned,
in the streets of Tombstone. As Catfish and his unladylike com-
panion, Miss Lucy Featherdip, move from site to site in search
of Uncle Ugly's stowed fortune, Artemis must skirmish repeat-
edly with his nemesis, dealing with such woes as cactus needles,
ant beds, and hungry bears — "all for that treasure."
838 Paterson, Katherine. Lyddie. Lodestar Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-
67338-5. 182p. 9 and up (est.).
Set in New England in the mid 1840s, this novel depicts the life
of Lyddie Worthen, a destitute Vermont farm girl who must
360
Nineteenth Century
305
leave her home and support herself as a factory worker in Low-
ell, Massachusetts. In the mill, she endures illness from exhaus-
tion, unsanitary conditions, low pay, sexual advances from her
manager, and isolation from her family. Like other young female
protagonists in Katherine Paterson's award-winning novels,
Lyddie not only survives but actually improves her lot in life
through her resourcefulness, industry, and indomitable courage.
Notable 1991 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies;
ALA Notable Children's Books, 1992.
8.39 Reeder, Carolyn. Shades of Gray. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-
775810-9. 152p. 10-12 (est).
Orphaned by the Civil War and its aftermath, twelve-year-old
Will Page is forced to live with his uncle's family. Because Uncle
Jed refused to fight the Yankees, Will considers him a traitor. But
as Will works alongside his uncle on the farm, he learns to
appreciate both the older man's strengths and the many faces of
loss. Topics, themes, and style of this book easily blend into an
intermediate curriculum. ALA Notable Children's Books, 1990;
Scott O'Dell Award for Historical Fiction, 1990; Virginia Library
Association Children's Book Award.
8.40 Rounds, Glen. Cowboys. Illustrated by Glen Rounds. Holiday
House, 1991. ISBN 0-8234-0867-1. 32p. 3-7 (est).
When a rancher hires a cowboy to ride the range, the work day
is long and hard. Glen Rounds's brief text and scratchy illustra-
tions take the cowboy from sunup to sundown in a kind of
"bunkhouse to bunkhouse" saga that demonstrates saddling
and breaking a horse, looking for strays, rescuing steers, meet-
ing snakes and storms head on, and even conquering a stam-
pede. Line and color work together for lanky, scruffy cowboy
images.
8.41 Sanders, Scott Russell. Aurora Means Dawn. Illustrated by Jill
Kastner. Bradbury Press, 1989. ISBN 0-02-778270-0. 30p. 6-9.
This picture-book account of early pioneer life in Ohio is based
on fact, but it is embellished to help young readers imagine the
difficult lives of American settlers. In this story, the Sheldons
travel from Connecticut to Ohio in 1800 to join the settlement of
Aurora, only to realize that they are the first settlers in the
community. Watercolor paintings are accurately detailed, giving
life to the print and suggesting strongly the beauty of this chal-
lenging new land. A short afterword explains the factual basis in
361
306
Historical Fiction
this story of a real Mr. and Mrs. Sheldon and their seven chil-
dren. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
SA2 Sanders, Scott Russell. Warm as Wool* Illustrated by Helen
Cogancherry. Bradbury Press, 1992. ISBN 0-02-778139-9. 32p.
6-10 (est.).
In an author's note, Scott Russell Sanders writes that "Children
enter the past . . . not through names and dates, but through the
feelings of those who lived in the past." Drawing from a nine-
teenth-century record book, he re-creates the story of the Ward
family, focusing particularly on Betsy Ward, the first pioneer to
own sheep in Randolph Township, Ohio. Because of her chil-
dren's desperate need for warm wool clothes, Betsy purchased
the sheep in 1805 with saved coins. Watercolor and pencil illus-
trations inform readers of time and place and convey the Wards'
determination.
8.43 Turner, Ann. Grasshopper Summer* Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-
02-789511-4. 166p. 9-12 (est.).
Eleven-year-old Sam White and his family move from bucolic
Kentucky to the raw southern Dakota Territory of 1874. The
journey itself is challenging, and the land that they settle is vast
and harsh. Coupled with the external tension of the landscape is
Sam's struggle to adjust, as compared with his younger brother
Billy's natural optimism. After their sod house is built, crops are
planted, only to be destroyed by a terrifying grasshopper
plague. Determined to persevere, the family remains on the
land. Ann Turner's dialogue-filled saga of a pioneer family that
triumphs would make for a good read-aloud. Notable 1989 CM-
dren's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
8.44 Van Leeuwen, Jean. Going West Illustrated by Thomas B. Allen.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1028-3. 32p.
5-9.
Illustrated with earth-tone chalks on roughly textured brown
paper, the story of a pioneer family's westward journey and
settlement is told through the eyes of seven-year-old Hannah.
Hannah's voice is both childlike and lyrical: "Here is what was
in our wagon . . . "; "Rebecca caught a cold. At night she
coughed and coughed. Mama looked worried, but still we rode
on. Going West." Brutal weather, deprivation, and isolation are
evident, as are steadfastness, ingenuity, and hope.
er|c
362
Nineteenth Century
307
8.45 Wisler, G. Clifton. Piper's Ferry: A Tale of the Texas Revolution*
Lodestar Books, 1990. ISBN 0-525-67303-2. 144p. 10 and up.
Leaving his home in New Orleans, young Tim Piper heads to
Texas to help his uncle run a ferry across the Brazos River. As
Tim tries to find his place in this new land, he builds strong
friendships and faces danger and personal conflict. Told through
the eyes and voice of Tim, this historically based novel, rich with
the characters and events of the Texas revolution, tells a story of
a young teen's struggle to become a man.
8.46 Wisler, G. Clifton. Red Cap- Lodestar Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-
67337-7. 160p. 10-13 (est.).
Set during the Civil War and based on a real boy's exploits, this
novel portrays thirteen-year-old Ransom Powell as he copes
with his duties as a drummer boy in the Union army. Then
Ransom is captured and sent to the notorious Andersonville
prison camp. Ultimately, the young boy's wit, stoicism, and
bravery make him a hero to his fellow prisoners and allow him
to escape to the North.
World
8.47 Avi. The True Confessions of Charlotte Doyle. Avon/Flare
Books, 1992. ISBN 0-380-71475-2. 232p. 10 and up.
"Not every thirteen-year-old girl is accused of murder, brought
to trial, and found guilty. . . . For my part I intend to tell the truth
as I lived it." So begins the unexpectedly terrifying tale told by
Charlotte Doyle, the only female passenger aboard the Seahawk
on a Liverpool-to-Providence voyage with vicious sailors and a
tyrannical captain during the summer of 1832. Readers willing
to tear themselves away from rapidly unfolding action will ap-
preciate an appendix naming ship locations and equipment and
explaining ship's time. ALA Notable Book, 1990; Boston Globe-
Horn Book Fiction Award, 1991; Newbery Honor Book, 1991.
8.48 Crofford, Emily. Born in the Year of Courage* Carolrhoda
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-87614-679-5. 160p. 10 and up.
Manjiro, a fifteen-year-old Japanese fisherman living in the mid
nineteenth century, becomes shipwrecked and stranded on a
deserted island. Based on actual events, the story describes Man-
jiro's rescue by American whalers, his subsequent training at sea
and education in the United States, and his great success as a
courageous, talented navigator. Since at that time Japan's policy
363
308
Historical Fiction
of isolationism meant virtually no trade with Western countries,
Manjiro became a key negotiator in opening up trade relations
between the United States and Japan in the 1850s.
8.49 Hautzig, Esther Riches, Illustrated by Donna Diamond. Harper-
Collins/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-06-022260-3.
43p. 8 and up (est.).
Successful, hard-working shop owners Samuel and Chaya-
Rivka grow old and desire a more restful life. Wanting most of
all to find a way to please the Almighty, Samuel seeks guidance
from a wise rabbi. In following his advice, the couple learns that
the giving of oneself can be more important than the giving of
material things. Black-and-white drawings capture devotion
and humility.
8.50 Hudson, Jan. Sweetgrass. Philomel Books, 1989. ISBN 0-399-
21721-5. 157p. 8-12.
This is a well-researched novel about Sweetgrass, a fifteen-year-
old Blackfoot Indian girl living on the prairies of Alberta in
western Canada in the nineteenth century. Told in first person, it
chronicles the daily life, dreams, and courage of Sweetgrass as
she experiences awakening emotions of love and battles a dev-
astating smallpox epidemic which threatens to annihilate her
tribe. Through a suspenseful plot and abundant dialogue, the
book subtly but skillfully educates the young reader in the ways
of the Blackfoot. Canada Council Children's Literature Prize; CLA
Book of the Year for Children; ALA Booklist Children's Editors'
Choices, 1989; ALA Notable Children's Books, 1990.
8.51 Lutzeier, Elizabeth. The Coldest Winter. Holiday House, 1991.
ISBN 0-8234-0899-X. 153p. 10 and up.
In this fictional account of the Irish Potato Famine of the 1840s,
Eamonn and his family are evicted from their farm in the dead
of winter by British troops because their landlord wants more
pasture land. They walk to a city in search of work and famine
relief, then begin to die of starvation and yellow fever. Author
Elizabeth Lutzeier does an exceptional job of dramatizing the
political and economic dynamics of social disintegration.
8.52 McCully, Emily Arnold. Mirette on the High Wire. Illustrated
by Emily Arnold McCully. G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-
399-22130-1. 32p. 4-8.
364
Twentieth Century
309
In 1890s Paris, the best place to stay if you are an acrobat, juggler,
or mime is at the widow Gateau's boardinghouse. There, guests
receive superb treatment from the widow and her daughter,
Mirette. One retiring guest, though, fascinates Mirette above all
others, and she begs the high-wire artist, the Great Bellini, for
instruction. Mirette's determination both to learn tightrope
walking and to help the Great Bellini, who has become fearful of
the wire, is charmingly interpreted through Emily Arnold
McCully's watercolors. Caldecott Medal, 1993.
Twentieth Century
United States: Early in the Century
8.53 Allen, Thomas B. On Granddadd/s Farm. Illustrated by
Thomas B. Allen. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN
0-394-99613-5. 32p. 4-7 (est.).
While Granddaddy works as a train brakeman on the Nashville
to Montgomery run four days a week, three cousins help
Granny run the farm. The children water the plants, tend the
animals, haul coal and water from the well, as well as ride the
mule and play in the haystacks. Soft, textured pastels depict
pastoral scenes from a 1930s Tennes^e farm,
8.54 Cooney, Barbara. Hattie and the Wild Waves: A Story from
Brooklyn. Illustrated by Barbara Cooney Viking Penguin, 1990.
ISBN 0-670-83056-9. 40p. 3^8.
Growing up in Brooklyn at the turn of the century, Hattie,
daughter of German immigrants, enjoys sketching river boats
and ocean waves. As the years go by and Hattie's brother and
sister make their way in the world, her family worries about
what will become of their youngest daughter. But Hattie knows
her own mind and, with the help of a fortune-teller, finally
realizes her dream of becoming an artist. Barbara Cooney's
primitive-style illustrations, painted with acrylics and accented
with pencils, help to capture the story of an American era that
was spirited with independence and strength of family
8.55 Corcoran, Barbara. The Private War of Lillian Adams.
Atheneum/Jean Karl Books, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31443-4. 166p. 9-
12.
It's 1917, World War I is raging, and Lillian's family has just
moved to a small New England town. The fifth grader, eager to
ERIC
310
Historical Fiction
be noticed and make friends, convinces her classmates that their
town is harboring a spy. In the end, Lillian learns that rumors
can be a dangerous thing.
8*56 Cross, Verda. Great-Grandma Tells of Threshing Day. Illus-
trated by Gail Owens. Albert Whitman, 1992. ISBN 0-8075-3042-
5. 38p. 6-11.
"Threshing day is the best day of the year. ... I'll remember it all
the days of my life And I did just that "At age seventy-
eight, Verda Cross, a.k.a. Great-Grandma, transports us to a June
day in the early 1900s and reminisces about the winter wheat
harvest on a Missouri farm. Through her words and through
Gail Owens's masterful pastel illustrations, we are reminded of
the sense of community, of pitching in to accomplish a task, so
commonplace in an earlier day.
8.57 Fleischman, Paul. Shadow Play. Illustrated by Eric Beddows.
Harper and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-06-
021865-7. 34p. 4-8.
At a county fair in the early 1900s, the silhouetted "LeGrand
Family" introduces the shadow puppet play of "Beauty and the
Beast." As the play progresses, the bull Stupendo from a neigh-
boring tent crashes the stage and terrorizes the LeGrands. At
last, Stupendo is tamed by the gentle, youngest LeGrand. When
the audience is invited backstage, they are amazed to discover
that the shadows, including the bull, were all made by a master
puppeteer, echoing the moral of the fairy tale itself: "Appear-
ances are as thin and deceptive — as shadows."
8.58 Gregory, Kristiana. Earthquake at Dawn. Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich/Gulliver Books, 1992. ISBN 0-15-200446-7. 187p. 10
In a fictionalized account, two young women, photographer
Edith Irvine and her assistant, witness the San Francisco earth-
quake of 1906. In the aftermath, the pair becomes involved with
a family of Irish immigrants, meets Jack London, and, against
the wishes of civic leaders, manages to photograph the dimen-
sions of the disaster. This is first-rate historical fiction, and it
would have been a real treat to have the text accompanied by
surviving photographs by the real Edith Irvine.
8.59 Houston, Gloria. Littlejim. Illustrated by Thomas B. Allen. Phi-
lomel Books, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22222-0. 172p. 8-12.
and up.
Twentieth Century
311
Living in rural North Carolina in the early 1900s, twelve-year-
old Littlejim Houston is happy being the best student in his
class. But Papa thinks that Littlejim is wasting time on "book
learning" and should instead be learning to live off the land.
Through a newspaper's essay contest, Littlejim struggles with
his need to become a scholar and his desire to please his father,
and in the process he proves what it means to be a man. Full-
page black-line sketches illustrate this sensitive story of a fa-
ther's acceptance and a young boy's coming of age in Ap-
palachia. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
8.60 Leighton, Maxinne Rhea. An Ellis Island Christmas. Illustrated
by Dennis Nolan. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-83182-4.
32p. 3-8.
Six-year-old Krysia and her family leave Poland to join Papa in
America. Although sad to leave behind friends and her doll,
Yola, Krysia is excited about the reunion. Arriving in the forbid-
ding immigration hall on Christmas Eve, Mama retrieves Yola
from a wicker basket to ease the strangeness that surrounds
Krysia. The story is told in detailed retrospect, with paintings
adding a chimerical quality to remembered scenes from the
Polish village to Ellis Island.
8.61 Leonard, Laura. Saving Damaris. Atheneum/Jean Karl Books,
1989. ISBN 0-689-31553-8. 198p. 8-12.
Through an engaging diary, twelve-year-old Abby tells how she,
her brother Joel, and her sister Damaris struggle to hold their
family together after the sudden death of their mother. It is early
twentieth-century America, and sixteen-year-old Damaris goes
to work at Mr. Buttchenbacher's emporium. Abby and Joel try
to prevent their beautiful sister from trying to aid the family by
accepting marriage to the wealthy but ill-tempered widower.
The wedding seems unstoppable until the children discover that
there is no room for them in Mr. B's plans.
8.62 McDonald, Megan. The Great Pumpkin Switch. Illustrated by
Ted Lewin. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992. ISBN
0-531-08600-3. 32p. 4-7.
"Sit close now, and Til tell you/' In a chair by a window, a
grandfather begins a tale about a time when he and his friend
Otto were boys, and Grandpa's sister, Rosie, had grown Big
Max — the biggest pumpkin ever — for her Sunflower Girls
367
312
Historical Fiction
patches. But the boys inadvertently cut the pumpkin vine, and
Big Max rolled, bounced, and smashed into the street below. Ted
Lewin's knicker-clad characters with their Radio Flyer create
nostalgia for a time past.
8.63 Precek, Katharine Wilson. Penny in the Road. Illustrated by
Patricia Cullen-Clark. Macmillan, 1989. ISBN 0-02-774970-3. 32p.
4-8.
A sense of wonder and respect permeate Katharine Wilson Pre-
cek's story that a grandfather tells of himself as a country boy in
1913 who, after finding a 1793 penny, imagines what life must
have been like for the boy who dropped it. In the present, the
grandchildren can imagine the boyhood of the grandfather who
wondered. Patricia Cullen-Clark's soft pastel illustrations add to
the sense of a gently faded past which lingers.
8.64 Shefelman, Janice. A Peddler's Dream. Illustrated by Tom She-
felman. Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-60904-6. 32p. 6-10
(est).
A Lebanese immigrant pursues his dream of becoming a mer-
chant in the New World. The realistic historical tale, set at the
turn of the century, tells of the hopes, frustrations, and eventual
successes of Soloman Joseph Azar in his climb from peddler to
clerk to partner and, finally, to owner of the clothing store of his
dreams. The author-illustrator team capture both the feeling and
setting of the Old World, as well as the fictionalized American
town of Arcadia.
8.65 Wallace, Bill. Buffalo Gal. Holiday House, 1992. ISBN 0-8234-
0943-0. 185p. 11 and up (est.).
In this romantic adventure story set in 1904, the Guthridge
women participate in efforts to save the buffalo from extinction.
Amanda Guthridge and her mother travel to Oklahoma and
then Texas to help round up a herd of buffalo that will be sent to
safety on a ranch. During the trip's adventures, Amanda meets
David Talltree, a Native American soldier who escorts them on
their journey. At first, Amanda and David have little use for each
other, but their slowly developing respect turns to love.
8.66 Wyman, Andrea. Red Sky at Morning. Holiday House, 1991.
ISBN 0-8234-0903-1. 225p. 10 and up.
While her father seeks a new farm in Oregon, Callie is left alone
in Indiana with her Grandfather Opa to tend the farm and Cal-
368
Twentieth Century
313
lie's sick mother. Friendships, love, and the simple pleasures of
early twentieth-century prairie life enable Callie and Opa to
endure the disease and death that strike her family and town
during her father's absence. An enriching novel to accompany a
history unit, this book would also make a captivating read-
aloud.
8.67 Yep, Laurence. The Star Fisher. Morrow Junior Books, 1991.
ISBN 0-688-09365-5. 160p. 8 and up.
Loosely based on Laurence Yep's own family background, this
novel examines the struggles and triumphs of a Chinese Ameri-
can family moving from Ohio to West Virginia in the 1920s. The
protagonist, fifteen-year-old Joan Lee, is dismayed by the preju-
dice that her family encounters from several townspeople when
her father tries to establish a laundry business. Aided by ancient
Miss Lucy and her friend Bernice, Joan Lee and her mother's
delicious apple pies ultimately win over the hearts of their
small-town neighbors.
United States: World War I and Next Two Decades
8.68 Green, Connie Jordan. Emmy. Margaret K. McElderry Books,
1992. ISBN 0-689-50556-6. 152p. 10-13 (est.).
Nothing has been the same since Emmy's father was disabled in
the mine accident. Pa has become reclusive; for Emmy, there is
never-ending work to be done and no time for herself. Nonethe-
less, the family is determined to overcome the odds and stay
together. Then Emmy's brother is in a mining accident, and even
this resolve appears threatened. But the strength of family ties
proves strong enough to hold the family together and to bring
back the Pa that everyone loves.
8.69 Morris, Linda Lowe. Morning Milking. Illustrated by David
DeRan. Picture Book Studio, 1991. ISBN 0-88708-173-8. 34p. 6-8
(est).
This account of a farm girl helping her father with milking the
cows, though simple, is entrancing and profound. The water-
color illustrations are warm and serene, rendering farm life with
loving care. The text, plain in language and rich in detail, reso-
nates with the love between parent and child, the human yearn-
ing to freeze happiness in time, the beauty of land and animals,
and the power of storytelling.
ERIC
369
314
Historical Fiction
8.70 Skurzynski, Gloria. Good-bye, Billy Radish. Bradbury Press,
1992. ISBN 0-02-782921-9. 138p. 10 and up.
Against the backdrop of the United States entering World War I,
two young boys entering adolescence develop a deep friend-
ship. The characters of Hank Kerner, an "all- American" boy who
aspires to be a doctor, and Bazyli Radichevych, a Ukrainian
immigrant who accepts his destiny as a steel worker in the small
Pennsylvania town, are complex and appealing. Within the con-
text of several focal incidents, the characters face career deci-
sions, crises of personal and cultural identity, and death. Black-
and-white photos illuminate the era.
United States: World War II and Later
8.71 Avi. "Who Was That Masked Man, Anyway?" Orchard
Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08607-0. 176p.
9 and up.
Franklin D. Wattleson and Mario Calvino are next-door neigh-
bors and best friends, even though Frankie's radio adventure
shows — the Green Hornet, the Lone Ranger, the Shadow — spill
into his ordinary 1945 life and out through his imaginary per-
sona, Chet Barker (with his faithful sidekick, Skipper O'Malley).
Meanwhile, Frankie's brother Tom, wounded in the war, is un-
communicative; Miss Gomez isn't happy with Frankie's school
behavior; and the roomer, Dr. Smerdlow, just could be a spy. Told
entirely in dialogue, Avi's story and its characters are great fun.
8.72 Cormier, Robert. Other Bells for Us to Ring. Illustrated by De-
borah Kogan Ray. Delacorte Press, 1990. ISBN 0-385-30245-2.
136p. 9-12.
Just prior to the outbreak of World War II, eleven-year-old Darcy
Webster has at last found a friend in the irrepressible Kathleen
Mary O'Hara. With her flaming orange hair, an adventurous
soul, and a firm religious faith, Kathleen Mary's spirit lifts
Darcy's own, even through Kathleen Mary must deal with an
abusive father. But then the war begins, Darcy's father is
shipped overseas, and her precious friend disappears. Darcy is
left to consider the place of miracles in her life — and how prom-
ises are almost always kept.
8.73 Dillon, Eilis. Children of Bach. Charles Scribner's Sons, 1992.
ISBN 0-684-19440-6. 164p. 10 and up (est).
370
NO
/TAR
NIGHT/
K AT H ERIN E PATERS
T//Cs/ , T;
■M K( ".MX VI
A. Lydd/e by Katherine Paterson (see 8.38). B. Shadow Play by Paul Fleischman;
illustrated by Eric Beddows (see 8.57). C. 777© Star Fisher by Laurence Yep (see
8.67). D. No Star Nights by Anna Egan Smucker; Illustrated by Steve Johnson (see
8.84).
371
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
A.
B.
372
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Twentieth Century
315
All of Pali's family are Jewish musicians living in Hungary dur-
ing World War II. He comes home one day to find that his
parents have been taken by the Nazis controlling their city.
Smuggled in a van, Pali, his two siblings, his aunt, a neighbor,
and a friend embark on a dangerous journey to Italy to escape
their parents7 fate. Along the way, the troupe receives the help of
strangers and overcomes their sorrows with the power of music.
8.74 Hahn, Mary Downing. Stepping on the Cracks. Clarion Books,
1991. ISBN 0-395-58507-4. 216p. 10 and up (est.).
Eleven-year-old Margaret, the narrator, and Elizabeth are best
friends. They are preoccupied with World War n, each having a
brother in the military. But they have also had a war since kin-
dergarten with the sixth-grade bully, mean Gordy Smith. In the
process of getting even for his misdeeds, they discover that in a
hut in the woods Gordy is hiding an army deserter — his own
brother Stuart. The result is a questioning of their attitudes to-
ward Gordy and toward war, but never their status as best
friends. Scott O'Dell Award for Historical Fiction, 1992.
8.75 Hartling, Peter (translated by Elizabeth D. Crawford). Crutches.
Lothrop, Lee and Shepard Books, 1988. ISBN 0-688-07991-1.
163p. 9 and up.
In the harrowing final days of World War II, Thomas finds him-
self alone in Vienna, his last hope of finding a living relative
dashed in the rubble of his aunt's abandoned home. Then comes
hope in the form of the one-legged man who calls himself
Crutches. With Crutches, Thomas believes he can triumph over
the tragedies that surround him and find his missing mother
and the life he left behind. Mildred L. Batchelder Award, 1989.
8.76 Heide, Florence Parry, and Judith Heide Gilliland. Sami and the
Time of the Troubles. Illustrated by Ted Lewin. Clarion Books,
1992. ISBN 0-395-55964-2. 32p. 8-12.
Sami, a ten-year-old Lebanese boy, ''lives in the time of the
troubles/' a time of gunfire and bombs that has lasted all his life.
Bombed-out Beruit is Sami's playground. When fighting occurs,
Sami's family must live in a basement. Even so, his mother
insists that there be things of beauty to remind them of days
before the troubles. Through his grandfather's stories, Sami
comes to understand that children must demand peace. Ted
Lewin's watercolors reflect the light play and shadows of streets
and cavern.
373
316
Historical Fiction
8.77 Hest, Amy. Fancy Aunt Jess* Illustrated by Amy Schwartz. Mor-
row Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08097-9. 32p. 5-7 (est).
Aunt Jess wears spiky high heels, dresses oh-so-stylishly, lives in
New York City, and is single at a time when being single makes
the butcher's wife grunt. She'll get married, she says, when she
meets someone special. Amy Schwartz's paintings set a 1950s
scene for a Jewish aunt and her glamorous lifestyle as viewed
through the adoring eyes of her young niece. Then, through the
efforts of two look-aliKe nieces, Aunt Jess meets Uncle Harry at
Friday services and there's a "special wedding."
8*78 Houston, Gloria. But No Candy. Illustrated by Lloyd Bloom.
Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22142-5. 32p. 4 and up.
Afternoons were the favorite part of Lee's day. With a chocolate
bar from the candy counter in her daddy's store, she escaped to
her special tree, where she slowly peeled the paper, savored each
nibble, and made the chocolate last as long as possible. But when
war came, there was no more chocolate. Despite all the sacri-
fices, and even while missing Uncle Ted, Lee desperately missed
chocolate. At war's end, with Uncle Ted safely home, favorite
things taste different, and little girls know when they have
grown.
8.79 Kinsey-Warnock, Natalie. The Canada Geese Quilt Illustrated
by Leslie W. Bowman. Cobblehill Books, 1989. ISBN 0-525-65004-
0. 60p. 9 and up.
Spring always brings the geese back to Vermont, but this spring
brings changes to ten-year-old Ariel's life as well: her mother
announces that she is expecting another baby, and her grand-
mother suffers a stroke. Ariel now faces uncertainty and must
learn to give of herself. Later, a special quilt from her grand-
mother helps Ariel to feel safe and secure once again. Black-and-
white sketches illustrate this touching story of family and per-
sonal growth set in the 1940s. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books
in the Field of Social Studies.
8.80 Levitin, Sonia. Silver Days. Atheneum, 1989. ISBN 0-689-31563-
5. 186p. 10 and up (est.).
This sequel to Journey to America continues the Piatt family's
story of escape from Nazi Germany to freedom in the United
States. Told through the eyes of fifteen-year-old Lisa Piatt, the
novel describes the hardships that Jewish immigrants encoun-
tered in the early 1940s as they struggled with the English lan-
ERIC
374
Twentieth Century
317
guage, American customs, and financial constraints. Readers
will also enjoy the poignant portrayal of family love, sibling
relationships, and a young girl's dream to dance. Notable 1989
Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
8.81 Nelson, Theresa. And One for AIL Orchard Books/Richard
Jackson Books, 1989. ISBN 0-531-08404-3. 182p. 11 and up (est.).
Theresa Nelson's award-winning novel poignantly examines
young Geraldine's loving relationships with her older brother
Wing and his best friend, Sam, during the years 1966-68. Wing,
a good athlete but poor student, drops out of high school to fight
in Vietnam. In contrast, Sam becomes a conscientious objector
and peace activist. Ultimately, Geraldine realizes that patriotism
can take many different forms. Realistic characterizations ana
sensitive depictions of conflicting viewpoints make this a touch-
ing story. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
8.82 Paulsen, Gary. The Cookcamp. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson
Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08527-9. 128p. 10-12.
In 1944, a five-year-old boy living in Chicago is sent by his
mother to join his Norwegian grandmother in northern Minne-
sota. His grandmother is a camp cook for a road-construction
crew, and the men with whom she works fill the boy's summer
days with good food, ample love, and helpful lessons about life.
Lacking in fast-paced plot action, the novel nevertheless offers
simple, straightforward prose, making the book a quick read.
8.83 Ray, Deborah Kogan. My Daddy Was a Soldier: A World War II
Story. Dlustrated by Deborah Kogan Ray. Holiday House, 1990.
ISBN 0-8234-0795-0. 37p. 8-12 (est.).
In 1943, eight-year-old Jeannie's father leaves to fight in World
War II. "You'll always be with me, Jeannie-O" are his last words
as he departs for army camp. This is the story of victory gardens,
scrap drives, food rations, Betty Grable hairdos, and families left
behind. Through the shaded grays of pencil drawings and un-
adorned text, both children and adults will better understand
the universality of feelings that accompany separation. Notable
1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social Studies.
8.84 Smucker, Anna Egan. No Star Nights. Illustrated by Steve
Johnson. Alfred A. Knopf/Borzoi Books, 1989. ISBN 0-394-
99925-8. 38p. 7-10 (est.).
375
318
Historical Fiction
With great clarity and glowing color, the beauty and grit of
ordinary daily life in a West Virginia steel-mill town are cap-
tured in Steve Johnson's paintings — family dinner, a baseball
game, and millworkers against rust-colored skies and billowing
stacks. In a text that reflects memories of the author's childhood,
young readers will experience the powerful mood of 1950s
America. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies; IRA Children's Book Award, 1990.
8.85 Taylor, Mildred D. Mississippi Bridge. Illustrated by Max
Ginsburg. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-
0427-5. 64p. 8-12.
During a heavy rainstorm in 1930s rural Mississippi, an
astonished Jeremy Simms — white, ten years old, and a neighbor
of the Logan family — watches a bus driver order black passen-
gers off the bus to make room for white riders. Just outside of
town the bus crosses a raging creek at high speed, smashes
through the railing of the old bridge, and tumbles into the water.
Jeremy joins others in an attempt to rescue survivors, but there
are none. Black-and-white pencil drawings heighten the drama
of another Mildred Taylor retelling of tales from her father's
boyhood. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of Social
Studies.
8.86 Taylor, Mildred. The Road to Memphis. Dial Books, 1990. ISBN
0-8037-0340-6. 288p. 12 and up.
Mildred Taylor's story of the Logan family of rural Mississippi
continues in this novel about three harrowing days in December
1941. Cassie, now sixteen, describes an action-packed road trip
to Memphis incited by an African American friend who is flee-
ing white tormentors after an altercation. Prejudice, death, a
touch of romance, and reconciliation all take center stage in this
high drama. Notable 1990 Children's Trade Books in the Field of
Social Studies; Coretta Scott King Award (Writing), 1991.
8.87 Yolen, Jane. Letting Swift Rn ?r Go. Illustrated by Barbara
Cooney. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-9689-4. 32p. 6-10 (est.).
Accompanied by Barbara Cooney's primitive watercolor,
gouache, and pencil illustrations, Jane Yolen's poignant story
tells of the flooding of the Swift River Valley of western Massa-
chusetts to create the Quabbin Reservoir. As recalled by Sally
Jane, a child of six when the changes began, trout fishing, grave-
yard picnics, and sugaring time were exchanged for "a long,
9
ERLC
Twentieth Century
319
gray wilderness" of concrete. Boston's "thirst'' meant relocation
of graves, deforestation, and demolition of houses. Visiting the
beautiful waterway as an adult, Sally remembers and lets go.
World: World War I and Next Two Decades
8.88 Hesse, Karen. Letters from Rifka. Henry Holt, 1992. ISBN 0-
8050-1964-2. 148p. 11 and up.
It is 1919 when twelve-year-old Rifka and her family flee the
oppression against Jews in Russia. They are bound for America,
where Rifka imagines that she will be safe from the Russian
soldiers she so fears. Carrying only her treasured volume of
poetry by Alexander Pushkin, Rifka begins an odyssey that will
take her from the Polish border to Ellis Island, an odyssey of
hope and courage detailed in her letters to Tovah, a cousin
whom she has left behind. IRA Children's Book Award, 1993,
World: World War II and Later
8.89 Hill, Susan. The Glass Angels. Illustrated by Valerie Littlewood.
Candlewick Press, 1991. ISBN 1-56402-111-4. 92p. 9 and up (est.).
In post-World War II London, Tillie lives with her widowed
mother, who barely makes ends meet through her sewing. Near
Christmas, Tillie's mother becomes ill, and the wedding dress
that she has been making is ruined when the ceiling collapses.
Tillie must take charge, learning that the meaning of Christmas
is often revealed unexpectedly by a gift of glass angels or the
help of friends. Valerie Littlewood's illustrations, including both
ink drawings and color paintings, make this a beautifully
crafted book.
8.90 Kordon, Klaus (translated by Elizabeth D. Crawford). Brothers
Like Friends. Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22137-9. 206p.
10 and up.
Seven-year-old Frank idolizes Burkie, his fourteen-year-old half-
brother, and shares his distress when their widowed mother
marries a lazy bully. Set in 1950s East Germany, the daily hard-
ships aggravate the family situation. All Frank's happiness rests
in Burkie's friendship and sharing his success on the soccer
team. When a secret confession, seemingly about a soccer injury,
leads to Burkie's death, Frank senses his own responsibility, and
his shattered life is hard to put together. German Youth Literature
Award, Runner-uv.
ERIC
377
320
Historical Fiction
8.91 Laird, Christa. Shadow of the Wall. Greenwillow Books, 1990.
ISBN 0-688-09336-1. 192p. 12 and up.
Misha lives with his sisters in an orphanage in the Warsaw
ghetto in 1942 and begs for food for their widowed mother.
Christa Laird writes with calculated restraint about the depriva-
tion, the terror, and the bravery of thirteen-year-old Misha and
the thousands like him who lost their childhoods or lives during
the war. Central to this novel is one of Poland's true heroes of
the war, Dr. Janusz Korczak.
8.92 Lingard, Joan. Between Two Worlds. Lodestar Books, 1991.
ISBN 0-525-67360-1. 186p. 12 and up.
This sequel to Tug of War continues the saga of the Petersons, a
family of Latvian refugees who immigrate to Toronto after
World War II. Their story is told through the family's teenage
daughter, Astra. Through hard work, the family struggles to
make a new life in the postwar world. Joan Lingard simplifies
and romanticizes the trials of immigrant life, uniting all her
subplots with multiple happy endings. Late 1940s popular cul-
ture is well represented, however, as are the anachronisms of the
Cold War.
8.93 Lowry, Lois. Number the Stars. Houghton Mifflin, 1989. ISBN
0-395-51060-0. 137p. 10 and up (est.).
"Halie\" The first encounter that Danish Annemarie and her
Jewish friend Ellen have with German soldiers is while racing
each other home from school. As the Nazis attempt to "relocate"
all Jews from Copenhagen in 1943, Annemarie's family "adopts"
Ellen as their daughter and through a clever scheme attempts to
help her family to safety. As the plot builds to an exciting climax,
Annemarie displays the extraordinary courage which became
common in wartime Europe. Notable 1989 Children's Trade Books
in the Field of Social Studies; Newbery Medal, 1990.
8.94 Morpurgo, Michael. Waiting for Anya. Viking Penguin, 1991.
ISBN 0-670-83735-0. 172p. 10 and up.
Set in the French village of Lescun during World War II, the
novel recounts the daring exploits of twelve-year-old Jo as he
and his adult friend Benjamin plan the escape of twelve Jewish
children into adjacent Spain. With the help of the village priest
and a sympathetic German soldier, eleven of the children suc-
ceed. Although Benjamin, who also is Jewish, and one girl are
captured and eventually die at Auschwitz, the story nonetheless
er|c
378
Twentieth Century
321
offers a generally optimistic ending: Anya, the daughter for
whom Benjamin was waiting, rather than fleeing to safety in
Spain himself, arrives safely in Lescun at the end of the war. ALA
Best Books for Young Adults, 1992.
8.95 Orlev, Uri (translated by Hillel Halkin). The Man from the
Other Side. Houghton Mifflin, 1991. ISBN 0-395-53808-4. 186p.
10 and up.
Fourteen-year-old Marek and his stepfather wade through the
Warsaw sewers to bring food to Jews beseiged in the ghetto
during World War II. Marek takes further risks by hiding Pan
Jozek, a young man who has escaped from the ghetto. The two
young men return to fight in the horrifying uprising, and the
story culminates with Marek's escape. This extraordinarily mov-
ing book, an actual account translated from Hebrew, is written
in a dispassionate tone that intensifies the emotional reality.
Mildred L. Batchelder Award, 1992.
:RLC
379
Language and Reading
Language is at the center of human existence. Without language there
is no human society, no medicine, no politics, no war. It is at the root
of our existence. Our language permits us to think, to understand
complicated things, the nuances of our existence [W]riters assist
children in learning how to manipulate language.
James Collier, "Profile: James and Christopher
Collier — More Than Just a Good Read," Language Arts
ERIC
380
9 Language and Reading
Easy-Reading Books
9.1 Ahlberg, Allan. The Black Cat. Dinosaur Dreams. Mystery
Tour. The Pet Shop. Illustrated by Andre Amstutz. Greenwillow
Books, 1990. 32p. 4-8 (est.). Fiction.
The Funnybones Easy Reading series cleverly follows the ad-
ventures of a big skeleton, a little skeleton, and a dog skeleton,
who make up the trio called Funnybones. The three skeletons
sled in the snow, are chased by dinosaurs in their dreams, un-
cover several mysteries by shining a light on some suspicious
objects, and swap a parrot for a hippopotamus.
9.2 Anholt, Catherine. Good Days, Bad Days. Illustrated by Cath-
erine Anholt G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1990. ISBN 0-399-22283-9. 26p.
2-6 (est.). Fiction.
With minimal text, Catherine Anholt celebrates ordinary family
activities through her lively illustrations, tracing the days —
good, bad, sunny, sad, snpwy, fun— of a family's life together.
Illustrations show a family at play on "healthy days/' but Mom
ironing and Dad vacuuming on "home days." The color-patch
pen-and-ink drawings filled in with bright watercolors are true
to children's days, and are sure to stimulate comparisons.
9.3 Barton, Byron. Bones, Bones, Dinosaur Bones. Illustrated by
Byron Barton. Thomas Y. Crowell, 1990. ISBN 0-690-04827-0.
32p. 3-6 (est.). Fiction.
Six small paleontologists, painted with bold lines and crayon-
box colors, set out to look for the bones of dinosaurs. Young
dinosaur lovers will be able to read almost instantly the minimal
text, cued by full-page pictures: "We find them," reads one page;
"We dig them up," reads the next. From discovery to shipment
to the National History Museum, the steps are clear. Best of all
is the reassembly. A "dry bones" rhythm follows attachment of
claw bones to foot bones to leg bones, and so on. Outstanding
Science Trade Books, 1990.
9.4 Barton, Byron. Dinosaurs, Dinosaurs. Illustrated by Byron Bar-
ton. Thomas Y Crowell, 1989. ISBN 0-690-04768-1. 31p. 3-6. Fic-
tion.
Easy-Reading Books
325
"A long time ago there were dinosaurs!" Through simple text
and brightly colored illustrations, Byron Barton takes young
children on a short tour through prehistoric times when dino-
saurs big and small, horned and spiked, fierce and scared,
roamed the earth.
9.5 Florian, Douglas. At the Zoo. Illustrated by Douglas Florian.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09629-8. 32p. 3-5 (est.).
Fiction.
Only two words of text appear on each double-page spread of
this rhythmic text recounting animals and activities at the zoo,
such as "Zoo guide" on one, "Camel ride" on another. Large,
simple drawings are flatly childlike, achieved with colored pen-
cil and strong sepia outlines.
9.6 Ginsburg, Mirra. Asleep, Asleep. Illustrated by Nancy Tafuri.
Greenwillow Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09154-7. 24p. 2-6 (est.).
Fiction.
The author/illustrator team of Mirra Ginsburg and Nancy
Tafuri, inspired by a verse by A. Vvedensky, produce a gentle
lullaby text that rhythmically asks if nature's creatures are
asleep. The answer for each simple question (such as "And the
bees?") is always the same: "Asleep." At last, the cuddled child
is told: "Only you and the wind are awake." Bordered art picks
up the quiet nighttime colors of nature at rest.
9.7 Guy, Ginger Foglesong. Black Crow, Black Crow. Illustrated by
Nancy Winslow Parker. Greenwillow Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-
08957-7. 24p. 4 and up. Fiction.
In the spirit of Bill Martin's Brown Bear, Brown Bear, Wlwt Did You
See?, this book uses rhythmic language to tell the story of a busy
mother crow who wakes, feeds, and plays with her children,
until finally, back in their nest at the end of a busy day, she sings
her brood to sleep. Flat, oversized images in pastel colors, bold
type, and repetitive text combine to create a readable and useful
book for young children.
9.8 Hoban, Julia. Buzby. Illustrated by John Himmelman. Harper
and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-022398-7. 64p. S-8(est). Fiction.
Buzby the cat is grown, and he's ready to get a job. He has all
the right qualifications — he's a good mouser, he's clean, and he's
polite. When he gets work as a hotel busboy, he finds himself
doing all the wrong things. But as Buzby and the others dis-
ERIC
382
326 Language and Reading
cover, he is good at making the guests feel at home, and so he is
given the appropriate job of hotel cat. Ink and watercolor illus-
trations complement this I Can Read Book about a cat who finds
his place in tire world.
9.9 King, Bob. Sitting on the Farm* Illustrated by Bill Slavin. Or-
chard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08585-6. 32p. 3-6. Fiction.
"Sitting on the farm, happy as can be, / I had a little bug on my
knee." To get rid of the bug, the farm child invites a frog to lunch.
But when the frog arrives, it's "MUNCH! MUNCH! MUNCH!"
on the lunch. So the girl invites a snake to get rid of the frog. The
predictable story line with accumulating lunch guests can be
sung in repetitive verse. Words and music appear at the end of
the book.
9.10 LeTord, Bijou. A Brown Cow. Illustrated by Bijou LeTord. Little.
Brown, 1989. ISBN 0-316-52166-3. 29p. 4-7 (est.). Fiction.
In simple, warm text, a little girl describes the "little brown cow
with no spots on her back that lives in my backyard." When they
are inside the house, the child and her cat admire the cow from
a window, which is, in turn, framed by the artist in an ink and
watercolor border. In childlike, minimalist style, the art matches
the winsome language: "I know she likes trees and the sky. I see
her look up and moo, moo/'
9.11 Lewis, Thomas P. Frida's Office Day. Illustrated by Doug Cush-
man. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN 0-06-023844-5. 64p. 5-8 (est.).
Fiction.
Frida Cat looks forward to a day with her father at his office.
After the train ride to the city, Frida takes phone messages,
delivers mail, and enjoys using the copy machine at the office of
Flying Cat Airline, Lunch and a movie complete a special day.
This I Can Read Book features large print and bright pictures.
9.12 Marshall, James. Fox Outfoxed. Illustrated by James Marshall.
Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-8037-1037-2. 48p.
6-8 (est). Fiction.
In three chapter-length stories, Fox is outfoxed by his own foi-
bles. First, he convinces little sister Louise to provide some extra
engine power for his vehicle so that he can win the Big Race.
Next, Fox is tricked out of his ten favorite comic books by foxy
Lulu. Finally, Louise turns the tables when Fox and his friends
park her on a bench so that they can trick-or-treat without her.
er|c
383
Easy-Reading Books
327
Fox is perfectly smug, perplexed, and discombobulated as the
funny situations shift in this Easy-to-Read Book.
9.13 Marshall, James. Rats on the Roof, and Other Stories. Illus-
trated by James Marshall. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991.
ISBN 0-8037-0835-1. 79p. 6-10. Fiction.
The animal characters in these seven fable-like tales for young
readers reflect both James Marshall's droll humor at its best and
sufficient cleverness to wiggle out of various scrapes. Mrs.
Goose manages not to be Christmas dinner for a couple of
wolves passing themselves off as canaries. Two sheep who can-
not read warning signs nearly end up in a wolf's pot, but even-
tually bore the wolf to sleep with their bland conversation.
Black-and-white drawings offer perplexed, and sometimes
thwarted, characters.
9.14 Oxenbury, Helen. Pippo Gets Lost Tom and Pippo and the
Dog. Tom and Pippo in the Snow. Tom and Pippo Make a
Friend. Illustrated by Helen Oxenbury. Macmillan/Aladdin
Books, 1989. lip. 3-5. Fiction.
Tom and his toy monkey Pippo go sledding, make a new friend,
get separated, and play with a dog in four of twelve brief adven-
tures written by Helen Oxenbury, a well-known writer of books
for the very young. Pippo Books have a simple, clear text, sturdy
pages, and reassuring black-and-white and watercolor illustra-
tions.
9.15 Paterson, Katherine. The Smallest Cow in the World. Illustrated
by Jane Clark Brown. HarperCollins, 1991. ISBN 0-06-024691-X.
64p. 5-8 (est.). Fiction.
Marvin's favorite cow at Brock's Dairy Farm, where his dad
works, is Rosie. To Marvin, she is the most wonderful cow in the
world. But when Mr. Brock sells his farm and Rosie, Marvin's
family must move. Marvin is heartbroken. To cope, he creates an
imaginary tiny Rosie who does naughty things in the family.
Marvin's parents are models of understanding, and his sister
helps to reassure as well. A child's feelings of frustration and
separation reach across the format of this I Can Read Book.
9.16 Rose, Agatha. Hide and Seek in the Yellow House. Illustrated
by Kate Spohn. Viking Penguin, 1992. ISBN 0-670-84383-0. 26p.
4-8 (est). Fiction.
3S4
328
Language and Reading
"In the yellow house, Mother Cat is searching for her kitten. . . ."
As the kitten plays a game of hide-and-seek, young listeners will
play along. Because the text is so simple and the art so inviting,
young listeners will soon become young "readers" with this one.
The repetitive text commands engagement: "Now he isn't
there!" Kate Spohn's brush gives stylized texture and pattern to
walls and rugs in the yellow house.
9.17 Stadler, John. Cat Is Back at Bat Illustrated by John Stadler.
Dutton Children's Books, 1991. ISBN 0-525-44762-8. 30p. 3-7.
Fiction.
Fourteen verses about unusual animal behaviors give readers an
opportunity to learn about rhythm and rhyme, as well as a
chance to use their imaginations. Sentences such as "A goat in a
coat sails a boat" and "A big pig wears a wig" are illustrated
with watercolor and ink drawings that take the plight of each
animal as seriously as possible. After reading this book, children
will want to write and illustrate their own silly sentences.
9.18 Van Leeuwen, Jean. Oliver Pig at School. Illustrated by Ann
Schweninger. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1990. ISBN 0-8037-
0813-0. 48p. 4-8. Fiction.
Whimsically depicted in colored pencil and watercolor washes
in this Easty-to-Read Book, Oliver Pig puts up a brave front as
he says good-bye to his toys and his parents and heads for
school. School itself is a bit scary, though manageable — until
mischief-maker Bernard gets Oliver into trouble. But the two
pigs end up friends, and when Oliver returns home from his first
day at school, he reports happily to his family that "school is
fun."
9.19 Weiss, Nicki. Dog, Boy, Cap, Skate. Sun, Sand, Sea, Sail. Illus-
trated by Nicki Weiss. Greenwillow Books, 1989. 32p. 2-6 (est.).
Fiction.
Two books by Nicki Weiss demonstrate how much story can be
conveyed with so few words. Across each spread, only four
words march, each matched with the object or action directly
above it. As a child and his dog prepare to go outdoors, Mom
hands over the cap and skates. The text? "Dog / Boy / Cap /
Skate." The next page rhymes with the first, thus a family's day
at the beach means "Sun / Sand / Sea / Sail" as well as "Um-
brella / Towel / Shovel / Pail."
ERiC
385
Jokes, Riddles, and Puns
329
9.20 Wiseman, B. Morris and Boris at the Circus. Illustrated by B.
Wiseman. Harper and Row/Harper Trophy Books, 1990. ISBN
0-06-444143-1. 64p. 4rS. Fiction.
Morris and Boris, entertaining and goofy as ever, approach the
circus in their own predictable styles. Morris, the eternally opti-
mistic moose, is ready to accept every challenge in the ring.
Boris the bear is more cautious. When Boris explains that the
circus tent is called the Big Top, Morris cheerfully surmises that
the elephant's rear must be the Big Bottom. Even the caged lions
chuckle at Morris as the action skips from page to page in this I
Can Read Book.
9.21 Ziefert, Harriet. Who Can Boo the Loudest? Illustrated by
Claire Schumacher. Harper and Row, 1990. ISBN 0-06-026899-9.
32p. 3-6 (est.). Fiction.
When two ghosts meet in the moonlight, they disagree over who
can boo louder. To settle the matter, they engage in a booing
contest, agreeing that the winner will be the ghost who can scare
the moon. Even though both ghosts huff and puff and shake
their sheets, neither can scare the moon by itself. Perhaps if they
worked together? Cartoon illustrations provide simple accom-
paniment for an easy-to-read, repetitive text.
Jokes, Riddles, and Puns
9.22 Beisner, Monika. Catch That Cat! A Picture Book of Rhymes
and Puzzles. Illustrated by Monika Beisner. Farrar, Straus and
Giroux, 1990. ISBN 0-374-31226-5. 28p. 4-8 (est.). Nonfiction.
Hidden calicoes, vain tabbies, and mysterious Siamese frolic on
the pages of this collection of cat verses, riddles, games, and
puzzles. Jewel-toned paintings with the feel of tapestries add to
the complexity and detail of a book that will invite a variety of
responses from cat fanciers of all ages.
9.23 Bierhorst, John, editor. Lightning inside You, and Other Native
American Riddles. Illustrated by Louise Brierley. William Mor-
row, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09582-8. 104p. 6 and up (est.). Nonfiction.
"Riddling, like fever, is contagious." Native Americans caught
riddling fever long ago, but not until now have their riddles
been gathered and widely circulated. Many of the riddles have
several possible answers, but only one Native American one,
thus these puzzles indirectly provide a glimpse into Native
3S6
330
Language and Reading
American culture. The location and tribal origin of each riddle is
meticulously attributed, supplemented by instructive beginning
notes and endnotes. Black-and-white pastel drawings are sprin-
kled throughout.
9.24 Calmenson, Stephanie. What Am I? Very First Riddles. Illus-
trated by Karen Gundersheimer. Harper and Row, 1989. ISBN
0-06-020998-4. 32p. 4-7. Nonfiction.
Here are riddles for children who are just beginning riddling —
puzzles that don't depend upon wordplay or pun — as well as a
book for emerging readers. Each rhyming riddle appears on a
page of its own, sprinkled with small children offering clues,
and ends with a boldfaced question: "What Am I?" 'Tm sweet
and cold, so take a lick. But watch me melt if you're not quick!"
Turn the page for a full-color picture answer with the word
beneath.
9.25 Gomi, Taro. Who Ate It? Who Hid It? Illustrated by Taro Gomi.
Millbrook Press, 1991. 22p. 2-6 (est.) Fiction.
In a pair of simple, riddle picture books, children search the
artwork to answer Who ate it? or Who hid it? At first glance, it
seems almost impossible for readers of the first book to know
which of four innocent-appearing Holsteins ate the fried eggs.
At second glance, young children will discover the yellow yolks
in the middle of one Holstein's white markings. Readers of the
second book will need to rely on picture play to determine
which giraffe hid the birthday candles. There they are, looking
like a pair of giraffe horns! Other familiar objects are camou-
flaged in the artwork in this simple, riddle picture book.
9.26 Gordon, Jeffie Ross. Hide and Shriek: Riddles about Ghosts
and Goblins. Walton, Rick, and Ann Walton. Ho Ho Ho! Rid-
dles about Santa Claus. Illustrated by Susan Slattery Burke.
Lerner, 1991. 32p. 6-10. Nonfiction.
Know what goes, "Ho, ho, ho OOPS"? It's Santa Claus falling
out of his sled. Know how the reindeer can tell that Santa has
fallen out? "They feel a rein drop." Could you have guessed that
"Elves" Presley is Santa's favorite singer? Santa Claus groaners
fill Ho, Ho, Ho!, while Hide and Shriek maintains the pattern, but
changes the source for the puns: "Who is the most famous
French skeleton?" "Napoleon Bone-aparte," of course. Susan
Slattery Burke's two-color illustrations keep the spirits light in
these You Must Be Joking Riddle Books.
387
A. Black and White by David Macaulay (see 9.45). B. Bones, Bones, Dinosaur
Bones by Byron Barton (see 9.3). C. Baby-O by Nancy White Carlstrom; illustrated
by Sugie Stevenson (see 9.36).
ERIC
388
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
A. Asleep, Asleep by Mirra Ginsburg; illustrated by Nancy Tafuri (see 9.6).
B. Lightning inside You and Other Native American Riddles edited by John Biertiorst;
illustrated by Louise Brieriey (see 9.23). C. We're Going on a Bear Hunt by Michael
Rosen; illustrated by Helen Oxenbury (see 9.50).
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
3S3
Jokes, Riddles, and Puns
331
9.27 Hall, Katy, and Lisa Eisenberg. Spacey Riddles. Illustrated by
Simms Taback. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1992. ISBN 0-
8037-0815-7. 48p. 4-8. Nonfiction.
What is the astronaut's favorite meal? Launch! Why couldn't the
astronaut land on the moon? Because it was already full! Here
are forty-two riddles with space as their theme in an easy-to-
read format. Clues are generous (and humorously misleading)
in these full-color illustrations of space travelers, heavenly bod-
ies, and aliens.
9.28 Koontz, Robin Michal. I See Something You Don't See: A Rid-
dle-me Picture Book. Illustrated by Robin Michal Koontz. Cob-
blehill Books, 1992. ISBN 0-525-65077-6. 32p. 4-8 (est.). Nonfic-
tion.
Clues to thirteen rhyming "riddle-me-rees" can be found in the
pictures that accompany the riddles. From morning wake-up to
tuck-in time, two smiling children participate in ordinary family
events that become the fodder for riddle clues. For example,
toothbrushing time: "When you look at my face it's easy to see,
you're looking at you when you're looking at me." The accom-
panying illustration shows the children looking in a mirror. Line
drawings done in sunny pastel shades make the answers achiev-
able by the youngest children.
9.29 Livingston, Myra Cohn. My Head Is Red, and Other Riddle
Rhymes. Illustrated by Tere LoPrete. Holiday House, 1990. ISBN
0-8234-0806-X. 32p. 6-9. Nonfiction.
"My head is red. My back is white. You'll find me near the
candlelight. But once I make a shining flame, I never, ever look
the same." Turn the pages upside down to discover the answers
to this and twenty-six other rhyming, readable riddles. Bold
abstract illustrations give visual clues to the shapes and the
colors of the answer.
9.30 Maestro, Giulio. Riddle Roundup: A Wild Bunch to Beef Up
Your Word Power. Illustrated by Giulio Maestro. Clarion Books,
1989. ISBN 0-89919-508-3. 64p. 7-10 (est.). Nonfiction.
"Why did the runner put a net over her head? She wanted to
catch her breath." "What happened when the pink flower grew?
The rose rose rose." The sixty-two riddles in this collection are
based on different kinds of wordplay, including puns, homo-
nyms, and homographs. Each riddle is separated from its an-
swer by a full-page, two-color illustration.
390
332
Language and Reading
9.31 Marzollo, Jean. I Spy: A Book of Picture Riddles. Photographs
by Walter Wick. Scholastic/Cartwheel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-590-
45087-5. 32p. 2-7 (est.). Nonfiction.
Thirteen double-page picture riddles are created by pairing
boldly colored photographs of collections of related objects —
such as beach items or old toys — with a rhyming text, which
begins with the words "I spy . . . " and then names items to be
located. For example, the riddle in the nature collection begins:
"I spy an arrowhead, a little white goose, / A horse's shadow, a
snake on the loose. ..." The author closes with "Extra Credit
Riddles'7 and an invitation for children to write their own pic-
ture riddles.
9.32 Nims, Bonnie Larkin. Where Is the Bear at School? Illustrated
by Madelaine Gill. Albert Whitman, 1989. ISBN 0-8075-8935-7.
24p. 2-6. Fiction.
At school, children are busy hanging up their coats, listening to
a story, painting pictures, and playing on the playground. But
within the bustle of classroom activity, there's a teddy bear loose.
Readers are invited through rhyming text and repetitive refrain
to find the bear hiding on each page: "But I am looking for a
bear. Can you show me — where is the bear?" No matter where
bear hides, he does what the children do. The watercolor paint-
ings are of multicultural children thoroughly engaged with
school.
933 Stevenson, James. Quick! Turn the Page! Illustrated by James
Stevenson. Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09309-4. 32p.
4-7 (est.). Fiction.
Here's an innovative way in which readers can help characters
out of scrapes just by turning the page. If Sarah is sick of winter,
turn the page and give her spring. If Arthur can't get to the
movies until his room is cleaned, turn the page and it's clean as
a bean. But if you ignore the warning and turn the last page, it's
''the end." As always, young readers will find James Stevenson's
illustrations and text simple and appealing.
9.34 Yektai, Niki. What's Silly? Illustrated by Susannah Ryan. Clar-
ion Books, 1989. ISBN 0-89919-746-9. 32p. 2-8 (est.). Fiction.
In a book suited for interaction with the youngest of listeners,
the children's task is always the same: find what's silly in the
pictures. Cartoon-like illustrations provide the kind of silliness
that makes three- and four-year-old children scream with de-
er|c
391
Language Play
333
light: Mother lathers up to shave her face. Daughter wears her
skirt on her head, then swings from an upside-down tree.
There's even a toilet in the living room. No bother, though, if the
answer eludes — just turn the page to set everything right.
Language Play
9.35 Baer, Gene. Thump, Thump, Rat-a-Tat-Tat Illustrated by Lois
Ehlert. Harper and Row/Charlotte Zolotow Books, 1989. ISBN
0-06-020362-5. 30p. 2-7. Fiction.
On the opening spread, the marching band unloads from the bus
with the rat-a-tat-tat of snare drums, the thump, thump of bass
drums, and the warmup sounds of chirping horns. Marching
boldly toward the reader, band and text enlarge to fill the pages.
Flags, plumes, "piping flutes/' and "flashing brass" are vibrant
cut-paper against Lois Ehlert's bold background colors. Text and
art are perfect complements: the rhythmic cadence of the ono-
matopoeic text thunders past and then fades.
9.36 Carlstrom, Nancy White. Baby-O. Illustrated by Sugie Steven-
son. Little, Brown, 1992. ISBN 0-316-12851-1. 32p. 3-6 (est.). Fic-
tion.
All the generations of an island family (from Baby-O to Granny-
O) board a jitney to take their wares to market. Festive Carib-
bean colors are a perfect match for the cadence of the text, its
singsong rhythms punctuated by onomatopoeic refrains. As
Baby-O chases the chickens in the garden patch, "Sing a song of
Baby-O, / Sing it soft, now, sing it slow. / Chucka Chucka."
Mama-O's cloth goes "Wusha Wusha" in the big tin tub, and
Papa-O's fishnets "dippa dippa" off the sandy shores.
9.37 Catalanotto, Peter. Mr. Mumble. Illustrated by Peter
Catalanotto. Orchard Books/Richard Jackson Books, 1990. ISBN
0-531-08480-9. 32p. 4-7. Fiction.
Mr. Mumble wakes up with a cough one Saturday morning, and
as he sets out on a shopping trip, he discovers how much a little
cough can interfere with a person's routine. At the bakery he
asks for a dozen bagels; what he gets is a dozing beagle. At the
fruit stand, a request for a pound of pears gets Mr. Mumble a
panda bear. And a mention to the tailor of a light tan coat lands
Mr. Mumble a white goat. Peter Catalanotto's book is chock-full
of wonderful language play.
392
334
Language and Reading
9.38 Cauley, Lorinda Bryan. Clap Your Hands. Illustrated by Lorinda
Bryan Cauley G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22118-2.
32p. 3-6. Fiction.
"Reach for the sky, wiggle your toes. Stick out your tongue and
touch your nose." Smiling animals and children in a frenzy of
activity spill across double-page spreads in this spirited book for
which participation is a must. Colorful illustrations capture the
happy expressions of the playmates as they jump and twirl and
finally wave "Bye-bye!"
9.39 Falwell, Cathryn. Clowning Around. Illustrated by Cathryn Fal-
well. Orchard Books, 1991. ISBN 0-531-08552-X. 32p. 3-6. Fic-
tion.
A red and white polka-dot clown juggles and rearranges over-
size letters against stark white backgrounds to make words and
fun for the youngest readers. As he pushes, pulls, reshapes, and
moves letters and their parts, the art magically follows, taking
shape and then transforming to match the print. Beginners may
want to try juggling and "clowning around" on paper with some
letters of their own.
9.40 Florian, Douglas. A Beach Day. Illustrated by Douglas Florian.
Greenwillow Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-09105-9. 32p. 3 and up.
Fiction.
"Feet splash / Waves crash / Kites sail / Sand pail." With rhym-
ing, minimalist text, a family's day at the beach is revealed
through gestural bold line drawings in crayon, colored pencils,
and watercolors in sunny hues of yellow and gold. When the
day draws to a close, the foursome enjoys a shimmering fire-
works display. The last page lists and illustrates several shells
that can be found on coastal beaches.
9.41 Fox, Mem. Shoes from Grandpa. Illustrated by Patricia Mullins.
Orchard Books, 1992. ISBN 0-531-08448-5. 32p. 3-6 (est.). Fiction.
In cumulative fashion, Jessie is clothed by all the members of her
family. First, Grandpa gets shoes for Jessie. Then Dad decides,
"I'll buy you some socks from the local shops, / to go with the
shoes from Grandpa." Next, it's Mom who buys Jessie a skirt
"that won't show the dirt, / to go with the socks from the local
shops/' and on and on until Jessie asks politely for just "some
jeans." Torn paper and fabric scraps give the large-scale illustra-
tions pleasing textures.
39.3
Language Play
335
9.42 Gordon, Jeffie Ross. Six Sleepy Sheep. Illustrated by John
O'Brien. Caroline House, 1991. ISBN 1-878093-06-1. 32p. 2-6.
Fiction.
In a curly iron bed, six sleepy sheep slumber on six soft pil-
lows— until one sheep snores and the whole crew is awake. In
alliterative prose, the sleepy sheep try to regain repose through
slurping celery soup, telling spooky stories, singing silly songs,
and sipping simmered milk until, one by one, they snooze. At
last, when all six are asleep, one snores Sheep made curly
and textured with fine pen lines are distinguishable by human
accoutrements — necktie, eyeglasses, slippers, or a nightcap.
9.43 Heller, Ruth. Merry-Go-Round: A Book about Nouns. Illus-
trated by Ruth Heller. Grorset and Dunlap, 1990. ISBN 0-448-
40085-5. 46p, 6 and up. Nonfiction.
Ruth Heller adds another title to her series on language in this
rhyming, color-rich tribute to nouns. Opening with every
schoolchild's definition, "Nouns name a person, place or thing/'
the artist wraps a green-scaled, fuschia-tongued dragon around
birches, through which a determined maiden trots, and the text
labels: "a damsel, a forest, a dragon, ... a king." Children meet
nouns common and proper, abstract and concrete, compound
and collective/ singular and plural, all accompanied by dramatic
designs.
9.44 Hilton, Nette. Prince Lachlan. Illustrated by Ann James. Or-
chard Books, 1990. ISBN 0-531-08463-9. 32p. 3-6 (est.). Fiction.
In kilt and a jaunty tam-o'-shanter, Prince Lachlan announces his
comings and goings about the castle with sounds like "smash/7
"crash," and "thud." "Prince Lachlan is home," his mother un-
derstates. "I know," sighs his laconic father, the king. Nothing in
the castle is quite safe from the Prince's energy. But this irritation
becomes an asset when the Great One threatens the kingdom —
and Prince Lachlan sets off to "see about that." Repetitive
phrases and onomatopoeia add to the appeal.
9.45 Macaulay, David. Black and White. Illustrated by David Macau-
lay. Houghton Mifflin, 1990. ISBN 0-395-552151-3. 32p. All ages
(est.). Fiction.
Not without warning, readers are faced with double-page
spreads divided into four seemingly dissimilar segments. How
do they proceed? Once through the book in conventional fash-
ion? Four times through, reading corresponding quadrants? Or
394
336
Language and Reading
should readers visit and revisit, each time shuffling and reshuf-
fling these elements: a boy returning by train to his parents, a
row of newspaper-reading commuters, a pair of wacky parents,
and a herd of Holstein cows. David Macaulay leaves it to readers
to decide if he has written four stories or one. Caldecott Medal
1991.
9.46 MacCarthy, Patricia. Herds of Words. Illustrated by Patricia
MacCarthy. Dial Books for Young Readers, 1991. ISBN 0-8037-
0892-0. 32p. 3-6. Nonfiction.
In batik paintings on silk, groups and families of "things" are
gathered into scenes and labeled with their collective nouns.
Near a bright blue watering hole, a stand of flamingos, a bask of
crocodiles, and a clutch of eggs share a habitat; under a galaxy of
stars, a coven of witches stirs the brew, while a parliament of owls
keeps watch. Such unusual nomenclature as a wedge of swans, a
leap of leopards, and an exaltation of larks fills the pages.
9.47 McMillan, Bruce. One Sun: A Book of Terse Verse. Play Day: A
Book of Terse Verse. Photographs by Bruce McMillan. Holiday
House, 1990. 32p. 4-6 (est.). Nonfiction.
Terse verse is an adjective-noun combination that rhymes. Bruce
McMillan's two books of terse verse are inspired by the seashore
and backyard, with full-page color photographs of such verses
as "sand hand," "wet pet," "fun run," and "fat bat." Warm skin
shades of photogenic children and royal blues and brilliant
greens of sky water, and grass are set opposite the boldly out-
lined words. In classrooms in which teachers cover the words,
children use the book as puzzles to be solved. Best fest!
9.48 Merriam, Eve. Fighting Words. Illustrated by David Small. Mor-
row Junior Books, 1992. ISBN 0-688-09677-8. 32p. 5 and up.
Fiction.
In her author's note, Eve Merriam acknowledges that all the
fighting words in her book "live happily, harmoniously together
in the Oxford English Dictionary and in Webster's Unabridged/'
Within the story, the fighting words are hurled and blasted and
growled and howled between two friends, who admire each
other so much that it calls for a fight. Fighting words appear in
giant type (Lummox, Ignoramus, Ninny, Lout) while the children
clamor over and through their remarkably undersized world to
be friends again.
er|c 395
Language Play
337
9.49 Most, Bernard. Zoodles. Illustrated by Bernard Most. Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, 1992. ISBN 0-15-299969-8. 32p. 3-8. Nonfic-
tion.
"What do you call a kangaroo that wakes you up every day?"
Answer: "A kangarooster!" In this animal riddle book, Bernard
Most creates name-blended imaginary beasts. Unlike other
imaginary animal books, however, Most doesn't produce a new
body design merging the two animals. Instead, he lets each
animal retain its recognizable shape and form on the answer
page. As with the author /illustrator's dinosaur books, these
animal drawings are large, simple, and cheerful.
9.50 Rosen, Michael, reteller. We're Going on a Bear Hunt. Illus-
trated by Helen Oxenbury. Margaret K. McElderry Books, 1989.
ISBN 0-689-50476-4. 32p. 4-S. Fiction.
On expansive pages, alternately black-and-white and color, a
father and four children set forth on the traditional bear hunt,
complete with its predictable challenges of long grass, deep
river, oozy mud, and dark forest — all of which must be negoti-
ated: "We can't go over it. / We can't go under it. / Oh, no! /
We've got to go through it!" Most fun of all are the full-color
sound pages, on which "splash splosh" the river, "squelch
squerch" the mud, and "swishy swashy" the grass. Boston Globe-
Horn Book Honor Book, 1990.
9.51 Shaw, Nancy Sheep in a Shop. Illustrated by Margot Apple.
Houghton Mifflin, 1991. ISBN 0-395-53681-2. 32p. 2-5. Fiction.
It's a rollicking shopping trip wilh five comical sheep. The goal:
to find the perfect birthday present for a friend. These enthusi-
astic customers try on jackets, play with rackets, fly planes, try
trains, and dismantle a display of beach balls along the way.
Rhyming text and colored-pencil drawings that offer just the
right sheepish expressions are a perfect combination for a suc-
cessful read. Nancy Shaw's Sheep in a Jeep and Sheep on a Ship add
more sheep adventures.
9.52 Shaw, Nancy. Sheep on a Ship. Illustrated by Margot Apple.
Houghton Mifflin, 1989. ISBN 0-395-48160-0. 26p. 2-6 (est.). Fic-
tion.
The silly sheep from Nancy Shaw's Sheep in a Jeep and Sheep in a
Shop are having another tongue-tripping adventure. This time,
in rhyming text, they are pirates on a deep-sea trip. When a
storm arises, they are comically unprepared: "Waves slosh.
ERLC
396
338
Language and Reading
Sheep slip. Decks tip. Sheep slide. Sheep trip. Sheep collide."
Colored pencil drawings add action to the storm and mild des-
peration to their sheep-overboard faces.
9.53 Shaw, Nancy. Sheep Out to Eat- Illustrated by Margot Apple.
Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-61128-8. 32p. 4-8 (est.).
Dining out for tea is a disaster for the sheep whose rhyming
adventures have populated Sheep in a Jeep and Sheep in a Shop.
This time, they can't read the menus, so they neither know what
to order nor how to eat it. They add sugar, salt, and mustard to
their lovdy spinach custard. Adding pepper to their teacakes is
even worse. Sneezes turn the teashop upside down. Ejected,
they find the lawn is just what sheep need to munch for lunch.
9.54 Steig, Jeanne. Alpha Beta Chowder. Illustrated by William Steig.
HarperCollins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-205007-9. 32p. 4-10 (est.). Fic-
tion.
A collaboration of Steigs has cooked up an alphabet chowder of
twenty-six rhymes and seasoned them with spirited, witty char-
acters. For the letter H, there is the "Heebie-jeebies," which is
what a harpy with the hiccups hurls upon the hag who hexes
her. In alliterative verse with the bite of Ogden Nash or the sting
of Roald Dahl, Jeanne Steig succeeds with such unexpected sub-
jects as "Ken, the killer kangaroo," and Daphne, who dresses
divinely.
9.55 Ziefert, Harriet. Parade. Illustrated by Saul Mandel. Ban-
tam/Little Rooster Books, 1990. ISBN 0-553-05862-2. 32p. 2-6
(est.). Fiction.
"A parade! A parade! I know a parade by the sound of the drum,
A-rum-a-tee-tum! A-rum-a-tee-tum!" In rhythmic, easy-to-read
text that evokes a cadence, Harriet Ziefert describes a circus
parade as it marches jauntily down the street, accompanied by
clowns and elephants, jugglers and twirlers, and popcorn and
candy Saul Mandel's loose, cartoon-like drawings complement
the action-packed event.
397
Poetry
"J," says the poem matter-of-factly,
"J am a cloud,
lama tree,
lama city,
1 am the sea,
lama golden
mystery."
But, adds the poem silently,
I cannot speak until you come.
Reader, come, come with me.
Eve Merriam, It Doesn't Always
Have to Rhyme
340
10 Poetry
Anthologies
10.1 Bennett, Jill, compiler. The Animal Fair, Illustrated by Susie
Jenkin-Pearce. Viking Penguin, 1990. ISBN 0-670-82691-X. 32p.
This collection of twenty-two rhymes in celebration of animals
includes works by Aileen Fisher, Langston Hughes, and Eleanor
Farjeon, as well as humorous verse by anonymous poets, such
as the title poem, " Animal Fair." Watercolor and ink combine on
generously spaced page layouts to achieve a whimsy that sits
lightly with the verse.
10.2 Big Bear's Treasury: A Children's Anthology. Candlewick
Press, 1992. ISBN 1-56402-113-0. 80p. 4-8 (est).
Dozens of poems and very short stories to match every mood are
woven together with excerpts from well-known fairy tales and
nonsense rhymes in this second volume of Big Bear's favorites.
The anthology is enriched by the inclusion of original illustra-
tions and features works by Anthony Browne, Charlotte Voake,
Helen Oxenbury, and Jan Ormerod. The pages take only minutes
to read aloud, but are distinctive and sufficiently illustrated for
the youngest to find and "read" alone.
10.3 Booth, David, compiler. Voices on the Wind: Poems for All
Seasons. Illustrated by Mich&e Lemieux. Morrow Junior Books,
1990. ISBN 0-688-09555-0. 48p. All ages.
Poems from favorite poets celebrating the sights and sounds of
the seasons are combined with artistic impressions of the poems'
moods. Included are Mary Ann Hoberman's "Spiders," Robert
Louis Stevenson's "Autumn Fires," Beatrix Potter's "Fishes
Come Bite!" and William Blake's "The Lamb."
10.4 Bruchac, Joseph, and Jonathan London. Thirteen Moons on Tur-
tle's Back: A Native American Year of Moons. Illustrated by
Thomas Locker. Philomel Books, 1992. ISBN 0-399-22141-7. 28p.
All ages.
Many North American Indian tribes used the scales of the tur-
tle's shell to represent the "months" of the year. From traditions
of the Sioux, Lakota, and Cherokee, to name a few, this collection
er|c
3.93
Anthologies
341
of seasonal poems represents an anthology of native beliefs.
Each "moon" includes both a legend and a dramatic, brilliantly
hued oil painting. Together, they provide a unique orientation to
time, the Earth, and humanity's role within each.
10.5 Cameo Cats. Illustrated by Isabelle Brent. Little, Brown, 1992.
ISBN 0-316-10836-7. 22p. 6 and up (est.).
This ornate anthology features bordered mosaics in royal colors
and snippets from literature celebrating felines. Contributors
range from Edward Lear to Chaucer to Mother Goose. The
cameo portraits represent cats of various types and in varying
poses. "Even the smallest of the felines is a masterpiece," said
Da Vinci, and this tiny jewel of a book demonstrates that mas-
tery.
10.6 Cassedy, Sylvia, and Kunihiro Suetake, translators. Red Drag-
onfly on My Shoulder. Illustrated by Molly Bang. HarperCol-
lins, 1992. ISBN 0-06-022625-0. 32p. 6-10 (est).
Turn the collection sideways to read, scroll-like, these thirteen
haiku, the ancient Japanese form of poetry. The translations offer
inspired images, but Molly Bang's clever and playful collages
demand close attention as well. Throughout, she uses common
materials — from a yam to a crab leg — in inspired ways. Jet-black
crickets constructed of safety pins, screws, wires, and hairpins
climb blades of grass toward a golden cricket to accompany the
lines "Above the chorus, / listen! A single cricket / shakes a
golden bell."
10.7 Cole, Joanna, and Stephanie Calmenson, compilers. The Eentsy,
Weentsy Spider: Fingerplays and Action Rhymes. Illustrated
by Alan Tiegreen. Morrow Junior Books, 1991. ISBN 0-688-
09439-2. 64p. 3 and up.
This cheery collection of action rhymes brings together some of
the most popular rhymes ("This Old Man," "I'm a Little Tea-
pot") as well as less familiar pieces. "How-to" illustrations dem-
onstrate how to act out the rhymes, gesture by gesture. An index
to first lines, bibliography, and some musical arrangements are
also included.
10.8 Cole, Joanna, and Stephanie Calmenson, compilers. Miss Mary
Mack, and Other Children's Street Rhymes. Illustrated by Alan
Tiegreen. Morrow Junior Books, 1990. ISBN 0-688-08330-7. 64p.
7 and up.
4,0
342
Poetry
Joanna Cole and Stephanie Calmenson have collected five chap-
ters of rhymes for street games and jumping rope — not the
rhymes read to kids in school or at home, but those that children
experience while playing independently Topical chapters in-
clude "Hand-Clapping/' "Ball-Bouncing/' and "Teases and
Comebacks/' with introductory paragraphs instructing readers
on hand-clapping and ball-bouncing techniques. The compilers
go to the line in this collection and include street rhymes to
which some parents might object, but which kids often chant
among themselves.
10.9 Cole, William, compiler. A Zooful of Animals. Illustrated by
Lynn Munsinger. Houghton Mifflin, 1992. ISBN 0-395-52278-1.
88p. 4-9.
A trip 
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American Libraries
TV News
Understanding 9/11